Home

"user manual"

1. Direc tional earth fault Directional earth fault and phase Directional earth fault Directional earth fault and phase Disconnect ion ROCOF Transformer or machine transformer unit differential Machine differential Busbar voltage and frequency protection Capacitor bank unbalance B22 EED S8D B80 D 0 to 42 0 to 42 0 to 42 5 to 23 5 to 23 5 to 23 0 to 16 0 to 16 0 to 16 2x3l 2x10 3I 10 2x3l 2x 10 3V 2U VO or Vnt 3V VO 2x3V 2x V0 3V VO Yes Yes Yes Yes 1to2 2to4 2to4 2to4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes All the information relating to the Sepam range can be found in the following documents Sepam catalog reference SEPED303005EN Sepam series 20 user s manual reference PCRED301005EN Sepam series 40 user s manual reference PCRED301006EN Sepam series 60 user s manual reference SEPED310017EN Sepam series 80 functions user s manual reference SEPED303001EN Sepam series 80 Modbus communication user s manual reference SEPED303002EN m Sepam series 80 operation manual reference SEPED303003EN m Sepam DNP3 communication user s manua
2. Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet switch 1 SSS SS E EEE SS Rm EEE switch 3 switch 2 ROOT Ring 1 Ring 2 Immun P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 Pif gy P2 ACE850 TP TE TP TP ACE850 FO Sepam 1 Sepam 2 Sepam 3 Sepam 4 Sepam 5 Sepam 6 Sepam n series 40 series 40 series 40 series 60 series 40 series 40 series 80 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Recommendations for connecting Sepam units in ring configuration When connecting Sepam units in the same ring configuration the ACE850 interfaces must be of the same type either ACE850TP or ACE850FO In the worst case scenario each Sepam unit must not be separated by more than 30 communicating devices connected to the network other Sepam units or Ethernet switches from the ROOT Ethernet switch A worst case analysis must be performed for all the Sepam units in each network topology Example m Inthe best case scenario Sepam 2 of ring 1 is separated from the ROOT Ethernet switch by 2 devices switch 2 and Sepam 1 m In the worst case scenario i e if the connections between switches 1 and 2 and between Sepam units 1 and 2 of ring 1 are broken Sepam 2 of ring 1 will be separated from the ROOT Ethernet switch by 4 devices switch 3 switch 2 Sepam 4 and Sepam 3 Schneider 257 Electric PE80317 Installation ACE909 2 RS 232 RS 485 c
3. Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 6 2 CB control 6 3 Activity 4 Type 0 projection 1 directionalized 5 Type of 10 Sum or Core balance CT 0 calculated 1 measured 6 Reserved 7 Reserved 8 Group A direction O line 1 busbar 9 Group A types 1 and 2 characteristic angle 45 angle 1 0 angle 2 15 angle 3 30 angle 4 45 angle 5 60 angle 6 90 angle Group A type 3 limit 1 0 to 359 10 Group A type 1 sector 2 76 sector 3 83 sector 4 86 sector Group A type 3 limit 2 0 to 359 11 Group A tripping curve 12 Group A types 1 and 2 IsO set point 0 1 A Group A type 3 Is0 set point 0 01 A 13 Group A tripping time delay 10 ms 14 Group A types 1 and 2 Vs0 Unp Group A type 3 VsO 0 1 Unp 15 Group A timer hold curve 3 16 Group A timer hold delay 10 ms 17 Group A memory time 10 ms 18 Group A memory voltage Unp 19 Reserved 20 Reserved 21 Reserved z 22 Reserved 23 Group B direction 0 line 1 busbar 24 Group B types 1 and 2 characteristic angle 0 45 angle 1 0 angle 2 15 angle 3 30 angle 4 45 angle 5 60 angle 6 90 angle Group B type 3 limit 1 0 to 359 25 Group B type 1 sector 2 76 sector 3 83 sector 4 86 sector Group B type 3 limit 2
4. Sepam Sepam series 40 series 40 RS 485 Modbus ACE949 2 ACE949 2 ACE949 2 EM Sepam Sepam Sepam series 20 series 20 series 20 Maximum Advised Configuration The maximum configuration of Sepam for an ECI850 IEC 61850 Sepam server of level 1 is to be choosen between the following configurations m 5 Sepam series 20 m 3 Sepam series 40 m 2 Sepam series 60 m 2 Sepam series 80 Schneider nes i PCRED301006EN 03 2011 266 Seeder Use PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Contents User Machine Interfaces SFT2841 setting and operating software Welcome window SFT2841 setting and operating software Presentation General screen organization Use of the software Configuration of a Sepam network UMI on front panel Presentation Advanced UMI Access to data White keys for current operation Blue keys for parameter and protection setting Data entry principles Default parameters all applications Principles and methods Testing and metering equipment required General examination and preliminary actions Checking of parameter and protection settings Checking of phase current and voltage input connection With 3 phase generator With single phase generator and voltages delivered by 3 VTs With single phase generator and
5. Male 9 pin sub D connector supplied with the ACE909 2 ACE909 2 Rx Tx 0V RS 232 RS 485 Phn V V L L oe TI Eh 3 7 9 5 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 ACE909 2 RS 232 RS 485 converter Description and dimensions A Terminal block for RS 232 link limited to 10 m 33 ft Female 9 pin sub D connector to connect to the 2 wire RS 485 network with distributed power supply 1 screw type male 9 pin sub D connector is supplied with the converter Power supply terminal block 1 Distributed power supply voltage selector switch 12 V DC or 24 V DC 2 Protection fuse unlocked by a 1 4 turn 3 LEDs m ON OFF on if ACE909 2 is energized m Tx on if RS 232 sending by ACE909 2 is active m Rx on if RS 232 receiving by ACE909 2 is active 4 SW1 parameter setting of 2 wire RS 485 network polarization and line impedance matching resistors Function SW1 1 SW1 2 SW1 3 Polarization at 0 V via Rp 470 Q ON Polarization at 5 V via Rp 470 Q ON 2 wire RS 485 network impedance ON matching by 150 Q resistor 5 SW2 parameter setting of asynchronous data transmission rate and format Same parameters as for RS 232 link and 2 wire RS 485 network Rate bauds SW2 1 SW2 2 SW2 3 1200 1 2400 4800 19200 l lo lo 1 0 1 9600 0 7 0 olo 38400 Format SW2 4 SW2 5 With parity check 0 Without parity check 1
6. or Vs pick up signal Characteristics Us or Vs set point Setting 50 to 150 Unp or Vnp if Uns lt 208 V 50 to 135 Unp or Vnp if Uns 2 208 V Accuracy 2 or 0 005 Unp Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 97 41 Time delay T Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 0 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic times Operation time pick up lt 35 ms typically 25 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 40 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Connnection conditions Type of connection V1 V2 V3 U21 U21 U32 U21 VO U21 U32 VO Phase to neutral Yes No No No Yes operation Phase to phase Yes on U21 only Yes on U21 only Yes operation PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Protection functions Neutral voltage displacement ANSI code 59N Operation The protection function picks up if the residual voltage VO is above a Vs0 set point gt gt 3 gt with VO V1 V2 V3 m it includes a definite time delay T m the residual voltage is either calculated from the 3 phase voltages or measured by an external VT m the protection function operates for connections V1V2V3 U21U32 VO and U21 VO Block diagram V1 v2 Z 2 y3 ee eins VO gt VsO time delayed output external VT pick up signal Characteristics Vs0 set point Setting 2 Unp to 80 Unp if Vnso sum of 3Vs 2 Unp to 80 Unp if Vnso
7. 1 Latching 2 Reserved 3 Activity 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Use close position of circuit breaker 6 7 Is set point 0 1A 8 Tripping time delay 10 ms 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved Schneider Electric 187 Modbus communication Access to remote settings ANSI 50N 51N Earth fault Function number 02xx relay 1 xx 01 to relay 4 xx 04 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 6 3 Activity 4 Type of 10 0 calculated 1 measured 5 Reserved 2 6 Reserved 7 Group A tripping curve 8 Group A Is0 set point 0 1 A 9 Group A tripping time delay 10 ms 10 Group A timer hold curve 11 Group A timer hold delay 10 ms 12 Group A H2 restraint 0 yes 1 no 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved 16 Reserved 17 Group B tripping curve 18 Group B IsO set point 0 1 A 19 Group B tripping time delay 10 ms 20 Group B timer hold curve 21 Group B timer hold delay 10 ms 22 Group B H2 restraint 0 yes 1 no 23 Reserved 24 Reserved 25 Reserved 26 Reserved ANSI 51V Voltage restrained phase overcurrent Function number 2501 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity O 4 Reserved 5 Reserved s 6 Tripping curve 7 Is set point 0 1A
8. General settings Selection Setting range In Rated phase current 20r3CT1A 5A 1 Ato 6250 A sensor primary current 3LPCTs 25 Ato 3150 A Ib Base current according to rated power of equipment 0 2 Into 1 3 In Ind Rated residual current Sum of 3 phase currents See In rated phase current CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT 2A 5 A or 20 A rating 1 A 5 ACT 1 A to 6250 A In0 In 1 A 5 ACT 0 1 A to 625 A InO In 10 Sensitivity x 10 Core balance CT ACE990 the core According to current monitored and use balance CT ratio of ACE990 1 n must be such that 50 lt n lt 1500 Unp Rated primary phase to phase voltage 220 V to 250 kV Vnp rated primary phase to neutral voltage Vnp Unp v3 Uns Rated secondary phase to phase voltage 3 VTs V1 V2 V3 90 V to 230 V in steps of 1 V 2 VTs U21 U32 90 V to 120 V in steps of 1 V 1VT V1 90 V to 120 V in steps of 1 V UnsO Secondary zero sequence voltage for primary zero Uns 3 or Uns 3 sequence voltage Unp v3 Rated frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz Integration period for demand current and peak demand current and power 5 10 15 30 60 mn Pulse type accumulated energy meter Increments active energy 0 1 kW h to 5 MW h Increments reactive energy 0 1 kvar h to 5 Mvar h 1 In values for LPCT in Amps 25 50 100 125 133 200 250 320 400 500 630 666 1000 1600 2000 3150 20 Schneider G Electric PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Meteri
9. 70 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Protection functions Thermal overload ANSI code 49 RMS Setting examples Hot curves Ib 480 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 10 00 1250 15 00 17 50 20 00 Es 105 0 0023 0 0021 0 0017 0 0014 0 0012 0 0010 0 0009 0 0008 0 0007 0 0006 0 0006 0 0005 0 0003 0 0002 0 0002 0 0001 110 0 0045 0 0042 0 0034 0 0029 0 0024 0 0021 0 0018 0 0016 0 0014 0 0013 0 0011 0 0010 0 0006 0 0004 0 0003 0 0003 115 0 0068 0 0063 0 0051 0 0043 0 0036 0 0031 0 0027 0 0024 0 0021 0 0019 0 0017 0 0015 0 0010 0 0007 0 0005 0 0004 120 0 0091 0 0084 0 0069 0 0057 0 0049 0 0042 0 0036 0 0032 0 0028 0 0025 0 0022 0 0020 0 0013 0 0009 0 0007 0 0005 125 0 0114 0 0105 0 0086 0 0072 0 0061 0 0052 0 0045 0 0040 0 0035 0 0031 0 0028 0 0025 0 0016 0 0011 0 0008 0 0006 130 0 0137 0 0126 0 0103 0 0086 0 0073 0 0063 0 0054 0 0048 0 0042 0 0038 0 0034 0 0030 0 0019 0 0013 0 0010 0 0008 135 0 0160 0 0147 0 0120 0 0101 0 0085 0 0073 0 0064 0 0056 0 0049 0 0044 0 0039 0 0035 0 0023 0 0016 0 0011 0 0009 140 0 0183 0 0168 0 0138 0 0115 0 0097 0 0084 0 0073 0 0064 0 0056 0 0050 0 0045 0 0040 0 0026 0 0018 0 0013 0 0010 145 0 0206 0 0189 0 0155 0 0129 0 0110 0 0094 0 0082 0 0072 0 0063 0 0056 0 0051 0 0046 0 0029 0 0020 0 0015 0 0011 150 0 0229 0 0211 0 0172 0 0144 0 0122 0 0105 0 0091 0 0080 0 0070 0 0063 0 0056 0 0051 0 0032 0 0022 0 0016 0 0013 155 0 0253 0 0232 0 0190 0 0158
10. Setting range 10 Angle at start of tripping zone Lim 1 Setting 0 to 359 Resolution 1 Accuracy 3 Angle at end of tripping zone Lim 2 Setting 0 to 359 1 Resolution 12 Accuracy 3 Tripping direction Setting Busbar line IsO setting Setting With CSH core balance CT 2 A rating 0 1 A to 30 A 20 A rating 2 A to 300 A With sensitive 1 ACT 0 05 In0 lt IsO lt 15 InO minimum 0 1 A With core balance CT 0 05 In0 lt Is0 lt 15 InO ACE990 range 1 minimum 0 1 A Resolution 0 1 Aor 1 digit Accuracy 5 Drop out pick up ratio 290 Vs0 set point Setting Calculated VO 2 Unps Vs0 lt 80 Unp sum of 3 voltages Measured VO 0 6 Unp lt Vs0 lt 80 Unp external VT Resolution 0 1 for Vs0 lt 10 1 for Vs0 210 Accuracy 5 Drop out pick up ratio 290 Time delay T Setting Instantaneous 50 ms lt T lt 300 s Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy lt 3 or 20 ms at 2 Is0 Characteristics times Operation time Pick up lt 40 ms at 2 IsO Instantaneous lt 50 ms at 2 Is0 Overshoot time lt 35 ms to 2 IsO Reset time lt 50 ms to 2 IsO 1 The tripping zone Lim 2 Lim 1 must be greater than or equal to 10 2 For IsO 0 the protection is equivalent to the neutral voltage displacement protection ANSI 59N 3 nO k n with n number of core balance CT turns and k factor to be determined according to the wiring of the ACE99
11. Function code Unit number The content of the address 1E80h 2080h may be read using a Modbus read word operation function 3 The function code field may have the following values m 01h to 99h BCD encoding for protection functions The unit number field is used as follows m for protection functions it indicates the unit involved varying from 1 to N N being the maximum number of relays available in the Sepam m when only one unit of a protection function is available this number field is not controlled Exception replies In addition to the usual cases Sepam can send Modbus type 07 exception replies not acknowledged if another remote reading request is being processed Reply frame The reply sent back by Sepam fits into a zone with a maximum length of 25 words at the address 1E00h or 2000h which comprises the following 1E00h 1E7Ch 2000h 207Ch B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 BO9 B08 B07 BO6 BO5 B04 BOS BO2 BO1 BOO Function code Unit number This zone is read by a Modbus read word operation function 3 at the address 2000h The length of the exchange may concern m first word only validity test m maximum size of the zone 125 mots m usable size of the zone determined by the function being addressed However reading must always begin at the first word in the zone any other address triggers an e
12. curve T v Pai D X v ni a 1 00 extremely inverse EIT 0 10 ultra inverse UIT Vs IAC curves t s A 100 1 000 00 100 00 VI 10 00 vr 0 10 Vs 100 Schneider 109 4 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 0 G Electric Control and monitoring functions PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Contents Description Definition of symbols Logic input output assignment Standard logic input assignment Circuit breaker contactor control ANSI code 94 69 Associated functions Logic discrimination ANSI code 68 Radial network Closed ring network Substation with 2 parallel incomers Disturbance recording triggering Switching of groups of settings Local indication ANSI code 30 Control matrix Logic equations Self tests and fail safe position Schneider Electric 112 113 114 115 116 118 120 120 122 124 125 126 127 129 130 135 111 DE81058 Control and monitoring Description functions Sepam performs the control and monitoring functions required for electrical network operation m the main control and monitoring functions are predefined and fit the applications most frequently used They a
13. Metering bar graphs 10 bar graph y bar graph Protection and parameter setting modes There are 3 levels of use m operator level used to access all the screens in read mode and does not require any passwords m protection setter level requires the entry of the first password gt key allows protection setting key m parameter setter level requires the entry of the N b5 b51 b gt 5iN b gt 5N ext MT10808 second password key allows modification of the passwords general settings as well key Only general setters may modify the passwords m _ The passwords have 4 digits gt PCRED301006EN 03 2011 yo off I on Trip Scheider 279 Use Advanced UMI White keys for current operation Dw The metering key is used to display the variables measured by Sepam b51 b gt 51 lo gt 5IN b gt 5iN ext Ooff lon Tip MT 10283 162A ans 161A ans 163A RMS The diagnosis key provides access to diagnostic data on the breaking device and additional measurements to facilitate fault analysis N b5 St b gt 5IN b gt gt 5iN ext Yooff Ylon Trip MT11117 reset k ey on SX b5 b gt 51 b gt 5iN lo gt gt SIN ext Ooff Ylon Trip The alarms key is used to consult the 16 most recent U amp U U U U alarms that have not yet been cleared MT10287 0 lo FAULT 3 ZN reset 280 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2
14. ECI850 ACE949 2 ACE949 2 Im V V WE saili N Rx 3 L Q L Rx 4 L Ee 5 Fa ECI850 ACE959 ACE959 oO V 9 V V V Rx Txt Tx Rx Tx 2 Tx Tx Rx Rx Tx UN Rx g H 3 Rx G ar PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE81028 Installation Supervisor or RTU E LAN S LAN ECI850 ECI850 S LAN S LAN and E LAN and E LAN Be ACE949 2 a e evcce Sepam series 20 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 ACE949 2 Sepam series 40 ACE949 2 Sepam series 20 ECI850 IEC 61850 Sepam server Example of architecture The diagram below shows an example of the communication architecture with ECI850 IEC 61850 Sepam servers Note Rc line impedance matching resistor Ethernet TCP IP IEC 61850 ECI850 ECI850 S LAN S LAN and E LAN and E LAN RS 485 Modbus ACE949 2 EM Sepam Sepam series 80 series 80 RS 485 Modbus RE ACE949 2 Rc ACE949 2 Sepam Sepam series 60 series 60 RS 485 Modbus ACE949 2 Rc ACE949 2
15. PE80422 Motor03 Motoi0d Motor05 Those Configuration window for the serial link communication network Network configuration New configuration gt alalsix I T EC 61650 configuration Edition f PE80423 Network configuration Addes Te Fam Model Userlabel Devi wissis12 ep 1019513113 1 SES sos Configuration window for the Ethernet TCP IP communication network aa Schneider SFT2841 setting and operating software Configuration of a Sepam network Direct serial link The Sepam units are connected to an RS 485 or fiber optic multidrop network Depending on the serial link interfaces available on the PC the PC itself will be connected either directly to the RS 485 network or fiber optic HUB or via an RS 232 RS 485 converter or fiber optic converter The communication parameters to be defined are m port communication port used on the PC m speed 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bauds m parity None Even or Odd m handshake None RTS or RTS CTS m time out from 100 to 3000 ms m number of retries from 1 to 6 Link via TCP IP Ethernet The Sepam units are connected to an RS 485 multidrop network over one or more Ethernet Modbus TCP IP gateways for example EGX gateways or ECI850 servers that act as the Modbus TCP IP gateway for the link with the SFT2841 Use on an IEC 61850 network SFT2841 can be used on an IE
16. Protection Personalized functions messages Messages Se PHASE FAULT Logic equations Logic inputs and outputs The number of Sepam inputs outputs is adapted to fit the control and monitoring functions used The 4 outputs included in the Sepam series 40 base unit may be extended by adding one MES114 module with 10 logic inputs and 4 output relays After selecting the MES114 type required by an application the logic inputs must be assigned to functions The functions to which inputs are assigned are chosen from a list of available functions which covers the whole range of possible uses The functions used can be adapted to meet needs within the limits of the logic inputs available The inputs may also be inverted for undervoltage type operation A default input output assignment is proposed for the most frequent uses TE Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Control and monitoring functions This page gives the meaning of the symbols used in the block diagrams illustrating the different control and monitoring functions in this chapter Logic functions m OR gt 1 DE50675 N x x Equation S X Y Z m AND DE50676 N lt XK Reo Equation S Xx Y xZ m exclusive XOR DE50677 N lt X u S 1 if one and only one input is set to 1 S 1ifX Y Z 1 m Complement These functions may use the complement of one or mo
17. ACE959 CCA614 connection cord Function CAUTION The CCA614 prefabricated cord is used to connect ACE850TP and ACE850FO HAZARD OF DEFECTIVE COMMUNICATION communication interfaces m Never use the C and F communication m To the white communication port on a Sepam series 40 base unit ports on a Sepam series 80 simultaneously m To the blue communication port F on a Sepam series 60 or Sepam series 80 m The only communication ports on a Sepam base unit series 80 unit that can be used simultaneously are ports 1 and 2 or ports and F Characteristics Failure to follow these instructions can result m Length 3 m 9 8 ft in equipment damage m Fitted with 2 blue RJ45 connectors m Minimum curvature radius 50 mm 1 97 in Sepam series 40 Sepam series 60 and Sepam series 80 DE80440 CCA614 Electric PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 241 Installation RS 485 network cable RS 485 medium Connection of communication interfaces Characteristics of communication networks RS 485 network for ACE949 2 ACE959 and ACE969TP 2 interfaces 2 wire 1 shielded twisted pair 4 wire 2 shielded twisted pairs Distributed power supply 1 shielded twisted pair 1 shielded twisted pair Shielding Tinned copper braid coverage gt 65 Characteristic impedance 120 Q Gauge AWG 24 Resistance per unit length lt 100 Q km 62 1 Q mi Capacit
18. 7 7 E Hot state 18 Positive active power 19 Negative active power 20 Instantaneous output at 0 8 Is 21 Starting in progress 22 Recloser in service 201 Recloser ready 202 Reclosing successful 203 Permanent trip 204 Reclosing cycle 1 211 Reclosing cycle 2 212 Reclosing cycle 3 213 Reclosing cycle 4 214 Inputs Reset 101 E VT fault 103 Start 50BF 107 Inhibition 113 a Closed circuit breaker 119 m Downstream load start up 120 1 When the protection is used with phase to neutral voltage PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider Electric Control and monitoring functions a Schneider Logic equations Processing upon loss of auxiliary voltage The V1 to V10 VL1 to VL 31 and V_TRIPCB V_CLOSECB V_INHIBCLOSE V_FLAGREC variables are saved in the event of a Sepam auxiliary power outage The status is restored when the power returns allowing the statuses produced by LATCH SR or PULSE type memory operators to be saved Special cases m brackets must be used in expressions which comprise different OR AND XOR or NOT operators o V1 VL1 AND 112 OR P27 27S_1_1 incorrect expression o V1 VL1 AND 112 OR P27 27S_1_1 correct expression o V1 VL1 OR 112 OR P27 27S_1_1 correct expression m only the V1 to V10 VL1 to VL31 and V_TRIPCB V_CLOSECB V_INHIBCLOSE V_FLAGREC variables are allowed in the LATCH function m function parameters cannot be expres
19. Entry of numerical values e g current threshold value m Position the cursor on the required field using the P 4 keys then confirm to go on to the next digit by pressing the pm key u m Select the first digit to be entered and set the value by pressing the W or a key choice of __ 0 9 k m Press the I key to confirm the choice and go on to the following digit The values are entered with 3 significant digits and a period The unit e g A or kA is chosen using the last digit m Press the em key to confirm the entry then press the key for access to the following field m All of the values entered are only effective after the user confirms by selecting the apply box at the bottom of the screen and presses the Ka key PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Use Default parameters all applications Hardware configuration m identification Sepam xxxx m model MX m MES module absent m MET modules absent m MSA module absent m DSM module present m ACE module absent Output parameter setting m outputs used O1 to O4 m shunt trip units O1 O3 m undervoltage trip units O2 O4 m impulse mode no latched Program logic m circuit breaker control yes m logic discrimination no m recloser no m logic input assignment not used General characteristics m network frequency 50 Hz m group of settings A m enable remote setting no m working language English m type of cubicle feeder exce
20. Residual current and Injection of 5 A into the core Injected current value residual voltage input balance CT primary circuit 10 Soissons o connection Secondary injection VT rated primary phase to neutral of the rated voltage of the VTs voltage Unp v3 VO in an open delta arrangement Uns V3 or Uns 3 Phase displacement VO 10 0 10 0 HIESSENBEREFFERFERE Testsiperformedion reed Signatures rer Comments Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 P Electric 301 MT11196 Commissioning Sepam has a large number of self tests that are carried out in the base unit and additional modules The purpose of the self tests is m to detect failures that may lead to nuisance tripping or the failure to trip when a fault occurs m to put Sepam in the fail safe position to avoid user errors m to notify the operator that a maintenance operation is required The Sepam diagnosis screen of the SFT2841 software provides access to data on the status of the SO SES AL De ZU AeA Diagnostiques Etats Leds Entr es Sorties Etats TS Diagnostique Sepam Caract ristiques g n ales du Sepam Etat du Sepam Type d application Mat Moteur D faut majeur non Rep re du Sepam Vers logiciele v2 Sepam Diagnosis screen Schneider 302 Electric Maintenance Shutdown of the base unit in fail safe position The base unit goes into the fail safe position in the following condition
21. 1 According to parameter setting with the SFT2841 software and factory set to 36 periods 2 According to the type of sensors PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Network diagnosis functions Description The Fault locator function calculates the location and resistance of a presumed fault in a medium voltage network The fault location is calculated for faults downstream of the point where the protection relay is installed typically on the incoming feeder of an installation on a network comprising several feeders m The single phase fault locator is associated with the ANSI 50N 51N and ANSI 67N protection functions m The multi phase fault locator is associated with the ANSI 50 51 and ANSI 67 protection functions Only the protection function units configured for circuit breaker tripping can activate the Fault locator function After calculation the following data is recorded in the tripping context m fault location in km or in mi m fault resistance in Q m faulty phase s This data may be accessed with the other measurements in the tripping contexts via m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link See Tripping context Tripping current page 31 DE80531 Pick up signals Unit 1 Units configured for tripping protection functions 50 51 67 50N 51N 67N Time delayed outputs Unit 1 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Fault locator ANSI code 21FL Field of application The Fau
22. IEC 61850 protocol CID file Active connections Modbus protocol Active connections Status JACE850F0 ACE850 module v0 05 Sepam configuration IP address v1 00 Port P1 Port P2 00 00 54 81 30 10 169 254 0 10 169 254 0 10 x Disabled Forwarding Imini_prot_gserx2 cid 0 0 SFT2841 Ethernet diagnosis screen PE80403 ACE850 home page PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Commissioning and diagnosis Ethernet communication Diagnosis using SFT2841 software When connected to Sepam the SFT2841 software informs the operator of the general Sepam status and of the Sepam communication status in particular Sepam status information appears on the Sepam diagnosis screen on which buttons can be used to obtain detailed status information on each communication channel The Sepam diagnosis screen can be used to check that the Sepam base unit and the ACE850 interface are correctly connected Communication Communication 8 8 Communication protocol 227 a Communication protocol Ethernet Communication interface version Communication interface version 0 5 Active IP address 227 Active IP address 010 195 132 003 Status 2777 Status operational Diagnosis screen detail Diagnosis screen detail ACE850 not or improperly connected ACE850 connected properly The Ethernet diagnosis screen can be used to check m the ACE850 module sta
23. The protection units must be configured to trip the circuit breaker in order to be taken into account in logic discrimination 1 According to parameter setting O3 by default 2 Instantaneous action inst corresponds to protection pick up signal information Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 P Electric 121 MT11208 Control and monitoring Logic discrimination functions ANSI code 68 Closed ring network Application Block diagram Sepam S42 S52 Closed ring network protection may be provided using send Sepam 42 or S52 which includes the following gt Blt and BI2 ai functions ae m 2 units of directional phase 67 and earth fault 67N directional earth fault i protection functions inst unit o a unit to detect faults located in the line direction directional overcurrent ee o aunit to detect faults located in the busbar direction inst unit 1 0 8 Is Output Oxx m doubled logic discrimination function with send BI1 o sending of 2 blocking information according to the direction of the fault detected i RN Output Oyy o receipt of 2 blocking information to block the mE send BI2 directional protection relays according to their detection directional earth fault direction inst unit g directional overcurrent inst unit 2 0 8 Is BI2 inhibit send BI if fault not cleared Receive BI1 and BI2 time delay settings for time based dis
24. cable line Recording 11 12 13 V1 V2 V3 in healthy conditions Determination of the Calculation of the Recording in the fault type and the fault location and tripping context reference phase resistance Recording 11 12 13 V1 V2 V3 in fault conditions Schneider 85 Network diagnosis functions a Schneider Fault locator ANSI code 21FL Protection setting parameters The protection setting parameters are m time delay T indicating the time it takes to establish healthy conditions after the last instantaneous pick up signal Time delay T avoids having to record the values measured in fault conditions as healthy values during for example a circuit breaker reclosing cycle m the percentage of cable in the relevant feeder m symmetrical impedances of conductors in km or in mi o Rdl Xdl resistance and reactance per unit length of the positive sequence diagram of overhead line conductors o Rdc Xdc resistance and reactance per unit length of the positive sequence diagram of underground cable conductors o ROI XOl resistance and reactance per unit length of the zero sequence diagram of overhead line conductors o ROc X0c resistance and reactance per unit length of the zero sequence diagram of underground cable conductors Average impedance values are given in the table below They were calculated taking the average of the IEC 60909 answers and the calculations statistics Average impedance v
25. 16 Unit 3 Group A 50 51 activation time delay T 1 17 Unit 3 Group A 50 51 multiplying factor M ls 18 Unit 4 Group A 50 51 unit of activation time delay T 19 Unit 4 Group A 50 51 activation time delay T 0 20 Unit 4 Group A 50 51 multiplying factor M ls 21 Unit 1 Group B 50 51 unit of activation time delay T 22 Unit 1 Group B 50 51 activation time delay T G 23 Unit 1 Group B 50 51 multiplying factor M Is 24 Unit 2 Group B 50 51 unit of activation time delay T 25 Unit 2 Group B 50 51 activation time delay T 1 26 Unit 2 Group B 50 51 multiplying factor M ls 27 Unit 3 Group B 50 51 unit of activation time delay T 28 Unit 3 Group B 50 51 activation time delay T 0 29 Unit 3 Group B 50 51 multiplying factor M Is 30 Unit 4 Group B 50 51 unit of activation time delay T 31 Unit 4 Group B 50 51 activation time delay T 1 32 Unit 4 Group B 50 51 multiplying factor M ls 33 CLPU 50N 51N global action setting 0 blocking 1 multiplication 34 Activation of ANSI 50N 51N protection unit x OFF or ON Q2 35 Unit 1 Group A 50N 51N unit of activation time delay TO 9 36 Unit 1 Group A 50N 51N activation time delay TO 0 37 Unit 1 Group A 50N 51N multiplying factor MO IsO 38 Unit 2 Group A 50N 51N unit of activation time delay TO 39 Unit 2 Group A 50N 51N activation time delay TO 1 40 Unit 2 Group A 50N 51N multiplying factor MO IsO 41 Unit 3 Grou
26. CSH120 120 164 44 190 so 40 166 65 35 in 4 75 6 46 1 73 7 48 3 15 1 57 6 54 2 56 1 38 CSH200 196 256 46 274 120 eo 254 104 37 in 7 72 10 1 1 81 10 8 4 72 2 36 10 4 09 1 46 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE80231 DE80231 Installation A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device m NEVER work alone m Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding m Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off m Only CSH120 CSH200 and CSH280 core balance CTs can be used for direct residual current measurement Other residual current sensors require the use of an intermediate device CSH30 ACE990 or CCA634 m Install the core balance CTs on insulated cables m Cables with a rated voltage of more than 1000 V must also have an earthed shielding Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury CAUTION HAZARD OF NON OPERATION Do not connect the secondary circuit of the CSH core balance CTs to earth This connection is made in Sepam Failure to follow these instr
27. Characterist Tripping curve Setting ics Definite time IDMT chosen according to list page 78 IsO set point Definite time setting 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt 15 In0 expressed in Amps Sum of CTs 0 1 Ind lt Is0 lt 15 InO With CSH sensor 2 Arating 0 2 Ato 30 A 5 Arating 0 5 A to 75 A 20 A rating 2 A to 300 A CT 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt 15 In0 min 0 1 A Core balance CT with ACE990 0 1 Ind lt Is0 lt 15 InO IDMT time setting 0 1 Ind lt Is0 lt Ind expressed in Amps Sum of CTs 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt Ind With CSH sensor 2 A rating 0 2Ato2A 5 A rating 0 5Ato5A 20 A rating 2Ato20A CT 0 1 In0 lt IsO lt InO min 0 1 A Core balance CT with ACE990 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt Ind Resolution 0 1 Aor 1 digit Accuracy 2 5 or 0 01 InO Drop out pick up ratio Harmonic 2 restraint Fixed threshold Time delay T operation time at 10 IsO 93 5 5 with CSH sensor CT or core balance CT ACE990 93 5 5 or gt 1 0 015 In0 Is0 x 100 sum of CTs 20 5 Setting Definite time inst 50 ms lt Ts 300s IDMT 100 ms lt Ts 12 5 s or TMS 3 Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy 2 Definite time 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms IDMT class 5 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Timer hold delay T1 Definite time timer hold 0 0 05 to 300 s IDMT 0 5 to 20s Characteristic times Operation time Pick up lt 35 ms at 2 IsO typically 25 ms
28. Confirmed instantaneous m inst lt 50 ms at 2 IsO for IsO 2 0 3 InO typically 35 ms m inst lt 70 ms at 2 IsO for IsO lt 0 3 InO typically 50 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 40 ms for T1 0 TS TC equivalence for each protocol Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870 5 103 IEC 61850 TC Binary Output ASDU FUN INF LN DO DA TC3 BO08 20 160 23 LLNO SGCB SetActiveSettingGroup TC4 Boog 20 160 24 LLNO SGCB SetActiveSettingGroup Schneider 79 Electric DE80535 Protection functions Description The Cold Load Pick Up 10 or CLPU 50N 51N function avoids nuisance tripping of the earth fault protection ANSI 50N 51N during energization after a long outage Depending on the installation characteristics such operations can actually generate transient inrush currents If the residual current measurement is based on the sum of the 3 phase CTs the aperiodic component of these transient currents can result in saturation of the phase CTs which can result in a residual current measurement likely to exceed the protection set points These transient currents are essentially due to m the power transformer magnetizing currents m the motor starting current In principle the protection settings should be defined so as to avoid tripping due to these transient currents However if these settings result in inadequate sensitivity levels or delays that are too long the CLPU 50N 51N function is us
29. Frame type Ethernet Il C IEEE 802 3 C Auto Advanced parameters gt gt gt SFT2841 Ethernet and TCP IP configuration Configuring the communication interfaces Ethernet communication Access to configuration parameters The Sepam communication interfaces must be configured using SFT2841 software The configuration parameters can be accessed from the Communication configuration window in the SFT2841 software To access this window m open the Sepam configuration window in SFT2841 m check the box for ACExxx communication interface m click on the relevant button B the Communication configuration window appears m select the type of interface used ACE850TP or ACE850FO Configuring an ACE850 involves m configuring the standard Ethernet parameters mandatory m configuring one or more of the following sets of advanced optional parameters o SNMP Ethernet network management o SNTP time synchronization o IP filtering access control o RSTP Ethernet ring management o User accounts access control Ethernet and TCP IP configuration Before configuring the ACE850 obtain a unique static IP address subnet mask and default gateway address from the network administrator See the section on IP address and parameter guidelines page 151 Authorized values Ethernet II 802 3 Auto Default Ethernet Il Parameters Frame format Description Used to select the format for data sent over an Ethernet connecti
30. Measurement range 0 to 359 Resolution 1 Accuracy 2 Refresh interval 2 seconds typical Phase displacement 91 92 03 Operation This function gives the phase displacement between the V1 V2 V3 voltages and I1 12 I3 currents respectively in the trigonometric sense see diagram The measurements are used when Sepam is commissioned to check that the voltage and current inputs are wired correctly It does not operate when only the U21 voltage is connected to Sepam Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 to 359 Resolution 1 Accuracy 2 Refresh interval 2 seconds typical Electric Schneider 33 Network diagnosis functions 34 Schneider MT10181 Disturbance recording Operation This function is used to record analog signal and logical states Record storage is activated according to parameter setting by a triggering event see Control and monitoring functions Disturbance recording triggering The stored event begins before the triggering event and continues afterwards The record comprises the following information m values sampled from the different signals m date m characteristics of the recorded channels The duration and number of records may be set using the SFT2841 software tool Th
31. Power factor cos Operation The power factor is defined by cosp P P Q It expresses the phase displacement between the phase currents and phase to neutral voltages The and signs and IND inductive and CAP capacitive indications give the direction of power flow and the type of load Readout The measurement may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the K key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 1 to 1 IND CAP Accuracy 9 0 01 typical Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 0 01 Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 At In Unp cos gt 0 8 in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Metering functions Active and reactive energy Accumulated active and reactive energy Operation This function gives the following for the active and reactive energy values m accumulated energy conveyed in one direction m accumulated energy conveyed in the other direction It is based on measurement of the fundamental component The accumulated energy values are saved in the event of a power failure Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the K key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Active energy Reactive energy Metering capacity 0 to 2 1 108
32. Protection functions tsA DE51629 T 1 5 secy IEC curve VIT Example DE51630 1 gt Is pick up signal l l l DE50755 value of internal time delay counter T1 Ws gt Is delayed output j ch i ie i l tripping 0 Timer hold dependent on current I 106 Schneider Vs DE50754 General Tripping curves Setting of IDMT tripping curves time delay T or TMS factor The time delays of current IDMT tripping curves except for customized and RI curves may be set as follows m time T operating time at 10 x Is m TMS factor factor shown as T in the equations on the left 13 5 TMS whereTMS L 14 1 5 Is Example t l The IEC curve of the VIT type is positioned so as to be the same with TMS 1 or T 1 5s Timer hold The adjustable timer hold T1 is used for m detection of restriking faults DT curve m coordination with electromechanical relays IDMT curve m Timer hold may be inhibited if necessary Equation for IDMT timer hold curve Equation t D st I where 1 TMS I B B m T1 timer hold setting timer hold for reset 0 and TMS 1 T tripping time delay setting at 10 Is b basic tripping curve value at x tr T1 gt 0 1 Wis Constant timer hold PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Protection functions Implementing IDMT curves examples of problems to be solved Problem 1 Given the type of IDM
33. Schneider a7 Modbus communication Reading of remote settings remote reading Settings accessible for remote reading Reading of the settings of all the protection functions may be accessed remotely in 2 independent zones to enable operation with 2 masters Exchange principle Remote reading of settings remote reading takes place in two steps m first of all the master indicates the code of the function for which it wishes to know the settings by means of a request frame The request is acknowledged in the Modbus sense of the term to free the network m the master then reads a reply zone to find the required information by means of a reply frame Each function has its own particular reply zone contents The time needed between the request and the reply is linked to Sepam s low priority cycle time and may vary from a few tens to several hundreds of milliseconds setting zone 1 read 1E00h 1E7Ch read request 1E80h remote setting 1F00h 1F7Ch setting zone 2 read 2000h 207Ch read request 2080h remote setting 2100h 217Ch OoOoOmsgoqocac gd 178 Sepneider Access to remote settings Request frame The request is made by the master using a write word operation function 6 or 16 at the address 1E80h or 2080h of a 1 word frame consisting of the following 1E80h 2080h B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 BO9 B08 B07 BO6 BO5 B04 BO3 B02 BO1 BOO
34. This setting avoids the tripping of all the feeders when the busbar is resupplied by remanent motor voltage following the loss of the incomer Block diagram To time delayed 8 output pick up signal dF dt gt dFs dt setting without restraint with restraint 1 Or U21 gt Vs if only one VT Characteristics Fs set point Setting 40 to 50 Hz or 50 to 60 Hz Accuracy 0 02 Hz Resolution 0 1 Hz Pick up drop out difference 0 25 Hz 0 1 Hz Vs set point Setting 20 Unp to 50 Unp Accuracy 2 Resolution 1 Restraint on frequency variation Setting With without dFs dt set point 1 Hz s to 15 Hz s Accuracy 1 Hz s Resolution 1 Hz s Time delay T Setting 100 ms to 300s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic times Operation time pick up lt 80 ms Overshoot time lt 40ms Reset time lt 50 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 and df dt lt 3 Hz s Electric Schneider 103 Protection functions General Tripping curves Presentation of tripping curve operation and Definite time protection settings for protection functions using The tripping time is constant The time delay is started when the set point is overrun m definite time tA m DMT MT10911 E timer hold Definite time protection principle IDMT protection The operation time depends on the protected value phase current earth fault cur
35. 5 Use the SFT2841 software to check the following m the value indicated for 11 phase current is approximately equal to the rated primary current of the CT m the value indicated for V1 phase to neutral voltage is approximately equal to the rated primary phase to neutral voltage of the VT Vnp Unp V3 m the value indicated for the phase displacement 1 V1 11 between the 11 current and V1 voltage is approximately equal to 0 6 Proceed in the same way by circular permutation with the phase 2 and 3 voltages and currents to check the 12 V2 2 V2 12 and 13 V3 3 V3 13 values 7 Turn the generator off 092 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Commissioning Description Check to be carried out when the voltages are supplied by a2 VT assembly with the VT primary circuits connected between phases of the distributed voltage which means that the residual voltage is obtained outside Sepam by 3 VTs connected via their secondary circuits in an open delta arrangement or when applicable is not used for the protection function L1 S a AILS IT11200 current test terminal box single phase generator PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Checking of phase current and voltage input connection With single phase generator and voltages delivered by 2 VTs Procedure 1 Connect the single phase voltage and current generator to the corresponding test terminal boxes using the plugs provided according to
36. 7 E a Active reactive and apparent power P Q S E a Peak demand power PM QM power factor Calculated active and reactive energy W h var h Active and reactive energy by pulse counting W h tvar h o o E o o o o mi o o Temperature o o Oo o o Network and machine diagnosis Tripping context E a a E Tripping current Tripl1 Tripl2 Tripl3 TriplO a a E Unbalance ratio negative sequence current li Peak demand negative sequence and positive sequence current ratio Phase displacement 90 1 92 3 u Disturbance recording u Fault locator 21FL E E E Thermal capacity used E E a Remaining operating time before overload tripping E m Waiting time after overload tripping Running hours counter operating time Starting current and time Start inhibit time number of starts before inhibition Switchgear diagnosis Cumulative breaking current a u B a Trip circuit supervision Oo o Oo Oo Oo o o o o o Number of operations operating time charging time o o o o Oo o o o o o CT VT supervision 60FL Additional modules 8 temperature sensor inputs MET148 2 module 2 o o o o o 1 low level analog output MSA141 module o o o o o o o o o o Logic inputs outputs MES114 MES114E MES114F module 101 40 Oo Oo o o o o o o o
37. Characteristics cont d PRI surge arrester Electrical characteristics Nominal operating voltage 48 VDC Maximum discharge current 10 KA 8 20 us wave Nominal discharge current 5 kA 8 20 us wave Protection level 70V Response time ins Connection With cage terminals Cables with cross section 2 5 to 4 mm AWG 12 10 Description Setting the RS 485 network parameters The network polarization and line impedance matching resistors and type of 2 wire 4 wire RS 485 network are selected by means of the RS 485 parameter setting selector switches These selector switches are configured by default for a 2 wire RS 485 network with network polarization and line impedance matching resistors Network line impedance matching SW1 sw2 sw3 SW4 SW5 SW6 with resistor 2 wire RS 485 OFF ON 4 wire RS 485 ON ON Network polarization Sw1 sw2 sw3 SW4 SW5 SW6 at the 0 V ON at the 5 V ON Selecting the RS 485 network swi SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 2 wire network ON ON 4 wire network OFF OFF Setting the Ethernet link parameters The TCSEAK0100 configuration kit can be used to connect a PC to the EC1850 to set the Ethernet link parameters 263 Electric Schneider Installation CAUTION RISK OF DESTRUCTION OF THE ECI850 m Connect the PRI surge arrester in accordance with the wiring diagrams below m Check the quality of the earth connected to the surge arrest
38. Global action CLPU 50 51 Setting Blocking Multiplication of the set point Action on ANSI 50 51 protection unit x Setting OFF ON Time delay T x for ANSI 50 51 protection unit x Resolution setting 100 to 999 ms in 1 ms steps 1 to 999 s in 1 s steps 1 to 999 min in 1 min steps Accuracy 2 or 20 ms Multiplying factor M x for ANSI 50 51 protection unit x Setting 100 to 999 Is Resolution 1 Is Schneider 75 Electric Protection functions 76 Schneider DE80265 Breaker failure ANSI code 50BF Operation This function is designed to detect the failure of breakers that do not open when a tripping order is sent The breaker failure protection function is activated by an O1 output tripping order received from the overcurrent protection functions 50 51 50N 51N 46 67N 67 It checks for the disappearance of current during the time interval specified by the time delay T It may also take into account the position of the circuit breaker read on the logic inputs to determine the actual opening of the breaker Wiring a volt free closed circuit breaker position contact on the breaker closed equation editor input can ensure that the protection is effective in the following situations m When 50BF is activated by protection function 50N 51N set point IsO lt 0 2 In detection of the 50BF current set point can possibly be not operational m When trip circuit supervision TCS is used the closed circuit breaker contact is
39. P79_1_113 125 m life line mode example 2 The user wishes to inhibit protection functions 50N 51N and 46 by an input 124 P50N 51N_1_113 124 P46_1_113 124 m validation of a 50N 51N protection function by logic input 121 An 50N 51N protection function set with a very low set point must only trigger tripping of the circuit breaker if it is validated by an input The input comes from a relay which accurately measures the current in the neutral point V_TRIPCB P50N 51N_1_3 AND 121 m inhibition of circuit breaker closing if thermal alarm set points are overrun The temperature protection function 38 49T supplies 16 alarm bits If one of the first three bits is activated the user wishes to inhibit circuit breaker closing V_INHIBCLOSE P38 49T_1_10 OR P38 49T_2_10 OR P38 49T_3_10 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Control and monitoring functions PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Self tests and fail safe position Presentation The reliability of a device is the property that allows its users to have well placed confidence in the service it delivers For a Sepam protection relay operational reliability consists of ensuring the safety and availability of the installation This means avoiding the following 2 situations m Nuisance tripping of the protection Continuity of the electrical power supply is as vital for a manufacturer as it is for an electricity distribution company Nuisance tripping caused by the protection can result in considerabl
40. RDRE1 RcdTrg ctlVal Schneider 125 G Electric Control and monitoring Switching of groups of settings functions Description There are two groups of settings group A group B for the phase overcurrent earth fault and directional phase overcurrent and directional earth fault protection functions Switching from one group of settings to another makes it possible to adapt the protection characteristics to suit the electrical environment of the application change of earthing system transition to local production The switching of settings is global and therefore applies to all the units of the protection functions mentioned above The setting switching mode is determined by parameter setting m switching according to the position of logic input 113 0 group A 1 group B m switching by remote control TC3 TC4 m forced group A or group B Block diagram Group A forced DE50487 Choice via input 113 Input 113 Choice via remote control Group A TC3 Group B TC4 Group B forced Choice via input 113 Input 113 Choice via remote control Group B TC4 Group A TC3 TS TC equivalence for each protocol Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870 5 103 IEC 61850 TC Binary Output ASDU FUN INF LN DO DA TC3 BO8 20 160 23 LLNO SGCB SetActiveSettingGroup TC4 Bog 20 160 24 LLNO SGCB SetActiveSettingGroup 126 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Local indication ANSI code 30
41. Reserved Schneider 180 Modbus communication 190 Schneider G Electric Access to remote settings ANSI 67 Directional phase overcurrent Function number 21xx relay 1 xx 01 relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity O 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Group A direction 0 line 1 busbar 7 Group A characteristic angle 0 30 angle 1 45 angle 2 60 angle 8 Group A tripping logic 0 one out of three 1 two out of three 9 Group A tripping curve 10 Group A Is set point 0 1A 11 Group A tripping time delay 10 ms 12 Group A timer hold curve 13 Group A timer hold delay 10 ms 14 Reserved 15 Reserved 16 Reserved 17 Reserved 18 Group B direction 0 line 1 busbar 19 Group B characteristic angle 0 30 angle 1 45 angle 2 60 angle 20 Group B tripping logic 0 10n3 1 20n3 21 Group B tripping curve 22 Group B Is set point 0 1 A 23 Group B tripping time delay 10 ms 24 Group B timer hold curve O 25 Group B timer hold delay 10 ms 26 Reserved 27 Reserved 28 Reserved 29 Reserved PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Modbus communication PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Access to remote settings ANSI 67N 67NC Directional earth fault Function number 22xx relay 1 xx 01 relay 2 xx 02
42. Uns V3 5 Unp to 80 Unp if Vnso Uns 3 Accuracy 0 2 or 0 002 Unp Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 97 1 or gt 1 0 001 Unp Vs0 x 100 Temporisation T Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic times Operation time pick up lt 35 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 40 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 Vnso is one of the general settings PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 85 Electric Protection functions Starts per hour ANSI code 66 Operation This function is three phase It picks up when the number of starts reaches the following limits m maximum number of starts Nt allowed per period of time P m maximum allowed number of consecutive hot starts Nh m maximum allowed number of consecutive cold starts Nc Starting is detected when the current consumed becomes greater than 10 of the Ib current The number of consecutive starts is the number starts counted during the last P Nt minutes Nt being the number of starts allowed per period The motor hot state corresponds to the overshooting of the fixed set point 50 heat rise of the thermal overload function When the motor re accelerates it undergoes a stress similar to that of starting without the current first passing through a value less than 10 of Ib in which case the number of starts is not incremented It is possible however to increment the
43. m NEVER work alone m Check that the temperature sensors are isolated from dangerous voltages Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury MET148 2 Connection of the earthing terminal By tinned copper braid with cross section 2 6 mm AWG 10 or cable with 4 cross section 2 2 5 mm AWG 12 and length lt 200 mm 7 9 in fitted with a na H 3 4 mm 0 16 in ring lug Check the tightness maximum tightening torque 2 2 Nm or 19 5 Ib in Connection of RTDs to screw type connectors m 1 wire with cross section 0 2 to 2 5 mm AWG 24 12 N 6 m or 2 wires with cross section 0 2 to 1 mm AWG 24 18 Recommended cross sections according to distance m Up to 100 m 330 ft gt 1 mm AWG 18 N 5 N 2 a a ech a oa 18 a Upto 300 m 990 ft gt 1 5 mm AWG 16 N 3 9 N 7 m Upto 1 km 0 62 mi gt 2 5 mm AWG 12 Maximum distance between sensor and module 1 km 0 62 mi 10N 10 Wiring precautions N 9 m 1 N 8 m It is preferable to use shielded cables SS Sy The use of unshielded cables can cause measurement errors which vary in degree according to the level of surrounding electromagnetic disturbance m Only connect the shielding at the MET148 2 end in the shortest manner possible to the corresponding terminals of connectors and
44. m Start by connecting the device to the protective ground and to the functional ground m Screw tight all terminals even those not in use Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Wiring of connectors CCA620 and CCA626 m Without fitting o 1 wire with maximum cross section of 0 2 to 2 5 mm gt AWG 24 12 or 2 wires with maximum cross section of 0 2 to 1 mm 2 AWG 24 16 O Stripped length 8 to 10 mm 0 31 to 0 39 in m With fitting o Recommended wiring with Telemecanique fitting DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1 5 mm AWG 16 DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2 5 mm AWG 12 AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mm AWG 18 O Tube length 8 2 mm 0 32 in O Stripped length 8 mm 0 31 in Wiring of connectors CCA622 and CCA627 m Ring or spade lug 6 35 mm 1 4 m Wire with maximum cross section 0 2 to 2 5 mm AWG 24 12 m Stripped length 6 mm 0 236 in m Use an appropriate tool to crimp the lugs onto the wires m 2 ring or spade lugs maximum per terminal m Tightening torque 0 7 to 1 Nem 6 to 9 Ib in Characteristics of the 4 base unit relay outputs O1 O2 03 04 m O1 and O2 are 2 control outputs used by the breaking device control function for o O1 breaking device tripping o O2 breaking device closing inhibition m O3 is anon assigned control output m O4 is a non assigned indication output It can be assigned to the watchdog function Schneider 209 Electric DE52287 Insta
45. to go back to the previous screen m gt to go to the next screen The screens are linked up in the following order Sepam hardware configuration General characteristics CT VT supervision Program logic Password Setting screens for the protection functions available according to the type of Sepam 7 Logical equation editor 8 Various tabs of the control matrix 9 Disturbance recording setup oOonhwnd On line help The operator may look up on line help at any time via the command in the menu bar To use the on line help a browser such as Netscape Navigator or Internet Explorer MS is required PCRED301006EN 03 2011 SFT2841 setting and operating software General screen organization A BE SFT2841 Sepam 1000 serie 40 Connection window fil File Edt Operation Sepam Application Options Window 2 lt SH Sigh 20m ALT ASAE Sepam hardware configuration General characteristics CT VT Supervision Program logic Password 18 x MT11192 Hardware configuration Sepam model MX model without fixed advanced UMI MD model with fixed advanced UMI Zs Application type Sepam label Optional modules IV MES Input output module MES108 41 40 module MES114 101 40 module IF MET148 8 temperature sensor module number 1 IF MET148 8 temperature sensor module number 2 TF MSA141 1 analog output module IF DSM303 Front panel UMI module I ACE
46. 1 0 015 In Is x 100 m definite time timer hold for all the tripping curves Setting 30 45 60 Accuracy 2 gt Is time delayed output Tripping direction Setting Busbar line Tripping logic lol Setting One out of three two out of three l gt Is pick up signal l Tripping curve Setting Definite time E IDMT chosen according to list page 89 Li Vl I I Is set point id rl l l l l Setting Definite time 0 1 In lt Is lt 24 In expressed in Amps a MS tripping IDMT 0 1 In lt Is lt 2 4 In expressed in Amps value of internal I Resolution 1 Aor 1 digit time delay l Accuracy 5 or 0 01 In Li Li Setting Definite time inst 50 ms lt T lt 300 s IDMT 100 ms lt T lt 12 5 s or TMS Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy 0 Definite time t gt 100 ms 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms IDMT Class 5 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Timer hold delay T1 Definite time timer hold 0 0 05 to 300 s IDMT 0 5to 20s Characteristic times Operation time pick up lt 75 ms to 2 Is typically 65 ms inst lt 90 ms to 2 Is confirmed instantaneous typically 75 ms Overshoot time lt 40 ms Reset time lt 50 ms for T1 0 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 Setting ranges in TMS Time Multiplier Setting mode m Inverse SIT and IEC SIT A 0 04 to 4 20 IEEE moderately inverse 0 42 to 51 86 IEEE very inverse 0 73 to 90 57 IEEE extremely inverse 1
47. 1 Jumper for impedance matching with load resistor Rc to be set to m X lt if the module is not the last interlinked module default position m Rc if the module is the last interlinked module 2 Micro switches to set the analog output type Micro switches Position Output type low default position 0 20 mA 1 2 4 20 mA 0 10 mA high 0 1 mA 1 2 Output Setting The analog output type is configured in 2 steps 1 Hardware setting set the 2 micro switches m on low position for a 0 20 mA 4 20 mA or 0 10 mA output type m on high position for a 0 1 mA output type 2 Software configuration select the desired output type in the SFT2841 setting software Analog output module MSA141 setting window and validate by pressing the OK button Note The 0 1 mA output works only if the 0 20 mA or 0 1 mA depending on switch output type has been set in the SFT2841 setting software step 2 Connection Connection of the earthing terminal By tinned copper braid with cross section gt 6 mm AWG 10 or cable with cross section 2 2 5 mm AWG 12 and length lt 200 mm 7 9 in equipped with a 4 mm 0 16 in ring lug Check the tightness maximum tightening torque 2 2 Nm or 19 5 Ib in Connection of analog output to screw type connector m 1 wire with cross section 0 2 to 2 5 mm AWG 24 12 m or 2 wires with cross section 0 2 to 1 mm AWG 24 18 Wiring precautions m Itis preferable to use shielded cables
48. 1 stop bit If a no parity configuration is selected each character will contain 10 bits 1 start bit 8 data bits 1 stop bit The configuration parameters for the physical layer of the Modbus port are m slave number Sepam address m transmission speed m parity check type Parameters Sepam address Authorized values Default value 1 to 247 1 Speed 4800 9600 19200 or 19200 bauds 38400 bauds Parity None Even or Odd Even Configuring the ACE969FO 2 fiber optic port The configuration for the physical layer of the ACE969FO 2 fiber optic port is completed with the following 2 parameters m Link idle state light on or light off m Echo mode with or without Fiber optic parameters Link idle state Echo mode Authorized values Default value Light Off or Light On Light Off Yes fiber optic ring No or No fiber optic star Note in echo mode the Modbus master will receive the echo of its own request before the slave s reply The Modbus master must be able to disregard this echo Otherwise it is impossible to create a Modbus fiber optic ring PCRED301006EN 03 2011 PE50621 PE50622 Modbus communication Modbus parameters Cancel Direct C Select Before Operate SFT2841 Modbus advanced parameters window Communication configuration Communication interface g m S LAN port Communication protocol Sepam address Speed Parity C Light On Light Off r
49. 2 e Pln a na 126 10 s 8 o2 ARG 12549 o o Is 124 lt 8 5 8 8 Dis 123447 ol 191 o 122446 7 o 5 s j2 I o 4 D n2 4 o oji o o 2 2 7 a o pli Dm eth es i l i q 208 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE51131 Installation CAUTION LOSS OF PROTECTION OR RISK OF NUISANCE TRIPPING If the Sepam is no longer supplied with power or is in fail safe position the protection functions are no longer active and all the Sepam output relays are dropped out Check that this operating mode and the watchdog relay wiring are compatible with your installation Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage and unwanted shutdown of the electrical installation PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Base unit Connection Connection of the base unit The Sepam connections are made to the removable connectors located on the rear panel All the connectors are screw lockable A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions m NEVER work alone m Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding m Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that allpower is off
50. 66 gt 1 SF6 pressure drop 02 Inhibit restart 49 RMS Inhibit closing Inhibit closing shunt undervoltage logic input V_INHIBCLOSE Protection functions h r logic equations configured for breaker controlled tripping 27 27D 32P 32Q 37 38 49T 46 47 51 51N 51V 48 51LR 49 RMS 59 59N 67 67N 81L H end of charging position circuit charged TS130 OX Sa en a Tripping due Buchholz tripping T 200ms to protection Pressure tripping o1 Thermostat tripping 0 T Tripping shunt undervoltage Thermistor tripping External tripping 1 External tripping 2 External tripping 3 SSL tripping logic discrimination open order Manual opening logic input Open order sent by recloser V_TRIPCB logic equations TC2 remote closer order inhibit remote control Close order sent by recloser breaker closed T 200 ms Close order WV _ Ro breaker closed O V_CLOSECB logic equations Manual closing logic input 1 The close order is only available when the MES1 14 option is included Monitoring Modbus S LAN communication Description TC1 open order The Monitoring Modbus S LAN communication function is used to trip the circuit SIE ry breaker in the event of loss of communication with the Modbus master gt 1 Open order This function is inhibited by default It is activated
51. Combo box m the user must Apply or Cancel the new values entered before going on to the following screen m the consistency of the new values applied is checked o an explicit message identifies inconsistent values and specifies the authorized values o values that have become inconsistent following a parameter modification are adjusted to the closest consistent value a Schneider SFT2841 setting and operating software Use of the software Connected to Sepam mode Precaution When a laptop is used given the risks inherent to the accumulation of static electricity the customary precaution consists of discharging in contact with an earthed metal frame before physically connecting the CCA783 cord Note If you are unable to connect to Sepam check that the SFT2841 software version used is actually compatible with your Sepam see Compatibility of Sepam version SFT2841 version page 303 Plugging into Sepam m plugging of the 9 pin connector SUB D type into one of the PC communication ports Configuration of the PC communication port via the Communication port function in the Options menu m plugging of the 6 pin connector into the connector round minidin type situated behind the blanking plate on the front panel of Sepam or the DSM303 module Connection to Sepam 2 possibilities for setting up the connection between SFT2841 and Sepam m Connection function in the File menu m choice of connect to the Sepam
52. Commissioning PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Testing and metering equipment required Generators m dual sinusoidal AC current and voltage generator O 50 or 60 Hz frequency according to the country O current adjustable up to at least 5 Arms o adjustable up to the rated secondary phase to phase voltage of the VTs o adjustable relative phase displacement V I o three phase or single phase type m DC voltage generator o adjustable from 48 to 250 V DC for adaptation to the voltage level of the logic input being tested Accessories m plug with cord to match the current test terminal box installed m plug with cord to match the voltage test terminal box installed m electric cord with clamps wire grip or touch probes Metering devices built into the generator or separate m 1 ammeter 0 to5 Arms m 1 voltmeter 0 to 230 V rms m 1 phasemeter if phase displacement V is not identified on the voltage and current generator Computer equipment m PC with minimal configuration O Microsoft Windows XP or Vista O 400 MHz Pentium processor o 64 MB of RAM O 200 MB free on hard disk o CD ROM drive m SFT2841 software m CCA783 serial connection or CCA784 USB cord between the PC and Sepam Documents m complete connection diagram of Sepam and additional modules with phase current input connection to the corresponding CTs via the test terminal box residual current input connection phase voltage input connection to t
53. Control and monitoring functions Events may be indicated on the front panel of Sepam by m appearance of a message on the display of the advanced UMI m lighting up of one of the 9 yellow signal lamps Message type indication Predefined messages All the messages connected to the standard Sepam functions are predefined and available in two language versions m in English factory messages not modifiable m in the local language according to the version delivered The language version is chosen at the time of Sepam parameter setting The messages are visible on the display units of Sepams equipped with the advanced UMI and in the SFT2841 Alarms screen The predefined messages are identified by a number on the SFT2841 software screens m The number and type of predefined messages depend on the type of Sepam The table below gives the complete list of all predefined messages List of messages Functions English factory Local language e g French Message number Phase overcurrent PHASE FAULT 2 DEFAUT PHASE 2 1 Voltage restrained phase overcurrent O C V RESTRAINT DEF PHASE RET U 2 50 Earth fault EARTH FAULT DEFAUT TERRE 2 Breaker failure BREAKER FAILURE DEF DISJONCT 40 Negative sequence unbalance UNBALANCE DESEQUILIBRE 5 Broken conductor detection BROKEN CONDUCT RUPTURE COND 52 Direc
54. DNP3 or IEC 60870 5 103 59724 ACE969FO 2 fiber optic multi protocol interface Modbus DNP3 or IEC 60870 5 103 59726 CD SFT850 CD ROM with IEC 61850 configuration software 59751 CCA614 ACE850 communication interface connection cord L 3m 9 8 ft 59754 TCP IP firmware option mandatory for using ACE850 multi protocol communication interfaces with Sepam series 40 Sepam series 60 and Sepam series 80 59780 Substation application type S50 59781 Substation application type S51 59782 Substation application type S52 59783 Substation application type S53 59784 Transformer application type T50 59785 Transformer application type T52 59786 Substation application type S54 1 Reference 59720 ACE969TP cancelled and replaced by 59723 reference 59721 ACE969FO cancelled and replaced by 59724 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 205 Electric DE80030 DE80029 Installation A 222 8 8 Y 6 92 Front view of Sepam 4 CAUTION HAZARD OF CUTS Trim the edges of the cut out plates to remove any jagged edges Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury AMT840 mounting plate Schneider 206 Electric DE80114 DE80028 DE80082 Base unit Dimensions Dimensions mm in g
55. EXT TRIP x 1 to 3 DECLT EXT x 1 3 33 34 35 Trip circuit supervision TRIP CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DECLT 20 Circuit breaker control CONTROL FAULT DEFAUT COMPE 21 Recloser CYCLE x 1 to 4 4 CYCLE x 1 4 4 28 29 30 31 Recloser FINAL TRIP DECL DEFINITIF 41 Recloser CLEARED FAULT DEFAUT ELIMINE 19 SF6 SF6 LOW BAISSE SF6 43 Phase VT supervision VT FAULT DEFAUT TP 48 VO VT supervision VT FAULT VO DEFAUT TP VO 49 CT supervision CT FAULT DEFAUT TC 47 1 RTD FAULT message refer to the maintenance chapter 2 With indication of the faulty phase 3 With indication of the faulty phase when used with phase to neutral voltage 4 With indication of the protection unit that has initiated the cycle phase fault earth fault etc PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 127 Electric MT11188 DE51148 Control and monitoring functions SFT2841 Sepam 1000 serie 40 Connection window E Ele Edt Operation Sepam Appicaion Options Window 2 DEHS Ur HR AL AeAS WS Characteristics Outputs Indicators Events Faut recoding jenen ya 5051 1 x DENE 5051 2 x 9081 3 HE x Ike 5051 4 x SON SIN 1 x m Equations SON SIN 2 x SONASIN 3 x SON SIN 4 EARTH FAULT _JOEFAUT TERRE FF 506F 46 1 x 42 x Ei EI u es De BE TE Connected 161648 2 A i 3 5 s Assign U Co e SENCIA DEE E s EEG o CE TEN o UNDE
56. Es0 initial heat rise 0 to 100 0 to 100 Resolution 1 1 Time constants Setting T1 running heat rise 1 mn to 600 mn 1 mn to 600 mn T2 stopped cooling 5 mn to 600 mn 5 mn to 600 mn Resolution 1mn 1mn Accounting for negative sequence component Setting K 0 2 25 45 9 Maximum equipment temperature according to insulation class 2 settings and each group is suitable for equipment Setting Tmax 60 a 200 protection in one of the two operating rates Resolution 1 The equipment s basis current used to calculate heat Tripping time rise also depends on the operating rate Accuracy 42 or1s m with rate 1 the basis current Ib defined as a general RMS current measurement Sepam parameter is used to calculate the heat rise in Accuracy 5 the equipment Change of operating rate m with rate 2 the basis current Ib rate 2 a specific By current threshold Is Setting 0 25 to 8 Ib thermal overload protection setting is used to calculate By logic input Switching of thermal settings the heat rise in the equipment Basis current for thermal operating rate 2 Setting 0 2 to 2 6 In Use of learnt cooling time constant T2 Setting Yes no 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Block di agram 2 Equipment manufacturer data logic input switching of thermal settings selection of parameter group ph 1 calculation heat rise of equivalent alarm inverse current indication ambient
57. Phase 1 fault 7 m Phase 2 fault 8 m 1 Phase 3 fault 9 m Alarm 10 E E Inhibit closing 11 RTD fault 12 Locked rotor 13 Excessive starting time 14 Locked rotor at startup 15 Protection inhibited 16 m 7 Hot state 18 Positive active power 19 Negative active power 20 Instantaneous output at 0 8 Is 21 Starting in progress 22 Recloser in service 201 Recloser ready 202 Reclosing successful 203 Permanent trip 204 Reclosing cycle 1 211 Reclosing cycle 2 212 Reclosing cycle 3 213 Reclosing cycle 4 214 Inputs Reset 101 7 7 7 7 VT fault 103 Start 50BF 107 Inhibition 113 Closed circuit breaker 119 Downstream load start up 120 1 When the protection is used with phase to neutral voltage 12 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Control and monitoring Logic equations functions Table of protection function input and output variables continued Outputs Instantaneous output pick up 1 u Protection output time delayed 3 Drop out 4 7 u 7 E Instantaneous output inverse 6 a u zone Phase 1 fault 7 a 1 Phase 2 fault 8 a 1 Phase 3 fault 9 7 E m 1 Alarm 10 Inhibit closing 11 RTD fault 12 Locked rotor 13 Excessive starting time 14 Locked rotor at startup 15 Protection inhibited 16 a
58. Phase overcurrent ANSI code 50 51 The Is setting corresponds to the vertical asymptote of the curve and T is the operation time delay for 10 Is The tripping time for I Is values less than 1 2 depends on the type of curve chosen Curve description Type Standard inverse time SIT 1 2 Very inverse time VIT or LTI 1 2 Extremely inverse time EIT 1 2 Ultra inverse time UIT 1 2 RI curve IEC standard inverse time SIT A IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B IEC extremely inverse time EIT C IEEE moderately inverse IEC D IEEE very inverse IEC E IEEE extremely inverse IEC F IAC inverse IAC very inverse IAC extremely inverse 1 The curve equations are given in the chapter entitled IDMT protection functions i 1 i 4 I 1 4 The function takes into account current variations during the time delay interval For currents with a very large amplitude the protection function has a definite time characteristic m if gt 20 Is tripping time is the time that corresponds to 20 Is m if gt 40 In tripping time is the time that corresponds to 40 In In rated current transformer current defined when entering the general settings Block diagram pick up signal and to logic discrimination time delayed output I lt Iscmin 2 H2 restraint PCRED301006EN 03 2011 MT10541 MT10527 Protection functions Timer hold delay The function includes an adjustable tim
59. Standard inverse time SIT 1 2 Very inverse time VIT or LTI 1 2 Extremely inverse time EIT 1 2 Ultra inverse time UIT 1 2 RI curve 1 IEC standard inverse time SIT A 1 IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B 1 IEC extremely inverse time EIT C 1 IEEE moderately inverse IEC D 1 IEEE very inverse IEC E 1 IEEE extremely inverse IEC F 1 IAC inverse 1 IAC very inverse 1 IAC extremely inverse 1 The curve equations are given in the chapter entitled IDMT protection functions The function takes into account current variations during the time delay interval For currents with a very large amplitude the protection function has a definite time characteristic m if gt 20 Is tripping time is the time that corresponds to 20 Is m if gt 40 In tripping time is the time that corresponds to 40 In In current transformer rated current defined when the general settings are made Schneider 89 Electric Protection functions Directional phase overcurrent ANSI code 67 Timer hold delay Characteristics The function includes an adjustable timer hold delay T4 Characteristic angle 6 MT 10541 MT10527 counter Ti e a m IDMT for IEC IEEE and IAC curves gt Is time delayed output I time delay counter L value of internal m Schneider Drop out pick up ratio Time delay T operation time at 10 Is 93 5 5 or gt
60. Y B 40 Mounting IN 1 58 A 196 22 7 71 8 40 1 58 Sepam with advanced UMI and MES114 1 flush mounted in front panel 40 98 gt 31 1 58 3 86 1 22 1 With basic UMI 23 mm 0 91 in Sepam with advanced UMI and MES114 flush mounted in front panel a Clearance for Sepam assembly and wiring Cut out Cut out accuracy must be complied with to ensure good withstand For mounting plate between 1 5 mm For mounting plate 0 059 in and 3 mm 0 12 in thick 3 17 mm 0 125 inch thick mm m in DE80044 a 2 162 02 0 08 6 38 6 38 Assembly with AMT840 mounting plate Used to mount Sepam with basic UMI at the back of the compartment with access to the connectors on the rear panel Mounting associated with the use of the remote advanced UMI DSM303 Sepam with basic UMI and MES114 mounted with AMT840 plate Mounting plate thickness 2 mm 0 079 in PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Installation A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions m NEVER work alone m Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding m Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off Failur
61. automatically when the situation returns to normal i e as soon as m the cause of the fault has disappeared m and all of the measured voltages are present Use of circuit breaker closed information The circuit breaker closed information is used to detect the loss of one two or three voltages if it is connected to a logic input If the circuit breaker closed information is not connected to a logic input the detection of VT faults due to the loss of one two or three voltages is not determined by the position of the circuit breaker Block diagram circuit breaker closed logic input Partial loss of phase voltages amp Loss of all phase voltages max voltages measured lt 10 Unp max 11 12 13 gt 10 In circuit breaker closed logic input phase VT fuse melting logic input logic equation phase voltage R fault and VT fault message min voltages measured gt 40 Unp Detection of phase voltage fault phase voltage fault DE50448 VO calculated by sum VO VT fuse melting mi Detection of residual voltage fault I residual voltage fault VO VT fault message Schneider 43 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 G Electric Switchgear diagnosis VT supervision functions ANSI code 60FL Consequences of a VT fault on protection functions A Phase voltage fault affects the following protection functions m 27 278 27D 32P 32
62. empty string Read only SNMP community that has read only String lt 16 characters Community Name access to the MIB Acts as a password Default public Read write SNMP community that has read write String lt 16 characters Community Name access to the MIB Acts as a password Default private Enable traps Checking this check box enables SNMP to Default not checked send traps Traps SNMP community that is used with traps String lt 16 characters Community Name Default public Manager 1 IP IP address of the SNMP manager to which 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 address traps are sent Default 0 0 0 0 Manager 2 IP IP address of a second SNMP manager to 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 address which traps are sent Default 0 0 0 0 SNTP configuration SNTP is a time synchronization protocol that can be used to synchronize the Sepam SNTP is used in mode 3 4 unicast mode m If SNTP is used the synchronization source for Sepam must be defined as Ethernet m f SNTP is not used the Sepam synchronization must be ensured by other means Modbus frames synchronization tops Parameters Description Authorized values Enable SNTP Enables the time and date of the Sepamto Default not enabled be set by the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP server Time Zone Offset Determines the difference between local UTC 12 to UTC 14 time and Coordinated Universal Time UTC same as GMT Default UTC
63. for the list of protection functions F01 to F99 m the unit number field is used as follows for protection functions it indicates the unit involved varying from 1 to N N being the maximum number of units available in the Sepam It may never be equal to 0 Exception reply In addition to the usual cases le Sepam can send type 07 exception replies not acknowledged if m another remote reading or setting request is being processed m the remote setting function is inhibited Electric Schneider 179 Modbus communication Access to remote settings Reply frame The reply sent back by Sepam is the same as the remote reading reply frame It fits into a zone with a maximum length of 125 words at the address 1E00h or 2000h and is composed of the effective settings of the function following a semantic check 1E00h 1E7Ch 2000h 207Ch B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 BO9 B08 B07 B06 BO5 B04 BOS BO2 BO1 BOO Function code Unit number This zone is read by a read n words operation function 3 at the address 1E00h or 2000h The length of the exchange may concern m first word only validity test m maximum size of the zone 125 words m usable size of the zone determined by the function being addressed However reading must always begin at the first word in the zone any other address triggers an exception reply incorrect address Th
64. m Do not connect the shielding at the RTD end Accuracy derating according to wiring The error At is proportional to the length ofthe cable and inversely proportional to the cable cross section At C 2x Lkm S mm m 2 1 C km for 0 93 mm cross section AWG 18 m 1 C km for 1 92 mm cross section AWG 14 Electric PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 235 PE80748 Installation MSA141 analog output module 236 Seeder MSA141 MSA141 Analog output module Function The MSA141 module converts one of the Sepam measurements into an analog signal m Selection of the measurement to be converted by parameter setting m 0 1 mA 0 10 mA 4 20 mA 0 20 mA analog signal according to parameter setting m Scaling of the analog signal by setting minimum and maximum values of the converted measurement Example the setting used to have phase current 1 as a 0 10 mA analog output with a dynamic range of 0 to 300 A is O minimum value 0 o maximum value 3000 m A single module for each Sepam base unit to be connected by one of the CCA770 0 6m or 2 ft CCA772 2m or 6 6 ft or CCA774 4m or 13 1 ft cords The analog output can also be remotely managed via the communication network Characteristics MSA141 module Weight 0 2 kg 0 441 Ib Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail Operating temperature Environmental characteristics Analog output Current 4 20 mA 0 20 mA 0 10 mA 0 1 mA Scaling Minimum val
65. m The E LAN Engineering Local Area Network port reserved for Sepam remote ACE969TP 2 communication interface parameter setting and operation using the SFT2841 software PB103454 There are two versions of the ACE969 interfaces which are identical except for the S LAN port m ACE969TP 2 Twisted Pair for connection to an S LAN network using a 2 wire RS 485 serial link m ACE969FO 2 Fiber Optic for connection to an S LAN network using a fiber optic connection star or ring The E LAN port is always a 2 wire RS 485 type port PB103453 Compatible Sepam The ACE969TP 2 and ACE969FO 2 multi protocol interfaces are compatible with the following Sepam 93093 m Sepam series 20 version gt V0526 m Sepam series 40 version gt V3 00 ACE969FO 2 communication interface m Sepam series 60 all versions m Sepam series 80 base version and application version gt V3 00 2 2 246 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Installation PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DB114880 ACE969TP 2 and ACE969FO 2 Multi protocol interfaces Characteristics ACE969TP 2 and ACE969FO 2 module Technical characteristics Weight 0 285 kg 0 628 Ib Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail Operating temperature 25 C to 70 C 13 F to 158 F Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units Power supply Voltage 24 to 250 V DC 110 to 240 V AC Range 20 10 20 10 Maximum consumption 2W 3VA Inr
66. o the Automatic search Stop search button starts or interrupts the search O when SFT2841 recognizes a Sepam unit its Modbus address and type are shown on screen o when a Modbus device other than Sepam responds to SFT2841 its Modbus address is displayed The text indicates that the device is not a Sepam The Sepam network configuration is saved in a file when the UMI window closes by pressing the OK button Access to Sepam information To establish communication between SFT2841 and a Sepam network select the Sepam network configuration you want select the device connected to the TCP IP network and press Connect The Sepam network is displayed in the connection window SFT2841 polls all the equipment defined in the selected configuration Each Sepam queried is represented by an icon Sepam series 20 or Sepam series 40 actually connected to the network a E Sepam series 60 Sepam series 80 actually connected to the network gt Sepam configured but not connected to the network Device other than Sepam connected to the network A summary report of each Sepam detected as present is also displayed m Sepam Modbus address m Type of application and Sepam identification m Any alarms present m Any minor major faults present To access parameters settings and operation and maintenance information for a particular Sepam click on the icon for that Sepam SFT2841 then establishes a point to point connection with t
67. output 50 51 Sepam output relay circuit breaker ae margin opening time overshoot time 20 ms Sepam output relay trip relay Time delay T of the 50BF protection function with 20 ms margin 4 T 10 60 20 20 110 ms lt Fault clearance time 40 110 10 10 60 230 ms 15 ms gt The time delay for the 50BF function is the sum of the following times Sepam O1 output relay pick up time 10 ms Circuit breaker opening time 60 ms Overshoot time for the breaker failure function 20 ms To avoid unwanted tripping of the upstream breakers choose a margin of approximately 20 ms This gives us a time delay T 110 ms Characteristic Is set point Setting 0 2 In to 2 In Accuracy 5 Resolution 0 1A Drop out pick up ratio 87 5 10 Time delay T Setting 0 05 s to 300s Accuracy 0 2 or from 0 ms to 15 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic time Overshoot time lt 20 ms Taking into account of circuit breaker position Setting With without 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 77 Electric Protection functions Description The earth fault protection function comprises 2 groups of four units called Group A and Group B respectively The mode of switching from one group to the other may be determined by parameter setting m by remote control TC3 TC4 m by logic input 113 113 0 group A 113 1 group B or by forci
68. short circuited Logic input 1102 is therefore no longer operational Automatic activation of this protection function requires the use of the program logic circuit breaker control function A specific input may also be used to activate the protection from the equation editor That option is useful for adding special cases of activation e g tripping by an external protection unit The time delayed output of the protection unit should be assigned to a logic output via the control matrix The starting and stopping of the time delay T counter are conditioned by the presence of a current above the set point I gt Is Block diagram activation by 50 51 50N 51N 46 67N 67 ei I gt Is breaker closed logic input T 0 21 delayed 77 output breaker closed logic equation activation from logic equation editor gt 1 pick up signal Setting a Accounting for the circuit breaker position Not accounting for the circuit breaker PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Protection functions PCRED301006EN 03 2011 MT11174 Breaker failure ANSI code 50BF Example of setting The example below shows how to determine the time delay setting for the 50BF function Overcurrent protection setting T inst Circuit breaker operating time 60 ms Auxiliary relay operating time to open the upstream breaker or breakers 10 ms fault 4 clearing of fault without breaker failure rising time
69. values per microswitch m The table of equivalencies between the microswitch settings and the selected rated current In is printed on the connector m Leave the 7 other microswitches set to 0 3 Set the other 2 blocks of switches L2 and L3 to the same position as the L1 block and close the shield Schneider 221 Electric DE51675 Installation LPCT type current sensors Test accessories Accessory connection principle A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions m NEVER work alone m Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding m Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that allpower is off Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 1 LPCT sensor equipped with a shielded cable fitted with a yellow RJ 45 plug which is plugged directly into the CCA670 CCA671 connector 2 Sepam protection unit 3 CCA670 CCA671 connector LPCT voltage interface with microswitch setting of rated current m CCA670 lateral plugs for Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 m CCA671 radial plugs for Sepam series 60 and Sepam series 80 4 CCA613 remote test plug flush mounted on the front of the cubicle and equipped with a 3 mete
70. x 100 014C R 3 4 16S 100 kvar Apparent power S x 100 014D R 3 4 16S 100 kVA Peak demand active power Pm x 100 014E R 3 4 16S 100 kW Peak demand reactive power Qm x 100 014F R 3 4 16S 100 kvar Power factor cos x 100 0150 R 3 4 16S 0 01 Positive active energy Ea x 1 0151 0152 R 3 4 2x 16NS 100 kW h Energie active n gative Ea x 1 0153 0154 R 3 4 2x 16NS 100 kW h Positive reactive energy Er x 1 0155 0156 R 3 4 2x 16NS 100 kvar h Negative reactive energy Er x 1 0157 0158 R 3 4 2x 16NS 100 kvar h Diagnosis Diagnosis Word address Access Modbus function Format Unit enabled Peak demand li Id 0159 L 3 4 16NS Last tripping current Itrip1 015A R 3 4 16NS 10A Last tripping current Itrip2 015B R 3 4 16NS 10A Last tripping current Itrip3 015C R 3 4 16NS 10A Reserved 015D Cumulative breaking current 015E R 3 4 16NS 1 kA 2 Number of operations 015F R 3 4 16NS 1 Operating time 0160 R 3 4 16NS 1ms Charging time 0161 R 3 4 16NS 0 15 Running hours counter operation time 0162 R 3 4 16NS th Reserved 0163 Thermal capacity used 0164 R 3 4 16NS Time before tripping 0165 R 3 4 16NS 1 min Time before closing 0166 R 3 4 16NS 1 min Negative sequence unbalance 0167 R 3 4 16NS b Starting time overload 0168 R 3 4 16NS 0 18 Starting current overload 0169 R 3 4 16NS 1A Start inhibit time delay 016A R 3 4 16NS 1 min Number of starts allowed 016B R 3 4 16NS 1 Temperatures 1 to 16 016C 017B R 3 4 16S 1 C 1 F Externa
71. 0 0134 0 0115 0 0100 0 0088 0 0077 0 0069 0 0062 0 0056 0 0035 0 0025 0 0018 0 0014 160 0 0276 0 0253 0 0207 0 0173 0 0147 0 0126 0 0109 0 0096 0 0085 0 0075 0 0067 0 0061 0 0039 0 0027 0 0020 0 0015 165 0 0299 0 0275 0 0225 0 0187 0 0159 0 0136 0 0118 0 0104 0 0092 0 0082 0 0073 0 0066 0 0042 0 0029 0 0021 0 0016 170 0 0323 0 0296 0 0242 0 0202 0 0171 0 0147 0 0128 0 0112 0 0099 0 0088 0 0079 0 0071 0 0045 0 0031 0 0023 0 0018 175 0 0346 0 0317 0 0260 0 0217 0 0183 0 0157 0 0137 0 0120 0 0106 0 0094 0 0084 0 0076 0 0048 0 0034 0 0025 0 0019 180 0 0370 0 0339 0 0277 0 0231 0 0196 0 0168 0 0146 0 0128 0 0113 0 0101 0 0090 0 0081 0 0052 0 0036 0 0026 0 0020 185 0 0393 0 0361 0 0295 0 0246 0 0208 0 0179 0 0155 0 0136 0 0120 0 0107 0 0096 0 0086 0 0055 0 0038 0 0028 0 0021 190 0 0417 0 0382 0 0313 0 0261 0 0221 0 0189 0 0164 0 0144 0 0127 0 0113 0 0101 0 0091 0 0058 0 0040 0 0030 0 0023 195 0 0441 0 0404 0 0330 0 0275 0 0233 0 0200 0 0173 0 0152 0 0134 0 0119 0 0107 0 0096 0 0061 0 0043 0 0031 0 0024 200 0 0464 0 0426 0 0348 0 0290 0 0245 0 0211 0 0183 0 0160 0 0141 0 0126 0 0113 0 0102 0 0065 0 0045 0 0033 0 0025 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 71 Electric MT10911 MT10664 Protection functions Description The phase overcurrent function comprises 2 groups of four units called Group A and Group B respectively The mode of switching from one group to the other may be determined by parameter setting m by remote control TC3 TC4 m by logi
72. 0 0935 0 081 0 0708 0 0625 0 0555 0 0497 0 0447 0 0405 0 0368 0 0336 75 0 2474 0 2329 0 2197 0 2076 0 1684 0 1395 0 1176 0 1006 0 087 0 0761 0 0671 0 0596 0 0533 0 0480 0 0434 0 0395 0 0361 80 0 2662 0 2505 0 2362 0 2231 0 1807 0 1495 0 1260 0 1076 0 0931 0 0813 0 0717 0 0637 0 0570 0 0513 0 0464 0 0422 0 0385 85 0 2855 0 2685 0 2530 0 2389 0 1931 0 1597 0 1344 0 1148 0 0992 0 0867 0 0764 0 0678 0 0607 0 0546 0 0494 0 0449 0 0410 90 0 3051 0 2868 0 2701 0 2549 0 2057 0 1699 0 1429 0 1219 0 1054 0 092 0 0811 0 0720 0 0644 0 0579 0 0524 0 0476 0 0435 95 0 3251 0 3054 0 2875 0 2712 0 2185 0 1802 0 1514 0 1292 0 1116 0 0974 0 0858 0 0761 0 0681 0 0612 0 0554 0 0503 0 0459 100 0 3456 0 3244 0 3051 0 2877 0 2314 0 1907 0 1601 0 1365 0 1178 0 1028 0 0905 0 0803 0 0718 0 0645 0 0584 0 0530 0 0484 105 0 3664 0 3437 0 3231 0 3045 0 2445 0 2012 0 1688 0 1438 0 1241 0 1082 0 0952 0 0845 0 0755 0 0679 0 0614 0 0558 0 0509 110 0 3877 0 3634 0 3415 0 3216 0 2578 0 2119 0 1776 0 1512 0 1304 0 1136 0 1000 0 0887 0 0792 0 0712 0 0644 0 0585 0 0534 115 0 4095 0 3835 0 3602 0 3390 0 2713 0 2227 0 1865 0 1586 0 1367 0 1191 0 1048 0 0929 0 0830 0 0746 0 0674 0 0612 0 0559 120 0 4317 0 4041 0 3792 0 3567 0 2849 0 2336 0 1954 0 1661 0 1431 0 1246 0 1096 0 0972 0 0868 0 0780 0 0705 0 0640 0 0584 125 0 4545 0 4250 0 3986 0 3747 0 2988 0 2446 0 2045 0 1737 0 1495 0 1302 0 1144 0 1014 0 0905 0 0813 0 0735 0 0667 0 0609 130 0 4778 0 4465 0 4184 0 3930 0 3128 0 2558 0 2136 0 1813 0 156 0
73. 03 2011 Exception frame If an error occurs during request processing a special exception frame is sent Field Size bytes Slave number 1 171 ABh 1 Generic access exception 2Bh 80h 14 OEh 1 Read device identification 01 or 03 1 Type of error CRC16 2 Electric Schneider 197 1 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 98 G Electric Installation PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Contents Safety instructions Before starting Precautions Equipment identification Identification of the base unit Identification of accessories Sepam series 40 Base unit Dimensions Assembly Connection Connection of current input Other phase current input connection schemes Other residual current input connection schemes Connection of low voltage residual current inputs Connections of input voltage Connection of low voltage phase voltage inputs 1 A 5 A current transformers Voltage transformers LPCT type current sensors CSH120 and CSH200 Core balance CTs CSH30 interposing ring CT ACE990 Core balance CT interface MES114 modules Optional remote modules Connection MET148 2 Temperature sensor module MSA141 Analog output module DSM303 Remote advanced UMI module Communication accessory selection guide Connection of communication interfaces Connection cords Characteristics of communication networks ACE949 2 2 wire RS 485 network interface ACE959 4 wire RS 485 network interface ACE937 fiber optic
74. 1 0292 0 8923 0 7853 0 6991 0 6281 0 5686 0 5180 0 4745 0 4366 0 4035 0 3743 0 3483 0 3251 0 3043 90 2 3026 1 6946 1 3618 1 1411 0 9808 0 8580 0 7605 0 6809 0 6147 0 5587 0 5108 0 4694 0 4332 0 4013 0 3731 0 3480 0 3254 95 1 9782 1 5377 1 2670 1 0780 0 9365 0 8258 0 7366 0 6630 0 6012 0 5486 0 5032 0 4638 0 4292 0 3986 0 3714 0 3470 100 2 3755 1 7513 1 4112 1 1856 1 0217 0 8958 0 7956 0 7138 0 6455 0 5878 0 5383 0 4953 0 4578 0 4247 0 3953 0 3691 105 3 0445 2 0232 1 5796 1 3063 1 1147 0 9710 0 8583 0 7673 0 6920 0 6286 0 5746 0 5279 0 4872 0 4515 0 4199 0 3917 110 2 3979 1 7824 1 4435 1 2174 1 0524 0 9252 0 8238 0 7406 0 6712 0 6122 0 5616 0 5176 0 4790 0 4450 0 4148 115 3 0040 2 0369 1 6025 1 3318 1 1409 0 9970 0 8837 0 7918 0 7156 0 6514 0 5964 0 5489 0 5074 0 4708 0 4384 120 2 3792 1 7918 1 4610 1 2381 1 0742 0 9474 0 8457 0 7621 0 6921 0 6325 0 5812 0 5365 0 4973 0 4626 125 2 9037 2 0254 1 6094 1 3457 1 1580 1 0154 0 9027 0 8109 0 7346 0 6700 0 6146 0 5666 0 5245 0 4874 130 2 3308 1 7838 1 4663 1 2493 1 0885 0 9632 0 8622 0 7789 0 7089 0 6491 0 5975 0 5525 0 5129 135 2 7726 1 9951 1 6035 1 3499 1 1672 1 0275 0 9163 0 8253 0 7494 0 6849 0 6295 0 5813 0 5390 140 2 2634 1 7626 1 4618 1 2528 1 0962 0 9734 0 8740 0 7916 0 7220 0 6625 0 6109 0 5658 145 2 6311 1 9518 1 5877 1 3463 1 1701 1 0341 0 9252 0 8356 0 7606 0 6966 0 6414 0 5934 150 3 2189 2 1855 1 7319 1 4495 1 2498 1 0986 0 9791 0 8817 0 8007 0 7320 0 6729 0 6217 155 2 4908 1 9003 1 5645 1 3364 1 1676 1 0
75. 12 8 90 0 90 lt a2 lt 0 270 Phase 2 current I2 processing Ren 90 lt a1 lt 6 90 busbar line I gt 0 8 ls busbar line choice U21 0 90 lt a3 lt 0 90 a3 13 0 90 lt a3 lt 0 270 4 busbar line choice Phase 3 current 13 processina phase 1 time delayed g phase 2 time delayed e phase 3 time delayed phase 1 instantaneous inverse zone 3 phase 2 instantaneous inverse zone phase 3 instantaneous inverse zone amp amp eat amp Grouping of output data I gt Is I gt 0 8 Is time delayed output for tripping O inverse zone instantaneous output direction indication phase 1 inst output phase 1 time delayed output gt phase 1 inst output inverse zone phase 2 inst output T 0 phase 2 time delayed output gt phase 2 inst output inverse zone phase 3 inst output amp m phase 3 time delayed output amp k p Phase 3 inst output inverse zone phase 3 inst output 0 8 Is phase 1 instantaneous g 3 3 phase 2 instantaneous a phase 3 instantaneous pick up signal phase 1 g instantaneous 0 8 Is S phase 2 2 instantaneous 0 8 Is phase 3 instantaneous 0 8 Is inst output 0 8 Is for closed ring logic discrimination S
76. 1358 0 1193 0 1057 0 0943 0 0847 0 0766 0 0695 0 0634 135 0 5016 0 4683 0 4386 0 4117 0 3270 0 2671 0 2228 0 1890 0 1625 0 1414 0 1242 0 1100 0 0982 0 0881 0 0796 0 0723 0 0659 140 0 5260 0 4907 0 4591 0 4308 0 3414 0 2785 0 2321 0 1967 0 1691 0 147 0 1291 0 1143 0 1020 0 0916 0 0827 0 0751 0 0685 145 0 5511 0 5136 0 4802 0 4502 0 3561 0 2900 0 2414 0 2045 0 1757 0 1527 0 1340 0 1187 0 1058 0 0950 0 0858 0 0778 0 0710 150 0 5767 0 5370 0 5017 0 4700 0 3709 0 3017 0 2509 0 2124 0 1823 0 1584 0 1390 0 1230 0 1097 0 0984 0 0889 0 0806 0 0735 155 0 6031 0 5610 0 5236 0 4902 0 3860 0 3135 0 2604 0 2203 0 189 0 1641 0 1440 0 1274 0 1136 0 1019 0 0920 0 0834 0 0761 160 0 6302 0 5856 0 5461 0 5108 0 4013 0 3254 0 2701 0 2283 0 1957 0 1699 0 1490 0 1318 0 1174 0 1054 0 0951 0 0863 0 0786 165 0 6580 0 6108 0 5690 0 5319 0 4169 0 3375 0 2798 0 2363 0 2025 0 1757 0 1540 0 1362 0 1213 0 1088 0 0982 0 0891 0 0812 170 0 6866 0 6366 0 5925 0 5534 0 4327 0 3498 0 2897 0 2444 0 2094 0 1815 0 1591 0 1406 0 1253 0 1123 0 1013 0 0919 0 0838 175 0 7161 0 6631 0 6166 0 5754 0 4487 0 3621 0 2996 0 2526 0 2162 0 1874 0 1641 0 1451 0 1292 0 1158 0 1045 0 0947 0 0863 180 0 7464 0 6904 0 6413 0 5978 0 4651 0 3747 0 3096 0 2608 0 2231 0 1933 0 1693 0 1495 0 1331 0 1193 0 1076 0 0976 0 0889 185 0 7777 0 7184 0 6665 0 6208 0 4816 0 3874 0 3197 0 2691 0 2301 0 1993 0 1744 0 1540 0 1371 0 1229 0 1108 0 1004 0 0915 190 0 8100 0 7472 0 6925 0 6444 0 4985 0 4003 0 3300 0 2775 0 2371 0 2052 0 1796 0
77. 1585 0 1411 0 1264 0 1140 0 1033 0 0941 195 0 8434 0 7769 0 7191 0 6685 0 5157 0 4133 0 3403 0 2860 0 2442 0 2113 0 1847 0 1631 0 1451 0 1300 0 1171 0 1062 0 0967 200 0 8780 0 8075 0 7465 0 6931 0 5331 0 4265 0 3508 0 2945 0 2513 0 2173 0 1900 0 1676 0 1491 0 1335 0 1203 0 1090 0 0993 68 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Protection functions Cold curves for Es0 0 Thermal overload ANSI code 49 RMS Setting examples lb 480 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 10 00 1250 15 00 17 50 20 00 Es 50 0 0219 0 0202 0 0167 0 0140 0 0119 0 0103 0 0089 0 0078 0 0069 0 0062 0 0056 0 0050 0 0032 0 0022 0 0016 0 0013 55 0 0242 0 0222 0 0183 0 0154 0 0131 0 0113 0 0098 0 0086 0 0076 0 0068 0 0061 0 0055 0 0035 0 0024 0 0018 0 0014 60 0 0264 0 0243 0 0200 0 0168 0 0143 0 0123 0 0107 0 0094 0 0083 0 0074 0 0067 0 0060 0 0038 0 0027 0 0020 0 0015 65 0 0286 0 0263 0 0217 0 0182 0 0155 0 0134 0 0116 0 0102 0 0090 0 0081 0 0072 0 0065 0 0042 0 0029 0 0021 0 0016 70 0 0309 0 0284 0 0234 0 0196 0 0167 0 0144 0 0125 0 0110 0 0097 0 0087 0 0078 0 0070 0 0045 0 0031 0 0023 0 0018 75 0 0331 0 0305 0 0251 0 0211 0 0179 0 0154 0 0134 0 0118 0 0104 0 0093 0 0083 0 0075 0 0048 0 0033 0 0025 0 0019 80 0 0353 0 0325 0 0268 0 0225 0 0191 0 0165 0 0143 0 0126 0 0111 0 0099 0 0089 0 0080 0 0051 0 0036 0 0026 0 0020 85 0
78. 2 gt Vd 1 3 U21 a U32 2x U 3 J with V anda e 3 m it includes a definite time delay T m it allows drops in motor electrical torque to be detected Phase rotation direction This protection also allows the phase rotation direction to be detected The protection considers that the phase rotation direction is inverse when the positive sequence voltage is less than 10 of Unp and when the phase to phase voltage is greater than 80 of Unp Block diagram vd Vd lt Vsd gt time delayed output DE50461 pick up signal Vd lt 0 1 Un message rotation U21 or V1 Characteristics Vsd set point Setting 5 Unp to 60 Unp Accuracy 42 Pick up drop out ratio 103 42 5 Resolution 1 Time delay Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 2 or from 25 ms to 35 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic times Operating time pick up lt 55 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 35 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 52 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Protection functions Remanent undervoltage ANSI code 27R Operation This protection is single phase m it picks up when the U21 phase to phase voltage is less than the Us set point m the protection includes a definite time delay Block diagram T O U21 U lt Us time delayed output or V1 MT10875 pick up signal Characteristics Us s
79. 2100 217C R W 3 16 See Protection settings chapter Disturbance recording Word address zone 1 Fault recorder zone The fault recorder zone is an exchange tal recording records 2 zones are available to Word address zone 2 Access ble which is used to read disturbance be used by 2 masters Modbus function enabled Choice of transfer function 2200 2203 2400 2403 R W 3 16 Identification zone 2204 2228 2404 2428 R 3 Disturb rec exchange zone 2300 2500 R W 3 6 16 Disturbance recording data 2301 237C 2501 257C R 3 See Disturbance recording chapter Schneider 168 Electric PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Modbus communication PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Data addresses and encoding Use of remote indication bits Sepam provides the communication link with 144 TS The remote indications TS are pre assigned to protection and control functions which depend on the Sepam model The TSs may be read using the bit or word functions Each TS transition is time tagged and stored in the event stack see Time tagging page 173 Address word 0101 TS1 to TS16 Bit address 1010 to 101F TS Application 40 S41 S42 S43 S44 T40 T42 M40 M41 G40 50 S51 S52 S53 S54 T50 T52 1 Protection 50 51 unit 1 E E E E EEEE E E 2 Protection 50 51 unit 2 E E E E EEEE 8 E 3 Protection
80. 24 to 154 32 IAC inverse 0 34 to 42 08 IAC very inverse 0 61 to 75 75 IAC extremely inverse 1 08 to 134 4 Very inverse VIT and IEC VIT B 0 07 to 8 33 Long time inverse LTI and IEC LTI B 0 01 to 0 93 Extremely inverse EIT and IEC EIT C 0 13 to 15 47 3 Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC IEEE and IAC types TS TC equivalence for each protocol Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870 5 103 IEC 61850 TC Binary Output ASDU FUN INF LN DO DA TC3 BO08 20 160 23 LLNO SGCB SetActiveSettingGroup TC4 Boog 20 160 24 LLNO SGCB SetActiveSettingGroup PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE50454 DE50455 DE80150 Protection functions characteristic angle 004 0 Vo tripping zone Tripping characteristic of protection function 67N type 1 80 0 characteristic angle 60 0 sector Vo IsO set point tripping zone Tripping characteristic of protection function 67N type 1 80 0 V1 V2 V3 11 external VT Directional earth fault ANSI code 67N 67NC Description This function comprises 2 groups of settings with 2 units for each group The mode of switching groups of settings may be determined by parameter setting m by input 113 113 0 group A 113 1 group B m by remote control TC3 TC4 m operation with a single group group A or group B To adapt to all cases of applications and all earthing systems the protection function operat
81. 35 ms m inst lt 70 ms at 2 Is for Is lt 0 3 In typically 50 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 50 ms for T1 0 Harmonic restraint 2 Set point 5 to 50 Minimum short circuit current Isc Setting In to 999 kA 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 Setting ranges in TMS Time Multiplier Setting mode Inverse SIT and IEC SIT A 0 04 to 4 20 Very inverse VIT and IEC VIT B 0 07 to 8 33 Very inverse LTI and IEC LTI B 0 01 to 0 93 Ext inverse EIT and IEC EIT C 0 13 to 15 47 IEEE moderately inverse 0 42 to 51 86 IEEE very inverse 0 73 to 90 57 IEEE extremely inverse 1 24 to 154 32 IAC inverse 0 34 to 42 08 IAC very inverse 0 61 to 75 75 IAC extremely inverse 1 08 to 134 4 3 Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC IEEE and IAC types TS TC equivalence for each protocol Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870 5 103 IEC 61850 TC Binary Output ASDU FUN INF LN DO DA TC3 BOO08 20 160 23 LLNO SGCB SetActiveSettingGroup TC4 BO09 20 160 24 LLNO SGCB SetActiveSettingGroup Schneider 73 Electric DE80534 Protection functions Phase overcurrent Cold Load Pick Up Blocking CLPU 50 51 Description Operation The Cold Load Pick Up or CLPU 50 51 function avoids The CLPU 50 51 function starts if one of the following three conditions is fulfilled nuisance tripping of the phase overcurrent protection m a phase current is detected after all the currents have disappeared for longer than
82. 4 or 1 2 B TS129 TS144 0109 1090 R 3 4 or 1 2 B Reserved 010A 10A0 _ Logic inputs 010B 10B0 R 3 4 or 1 2 B Logic equation bits 010C 10C0 R 3 4 or 1 2 B Logic outputs 010D 10D0 R 3 4 or 1 2 B LEDs 010E 10E0 R 3 4 or 1 2 B Analog output 010F 10F0 R W 3 6 16 16S Address word 010B logic input status bit address 10B0 to 10BF Bit F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Inputs 126 125 124 123 122 121 114 113 12 11 Address word 010C logic equation bit status bit address 10C0 to 10CF Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Equation V8 V7 V6 V5 V4 V3 v2 V1 Bit F E D C B A 9 8 Equation V_FLAGREC V_INHIBCLOSE V_CLOSECB V_TRIPCB V10 v9 Address word 010D logic output status bit address 10D0 to 10DF Bit F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Output x 014 013 012 O11 04 03 02 01 Address word 010E LED status bit address 10E0 a 10EF Bit F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LED gt L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 LD LD red LED indicating Sepam unavailable PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 163 Electric Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding Measurement zone x 1 Measurements x 1 Word address Access Modbus function Format Unit enabled Phase current I1 x 1 0113 R 3 4 16NS 0 1A Phase current 12 x 1 0114 R 3 4 16NS 0 1A Phase current I3 x 1 0115 R 3 4 16NS 0 1A Residual current 10 Sum x 1 0116 R 3 4 16NS 0 1A Residual curre
83. 5 A current transformers Voltage transformers LPCT type current sensors CSH120 and CSH200 Core balance CTs CSH30 interposing ring CT ACE990 Core balance CT interface MES114 modules Optional remote modules MET148 2 Temperature sensor module MSA141 Analog output module DSM303 Remote advanced UMI module Communication accessory selection guide PCRED301006EN 111 112 113 114 116 120 125 126 127 129 130 135 141 142 143 146 152 160 173 178 182 195 197 199 200 201 202 206 218 220 221 224 226 228 230 233 234 236 238 240 03 2011 Sepam series 40 General contents Connection of communication interfaces ACE949 2 2 wire RS 485 network interface ACE959 4 wire RS 485 network interface ACE937 fiber optic interface ACE969TP 2 and ACE969FO 2 Multi protocol interfaces ACE850TP and ACE850FO Multi protocol interfaces ACE909 2 RS 232 RS 485 converter ACE919CA and ACE919CC RS 485 RS 485 converters ECI850 IEC 61850 Sepam server Use User Machine Interfaces SFT2841 setting and operating software SFT2841 setting and operating software UMI on front panel Advanced UMI Default parameters all applications Commissioning Principles and methods Testing and metering equipment required General examination and preliminary actions Checking of parameter and protection settings Checking of phase current and voltage input connection Checking of residual voltage input connection Checking of re
84. 50 51 unit 3 E E E E EEEE E E 4 Protection 50 51 unit 4 E E E E EEEE E E 5 Protection 50N 51N unit 1 E E E E EEEE E E 6 Protection 50N 51N unit 2 E E E E EEEE E E 7 Protection 50N 51N unit 3 E E E E EEEE E E 8 Protection 50N 51N unit 4 E E E E EEEE E E 9 Protection 49 RMS alarm set point E E E E E 10 Protection 49 RMS tripping set point E E E E E 11 Protection 37 E E 12 Protection 46 unit 1 E E E E EEEE E E 13 Protection 46 unit 2 E E E E EEEE E E 14 Protection 48 51LR 14 locked rotor E E 15 Protection 48 51LR 14 rotor locking on E start 16 Protection 48 51LR 14 excessive starting E E time Address word 0102 TS17 to TS32 Bit address 1020 to 102F TS Application S40 S41 S42 S43 S44 T40 T42 M40 M41 G40 S50 S51 S52 S53 S54 T50 T52 17 Protection 27D unit 1 E 18 Protection 27D unit 2 E 19 Protection 27 27S unit 1 E E E E E E E u 20 Protection 27 27S unit 2 E E E E E E E 21 Protection 27R E E 22 Protection 59 unit 1 E E E E E E E E u 23 Protection 59 unit 2 E E E E E E E E u 24 Protection 59N unit 1 E E E E E E 25 Protection 59N unit 2 E E E E E E 26 Protection 81H unit 1 E E E E E 27 Protection 81H unit 2 E 8 E E E 28 Protection 81L unit 1 E E E E E 29 Protection 81L unit 2 E E E E E 30 Protection 81L unit 3 E E E E E 31 Protection 81L unit 4 E E E E E 32 Protection 66 E E Address word 0103 TS33 to TS48 Bit address 1030 to 103F TS Application S40 S41 S42 S43 S44 T40 T42 M40 M41 G40 S50 S51 S52 S5
85. ACT In0 phase CT primary current In 0 1 to 20 InO Connection on TN S and TT networks PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 215 Electric DE51836 DE51837 DE51838 DE51839 DE51840 Installation Variant 1 measurement of 3 phase to neutral voltages standard connection ui Base unit Connections of input voltage The phase and residual voltage transformer secondary circuits are connected directly to the connector item E The 3 impedance matching and isolation transformers are integrated in the base unit of Sepam series 40 Variant 2 measurement of 2 phase to phase voltages and residual voltage L1 L1 L1 Variant 5 L1 216 Schneider amp Electric Parameters Voltages measured by VTs V1 V2 V3 Residual voltage None Functions available Voltages measured V1 V2 V3 Values calculated U21 U32 U13 VO Vd Vi f Measurements available All Protection functions available according to type of All Sepam Parameters Voltages measured by VTs U21 U32 Residual voltage External VT Functions available Voltages measured U21 U32 VO Values calculated U13 V1 V2 V3 Vd Vi f Measurements available All Protection functions available according to type of All Sepam Parameters Voltages measured by VTs U21 U32 Residual voltage None Functions available Voltages measured U21
86. CCA671 interface connector on the rear panel of Sepam Dimensions DE80046 Verrou de fixation 13 50 pls I 1 97 0 51 20 3 15 gt Front view with cover lifted Right side view mm in 69 2 72 Y 46 1 81 Cut out Electric Schneider 223 PE50032 Installation Z we om eg CSH120 and CSH200 core balance CTs E Sipigider DE80249 CSH120 and CSH200 Core balance CTs Function The specifically designed CSH120 and CSH200 core balance CTs are for direct residual current measurement The only difference between them is the diameter Due to their low voltage insulation they can only be used on cables Note The CSH280 core balance CT available in the Motorpact offer is compatible with Sepam Characteristics CSH120 CSH200 Inner diameter 120 mm 4 7 in 196 mm 7 72 in Weight 0 6 kg 1 32 Ib 1 4 kg 3 09 Ib Accuracy 1CT 5 at 20 C 68 F 6 max from 25 C to 70 C 13 F to 158 F 2 CTs in parallel E 10 Transformation ratio 1 470 Maximum permissible current 1 CT 20kA 15s 2 CTs in parallel A 6kA 1s 25 C to 70 C 13 F to 158 F 40 C to 85 C 40 F to 185 F Operating temperature Storage temperature Dimensions 4 horizontal mounting holes 6 mm 0 236 in 4 vertical mounting holes 5 mm 0 197 in Dimensions A B D E F H J K L
87. DNP3 IEC 60870 5 103 IEC 61850 TS Binary Input ASDU FUN INF LN DO DA TS108 BI10 1 160 36 Command Termination PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 119 Electric DE80349 if DE80350 Control and monitoring Logic discrimination functions ANSI code 68 Radial network Application With this type of system time delays are set in accordance with the device to be This function provides protected without any concern for the discrimination aspect m full tripping discrimination m a substantial reduction in delayed tripping of the inei circuit breakers located nearest the source drawback Operating principle of the classical time based discrimination process sending of BI The system applies to the definite time DT and IDMT standard inverse time SIT very inverse time VIT extremely inverse time EIT and ultra inverse time UIT phase overcurrent earth fault and directional protection functions MT10195 level n 1 Sepam O3 output other level n Sepam level n Sepam td X 0 9s td X 0 6s A receipt of BI td X 0 3s When a fault occurs in a radial network the fault current flows through the circuit between the source and the location of the fault td Xs m the protection units upstream from the fault are triggered 1 a l I i i ipa m the protection units downstream from the fault are not triggered m only the first protection unit upstream from the fault should trip Each Se
88. Enable Daylight Enables the use of Daylight Saving Time Default not enabled eso Pes Saving Time Summer time SFT2841 SNTP configuration DST offset Difference between standard time and 30 or 60 minutes Daylight Saving Time Default 60 minutes DST starts If enabled DST starts on the selected Default last Sunday of date March DST ends If enabled DST ends on the selected date Default last Sunday of PCRED301006EN 03 2011 October Primary Server IP Address The IP address of the SNTP server the ACE850 contacts to get the time message 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Default 0 0 0 0 Secondary Server The IP address of another SNTP server 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 IP Address the ACE850 contacts in case the primary Default 0 0 0 0 server is down Poll Interval Controls how often the ACE850 contacts 1 to 300 minutes the SNTP server for the correct time Default 60 minutes Scheider PE80398 PE80399 Modbus communication ACE850 advanced parameters SNMP SNTP IP filtering RSTP User accounts IV Enable fitering IP address IEC 61850 Modbus 0 0 r ee ou a o a wu u ueu SFT2841 IP filtering configuration ACEB5O advanced parameters SNMP SNTP IP fitering RSTP User accounts RSTP parameters Change default values only if necessary Default settings I Enable RSTP ASTP bridge priority js a0 Hello time 2 s
89. Forward delay time 15 Max age time 20 s ASTP max transmit count 32 RSTP cost style RSTP C STP Cares SFT2841 RSTP configuration Schneider 150 Electric Configuring the communication interfaces a Ethernet communication IP filtering configuration The IP filtering function allows the administrator to specify which Modbus TCP clients and which IEC 61850 clients have access to the ACE850 services Note if IP filtering is enabled access is forbidden to any client not in the filtered list Parameters Enable filtering Description Check this box to activate filtering based on IP addresses Authorized values Default not enabled IP address The IP address of a client for which 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 filtering options are defined Default 0 0 0 0 IEC 61850 Check this box to grant IEC 61850 access Default not checked to the given IP address Modbus Check this box to grant Modbus TCP Default not checked access to the given IP address RSTP configuration The RSTP protocol enables the use of redundant Ethernet architectures such as rings It must be enabled each time the ACE850 is included in a loop It may be disabled in other cases Changing the default settings is normally not required and should be performed with extreme care as it could jeopardize the stability of the Ethernet network If in doubt it is always possible to revert to the default values using the Default settings b
90. I from 0 Hz to 150 kHz Fast transient bursts EC 60255 22 4 AorB 4kV 2 5 kHz 2 kV 5 kHz EC 61000 4 4 IV 4kV 2 5 kHz ANSI C37 90 1 4kV 2 5 kHz 1 MHz damped oscillating wave EC 60255 22 1 lll 2 5 kV MC 1 kV MD ANSI C37 90 1 2 5 kV MC and MD 100 kHz damped oscillating wave EC 61000 4 12 2kV MC Surges IEC 61000 4 5 lll 2kV MC 1kV MD Voltage interruptions EC 60255 11 Series 20 100 10 ms Series 40 100 20 ms Mechanical robustness Standard Level Class Value In operation Vibrations EC 60255 21 1 2 1 Gn 10 Hz 150 Hz EC 60068 2 6 Fe 3 Hz 13 2 Hz a 1 mm 40 039 in EC 60068 2 64 2M1 Shocks EC 60255 21 2 2 10 Gn 11 ms Earthquakes EC 60255 21 3 2 2 Gn horizontal axes 1 Gn vertical axes De energized Vibrations EC 60255 21 1 2 2 Gn 10 Hz 150 Hz Shocks EC 60255 21 2 2 30 Gn 11 ms Jolts EC 60255 21 2 2 20 Gn 16 ms PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 17 P Electric Sepam series 40 Environmental characteristics Climatic withstand Standard Level Class Value In operation Exposure to cold IEC 60068 2 1 Series 20 Ab 25 C 13 F Series 40 Ad Exposure to dry heat IEC 60068 2 2 Series 20 Bb 70 C 158 F Series 40 Bd Continuous exposure to damp heat IEC 60068 2 3 Ca 10 days 93 RH 40 C 104 F Temperature variation with specified variation rate IEC 60068 2 14 Nb 25 C to 70 C 13 F to 158 F 5 C min Salt mist IEC 60068 2 52 Kb 2 Influence of corrosio
91. I Ib 1 00 1 05 1 10 1 15 1 20 1 25 1 30 1 35 1 40 1 45 1 50 1 55 1 60 1 65 1 70 1 75 1 80 Es 105 0 6690 0 2719 0 1685 0 1206 0 0931 0 0752 0 0627 0 0535 0 0464 0 0408 0 0363 0 0326 0 0295 0 0268 0 0245 0 0226 110 3 7136 0 6466 0 3712 0 2578 0 1957 0 1566 0 1296 0 1100 0 0951 0 0834 0 0740 0 0662 0 0598 0 0544 0 0497 0 0457 115 1 2528 0 6257 0 4169 0 3102 0 2451 0 2013 0 1699 0 1462 0 1278 0 1131 0 1011 0 0911 0 0827 0 0755 0 0693 120 3 0445 0 9680 0 6061 0 4394 0 3423 0 2786 0 2336 0 2002 0 1744 0 1539 0 1372 0 1234 0 1118 0 1020 0 0935 125 1 4925 0 8398 0 5878 0 4499 0 3623 0 3017 0 2572 0 2231 0 1963 0 1747 0 1568 0 1419 0 1292 0 1183 130 2 6626 1 1451 0 7621 0 5705 0 4537 0 3747 0 3176 0 2744 0 2407 0 2136 0 1914 0 1728 0 1572 0 1438 135 1 5870 0 9734 0 7077 0 5543 0 4535 0 3819 0 3285 0 2871 0 2541 0 2271 0 2048 0 1860 0 1699 140 2 3979 1 2417 0 8668 0 6662 0 5390 0 4507 0 3857 0 3358 0 2963 0 2643 0 2378 0 2156 0 1967 145 1 6094 1 0561 0 7921 0 6325 0 5245 0 4463 0 3869 0 3403 0 3028 0 2719 0 2461 0 2243 150 2 1972 1 2897 0 9362 0 7357 0 6042 0 5108 0 4408 0 3864 0 3429 0 3073 0 2776 0 2526 155 3 8067 1 5950 1 1047 0 8508 0 6909 0 5798 0 4978 0 4347 0 3846 0 3439 0 3102 0 2817 160 2 0369 1 3074 0 9808 0 7857 0 6539 0 5583 0 4855 0 4282 0 3819 0 3438 0 3118 165 2 8478 1 5620 1 1304 0 8905 0 7340 0 6226 0 5390 0 4738 0 4215 0 3786 0 3427 170 1 9042 1 3063 1 0076 0 8210 0 6914 0 5955 0 5215 0 4626 0 4146 0 3747 175 2 4288 1 5198 1 1403 0 9163 0 7652 0
92. IsO lt 15 InO min 0 1 A Core balance CT with 0 1 In0 lt IsO lt 15 In0 ACE990 Resolution 0 1 Aor 1 digit Accuracy at 0 180 60 5 or 0 01 InO Drop out pick up ratio Vs0 set point gt 89 or gt 1 0 015 In0 Is0 x 100 Setting 2 Unp to 80 Unp Resolution 1 Accuracy at 0 180 60 5 Drop out pick up ratio gt 89 Sector Setting 86 83 76 Accuracy With CCA634 2 With CT CSH30 3 Time delay T Setting inst 0 05 s lt Ts 300 s Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy lt 2 or 10 ms to 25 ms Memory time TOmem Setting 0 05 ss TOmem lt 300 s Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Memory voltage VOmem Setting 0 2 Unp lt VOmem lt 80 Unp Resolution 1 Characteristic times Operation time Pick up lt 45 ms Confirmed instantaneous m inst lt 50 ms at 2 IsO for IsO gt 0 3 InO typically 35 ms m inst lt 70 ms at 2 IsO for IsO lt 0 3 InO typically 50 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 35 ms at TOmem 0 1 In0 sensor rating if the measurement is taken by a CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT InO In of the CT if the measurement is taken by a 1 A or 5 A current transformer Ino In of the CT 10 if the measurement is taken by a 1 A or 5 A current transformer with the sensitivity x 10 option TS TC equivalence for each protocol Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870 5 103 IEC 61850 TC Binary Output
93. Link idle state Echo mode Modbus id 1 39600 Bds Even hd Advanced parameters gt gt gt C Yes No rE LEN port Sepam address Speed Parity gt Bds SFT2841 communication configuration window for ACE969FO PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Configuring the communication interfaces a Serial line communication Configuring Modbus advanced parameters The Sepam remote control mode is selected from the Advanced parameters window Advanced parameters Authorized values Default value Remote control mode Direct or SBO Select Direct Before Operate mode Configuring the physical layer of the ACE969 2 E LAN port The E LAN port on the ACE969TP 2 and ACE969FO 2 communication interfaces is a 2 wire RS 485 port The configuration parameters for the physical layer of the E LAN port are m Sepam address m transmission speed m parity check type The number of stop bits is always set at 1 If a configuration with parity is selected each character will contain 11 bits 1 start bit 8 data bits 1 parity bit 1 stop bit If ano parity configuration is selected each character will contain 10 bits 1 start bit 8 data bits 1 stop bit Parameters Authorized values Default value Sepam address 1 to 247 1 Speed 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bauds 38400 bauds Parity None Even or Odd Odd Configuration tips m The Sepam address MUST be assigned before Sepam is connected to the communic
94. MW h 0 to 2 1 108 Mvar h Unit MW h Mvar h Accuracy 1 typical 1 typical Display format 10 significant digits 10 significant digits Resolution 0 1 MW h 0 1 Mvar h 1 At In Unp cos gt 0 8 in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Accumulated active and reactive energy by pulse metering Operation This function is used for energy metering via logic inputs Energy incrementing is associated with each input one of the general parameters to be set Each input pulse increments the meter 4 inputs and 4 accumulated energy metering options are available m positive and negative active energy m positive and negative reactive energy The accumulated active and reactive energy values are saved in the event ofa power failure Readout m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Active energy Reactive energy Metering capacity 0 to 2 1 108 MW h 0 to 2 1 108 Mvar h Unit MW h Mvar h Display format 10 significant digits 10 significant digits Resolution 0 1 MW h 0 1 Mvar h Increment 0 1 kKW h to 5 MW 0 1 kvar h to 5 Mvar h Impulse 15 ms min 15 ms min PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 29 Electric Metering functions 30 Schneider G Electric Temperature Operation This function gives the temperature value measured by resistance temperature detectors RTDs m platinum Pt100 100 Q at 0 C or 32 F in accordance with the IEC 60751 and DIN 43760
95. Phase displacement 91 2 3 between V and I 0 to 359 2 Disturbance recording o Fault locator Fault location 0 to 99 99 km 2 or 0 to 62 13 mi Fault resistance 0 to 999 9 Q 10 Machine operating assistance Thermal capacity used 0 to 800 1 o 100 for phase Ib Remaining operating time before overload tripping 0 to 999 mn 1 mn Waiting time after overload tripping 0 to 999 mn 1 mn Running hours counter operating time 0 to 65535 hours 1 or 0 5 h o Starting current 1 2 Ib to 24 In 5 o Starting time 0 to 300 s 300 ms o Number of starts before inhibition 0 to 60 1 Start inhibit time 0 to 360 mn 1 mn Cooling time constant 5 to 600 mn 5 mn Switchgear diagnosis assistance Cumulative breaking current 0 to 65535 kA 10 o Number of operations 0 to 4 109 1 o Operating time 20 to 100 ms 1 ms o Charging time 1to20s 40 55 o m available on MSA141 analog output module according to setup o saved in the event of auxiliary supply outage 1 Typical accuracy see details on subsequent pages 2 Sn apparent power v3 Unp In 3 Measurement up to 0 02 In for information purpose PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider Electric 21 Metering functions 2 Schneider Phase current Residual current Phase current Operation This function gives the RMS value of the phase currents m 1 phase 1 current m 2 phase 2 current m 3 phase 3 current It is based on RMS current measurement and takes into account
96. Residual current Rated residual current Measuring range 2 A rating CSH Ind 2A 0 1 to 20 Ind 5 Arating CSH Ind 5A 0 1 to 20 Ind 20 A rating CSH In0 20A 0 1 to 20 Ind Connection on TN S and TT networks Variant 4 residual current measurement by sum of 3 phase currents and neutral current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs and CSH30 interposing ring CT Description The phase and neutral CTs should have the same primary and secondary currents The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used to connect 1 A or 5 A CTs to Sepam to measure residual current m Connection of CSH30 interposing ring CT to 1 A CT make 2 turns through CSH primary m Connection of CSH30 interposing ring CT to 5 A CT make 4 turns through CSH primary Parameters Residual current Rated residual current Measuring range 1 ACT InO phase CT primary current In 0 1 to 20 Ind 5 ACT In0 phase CT primary current In 0 1 to 20 InO CT 1A 2 turns CT 5A 4 turns Connection on TN S and TT networks Variant 5 residual current measurement by sum of 3 phase currents and neutral current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs and CCA634 connector Description CCA634 The phase and neutral CTs should have the same primary and secondary currents Residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs m Terminal 7 1 ACT m Terminal 8 5 A CT Parameters Residual current Rated residual current Measuring range 1ACT In0 phase CT primary current In 0 1 to 20 InO 5
97. Schneider Checking of logic input and output connection Checking of logic input connection Procedure Proceed as follows for each input 1 If the input supply voltage is present use an electric cord to short circuit the contact that delivers logic data to the input 2 If the input supply voltage is not present apply a voltage supplied by the DC voltage generator to the terminal of the contact linked to the chosen input being sure to comply with the suitable polarity and level 3 Observe the change of status of the input using the SFT2841 software in the Input output indicator status screen 4 At the end of the test if necessary press the SFT2841 Reset key to clear all messages and deactivate all outputs Checking of logic output connection Procedure Check carried out using the Output relay test function activated via the SFT2841 software in the Sepam Diagnosis screen Only output O4 when used for the watchdog can be tested This function requires prior entry of the Parameter setting password 1 Activate each output relay using the buttons in the SFT2841 software 2 The activated output relay changes status over a period of 5 seconds 3 Observe the change of status of the output relay through the operation of the related switchgear if it is ready to operate and is powered or connect a voltmeter to the terminals of the output contact the voltage cancels itself out when the contact closes 4 At the
98. Sepam display unit and also by the communication Sepam continues to protect the installation m Major failure Sepam switches to the fail safe position and attempts a restart during which it again runs its self tests There are 2 possible scenarios o The internal failure is still present It is a permanent failure Intervention on Sepam is required Only removing the cause of the failure followed by de energizing and then energizing Sepam will allow the unit to exit the fail safe position o The internal failure is no longer present It is a transient failure Sepam restarts so that it can continue to protect the installation Sepam has been in the fail safe position for 5 to 7 s Limiting the number of transient failure detections Each time a transient internal failure appears Sepam increments an internal counter The fifth time the failure occurs Sepam is placed in the fail safe position De energizing Sepam reinitializes the failure counter This mechanism can be used to avoid keeping a Sepam running that is subject to repeated transient failures Schneider 137 Electric Control and monitoring Self tests and fail safe position functions Selecting the trip command and examples of use An analysis of the operational reliability of the whole installation should determine whether availability or safety of this installation should be prioritized if Sepam is in the fail safe position This information is used to determine the choice of
99. Specific Breaker Disconnec Directional Directional Directional failure tion earth fault earthfaultand earth fault ROCOF Applications Transformer T20 T24 Characteristics Logic inputs Inputs outputs Outputs Temperature sensors Channel Current Voltage LPCT Communication ports Control Matrix 2 Logic equation editor Logipam Memory cartridge with settings Backup battery 1 LPCT Low Power Current Transducer conforming to standard IEC 60044 8 2 Control matrix used for simple assignment of data from the protection control and monitoring functions 3 Logipam Ladder language PC programming environment for extended use of Sepam series 80 functions 8 Schneider 4 S5X applications are identical to S4X applications with the following additional functions m earth fault and phase overcurrent cold load pick up m broken conductor detection fault locator 5 T5X applications are identical to T4X applications with the following additional functions m earth fault and phase overcurrent cold load pick up m broken conductor detection PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Sepam range Series 60 Selection guide by application The list of protection functions is given for information only Direct earthing or impedance earthing have been represented by the same pictogram i e by a direct earthing system Series 80
100. U32 Values calculated U13 Vd Vi f Measurements available U21 U32 U13 Vd Vi f Protection functions available according to type of Sepam All except 67N 67NC 59N Parameters Voltages measured by VTs U21 or V1 Residual voltage External VT Functions available Voltages measured U21 VO Values calculated f Measurements available U21 VO f Protection functions available according to type of Sepam All except 67 47 27D 32P 320 40 27S measurement of 1 phase to phase voltage Parameters Voltages measured by VTs U21 or V1 Residual voltage None Functions available Voltages measured U21 or V1 Values calculated f Measurements available U21 or V1 f Protection functions available according to type of Sepam All except 67 47 27D 32P 32Q 40 67N 67NC 59N 27S PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE80958 Installation Variant 1 TN S and TN C networks L1 L2 When a ground fault occurs on a TN S or TN C network the neutral potential is not affected the neutral can act as a reference for the VTs PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE80959 Base unit Connection of low voltage phase voltage inputs Variant 2 TT and IT networks L1 r N When a ground fault occurs on a TT or IT network the neutral potential is affected the neutral cannot act as a reference for the VTs phase to phase voltages must be us
101. UMI or remotely by means of a logic input or via the communication link The remote indication TS104 remains present after latching operations until acknowledgment has taken place The Latching acknowledgment function associated with the Circuit breaker contactor control function may be used to perform the ANSI 86 Lockout relay function TS TC equivalence for each protocol Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870 5 103 IEC 61850 TS Binary Input ASDU FUN INF LN DO DA TS104 BIO 1 160 16 LLNO LEDRs stVal TC Binary Output ASDU FUN INF LN DO DA TC5 BO2 20 160 19 LLNO LEDRs ctlVal TC circuit breaker position discrepancy Description This function detects a discrepancy between the last remote control order received and the actual position of the circuit breaker The information is accessible via remote indication TS105 TS TC equivalence for each protocol Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870 5 103 IEC 61850 TS Binary Input ASDU FUN INF LN DO DA TS105 Bli2 TC Binary Output ASDU FUN INF LN DO DA TC1 BOO 20 21 1 OFF CSWI1 Pos ctlVal TC2 BO1 20 21 1 ON CSWI1 Pos ctlVal Tripping Description The information can be accessed via remote indication TS130 It indicates whether a Sepam internal or external protection has tripped TS TC equivalence for each protocol Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870 5 103 IEC 61850 TS Binary Input ASDU FUN INF LN DO DA TS130 BI136 2 160 68 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 MT10190 MT10191 Control an
102. V DC or 24 V CC 250 mA max interfaces Maximum number of Sepam interfaces with 12 distributed supply Environmental characteristics Operating temperature Electromagnetic compatibility Fast transient bursts 5 ns 5 C to 55 C 23 F to 131 F IEC standard Value 60255 22 4 4 kV with capacitive coupling in common mode 2 kV with direct coupling in common mode 1 kV with direct coupling in differential mode 60255 22 1 1 kV common mode 0 5 kV differential mode 1 MHz damped oscillating wave 60255 5 3 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode 1 2 50 us impulse waves 260 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE80307 DE80022 DE51670 Installation Male 9 pin sub D connector supplied with the ACE919 ACE919 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 ACE919CA and ACE919CC RS 485 RS 485 converters Description and dimensions A Terminal block for 2 wire RS 485 link without distributed power supply Female 9 pin sub D connector to connect to the 2 wire RS 485 network with distributed power supply 1 screw type male 9 pin sub D connector is supplied with the converter Power supply terminal block 1 Distributed power supply voltage selector switch 12 V DC or 24 V DC 2 Protection fuse unlocked by a 1 4 turn 3 ON OFF LED on if ACE919 is energized 4 SW1 parameter setting of 2 wire RS 485 network polarization and line imp
103. Vnp to 3 Vnp Unit VorkV Accuracy 1 from 0 5 to 3 Vnp 2 from 0 05 to 0 5 Vnp 5 from 0 04 to 0 05 Vnp Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1V Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 Vnp primary rated phase to neutral voltage Vnp Unp v3 Positive sequence voltage Operation This function gives the calculated value of the positive sequence voltage Vd Readout The measurement may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the amp key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 05 to 1 2 Vnp Unit Vor kV Accuracy 2 at Vnp Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1V Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 Vnp primary rated phase to neutral voltage Vnp Unp v3 Schneider Electric 25 Metering functions Negative sequence voltage Frequency Negative sequence voltage Operation This function gives the calculated value of the negative sequence voltage Vi Readout The measurement may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the amp key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 05 to 1 2 Vnp Unit V or kV Accuracy 2 at Vnp Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1V Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 Vnp primary rated
104. a Sepam m When connected to a single Sepam unit you can access the parameter and protection setting file for the Sepam unit connected to the PC m When connected to a Sepam network you can access the parameter and protection setting files for a group of Sepam units connected to the PC viaa communication network Language of SFT2841 screens SFT2841 software can be used in English French or Spanish The language is selected at the top of the window Using SFT2841 in disconnected mode Disconnected mode allows you to prepare parameters and settings files for Sepam prior to commissioning The parameter and protection setting files prepared in disconnected mode will be downloaded later to the Sepam units in connected mode m To create a new parameter and protection setting file click on the icon for the relevant Sepam family os m To open an existing parameter and protection setting file click on the icon ww for the relevant Sepam family vs Using SFT2841 connected to a single Sepam unit Connected to a single Sepam unit mode is used during commissioning m To upload download and modify Sepam parameters and settings m To have all the measurements and supporting data available for commissioning The PC fitted with the SFT2841 software is connected to the port on the front panel of the Sepam via an RS 232 port using the CCA783 cord or via an USB port using the CCA784 cord To open the parameter and protection setti
105. a single master A request contains the slave address a unique number to identify the recipient Non addressed slaves disregard the requests received Modbus Protocol Data Unit Every Modbus request or response frame includes a Modbus PDU protocol data unit made up of 2 fields Function code Data m function code 1 byte indicates the type of request 1 to 127 m data 0 to n bytes depends on the function code see below If there is no error the function codes in the reply and in the request are identical Modbus data types Modbus uses 2 types of data bits and 16 bit words also called registers Each element of data is identified by a 16 bit address The most significant byte in 16 bit words is always sent first for both data and addresses Modbus functions supported The Modbus protocol used by Sepam is a compatible sub group of the RTU Modbus protocol The functions listed below are handled by Sepam m basic functions data access o function 1 reading of n output or internal bits function 2 reading of n input bits function 3 reading of n output or internal words function 4 reading of n input words function 5 writing of 1 bit function 6 writing of 1 word function 7 high speed reading of 8 bits function 15 writing of n bits function 16 writing of n words m communication management functions O function 8 Modbus diagnosis O function 11 reading of Modbus event counter o function 43
106. and maintaining high voltage equipment m Beware of potential hazards and wear personal protective equipment Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Protection relay testing Protection relays are tested prior to commissioning with the dual aim of maximizing availability and minimizing the risk of malfunctioning of the assembly being commissioned The problem consists of defining the consistency of the appropriate tests keeping in mind that the relay is always involved as the main link in the protection chain Therefore protection relays based on electromechanical and static technologies the performances of which are not totally reproducible must be systematically submitted to detailed testing not only to qualify relay commissioning but also to check that they actually are in good operating order and maintain the required level of performance The Sepam concept makes it possible to do away with such testing since m the use of digital technology guarantees the reproducibility of the performances announced m each of the Sepam functions has undergone full factory qualification m an internal self testing system provides continuous information on the state of the electronic components and the integrity of the functions e g automatic tests diagnose the level of component polarization voltages the continuity of the analog value acquisition chain non alteration of RAM memory absenc
107. at the start up of SFT2841 Once the connection with Sepam has been established Connected appears in the status bar and the Sepam connection window may be accessed in the work zone User identification The window intended for the entry of the 4 digit password is activated m via the Passwords tab m via the Identification function in the Sepam menu m via the Identification icon The Return to Operating mode function in the Passwords tab removes access rights to parameter and protection setting mode Downloading of parameters and protection settings Parameter and protection setting files may only be downloaded in the connected Sepam in Parameter setting mode Once the connection has been established the procedure for downloading a parameter and protection setting file is as follows 1 Activate the Download Sepam function in the Sepam menu 2 Select the file S40 S41 S42 S43 S44 S50 S51 S52 S53 S54 T40 T42 T50 T52 M40 M41 G40 according to the type of application which contains the data to be downloaded Return to factory settings This operation is only possible in Parameter setting mode via the Sepam menu All of the Sepam general characteristics protection settings and the control matrix go back to the default values Uploading of parameter and protection settings The connected Sepam parameter and protection setting file may only be uploaded in Operatin
108. be remotely set Writing of the settings of all the protection functions may be accessed remotely Exchange principle Remote setting is allowed for Sepam units Remote setting is carried out for a given function unit by unit It takes place in two steps m first of all the master indicates the function code and unit number followed by the values of all the settings in the write request frame The request is acknowledged to free the network m the master then reads a reply zone designed for checking that the settings have been processed Each function has its own particular reply zone contents They are the same as those of the remote reading function reply frame To use remote setting it is necessary to make all the settings for the function concerned even if some of them have not changed Request frame The request is made by the master using a write n words operation function 16 at the address 1F00h or 2100h The zone to be written contains a maximum of 123 words It contains the values of all the settings and consists of the following 1F00h 2100h B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 BO9 B08 B07 BO6 B05 B04 BO3 BO2 BO1 BOO Function code Unit number Settings The content of the address 2100h may be read using a read n words operation function 3 m the function code field may have the following values 01h to 99h BCD encoding
109. below lists the Sepam protection functions suitable for low voltage according to the earthing system used Sepam protection functions not listed in this table are not suitable for low voltage The protection functions listed in this table are available according to the Sepam type Protection ANSI Earthing system Comments code TN S TN C TT IT Phase overcurrent 50 51 Neutral conductor not protected Earth fault Sensitive earth fault 50N 51N 0 Earth fault Sensitive earth fault 50G 51G E E E 8 Negative sequence unbalance 46 u E 7 7 Threshold to be adapted to the phase unbalance Thermal overload for cables machine capacitor 49RMS u 7 u u Neutral conductor not protected Restricted earth fault 64REF Two winding transformer differential 87T Directional phase overcurrent 67 a 4 a 4 Directional earth fault 67N 67NC Incompatible with LV diagrams 4 wire Directional active overpower 32P 2 2 Directional reactive overpower 32Q 2 2 Undervoltage L L or L N 27 Remanent undervoltage 27R Overvoltage L L or L N 59 Neutral voltage displacement 59N 4 4 Residual voltage not available with 2 VTs Negative sequence overvoltage 47 Overfrequency 81H 7 7 7 m Underfrequency 81L Rate of change of frequency 81R Synchro check 25 m Protection function suitable for low voltage accordin
110. by the dedicated read functions Modbus protocol functions 8 and 11 CPT2 and CPT9 counters can be displayed on SFT2841 Sepam Diagnosis screen An incorrect speed or parity increments CPT2 Non reception is signaled by the lack of change on CPT9 Operating anomalies It is advisable to connect the Sepam units to the Modbus network one by one Make sure that the supervisor is sending frames to the relevant Sepam by checking the activity on the RS 232 RS 485 converter or the fiber optic converter if there is one and on the ACE module RS 485 network m check the wiring on each ACE module m check the tightness of the screw terminals on each ACE module m check the connection of the CCA612 cord linking the ACE module to the Sepam base unit m check that polarization is only at one point and that impedance matching is at both ends of the RS 485 network m check the auxiliary power supply connection to the ACE969TP 2 m check that the ACE909 2 or ACE919 converter used is connected powered and set up correctly Fiber optic network m check the connections on the ACE module m check the connection of the CCA612 cord linking the ACE module to the Sepam base unit m check the auxiliary power supply connection to the ACE969FO 2 m check that the converter or fiber optic star used is connected powered and set up correctly m for a fiber optic ring check that the Modbus master can handle the echo of its requests correctly In all cas
111. connecting cord to be ordered separately connects the PC to the port on the Sepam front panel so that the SFT2841 package can be used in point to point connected mode PCRED301006EN 03 2011 PE80759 DE81048 DE80149 DE80304 Use SFT2841 SSE English UK Welcome to SFT2841 your Sepam configuration software Do you want to Connection on Series 20 Series 40 Series 60 Series 80 Applications 20 Applications 40 and 50 Applications 60 Applications 80 as aS ae Welcome window Sepam series 60 CCA783 SFT2841 connected to a single Sepam unit with the serial port Sepam series 60 H CCA784 Mig EEE USB SFT2841 connected to a single Sepam unit with the USB port To supervisor S LAN Sepam series 20 a eecce Sepam series 40 SFT2841 connected to a Sepam network PCRED301006EN 03 2011 SFT2841 setting and operating software Welcome window Description The SFT2841 welcome window opens when the program is launched It lets you choose the language for the SFT2841 screens and provides access to the Sepam parameter and protection setting files m In disconnected mode you can open or create a parameter and protection setting file for
112. correction logic Input tripping temperature by ambient soi terial overload indication temperature inhibit closing indication 64 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Electric MT10860 Protection functions Example 1 The following data are available m time constants for on operation T1 and off operation T2 o T1 25 min o T2 70 min m maximum curve in steady state Imax lb 1 05 Setting of tripping set point Es2 Es2 Imax lb 110 Note If the motor absorbs a current of 1 05 Ib in steady state the heat rise calculated by the thermal overload protection will reach 110 Setting of alarm set point Es1 Es1 90 I lb 0 95 Knegative 4 5 usual value The other thermal overload parameters do not need to be set They are not taken into account by default Example 2 The following data are available m motor thermal resistance in the form of hot and cold curves see solid line curves in Figure 1 m cooling time constant T2 m maximum steady state current Imax lb 1 05 Setting of tripping set point Es2 Es2 Imax lb 2 110 Setting of alarm set point Es1 Es1 90 l lb 0 95 The manufacturer s hot cold curves may be used to determine the heating time constant T1 The method consists of placing the Sepam hot cold curves below those of the motor Figure 1 motor thermal resistance and thermal overload tripping curves A motor cold curve A o o Sepam cold curve moto
113. data files are read in their entirety in Sepam They are transferred adjacently Schneider 195 Modbus communication 196 Schneider Disturbance recording If the master requests more exchanges than necessary the exchange number remains unchanged and the number of usable bytes is forced to 0 To guarantee data transfers it is necessary to allow a response time of about 500 ms between each read operation at 2300h The first word transmitted is an exchange word The exchange word comprises two fields m the most significant byte contains the exchange number It is initialized to zero after an energizing operation It is incremented by 1 by Sepam each time a transfer takes place successfully When it reaches the value FF it automatically goes back to zero m the least significant byte contains the number of usable bytes in the data zone It is initialized to zero after an energizing operation and must be different from FFh The exchange word may also have the following values m xxyy the number of usable bytes in the data zone yy must be different from FFh m 0000h no read requeste frame has yet been formulated This is especially the case when Sepam is energized The other words are not significant m FFFFh the request frame has been processed but the results in the reply zone are not yet available It is necessary to repeat reply frame reading The other words are not significant The words that follow the exchange wo
114. end of the test press the SFT2841 Reset key to clear all messages and deactivate all outputs PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Commissioning PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Validation of the complete protection chain Checking of optional modules connection Validation of the complete protection chain Principle The complete protection chain is validated during the simulation of a fault that causes tripping of the breaking device by Sepam Procedure 1 Select one of the protection functions that triggers tripping of the breaking device and separately according to their incidence in the chain the function or functions related to the programmed or reprogrammed parts of the program logic 2 According to the selected function or functions inject a current and or apply a voltage that corresponds to a fault 3 Observe the tripping of the breaking device and the operation of the adapted parts of the program logic At the end of all the voltage and current application type checks put the covers back on the test terminal boxes Checking of optional module connection Checking of RTD inputs to the MET148 2 module The temperature monitoring function provided by Sepam T40 T42 T50 T52 M40 M41 and G40 units checks the connection of each RTD that is configured An RTD FAULT alarm is generated whenever one of the RTDs is detected as being short circuted or disconnected absent To identify the faulty RTD or RTDs 1 Display the temperature
115. enforced by SFT2841 and ACE850 These rules are m Every IP address is made of 4 fields separated by dots x y z t m Each field is a decimal value coded on 8 bits range 0 255 m The first field x must be in the range 1 224 but must not be 127 m Intermediate fields can cover the full range 0 255 m The last field must not be 0 range 1 255 IP subnet mask The IP subnet mask is also made of 4 dot separated fields m The binary representation of the subnet mask is made of a set of 8 to 30 contiguous ones in the most significant part followed by a set of contiguous zeroes 255 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 252 m For a class A IP address x lt 126 the number of ones in the subnet mask must be at least 8 255 y z t m For a class B IP address 128 lt x lt 191 the number of ones in the subnet mask must be at least 16 255 255 z t m For a class C IP address 192 lt x lt 223 the number of ones in the subnet mask must be at least 24 255 255 255 t m The subnet part of the device IP address obtained when applying the subnet mask must not be 0 IP default gateway m An IP address of 0 0 0 0 means no gateway m f a gateway is defined it must belong to the same subnet as the device Schneider 151 PE50623 Modbus communication SFT2841 Sepam s rie 40 Connection window E Fie Edt Operation Sepam Application Optone Window 2 S O SUSAR Se Ore sT eA isgriosis Input output and indic
116. includes an adjustable timer hold delay T1 m definite time timer hold for all the tripping curves 10 gt IsO time delayed output DE50248 10 gt IsO pick up signal value of internal time delay counter m DMT for IEC IEEE and IAC curves 10 gt IsO time delayed output I 10 gt IsO pick up signal LI DE50247 value of internal time delay counter 1 In0 In if the sum of the three phase currents is used for the measurement In0 sensor rating if the measurement is taken by a CSH core balance CT Ino In of the CT at In 10 according to parameter setting if the measurement is taken by a 1 A or 5 A current transformer 2 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 3 Setting ranges in TMS Time Multiplier Setting mode Inverse SIT and IECIEC SIT A 0 04 to 4 20 Very inverse VIT and IEC VIT B 0 07 to 8 33 Very inverse LTI and IEC LTI B 0 01 to 0 93 Ext inverse EIT and IEC EIT C 0 13 to 15 47 IEEE moderately inverse 0 42 to 51 86 IEEE very inverse 0 73 to 90 57 IEEE extremely inverse 1 24 to 154 32 IAC inverse 0 34 to 42 08 IAC very inverse 0 61 to 75 75 IAC extremely inverse 1 08 to 134 4 4 Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC IEEE and IAC types 5 For IsO lt 0 4 InO the minimum time delay is 300 ms If a shorter time delay is needed use the CT CSH30 or CT CCA634 combination PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Earth fault ANSI code 50N 51N or 50G 51G
117. installation and use Example of a protection setting screen 1 Modes accessed via 2 passwords protection setting level parameter setting level Schneider 270 Electric PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Use A Sepam document is displayed on the screen via a graphic interface that has the conventional Windows features All the SFT2841 software screens are set up in the same way i e m A title bar with O name of the application SFT2841 o identification of the Sepam document displayed O window manipulation handles E B menu bar to access all the SFT2841 software functions unavailable functions are dimmed E toolbar a group of contextual icons for quick access to the main functions also accessed via the menu bar E D work zone available to the user presented in the form of tab boxes status bar with the following information relating to the active document o alarm on o identification of the connection window o SFT2841 operating mode connected or not connected o type of Sepam o Sepam editing identification o identification level o Sepam operating mode o PC date and time Guided navigation A guided navigation mode is proposed to make it easier to enter all of the Sepam parameter and protection settings It allows users to go through all the data input screens in the natural order The sequencing of the screens in guided mode is controlled by clicking on 2 icons in the toolbar m
118. interface ACE969TP 2 and ACE969FO 2 Multi protocol interfaces Description Connection ACE850TP and ACE850FO Multi protocol interfaces Description Connection ACE909 2 RS 232 RS 485 converter ACE919CA and ACE919CC RS 485 RS 485 converters ECI850 IEC 61850 Sepam server Schneider Electric 200 201 202 202 203 204 206 206 207 208 210 211 212 214 216 217 218 220 221 224 226 228 230 233 234 236 238 240 241 241 242 243 244 245 246 248 249 252 254 255 258 260 262 199 Installation Safety instructions Before starting This page contains important safety instructions that must be followed precisely before attempting to install repair service or maintain electrical equipment Carefully read and follow the safety instructions described below A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK ELECTRIC ARC BURNS OR EXPLOSION m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions m NEVER work alone m Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it m Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off m Before performing visual inspections tests or maintenance on this equipment disconnect all sources of electric power Assume that all circuits are live until they have been completely de energized tested and tagged Pay particular attention to
119. is T tk k Example Data m type of time delay standard inverse time SIT m set point Is m a point k on the operation curve k 3 5 Is 4 s Question What is the time delay T setting operation time at 10 Is Reading the table SIT column line V Is 3 5 therefore K 1 858 Answer The time delay setting is T 4 1 858 2 15 s Electric Schneider 107 Protection functions General Tripping curves Problem 3 Another practical method Given the Is current and time delay T settings foratype the table below gives the values of K ts Ts10 as a function of IIs of time delay standard inverse very inverse extremely In the column that corresponds to the type of time delay read the value K tsA Ts10 inverse find the operation time for a current value IA on the line for IA Is the operation time tA for the current IA with the Is and T settings On the standard curve of the same type read the istA K T operation time tsA that corresponds to the relative Example current IA Is and the operation time Ts10 that Data corresponds to the relative current I Is 10 m type of time delay very inverse time VIT The operation time tA for the current IA with the Is and g set point Is T settings is tA tsA x T Ts10 m time delay T 0 8 s ts A Question What is the operation time for the current IA 6 Is Reading the table VIT column line I Is 6 therefore k 1 8 Answer The operation time for the current IA is t 1 80 x 0
120. lasts approximately 6 seconds m green ON and red indicators on m red indicator off m pick up of watchdog contact The first screen displayed is the phase current measurement screen Implementation of the SFT2841 software for PC 1 Start up the PC 2 Connect the PC RS232 serial or USB port to the communication port on the front panel of Sepam using the CCA783 or CCA784 cord 3 Start up the SFT2841 software by clicking on the related icon 4 Choose to connect to the Sepam to be checked Identification of Sepam 1 Note the Sepam serial number given on the label stuck to the right side plate of the base unit 2 Note the Sepam type and software version using the SFT2841 software Sepam Diagnosis screen 3 Enter them in the test sheet PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Commissioning PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Checking of parameter and protection settings Determination of parameter and protection settings All of the Sepam parameter and protection settings are determined beforehand by the design department in charge of the application and should be approved by the customer It is presumed that the study has been carried out with all the attention necessary or even consolidated by a network coordination study All of the Sepam parameter and protection settings should be available at the time of commissioning m in hard copy format with the SFT2841 software the parameter and protection setting file for a Sepam can be printe
121. messages m in the protection functions to create new inhibition or reset conditions for example m in circuit breaker control to add cases of circuit breaker tripping closing or inhibition m in disturbance recording to record particular logic data i logic outputs logic inputs gore gt circuit breaker control signal lamps recloser amp protection functions messages Phase fault N logic equations Logic function configuration Logical functions are entered in text format in the SFT2841 editor Each line includes a logic operation the result of which is assigned to a variable Example V1 P5051_2_3 OR 112 The lines are executed sequentially every 14 ms Description of operations Operators m NOT logic inversion m OR logic OR m AND logic AND m XOR exclusive OR V1 XOR V2 is equivalent to V1 AND NOT V2 OR V2 AND NOT V1 m assignment of a result m start of a comment the characters on the right are not processed m the operations may be grouped between brackets Functions m x SR y z bistable with priority given to Set o xis set to 1 when y is equal to 1 o xis set to 0 when z is equal to 1 and y is equal to 0 O x is unchanged in the other cases m LATCH lt x y latching of variables x y The variables are maintained constantly at 1 after having been set to 1 a first t
122. network Block diagram Sepam S40 S41 S43 S44 S50 S51 S53 S54 T40 T42 T50 T52 G40 overcurrent inst unit 1 inst unit 2 earth fault ee inst unit 1 inst unit 2 gt 1 to sendBl directional earth fault inst unit 1 directional overcurrent inst unit 1 m inhibit send BI sendB_________121212121212222212212 22 0 0 i fault not cleared _ _ _ receive BI overcurrent time delayed unit 3 delayed unit 4 earth fault time delayed unit 3 delayed unit 4 directional earth fault delayed unit 2 time delay settings for time based discrimination w SSL tripping directional overcurrent delayed unit 1 delayed unit 2 overcurrent logic delayed unit 1 delayed unit 2 earth fault logic delayed unit 1 delayed unit 2 directional earth fault logic delayed unit 1 time delay settings for logic discrimination Blocking reception 0 T logic input T 30ms Block diagram Sepam M40 and M41 overcurrent inst unit 1 _ inst unit 2 output Oxx send BI earth fault inst unit 1 DE50466 to send BI WV inst unit 2 2 directional earth fault T 200ms inhibit send BI if fault not cleared inst unit 1 overcurrent delayed unit 1 delayed unit 2 earth fault SSL tripping w delayed unit 1 delayed unit 2 directional earth fault logic delayed unit 1
123. network synchronization mode by the broadcasting of a time message frame via the communication network Slave number 0 is used for broadcasting m external synchronization mode via a logic input The synchronization mode is selected at the time of commissioning via SFT2841 Internal synchronization via the network mode The time message frame is used for both time setting and synchronization of Sepam In this case it must be sent regularly at brief intervals between 10 and 60 seconds in order for synchronous time to be obtained Sepam s internal clock is reset each time a new time frame is received and synchronization is maintained if the difference in synchronism is less than 100 milliseconds With internal synchronization via the network accuracy is linked to the master and its mastery of time frame transmission in the communication network Sepam is synchronized without delay at the end of the receipt of the frame Time changes are made by sending a frame to Sepam with the new date and time Sepam then switches into a transitional non synchronous status When Sepam is in synchronous status if no time message is received for 200 seconds the appearance of the not synchronous event is triggered PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE80302 Modbus communication master computer clock JL synchronization link network Sepam Arch
124. number 2901 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Reserved lt 2 Reserved 3 Activity 4 Time delay T Numerical value see unit at setting 5 5 Unit of time delay T 0 s 1 mn 6 Location unit 0 km 1 miles 7 Positive sequence resistance of lines Rdl mQ km 8 Positive sequence reactance of lines Xdl mQ km 9 Zero sequence resistance of lines ROI mQ km 10 Zero sequence reactance of lines XOl mQ km 11 Positive sequence resistance of cables Rdc mQ km 12 Positive sequence reactance of cables Xdc mQ km 13 Zero sequence resistance of cables ROc mQ km 14 Zero sequence reactance of cables X0c mQ km 15 Percentage of cable 1 This parameter is only valid to display the settings 7 to 14 on the advanced UMI and SFT2841 software ANSI 60 CT supervision Function number 2601 Setting Data Reserved Format Unit Reserved Activity Reserved Reserved Behavior on 46 51N 32P 32Q functions 0 none 1 inhibition Tripping time delay 10 ms Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 NIJA A Vj N 0O Reserved ANSI 60FL VT supervision Function number 2701 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Reserved 2 Reserved s 3 Activity oO 4 Reserved E 5 Reserved 6 Check loss of 3 V 2 U 7 Test current 8 Use Vi li criterion 9 Behavior on 27 278 27D 32P 32Q 0 n
125. number of starts when a re acceleration occurs by a logic data input logic input motor re acceleration The stop start time delay T may be used to inhibit starting after a stop until the delay has elapsed Use of circuit breaker closed data In synchronous motor applications it is advisable to connect the circuit breaker closed data to a logic input in order to enable more precise detection of starts If the circuit breaker closed data is not connected to a logic input the detection of a start is not conditioned by the position of the circuit breaker User information The following information is available for the user m the waiting time before a start is allowed m the number of starts still allowed See chapter Machine operation assistance functions page 37 Block diagram DE52372 17 12 1 1 gt 0 11b B37 21 gt inhibit closing logic input CB closed P mn NT Fai 100 ms logic input motor re acceleration thermal alarm hot state P mn NT Clear Characteristics Period of time P Setting 1to6hr Resolution 1 Nt total number of starts Setting 1 to 60 Resolution 1 Nh and Nc number of consecutive starts Setting 9 1toNt Resolution 1 T time delay stop start Setting 0 mns Ts 90 mn 0 no time delay Resolution 1 mn or 1 digit 1 With Nh lt Ne 86 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Protection functions Des
126. o Communication interface ACE949 2 ACE959 ACE937 ACE969TP 2 or o o o o o o o o o o ACE969FO 2 ACE850TP or ACE850FO m Standard o according to parameter setting and MES114 MES114E MES114F or MET148 2 input output module options 1 For shunt trip unit or undervoltage trip unit 2 2 modules possible 3 Exclusive choice phase to neutral voltage or phase to phase voltage for each of the 2 relays 4 Only for S50 S51 S52 S53 S54 T50 T52 applications 5 Only for S50 S51 S52 S53 S54 applications PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 15 Sepam series 40 Weight Technical characteristics Minimum weight base unit with basic UMI and without MES114 1 4 kg 3 09 Ib Maximum weight base unit with advanced UMI and MES114 Analog inputs 1 9 kg 4 19 Ib Current transformer Input impedance lt 0 02 2 1 A or 5 ACT with CCA630 or CA634 Consumption lt 0 02 VAatiA 1 A to 6250 A ratings lt 0 5VAat5A Rated thermal withstand 4 In 1 second overload 100 In 500 A Voltage transformer Input impedance gt 100 kQ 220 V to 250 kV ratings Input voltage 100 to 230 V3 V Rated thermal withstand 240 V 1 second overload 480 V Temperature sensor input MET148 2 module Type of sensor Pt 100 Ni 100 120 Isolation from earth None None Current injected in sensor 4mA 4mA Maximum distance between sensor and modul
127. of bistable SR and latching LATCH functions Input variables They come from protection functions or logic inputs They may only appear on the right of the assignment sign m 111 to 114 121 to 126 logic inputs m Pprotection_unit_data a protection output Example P50 51_2_1 overcurrent protection unit 2 data 1 time delayed output The data numbers are detailed in the table which follows Output variables They are directed to the matrix or to the protection functions or to the program logic functions They may only appear on the left of the assignment sign The output variables should only be used once otherwise the last assignment is taken into account m outputs to the matrix V1 to V10 The outputs are included in the matrix and may therefore control signal lamps relay outputs or messages m outputs to a protection input Pprotection_unit_data Example P59_1_ 113 overvoltage protection unit 1 data 113 protection inhibition The data numbers are detailed in the table which follows m outputs to program logic o V_TRIPCB circuit breaker tripping by the circuit breaker control function Used to complete circuit breaker tripping conditions and activate the recloser o V_CLOSECB circuit breaker closing by the circuit breaker control function Used to generate a circuit breaker close order based on a particular condition o V_INHIBCLOSE inhibition of circuit breaker closing by the circuit breaker control function Us
128. relay 1 xx 01 relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 6 2 CB control 6 3 Activity 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Vsd set point Unp 7 Tripping time delay 10 ms 8 Reserved 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved ANSI 27R Remanent undervoltage Function number 0901 Setting Data Format Unit Latching 6 Reserved Activity Reserved Reserved Us set point Unp Tripping time delay 10 ms Reserved Reserved Reserved Ol O N OD oO A j N oO Reserved ANSI 32P Active overpower Function number 2301 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 6 3 Activity 4 Type 0 reverse power 1 overpower 5 Reserved 6 Reserved 7 Ps set point 100 W 8 Tripping time delay 10 ms 9 Reserved E 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved Electric Schneider 183 Modbus communication Access to remote settings ANSI 32Q Reactive overpower Function number 2401 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity O 4 Type 0 reverse power 1 overpower 5 Reserved 6 Reserved 7 Qs set point 100 var 8 Tripping time delay 10 ms 9 Reserved z 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved ANSI 37 Phase undercurrent Function number 0501 Set
129. specifications and designs change from time to time please ask for confirmation of the information given in this publication as Printed on recycled paper Production Assystem France Publication Schneider Electric Printed 03 2011
130. standard injection box the ACE917 injection adapter is required The ACE917 adapter is inserted between m the standard injection box m the LPCT test plug o integrated in the Sepam CCA670 connector o or transferred by means of the CCA613 accessory The ACE917 injection adapter should be set according to the currents selected on the CCA670 connector the ACE917 setting should be equal to the number of the microswitch that is set to 1 on the CCA670 The injection value depends on the rated primary current selected on the CCA670 connector and entered in the Sepam general settings i e m 1A for the following values in Amps 25 50 100 133 200 320 400 630 m 5A for the following values in Amps 125 250 500 666 1000 1600 2000 3150 Block diagram without CCA613 accessory Sepam series 40 CCA670 a st eed 1 l 0 gt vs L2 en MI lt irsell 3 L3 B gt lt e 12345678 1 negunnne o 88 Check 23 plug ACE917 4 5 3 6 2 f i 8 Input Li Lo ig 11 N Single phase or 3 phase generator A PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Commissioning Description Check to be carried out when the residual current is measured by a specific sensor such as m CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT m CSH30 interposing ring CT whether it is installed on the secondary circuit of a single 1 A or 5 A CT which encompasses the 3 ph
131. standards m nickel 100 Q or 120 Q at 0 C or 32 F Each RTD channel gives one measurement tx RTD x temperature The function also indicates RTD faults m RTD disconnected tx gt 205 C or t gt 401 F m RTD shorted tx lt 35 C or t lt 31 F In the event of a fault display of the value is inhibited The associated monitoring function generates a maintenance alarm Readout The measurement may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the amp key in C or in F m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Range 30 C to 200 C 22 F to 392 F Resolution 1 C 1 F Accuracy 9 1 C from 20 to 140 C 1 8 F from 68 F to 284 F 2 C from 30 to 20 C 3 6 F from 22 F to 68 F 2 C from 140 to 200 C 3 6 F from 284 F to 392 F Refresh interval 5 seconds typical Accuracy derating according to wiring See Installation of MET148 2 module page 228 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 MT10180 Network diagnosis functions lA TRIPI gt TO t Tripping current TRIPI1 acquisition PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Tripping context Tripping current Tripping context Operation This function gives the values of physical units at the time of tripping to enable analysis of the cause of the fault The values available accessible via
132. sub function 14 reading of identification DO Do Do 0 000 The following exception codes are supported m 1 unknown function code m 2 incorrect address m 3 incorrect data m 4 not ready cannot process request m 7 not acknowledged remote reading and setting Modbus specification The full description of the Modbus protocol can be found at www modbus org Schneider 143 DE80299 DE52312 Modbus communication broadcasting slave 144 master slave Tr lt 15 ms Schneider slave broadcasting question Tr lt 15 ms Modbus protocol Serial line Modbus This description is limited to the Modbus protocol using a serial link in binary mode RTU mode Frames All the frames exchanged have the same structure made up of 3 parts Slave address Modbus PDU Check CRC16 m Slave address 1 byte from 1 to 247 0 for broadcasting m Modbus PDU as previously described m Check 2 bytes CRC16 used to check frame integrity The slave addresses in the reply and in the request are identical The maximum size of a frame is 256 bytes 255 for Sepam series 40 Synchronization of exchanges Any character that is received after a silence of more than 3 5 characters is considered as the beginning of a new frame A minimum silence of 3 5 characters must always be observed between two frames A s
133. the U21 voltage is above the Vs set point It includes a definite time delay T Block diagram 1 Or U21 gt Vs if only one VT T 0 gt time delayed output pick up signal Characteristics Fs set point Setting 50 to 55 Hz or 60 to 65 Hz Accuracy 1 0 02 Hz Resolution 0 1 Hz Pick up drop out difference 0 25 Hz 0 1 Hz Vs set point Setting 20 Unp to 50 Unp Accuracy 2 Resolution 1 Time delay T Setting 100 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic times Operation time pick up lt 80 ms Overshoot time lt 40 ms Reset time lt 50 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 and df dt lt 3 Hz s PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Protection functions PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Underfrequency ANSI code 81L Operation The function picks up when the positive sequence voltage frequency is below the Fs set point and if the positive sequence voltage is above the Vs set point If a single VT is connected U21 the function picks up when the frequency is below the Fs set point and the U21 voltage is is above the Vs set point It includes a definite time delay T The protection function includes a restraint which may be configured according to the rate of change of frequency which inhibits the protection in the event of a continuous decrease in frequency greater than the inhibition set point
134. the block diagram below Sepam series 40 voltage test terminal box 2 Turn the generator on 3 Apply via the test box the voltage delivered at the V N terminals of the generator set to V3 2 times the rated secondary phase to phase voltage of the VTs i e V3 Uns 2 between terminals 1 3 of Sepam s voltage inputs 4 Inject the generator I current set to the rated secondary current of the CTs i e 1 A or 5 A and in phase with the V N voltage applied i e generator phase displacement a V N I 0 to Sepam s phase 1 current input via the test box 5 Use the SFT2841 software to check the following m the value indicated for l1 phase current is approximately equal to the rated primary current of the CT Inp m the value indicated for V1 phase to neutral voltage is approximately equal to the rated primary phase to neutral voltage of the VT Vnp Unp V3 m the value indicated for the phase displacement 1 V1 11 between the I1 current and V1 voltage is approximately equal to 0 6 Proceed in the same way to check the 12 V2 2 V2 12 values m apply the generator V N voltage set to V3 Uns 2 in parallel between terminals 1 3 and 2 3 of Sepam s voltage inputs via the test box m inject an current set to 1 A or 5 A and in phase opposition with the V N voltage i e o V N I 180 to Sepam s phase 2 current input via the test box
135. the design of the power system Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding m Beware of potential hazards wear personal protective equipment carefully inspect the work area for tools and objects that may have been left inside the equipment m The successful operation of this equipment depends upon proper handling installation and operation Neglecting fundamental installation requirements can lead to personal injury as well as damage to electrical equipment or other property m Handling this product requires relevant expertise in the field of protection of electrical networks Only competent people who have this expertise are allowed to configure and set up this product m Before performing Dielectric Hi Pot or Megger testing on any equipment in which the relay is installed disconnect all input and output wires to the relay High voltage testing can damage electronic components contained in the Sepam unit Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 200 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Installation We recommend that you follow the instructions given in this document for quick correct installation of your Sepam unit m Equipment identification m Assembly m Connection of inputs current voltage and sensors m Connection of power supply m Checking prior to commissioning PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Precautions Transport handing and storage Sepam in i
136. the phase overcurrent protection functions 50 51 of both incomers o and trips the incomer circuit breaker m protection function 67 of the fault free incomer is insensitive to fault current in the busbar direction Examples of parallel incomer protection function setting Protection by Sepam S42 or S52 m logic input output assignment o 113 blocking reception 1 Do not assign any inputs to blocking reception 2 o O3 send blocking information BI1 m protection function 67 unit 1 tripping direction line o instantaneous output send blocking information BI1 o time delayed output inhibited by receipt of BI1 on 113 m protection function 67 unit 2 tripping direction line o time delayed output tripping of circuit breaker triggered by fault upstream from incomer not inhibited since no input is assigned to blocking reception 2 Protection by Sepam T42 or T52 m logic input output assignment O 113 blocking reception 1 o O3 send blocking information BI1 m protection function 67 unit 1 tripping direction line o instantaneous output send blocking information BI1 o time delayed output tripping of circuit breaker triggered by a fault upstream from the incomer not inhibited by the receipt of BI1 on 113 m protection function 67 unit 2 if necessary 124 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Control and monitoring functions PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE51203 Disturbance recording triggering Description The re
137. the protection units program logic and logic inputs Each column creates a logic OR between all the lines selected The matrix may also be used to display the alarms connected to the information It guarantees the consistency of the parameter setting with the predefined functions The following data are managed in the control matrix and may be set using the SFT2841 software tool Protections button All of the application protection functions Protection time delayed output and additional Additional actions in the Characteristic outputs when applicable tab In service out of service Protection latching Participation of the protection unit in circuit breaker tripping Control functions button Tripping Tripping by the circuit breaker control function Forced on O1 Inhibit closing Inhibition of closing by the circuit breaker Forced on O2 control function Closing Closing by the circuit breaker control function Forced on O11 requires an MES114 Pick up Logical OR of the instantaneous output of all protection units Drop out A protection unit time delay counter has not yet gone back to 0 TCS fault Trip circuit fault Remote control discrepancy Circuit breaker position Discrepancy between the last state ordered by the remote monitoring and control system and the position of the circuit breaker CB control fault A circuit breaker open or close order has not been executed Fault recording inhibiti
138. time Value of the configured hello time Learned hello time Operational value for hello time Configured forward delay Reminder of the configured forward delay Learned forward delay Operational value for forward delay Configured max age Value of the configured max age Learned max age Operational value for max age PCRED301006EN 03 2011 PE80413 Modbus communication RSTP Port Statistics Pot P OP2 Status Forwarding Role Root Priority 1128 Port Path Cost 200000 Designated Port ID 128 15 Received RSTs 32824 Transmitted RSTs 3 Received Configure 0 Transmitted Configure 0 Received TCNs 0 Transmitted TCNs 0 ACE850 RSTP port statistics PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Commissioning and diagnosis Ethernet communication RSTP port statistics Item Description Port P1 P2 buttons Selection of the port of which statistics are displayed Status RSTP status for the selected port Role RSTP role for the selected port Priority Port priority Port path cost Port contribution to root path cost Designated port ID Identifier of the link partner port priority number Received RSTs Number of RST BPDUs received RSTP Transmitted RSTs Number of RST BPDUs sent RSTP Received configure Number of Configuration BPDUs received STP Transmitted configure Number of Configuration BPDUs sent STP Received TCNs Number of Topo
139. time m operating time before overload tripping m waiting time after tripping m operating time and number of operations m circuit breaker charging time Program logic data readout m atable of 144 pre assigned remote indications TS depends on the type of Sepam enables the readout of program logic data status m readout of the status of 10 logic inputs Remote control orders Writing of 16 impulse type remote control orders TC in either direct mode or SBO Select Before Operate mode via 16 selection bits Other functions m reading of Sepam configuration and identification m time tagging of events synchronization via the network or externally via logic input 121 time tagging within a millisecond m remote reading of Sepam settings m remote setting of protection units m remote control of the analog output with MSA141 option m transfer of disturbance recording data PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE80334 Modbus communication request reply slave slave PCRED301006EN 03 2011 master slave Modbus protocol Presentation Exchanges The Modbus protocol exchanges information using a request reply mechanism between a master and a slave An exchange is always initiated request sent by the master The only action on the part of a slave is to reply to requests received Where the communication network permits several slaves units can be connected to
140. to the communication network m Converters and other accessories as options which are used for complete implementation of the communication network Communication interface selection guide ACE949 2 ACE959 ACE937 ACE969TP 2 ACE969FO 2 ACE850TP ACE850FO Type of Sepam Sepam series 20 E 7 Sepam series 40 60 80 E Type of network S LAN S LAN S LAN gt gt ig Ba and E LAN and E LAN or E LAN or E LAN or E LAN Protocol Modbus RTU a 8 m 0 C DNP3 a a IEC 60870 5 103 a 0 m 0 Modbus TCP IP E IEC 61850 E Physical interface RS 485 2 wire m E 4 wire Fiber optic ST Star 7 Ring m 2 10 100 base Tx 2 ports 100 base Fx 2 ports Power supply DC Supplied by Supplied by Supplied by 24 to 250 V 24 to 250 V 24 to 250 V 24 to 250 V AC Sepam Sepam Sepam 110 to 240 V 110 to 240 V 110 to 240 V 110 to 240 V See details on page page 243 page 244 page 245 page 246 page 246 page 252 page 252 1 Only one connection possible S LAN or E LAN 2 Except with the Modbus RTU protocol 3 Not supported simultaneously 1 protocol per application Converter selection guide ACE909 2 ACE919CA ACE919CC EGX100 EGX300 ECI850 To supervisor Physical interface 1 RS 232 port 1 port 1 port 1 Ethernet port 1 Ethernet port 1 Ethernet port 2 wire RS 485 2 wire R
141. trip command as outlined in the table below DE80351 CAUTION Selecting the trip command RISK OF UNPROTECTED INSTALLATION Diagram Control Event Trip Advantag Disadvantage Always connect the watchdog output to a e monitoring device when the selected trip 1 Shunt trip breaker Sepam failure or No Availability of Installation not command does not result in the installation or mechanical loss of the the protected until tripping when Sepam fails latching contactor auxiliary power installation remedial z j g supply intervention Failure to follow these instructions can result 2 Breaker with Sepam failure or Yes Safety of the Installation not in equipment damage undervoltage trip loss of the installation available until coil fail safe auxiliary power remedial supply intervention 3 Breaker with Sepam failure No Availability of Installation not undervoltage trip the protected until coil not fail safe installation remedial intervention 1 Loss of auxiliary Yes Safety of the Installation not power supply installation available until remedial intervention 1 It is essential to use the watchdog see the warning notice opposite Example of use with shunt trip coil diagram 1 Breaker closed Breaker open gt Q gt H2 Inhibit closing 02 a Closing Setting the Sepam output parameter N O Shunt 01 N O closing C trip 02 N C coil coil 011 N O 138 Schneider
142. type connector Sepam receiving 3 Tx female ST type connector Sepam sending DB114632 248 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DB114795 Installation ACE969TP 2 and ACE969FO 2 Multi protocol interfaces Connection Power supply and Sepam m The ACE969 2 interface connects to connector C on the Sepam base unit using a CCA612 cord length 3 m or 9 84 ft white RJ45 fittings m The ACE969 2 interface must be supplied with 24 to 250 V DC or 110 to 240 V AC A DANGER is off earth HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device m NEVER work alone m Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding m Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that allpower m Start by connecting the device to the protective earth and to the functional m Screw tight all terminals even those not in use Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Terminals e1 e2 supply Type Screw terminals Wiring m Wiring with no fittings o 1 wire with maximum cross section 0 2 to 2 5 mm z AWG 24 12 or 2 wires with maximum cross section 0 2 to 1 mm z AWG 24 18 o st
143. which ANSI 50 51 protection units it affects m define the type of action multiplying factor or blocking its duration T x and if necessary the multiplying factor M x for each ANSI 50 51 protection unit x By default the CLPU 50 51 function is off Block diagram CLPU 50 51 x ON 1 12 Max eq I lt 5 In 3 4 ANSI 50 51 Unit x logic input A Ha Downstream load start up y 1 amp T 0 i CLPU 1 120 k 12 4 gt M x ls m time delayed Downstream load 13 4 amp gt output 51 x start up by Logic Equation I gt CLPUs instantaneous amp 1 gt output 50 x Action ofthe CLPU 50 51 function on set point Is of ANSI 50 51 protection unit x during time delay T x depends on the Global action CLPU 50 51 setting multiplication of set point Is by a coefficient M x blocking 74 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Protection functions PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Phase overcurrent Cold Load Pick Up Blocking CLPU 50 51 Characteristics Time before activation Tcold Setting common to CLPU 50 51 and CLPU 50N 51N functions Setting 0 1 to 300s Resolution 10 ms Accuracy 2 or 20 ms Pick up threshold CLPUs Setting common to CLPU 50 51 and CLPU 50N 51N functions Setting 10 to 100 In Resolution 1 In Accuracy 5 or 1 In
144. 0 0 00578 lt k lt 0 04 Standard settings for tripping zone The settings below are given for usual applications in the different earthing systems The shaded boxes represent default settings Angle Lim 1 190 100 100 Angle Lim 2 350 280 280 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Protection functions Definition Reclaim time The reclaim time delay is activated by a circuit breaker closing order given by the recloser If no faults are detected before the end of the reclaim time delay the initial fault is considered to have been cleared Otherwise a new reclosing cycle is initiated Safety time until recloser ready After manual closing of the circuit breaker the recloser function is inhibited during this time If a fault occurs during this time no reclosing cycles are initiated and the circuit breaker remains permanently open Dead time The cycle n dead time delay is activated by the circuit breaker tripping order given by the recloser in cycle n The breaking device remains open throughout the time delay At the end of the cycle n dead time delay the n 1 cycle begins and the recloser orders the closing of the circuit breaker Operation Initialization of the recloser The recloser is ready to operate if all of the following conditions are met CB control function activated and recloser in service m circuit breaker closed m safety time until 79 ready elapsed m none of the recloser inhibition condition
145. 0 Modbus TCP IP 59659 ACE850F0O fiber optic Ethernet multi protocol interface IEC 61850 Modbus TCP IP 59660 CCA770 remote module connection cord L 0 6 m 2 ft 59661 CCA772 remote module connection cord L 2 m 6 6 ft 59662 CCA774 remote module connection cord L 4 m 13 1 ft 59663 CCA612 communication interface communication cord except ACE850 L 3m 9 8 ft 59664 CCA783 PC RS 232 port connection cord 59666 CCA613 LPCT test plug 59667 ACE917 LPCT injection adapter 59668 CCA620 20 pin screw type connector 59669 CCA622 20 pin ring lug connector 59670 AMT840 mounting plate 59671 CCA784 PC USB port connection cord 59672 ACE990 core balance CT interface for IO input 59676 Kit 2640 2 sets of spare connectors for MES114 59679 SFT2841 CD ROM with SFT2841 and SFT2826 software without CCA783 cord 59680 Substation application type S40 59681 Substation application type S41 59682 Substation application type S42 59683 Transformer application type T40 59684 Transformer application type T42 59685 Motor application type M41 59686 Generator application type G40 59687 Substation application type S43 59688 Substation application type S44 59689 Motor application type M40 59723 ACE969TP 2 2 wire RS 485 multi protocol interface Modbus
146. 0 3 In0 typically 50 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 40 ms for T1 0 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE51201 Protection functions Directional earth fault ANSI code 67N 67NC Lim 1 Type 3 operation The protection function operates like an earth fault protection function with an added angular direction criterion Lim 1 Lim 2 It is adapted for distribution networks in which the neutral earthing system varies vo according to the operating mode The tripping direction may be set at the busbar end or line end The residual current is the current measured at the Sepam 10 input The time delay may be definite time DT IsO set point CERTI EENE In choosing an Is0 setting equal to zero the protection is equivalent to the neutral voltage displacement protection ANSI 59N Block diagram CSH core bal CT core bal CT ACE990 Lim 1 Lim 2 time delayed A A busbar line Lim 1 lt 0 lt Lim 2 choice v1 v pick up signal and to logic discrimination V3 VO gt VsO external m Definite time operation IsO is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation time delay tA TF IsO 10 Definite time protection principle PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 97 Electric Protection functions 98 Schneider Directional earth fault ANSI code 67N 67NC Characteristics Type 3 Measurement origin
147. 0 to 359 26 Group B tripping curve 2 27 Group B types 1 and 2 IsO set point 0 1A Group B type 3 IsO set point 0 01A 28 Group B tripping time delay 10 ms 29 Group B types 1 and 2 VsO Unp Group B type 3 VsO 0 1 Unp 30 Group B timer hold curve 3 31 Group B timer hold delay 10 ms 32 Group B memory time 10 ms 33 Group B memory voltage Unp 34 Reserved 35 Reserved 36 Reserved z 37 Reserved Electric Schneider 191 Modbus communication Access to remote settings ANSI 79 Recloser Function number 1701 192 Schneider Es Electric Setting Data Format Unit 1 Activity 2 Number of cycles 1to4 3 Reclaim time 10 ms 4 Safety time until ready 10 ms 5 Dead time extension 6 Maximum waiting time 10 ms 7 Reserved 8 Reserved 9 Cycle 1 activation mode 10 Cycle 1 dead time 10 ms 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 13 Cycle 2 3 4 activation mode 14 Cycle 2 dead time 10 ms 15 Cycle 3 dead time 10 ms 16 Cycle 4 dead time 10 ms 17 Reserved 18 Reserved ANSI 81H Overfrequency Function number 13xx relay 1 xx 01 relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 6 3 Activity 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Fs set point 0 1 Hz 7 Tripping time delay 10 ms 8 Reserved 9 Vs set point Unp 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 2 13 Reser
148. 0 to protect its power supply Compatible Sepam The ECI850 servers are compatible with the following Sepam m Sepam series 20 version gt V0526 m Sepam series 40 version gt V3 00 m Sepam series 60 all versions m Sepam series 80 base version and application version gt V3 00 Characteristics ECI850 module Technical characteristics Weight 0 17 kg 0 37 Ib Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail Power supply Voltage 24 V DC 10 supplied by a class 2 power supply Maximum consumption 4W Dielectric withstand 1 5 kV Environmental characteristics Operating temperature 25 C to 70 C 13 F to 158 F Storage temperature 40 C to 85 C 40 F to 185 F Humidity ratio 5 to 95 relative humidity non condensing at 55 C 131 F Degree of pollution Class 2 Tightness IP30 Electromagnetic compatibility Emission tests Emissions radiated and conducted EN 55022 EN 55011 FCC Class A Immunity tests Radiated disturbances Electrostatic discharge EN 61000 4 2 Radiated radiofrequencies EN 61000 4 3 Magnetic fields at the network frequency EN 61000 4 8 Immunity tests Conducted disturbances Fast transient bursts EN 61000 4 4 Surges EN 61000 4 5 Conducted radiofrequencies EN 61000 4 6 Safety International IEC 60950 USA UL 508 UL 60950 Canada cUL complies with CSA C22 2 no 60950 Australia New Zealand AS NZS 60950 Certification Europe cE 2 wire 4 wire
149. 0047 0 0036 150 0 0673 0 0619 0 0509 0 0426 0 0361 0 0311 0 0270 0 0237 0 0210 0 0187 0 0168 0 0151 0 0096 0 0067 0 0049 0 0038 155 0 0696 0 0640 0 0526 0 0440 0 0374 0 0321 0 0279 0 0245 0 0217 0 0193 0 0173 0 0156 0 0100 0 0069 0 0051 0 0039 160 0 0720 0 0661 0 0543 0 0455 0 0386 0 0332 0 0289 0 0253 0 0224 0 0200 0 0179 0 0161 0 0103 0 0071 0 0052 0 0040 165 0 0743 0 0683 0 0561 0 0469 0 0398 0 0343 0 0298 0 0261 0 0231 0 0206 0 0185 0 0166 0 0106 0 0074 0 0054 0 0041 170 0 0766 0 0704 0 0578 0 0484 0 0411 0 0353 0 0307 0 0269 0 0238 0 0212 0 0190 0 0171 0 0109 0 0076 0 0056 0 0043 175 0 0790 0 0726 0 0596 0 0498 0 0423 0 0364 0 0316 0 0277 0 0245 0 0218 0 0196 0 0177 0 0113 0 0078 0 0057 0 0044 180 0 0813 0 0747 0 0613 0 0513 0 0435 0 0374 0 0325 0 0285 0 0252 0 0225 0 0201 0 0182 0 0116 0 0080 0 0059 0 0045 185 0 0837 0 0769 0 0631 0 0528 0 0448 0 0385 0 0334 0 0293 0 0259 0 0231 0 0207 0 0187 0 0119 0 0083 0 0061 0 0046 190 0 0861 0 0790 0 0649 0 0542 0 0460 0 0395 0 0344 0 0301 0 0266 0 0237 0 0213 0 0192 0 0122 0 0085 0 0062 0 0048 195 0 0884 0 0812 0 0666 0 0557 0 0473 0 0406 0 0353 0 0309 0 0274 0 0244 0 0218 0 0197 0 0126 0 0087 0 0064 0 0049 200 0 0908 0 0834 0 0684 0 0572 0 0485 0 0417 0 0362 0 0317 0 0281 0 0250 0 0224 0 0202 0 0129 0 0089 0 0066 0 0050 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 69 Electric Protection functions Thermal overload ANSI code 49 RMS Setting examples Hot curves
150. 011 Use Advanced UMI White keys for current operation key The reset key resets Sepam extinction of signal lamps and resetting of protection units after the disappearance of faults The alarm messages are not erased Sepam resetting must be confirmed on bi 1 gt 5l b gt 5iN b gt 5iN ext Ooff Ylon Trip MT10301 2001 10 06 12 40 50 PHASE FAULT 1A AA Phase 1 we When an alarm is present on the Sepam display the clear key is used to return to the screen that was present prior to the appearance of the alarm or to a less recent unacknowledged alarm Sepam is not reset In the metering or diagnosis or alarm menus the clear on Q BSI be51 b gt 5iN b gt gt SIN ext Yooff Ylon Trip MT10284 key may be used to reset the average currents peak demand currents running hours counter and alarm 1 Max 1 80A stack when they are shown on the display l2max 1 81 A I2max 180A key Press the lamp test key for 5 seconds to start up a LED and display test sequence When an alarm is present the lamp test key is disabled on N Bst b gt 5i b gt SIN b gt gt 5iN ext Ooff lon Tip MT10283 162A ans 161A aus 163A ans Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 P Electric 281 Use Advanced UMI Blue keys for parameter and protection setting key on b5i 251 b gt 5iN b gt gt SIN ext Ooff Ylon Trip MT 10810 The status key is used to display and enter the Sepa
151. 03 2011 Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding Measurement zone x 10 Measurements x 10 Word address Access Modbus function Format Unit enabled Phase current I1 x 10 0136 R 3 4 16NS 1A Phase current I2 x 10 0137 R 3 4 16NS 1A Phase current I3 x 10 0138 R 3 4 16NS 1A Residual current 10 Sum x 10 0139 R 3 4 16NS 1A Residual current measured x 10 013A R 3 4 16NS 1A Average phase current Im1 x 10 013B R 3 4 16NS 1A Average phase current Im2 x 10 013C R 3 4 16NS 1A Average phase current Im3 x 10 013D R 3 4 16NS 1A Peak demand phase current IM1 x 10 013E R 3 4 16NS 1A Peak demand phase current IM2 x 10 013F R 3 4 16NS 1A Peak demand phase current IM3 x 10 0140 R 3 4 16NS 1A Phase to phase voltage U21 x 10 0141 R 3 4 16NS 10V Phase to phase voltage U32 x 10 0142 R 3 4 16NS 10V Phase to phase voltage U13 x 10 0143 R 3 4 16NS 10V Phase to neutral voltage V1 x 10 0144 R 3 4 16NS 10V Phase to neutral voltage V2 x 10 0145 R 3 4 16NS 10V Phase to neutral voltage V3 x 10 0146 R 3 4 16NS 10V Residual voltage VO x 10 0147 R 3 4 16NS 10V Positive sequence voltage Vd x 10 0148 R 3 4 16NS 10V Negative sequence voltage Vi x 10 0149 R 3 4 16NS 10V Frequency 014A R 3 4 16NS 0 01 Hz Active power P x 100 014B R 3 4 16S 100 kw Reactive power Q
152. 0376 0 0346 0 0285 0 0239 0 0203 0 0175 0 0152 0 0134 0 0118 0 0105 0 0095 0 0085 0 0055 0 0038 0 0028 0 0021 90 0 0398 0 0367 0 0302 0 0253 0 0215 0 0185 0 0161 0 0142 0 0125 0 0112 0 0100 0 0090 0 0058 0 0040 0 0029 0 0023 95 0 0421 0 0387 0 0319 0 0267 0 0227 0 0196 0 0170 0 0150 0 0132 0 0118 0 0106 0 0095 0 0061 0 0042 0 0031 0 0024 100 0 0444 0 0408 0 0336 0 0282 0 0240 0 0206 0 0179 0 0157 0 0139 0 0124 0 0111 0 0101 0 0064 0 0045 0 0033 0 0025 105 0 0466 0 0429 0 0353 0 0296 0 0252 0 0217 0 0188 0 0165 0 0146 0 0130 0 0117 0 0106 0 0067 0 0047 0 0034 0 0026 110 0 0489 0 0450 0 0370 0 0310 0 0264 0 0227 0 0197 0 0173 0 0153 0 0137 0 0123 0 0111 0 0071 0 0049 0 0036 0 0028 115 0 0512 0 0471 0 0388 0 0325 0 0276 0 0237 0 0207 0 0181 0 0160 0 0143 0 0128 0 0116 0 0074 0 0051 0 0038 0 0029 120 0 0535 0 0492 0 0405 0 0339 0 0288 0 0248 0 0216 0 0189 0 0167 0 0149 0 0134 0 0121 0 0077 0 0053 0 0039 0 0030 125 0 0558 0 0513 0 0422 0 0353 0 0300 0 0258 0 0225 0 0197 0 0175 0 0156 0 0139 0 0126 0 0080 0 0056 0 0041 0 0031 130 0 0581 0 0534 0 0439 0 0368 0 0313 0 0269 0 0234 0 0205 0 0182 0 0162 0 0145 0 0131 0 0084 0 0058 0 0043 0 0033 135 0 0604 0 0555 0 0457 0 0382 0 0325 0 0279 0 0243 0 0213 0 0189 0 0168 0 0151 0 0136 0 0087 0 0060 0 0044 0 0034 140 0 0627 0 0576 0 0474 0 0397 0 0337 0 0290 0 0252 0 0221 0 0196 0 0174 0 0156 0 0141 0 0090 0 0062 0 0046 0 0035 145 0 0650 0 0598 0 0491 0 0411 0 0349 0 0300 0 0261 0 0229 0 0203 0 0181 0 0162 0 0146 0 0093 0 0065 0
153. 1 751 1 019 1 099 1 164 1 400 1 078 1 126 1 337 8 5 1 078 1 200 1 390 1 504 1 013 1 070 1 112 1 273 1 055 1 087 1 233 9 0 1 049 1 125 1 238 1 303 1 008 1 044 1 068 1 166 1 035 1 054 1 144 9 5 1 023 1 059 1 109 1 137 1 004 1 021 1 031 1 077 1 016 1 026 1 067 10 0 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 10 5 0 979 0 947 0 906 0 885 0 996 0 981 0 973 0 934 0 985 0 977 0 941 11 0 0 959 0 900 0 825 0 787 0 993 0 963 0 950 0 877 0 972 0 957 0 888 11 5 0 941 0 857 0 754 0 704 0 990 0 947 0 929 0 828 0 960 0 939 0 841 12 0 0 925 0 818 0 692 0 633 0 988 0 932 0 912 0 784 0 949 0 922 0 799 12 5 0 910 0 783 0 638 0 572 0 985 0 918 0 896 0 746 0 938 0 907 0 761 13 0 0 895 0 750 0 589 0 518 0 983 0 905 0 882 0 712 0 929 0 893 0 727 13 5 0 882 0 720 0 546 0 471 0 981 0 893 0 870 0 682 0 920 0 880 0 695 14 0 0 870 0 692 0 508 0 430 0 979 0 882 0 858 0 655 0 912 0 868 0 667 14 5 0 858 0 667 0 473 0 394 0 977 0 871 0 849 0 631 0 905 0 857 0 641 15 0 0 847 0 643 0 442 0 362 0 976 0 861 0 840 0 609 0 898 0 846 0 616 15 5 0 836 0 621 0 414 0 334 0 974 0 852 0 831 0 589 0 891 0 837 0 594 16 0 0 827 0 600 0 388 0 308 0 973 0 843 0 824 0 571 0 885 0 828 0 573 16 5 0 817 0 581 0 365 0 285 0 971 0 834 0 817 0 555 0 879 0 819 0 554 17 0 0 808 0 563 0 344 0 265 0 970 0 826 0 811 0 540 0 874 0 811 0 536 17 5 0 800 0 545 0 324 0 246 0 969 0 819 0 806 0 527 0 869 0 804 0 519 18 0 0 792 0 529 0 307 0 229 0 968 0 812 0 801 0 514 0 864 0 797 0 504 18 5 0 784 0 5
154. 1 stop bit compulsory for Sepam 1 2 stop bits 0 Converter configuration when delivered m 12 V DC distributed power supply m 11 bit format with parity check m 2 wire RS 485 network polarization and impedance matching resistors activated Connection RS 232 link m To 2 5 mm AWG 12 screw type terminal block A m Maximum length 10 m 33 ft m Rx Tx RS 232 receiving sending by ACE909 2 m OV Rx Tx common do not earth 2 wire RS 485 link with distributed power supply m To connector female 9 pin sub D m 2 wire RS 485 signals L L m Distributed power supply V 12 V DC or 24 V DC V 0 V Power supply m To 2 5 mm AWG 12 screw type terminal block m Reversible phase and neutral m Earthed via terminal block and metal case ring lug on back of case Electric Schneider 259 PE80316 Installation ACE919CC RS 485 RS 485 converter A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device m NEVER work alone m Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding m Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off m Start by connecting the device to the p
155. 14 0 290 0 214 0 967 0 805 0 796 0 503 0 860 0 790 0 489 19 0 0 777 0 500 0 275 0 200 0 966 0 798 0 792 0 492 0 855 0 784 0 475 19 5 0 770 0 486 0 261 0 188 0 965 0 792 0 788 0 482 0 851 0 778 0 463 20 0 0 763 0 474 0 248 0 176 0 964 0 786 0 784 0 473 0 848 0 772 0 450 1 Values only suitable for IEC A B and C curves 108 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 MT10539 MT10528 Protection functions Standard inverse time SIT curve Very inverse time VIT or LTI curve RI curve t s A 100 00 10 00 y iy S v x _ curve T 1s LAT A v ee J N N N 3 1 00 RI 5 gt inverse time SIT v N 5 very inverse time VIT or LTI Vis 0 10 gt 1 10 100 IEEE curves t s 10000 00 1000 00 i i i 1 i A 100 004 Nr FT MI n 4 SM gt nt a El x A 7 10 00 x EN N x xi x S N 1 00 0 10 gt Is 1 10 100 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 MT10540 MT10529 General Tripping curves Extremely inverse time EIT curve Ultra inverse time UIT curve t s A 1 000 00 100 00 u B 10 00
156. 15 Ind expressed in Amps Sum of CTs 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt 15 Ind With CSH sensor 2 A rating 0 2 A to 30 A 5 A rating 0 5Ato75A 20 A rating 2 A to 300 A CT 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt 15 In0 min 0 1 A Core balance CT with 0 1 InO lt IsO lt 15 In0 ACE990 IDMTsetting 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt In0 expessed in Amps Sum of CTs 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt InO With CSH sensor 2 A rating 0 2Ato2A 5 A rating 0 5Ato5A 20 A rating 2Ato20A CT 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt 1 InO min 0 1 A Core balance CT with 0 1 Ind lt IsO lt In0 ACE990 Resolution 0 1 Aor 1 digit Accuracy 2 5 or 0 01 InO Drop out pick up ratio Vs0 set point 935 5 with CSH sensor CT or core balance CT ACE990 93 5 5 or gt 1 0 015 In0 IsO x 100 sum of CTs Setting 2 Un to 80 Un Resolution 1 Accuracy 5 Drop out pick up ratio Time delay T operation time at 10 IsO 93 5 5 Setting definite time inst 50 ms lt T lt 300s IDMT 100 ms lt Ts 12 5 s or TMS Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy 2 definite time 2 or 10 ms to 25 ms IDMT Class 5 or from 10 to 25 ms Timer hold delay T1 Definite time timer hold 0 50 ms lt T1 lt 300 s IDMT Characteristic times Operation time 0 5s lt T1 lt 20s Pick up lt 40 ms at 2 IsO typically 25 ms Confirmed instantaneous m inst lt 50 ms at 2 IsO for IsO 2 0 3 InO typically 35 ms m inst lt 70 ms at 2 IsO for Is0 lt
157. 15 Working language English French 59616 Working language English Spanish 59629 CCA634 connector for 1 A 5 ACT I0 current sensors 59630 CCA630 connector for 1 A 5 A CT current sensors 59631 CCA670 connector for LPCT current sensors 59634 CSH30 interposing ring CT for 10 input 59635 CSH120 residual current sensor diameter 120 mm 4 75 in 59636 CSH200 residual current sensor diameter 200 mm 7 87 in 59638 ECI850 IEC 61850 Sepam server with PRI voltage surge arrester 59639 AMT852 lead sealing accessory 59641 MET148 2 8 temperature sensor module 59642 ACE949 2 2 wire RS 485 network interface 59643 ACE959 4 wire RS 485 network interface 59644 ACE937 optical fiber interface 59646 MES114 10 input 4 output module 24 250 V DC 59647 MSA141 1 analog output module 59648 ACE909 2 RS 485 RS 232 converter 59649 ACE919CA RS 485 RS 485 interface AC power supply 59650 ACE919CC RS 485 RS 485 interface DC power supply 59651 MES114E 10 input 4 output module 110 125 V DC and V AC 59652 MES114F 10 input 4 output module 220 250 V DC and V AC TCSEAK0100 Ethernet configuration kit for ECI850 1 Reference 59645 MES108 module 41 40 cancelled and replaced by 59646 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Installation Equipment identification Sepam series 40 List of Sepam series 40 references 59656 CCA626 6 pin screw type connector 59657 CCA627 6 pin ring lug connector 59658 ACE850TP RJ45 Ethernet multi protocol interface IEC 6185
158. 19 li Ib 15 m for 0 5 lt li lb lt 5 464 li Ib 0 98 m for li lb gt 5 t T Block diagram 11 MT11101 t S Schneider curve 2 li gt Is T9 time delayed output 13 pick up signal Characteristics Curve Setting Definite standardized IDMT a choice of 6 Schneider IDMT Is set point Setting Definite time 10 Ib lt Is lt 500 Ib Standardized IDMT 10 Ib lt Is lt 100 Ib IEC IEEE Schneider IDMT 10 Ib lt Is lt 50 Ib Resolution 1 Accuracy 5 Time delay T Setting Definite time 100 ms lt T lt 300s IDMT 100 ms lt T lt 1s Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy 1 Definite time 2 or 25 ms IDMT 5 or 35 ms Characteristic times Operation time pick up lt 55 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 55 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Protection functions Determination of tripping time for different negative sequence current values for a given Schneider curve Negative sequence unbalance ANSI code 46 IDMT tripping Schneider curve t s 10000 Use the table to find the value of K that corresponds to the required negative sequence current 5000 The tripping time is equal to KT Example 2000 given a tripping curve with the setting T 0 5 s 1000 What is the tripping time at 0 6 Ib Use the table to find the value of K th
159. 1A Integration period 5 10 15 30 60 minutes 1 In rated current set in the general settings 2 At In in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 3 Display of values 0 02 to 40 In TS TC equivalence for each protocol Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870 5 103 IEC 61850 TC Binary Output ASDU FUN INF LN DO DA TC6 BO12 MSTA1 RsMaxA ctlVal Schneider 23 Electric Metering functions a Schneider Phase to phase voltage Phase to neutral voltage Phase to phase voltage Operation This function gives the RMS value of the 50 or 60 Hz component of phase to phase voltages according to voltage sensor connections m U21 voltage between phases 2 and 1 m U32 voltage between phases 3 and 2 m U13 voltage between phases 1 and 3 It is based on measurement of the fundamental component Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the amp key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement range 0 06 to 1 2 Unp Unit VorkV Accuracy 0 5 typical 2 1 from 0 5 to 1 2 Unp 2 from 0 06 to 0 5 Unp Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1V Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 Un nominal rating set in the general settings 2 At Unp in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Phase to neutral voltage Operation This function gives the RM
160. 1V Phase to phase voltage U13 0262 R 3 4 32NS 1V Phase to neutral voltage V1 0264 R 3 4 32NS 1V Phase to neutral voltage V2 0266 R 3 4 32NS 1V Phase to neutral voltage V3 0268 R 3 4 32NS 1V Residual voltage VO 026A R 3 4 32NS 1V Positive sequence voltage Vd 026C R 3 4 32NS 1V Negative sequence voltage Vi 026E R 3 4 32NS 1V Frequency 0270 R 3 4 32NS 0 01 Hz Active power P 0272 R 3 4 32S 1 kW Reactive power Q 0274 R 3 4 32S 1 kvar Negative sequence current li 0276 R 3 4 32NS 0 1 A Positive sequence current Id 0278 R 3 4 32NS 0 1 A Faulty phase s 027A R 3 4 32NS 0 Fault location 027C R 3 4 32NS m Fault resistance 027E R 3 4 32NS mQ 1 bit O faulty phase 1 bit 1 faulty phase 2 bit 2 faulty phase 3 166 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding Switchgear diagnosis zone Switchgear diagnosis Word address Access Modbus function Format Unit enabled Initial value of cumulative breaking current 0290 R 3 4 32NS 1 kA2 Cumulative breaking current 0 lt I lt 2 In 0292 R 3 4 32NS 1 kA Cumulative breaking current 2 In lt I lt 5 In 0294 R 3 4 32NS 1 kA Cumulative breaking current 0296 R 3 4 32NS 1 kA2 5 In lt 1 lt 10 In Cumulative breaking current 0298 R 3 4 32NS 1 kA2 10 In lt I lt 40 In Cumulative breaking current I gt 40 In 029A R 3 4 32NS 1 kA2 Cumulative breaking current 029C R 3 4 32NS 1 kA Reserved 029E Number of opera
161. 2 Characteristic times 2 or from 10 ms to 35 ms Operation time lt 80 ms Overshoot time lt 90 ms Reset time lt 80 ms 1 Sn v3 Unp In 2 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Electric Schneider 55 Protection functions Phase undercurrent ANSI code 37 Operation Block diagram This protection is single phase m it picks up when phase 1 current drops below the Is set point m it is inactive when the current is less than 10 of Ib m it is insensitive to current drops breaking due to DE50507 T 0 time delayed output pick up circuit breaker tripping signal m it includes a definite time delay T Tripping of the undercurrent protection may be inhibited Characteristics by the logic input Inhibit undercurrent Is set point t Setting 15 Ib lt Is lt 100 Ib by steps of 1 g Accuracy 5 Pick up drop out ratio 106 5 for Is gt 0 1 In T time delay Tj Setting 50 ms lt T lt 300 s i i Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit 0 0 1 Ib ls Characteristic times Operation time lt 60 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 40 ms Operating principle 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 MT 10865 pick up signal time delayed output l Case of current sag 1 06 Is g Is 0 1 Ib pick up gt lt signal 0 lt 15 ms time delayed output 0 Case of circuit br
162. 2 Underfrequency 81L 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Recloser 4 cycles 79 o o o o o Temperature monitoring 38 49T H o o o o 8 or 16 RTDs 2 set points per RTD Thermostat Buchholz 26 63 o o Control and monitoring Circuit breaker contactor control 94 69 Latching acknowledgment 86 a Logic discrimination 68 oO o o o o o o o o o Switching of groups of settings Annunciation 30 Logic equation editor a m Standard o according to parameter setting and MES114 MES114E MES114F or MET148 2 input output module options 1 For shunt trip unit or undervoltage trip unit 2 2 modules possible 3 Exclusive choice phase to neutral voltage or phase to phase voltage for each of the 2 relays 4 Only for S50 S51 S52 S53 S54 T50 T52 applications 5 Only for S50 S51 S52 S53 S54 applications my S lt hneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Introduction Selection table Substation Transform Motor Generator Metering ANSI code S40 S41 S42 S43 S44 T40 T42 M40 M41 G40 S50 S51 S52 S53 S54 T50 T52 Phase current l1 12 I3 RMS residual current 10 Demand current I1 12 13 peak demand current IM1 IM2 IM3 a Voltage U21 U32 U13 V1 V2 V3 residual voltage VO Positive sequence voltage Vd rotation direction negative sequence voltage Vi Frequency 7 E
163. 2 2 wire RS 485 network connection interface 72 2 83 1 70 mm 2 8 in with CCA612 cord connected i ACE949 2 2 wire Power supply RS 485 12 or network 24V DC B B A A BIB A A V 2 wire Power supply RS 485 12 or network 24V DC PCRED301006EN 03 2011 ACE949 2 2 wire RS 485 network interface Function The ACE949 2 interface performs 2 functions m Electrical interface between Sepam and a 2 wire RS 485 communication network m Main network cable branching box for the connection of a Sepam with a CCA612 cord Characteristics ACE949 2 module Weight 0 1 kg 0 22 Ib Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail Operating temperature 25 C to 70 C 13 F to 158 F Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units 2 wire RS 485 electrical interface Standard EIA 2 wire RS 485 differential Distributed power supply External 12 V DC or 24 V DC 10 Power consumption 16 mA in receiving mode 40 mA maximum in sending mode Maximum length of 2 wire RS 485 network with standard cable Number of Maximum length with Maximum length with Sepam units 12 V DC power supply 24 V DC power supply 5 320 m 1000 ft 1000 m 3300 ft 10 180 m 590 ft 750 m 2500 ft 20 160 m 520 ft 450 m 1500 ft 25 125 m 410 ft 375 m 1200 ft Description and dimensions A and B Terminal blocks for network cable RJ45 socket to
164. 3 U21 U32 VO and U21 U32 Block diagram U21 To Vi gt Vsi time delayed output 3 U32 a pick up signal Characteristics Vsi set point Setting 1 Unp to 50 Unp Accuracy 2 for Vi2 10 Unp 5 for Vi lt 10 Unp Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 97 32 5 at Vi2 10 Unp Time delay T Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 0 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic times Operation time pick up lt 55 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 55 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 61 Electric Protection functions Excessive starting time locked rotor ANSI code 48 51LR 14 Operation This function is three phase It comprises two parts m excessive starting time during starting the protection picks up when one of the 3 phase currents is greater than the set point Is for a longer period of time than the ST time delay normal starting time m locked rotor i o at the normal operating rate after starting the protection picks up when one of ar the 3 phase currents is greater than the set point Is for a longer period of time than the LT time delay of the definite time type o locked on start large motors may have very long starting time due to their inertia or the reduce voltage supply This starting time is longer than the permissive rotor blocking time To protect such a motor LTS timer
165. 3 a ME Configuration window for the communication network via Type Fary Model User label Device name Busbar SW_MAIN Motard Motor02 Motor03 telephone modem 276 Schneider Close SFT2841 setting and operating software Configuration of a Sepam network Configuration of called modem The modem on the Sepam side is the called modem It must first be configured either via AT commands from a PC using HyperTerminal or the configuration tool that may have been supplied with the modem or by setting switches see the modem manufacturer s manual Modem RS 485 interface In general the configuration parameters for the modem s RS 485 interface must be defined in accordance with the Sepam communication interface configuration m speed 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bauds m character format 8 data bits 1 stop bit parity none even odd Telephone network interface Modern modems offer sophisticated features such as checking the quality of the telephone line error correction and data compression These options are not appropriate for communication between SFT2841 and Sepam which is based on the Modbus RTU protocol Their effect on communication performance may be the opposite of the expected result It is therefore highly advisable to m Invalidate the error correction data compression and telephone line quality monitoring options m Use the same end to end communication speed
166. 3 S54 T50 T52 33 Protection 67 unit 1 7 34 Protection 67 unit 2 7 35 Protection 67N unit 1 E E 7 36 Protection 67N unit 2 E E 7 37 Protection 47 E E E E E E 38 Protection 32P E E E 39 Protection 50BF E E E E E E E E E E 40 Protection 32Q E 41 Protection 51V n 42 TC fault E E E E E E E E E E 43 TP Phase fault E E E E E E E E E E 44 TP VO fault E E E E E E E E 8 E 45 Reserved 46 Reserved 47 Reserved 48 Reserved Electric Schneider 169 Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding Address word 0104 TS49 to TS64 Bit address 1040 to 104F TS Application S40 S41 S42 S43 S44 T40 T42 M40 M41 G40 50 S51 S52 S53 S54 T50 T52 49 Reserved 50 Reserved 51 Reserved 52 Reserved 53 Reserved 54 Reserved 55 Reserved 56 Reserved 57 Reserved 58 Reserved 59 Reserved 60 Reserved 61 Reserved 62 Reserved 63 Reserved 64 Reserved Address word 0105 TS65 to TS80 Bit address 1050 to 105F TS Application S40 S41 S42 S43 S44 T40 T42 M40 M41 G40 50 S51 S52 S53 S54 T50 T52 65 Protection 38 49T module 1 alarm set point sensor 1 E E E E E 66 Protection 38 49T module 1 tripping set point sensor 1 E E E E E 67 Protection 38 49T module 1 alarm set point sensor 2 E E E E E 68 Protection 38 49T module 1 tripping set point sensor 2 E E E E E 69 Protection 38 49T module 1 alarm set point sensor 3 E E E E E 70 Protection 38 49T mod
167. 349 959 937 Communication interface Om Connected Motor M41 Example of Sepam configuration screen Moteur 1 Parameter settine Remote controls en 24 01 2002 16 49 05 Z BEE 16 x SFT2841 Sepam 1000 serie 40 Connection window E Eile Edit Operation Sepam Application Options Window s D SHS Bk 2 9re ALALZAV AE MT11193 Sepam hardware configuration General characteristics CTAT Supervision Program logic Password General characteristics eh Taisi r Network frequency Current transformers Meter increment 50Hz Rated secondary current erna Active energy C 60H 5 z Number of CTs 1 1213 g fe kwh f r Selection of active setting group This choice determines the setting group Rated primary current In S30 J A u active for all the protections go z Reactive energy Base current Ib Am fr 1 van h Choice by input 113 x 3 Integration period 5 vj m Remote setting enabled ual current 2A rated CSH120 200 x No C Yes Rated residual current InD F A E r Sepam working language 4 English Voltage transformers Cc I beaikonege Rated primary voltage Unp 100 w p Incomer feeder Fe Rated secondary voltage Uns 100 V Feeder VT connection type vi1v2v3 Edit Sepam label Residual voltage measurement umn of SS BE amp Connected Motor M41 Moteur 1 Operation Remote controls en 24 01 2002 16 56 38 7 Example of general characteristics screen Sc
168. 361 0 9301 0 8424 0 7686 0 7055 0 6508 160 2 9327 2 1030 1 6946 1 4313 1 2417 1 0965 0 9808 0 8860 0 8066 0 7391 0 6809 165 2 3576 1 8441 1 5361 1 3218 1 1609 1 0343 0 9316 0 8461 0 7739 0 7118 170 2 6999 2 0200 1 6532 1 4088 1 2296 1 0908 0 9793 0 8873 0 8099 0 7438 175 3 2244 2 2336 1 7858 1 5041 1 3035 1 1507 1 0294 0 9302 0 8473 0 7768 180 2 5055 1 9388 1 6094 1 3832 1 2144 1 0822 0 9751 0 8861 0 8109 185 2 8802 2 1195 1 7272 1 4698 1 2825 1 1379 1 0220 0 9265 0 8463 190 3 4864 2 3401 1 8608 1 5647 1 3555 1 1970 1 0713 0 9687 0 8829 195 2 6237 2 0149 1 6695 1 4343 1 2597 1 1231 1 0126 0 9209 200 3 0210 2 1972 1 7866 1 5198 1 3266 1 1778 1 0586 0 9605 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 67 Electric Protection functions Thermal overload ANSI code 49 RMS Setting examples Cold curves for Es0 0 I Ib 1 85 1 90 1 95 2 00 2 20 2 40 2 60 2 80 3 00 3 20 3 40 3 60 3 80 4 00 4 20 4 40 4 60 Es 50 0 1579 0 1491 0 1410 0 1335 0 1090 0 0908 0 0768 0 0659 0 0572 0 0501 0 0442 0 0393 0 0352 0 0317 0 0288 0 0262 0 0239 55 0 1752 0 1653 0 1562 0 1479 0 1206 0 1004 0 0849 0 0727 0 0631 0 0552 0 0487 0 0434 0 0388 0 0350 0 0317 0 0288 0 0263 60 0 1927 0 1818 0 1717 0 1625 0 1324 0 1100 0 0929 0 0796 0 069 0 0604 0 0533 0 0474 0 0424 0 0382 0 0346 0 0315 0 0288 65 0 2106 0 1985 0 1875 0 1773 0 1442 0 1197 0 1011 0 0865 0 075 0 0656 0 0579 0 0515 0 0461 0 0415 0 0375 0 0342 0 0312 70 0 2288 0 2156 0 2035 0 1924 0 1562 0 1296 0 1093
169. 37 48 S1LR 66 270 67N Directional earth fault On Latching d d Trip C B Vv Vv Residual current type r 2 m o Tripping cuve Iso threshold Delay paneme dey to e o pasm aa o e or Type Typel Element 1 Element 2 Main functions performed by SFT2841 m changing of passwords m entry of general characteristics ratings integration period m setting Sepam date and time m entry of protection settings m changing of program logic assignments m enabling disabling of functions m saving of files Saving m protection and parameter setting data may be saved m printing of reports is possible as well Group A Active group Group B pam eea v or pasm aa ve 2 oI r Advanced group B ed A Advanced group Delay Votage Memory Memory Sector foe 0 wlan for 0 ro fees 1 2 Tripping behavior coe Angle Vso Threshold za 1277275 58 SIN lt 4 gt Direction R lt Unp line M R Unp Line v R zum line sd 2 np Line Delay Voltage Memory Memory Sector re ft ood PER we The SFT2841 software may also be used to recover disturbance recording files and provide graphic display MIE Connected __ Motor mat Moteur 1 Parameter setting Remote controls en 24 01 2002 16 47 12 using the SFT2826 software tool Operating assistance Access from all the screens to a help section which contains all the technical data required for Sepam
170. 4 Directional reactive overpower 55 Phase undercurrent 56 Temperature monitoring 57 Negative sequence unbalance 58 Broken conductor 60 Negative sequence overvoltage 61 Excessive starting time locked rotor 62 Thermal overload 63 Phase overcurrent 72 Phase overcurrent Cold Load Pick Up Blocking 74 Breaker failure 76 Earth fault 78 Earth fault Cold Load Pick Up Blocking 80 Voltage restrained phase overcurrent 82 Overvoltage 84 Neutral voltage displacement 85 Starts per hour 86 Directional phase overcurrent 87 Directional earth fault 91 Recloser 99 Overfrequency 102 Underfrequency 103 General 104 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 3 Electric Sepam series 40 4 Schneider Electric General contents Control and monitoring functions Description Definition of symbols Logic input output assignment Circuit breaker contactor control ANSI code 94 69 Logic discrimination ANSI code 68 Disturbance recording triggering Switching of groups of settings Local indication ANSI code 30 Control matrix Logic equations Self tests and fail safe position Modbus communication Presentation Modbus protocol Configuring the communication interfaces Commissioning and diagnosis Data addresses and encoding Time tagging of events Access to remote settings Access to remote settings Disturbance recording Reading Sepam identification Installation Safety instructions Precautions Equipment identification Base unit 1 A
171. 4 mor 13 1 ft The DSM303 module may only be connected at the end of the series Maximum configuration A maximum of three modules may be connected to the base unit in compliance with the module order and maximum connection lengths indicated in the table CCA772 MSA141 CCA770 MET148 2 CCA774 DSM303 CCA772 MSA141 CCA770 MET148 2 CCA772 MET148 2 CCA772 MET148 2 CCA770 MET148 2 CCA774 DSM303 x VvvvvVVYYVYVY CCA612 CCA770 MSA141 module MET148 2 CCA772 module or CCA774 DSM303 Electric Schneider 233 PE50021 DE80031 Installation MET148 2 Temperature sensor module Function The MET148 2 module can be used to connect 8 temperature sensors RTDs of the same type m Pt100 Ni100 or Ni120 type RTDs according to parameter setting m 3 wire temperature sensors m A single module for each Sepam series 20 base unit to be connected by one of the CCA770 0 6 or 2 ft CCA772 2 m or 6 6 ft or CCA774 4 m or 13 1 ft cords m 2 modules for each Sepam series 40 Sepam series 60 or Sepam series 80 base unit to be connected by CCA770 0 6 or 2 ft CCA772 2 m or 6 6 ft or CCA774 4 m or 13 1 ft cords The temperature measurement e g in a transformer or motor winding is utilized by eS the following protection functions m Thermal overload to take ambient temperature into account m Temperature monitoring Characteristics MET148 2 module Weight 0 2 kg 0 441 Ib Assembly On
172. 41 analog output module and the new MET148 2 temperature sensor module V3 00 July 2005 Base 1 0528001 to m Compliance with the new ACE969 multi protocol interfaces 0622999 m Remote connection of Sepam setting software SFT2841 V8 0 and higher V4 00 June 2006 Bases 1 2 3 0623001 to Metering 3 phase currents with only 2 CTs and 4 0722999 m Communication protocol DNP3 new possibility to set the threshold of the measurement dead band that starts the transmission event m Sepam time and date setting using the setting software SFT2841 V5 00 June 2007 Bases 1 2 3 0723001 to m 49 RMS function Thermal overload improvement and 4 08129999 O Improvement of the functioning time accuracy when tripping has to occur in a few seconds O Use of 48 51LR excessive starting time and locked rotor protection threshold instead of the actual fixed threshold to detect the motor starting O Improvement of the choice of setting groups to take into account the appropriate time constants as soon as the motor starts m Pre assigned remote indication bit TS130 for the tripping information is now available in communication V5 03 August 2008 Bases 1 2 3 08130001 to New application S43 added and 4 09139999 V6 00 March 2009 Bases 1 2 3 09140001 to m Supervision communication is checked by using remote control orders TC broadcasting If and 4 09349999 the TC is not received in the correct setting time interval the Sepam trips m Inductive and capacitive remote indication TS event
173. 5 b04 b03 b02 b01 b00 Number of events 0 4 Description of the LSB of the exchange word Sepam indicates the number of significant events in the event table in the least significant byte of the exchange word Each non significant event word is initialized to zero Event table acknowledgment To inform Sepam that the block read by the master has been correctly received the master writes the number of the last exchange made in the Exchange number field and resets the Number of events field of the exchange word to zero After acknowledgment the 4 events in the event table are initialized to zero and the old acknowledged events are erased in Sepam Until the exchange word written by the master becomes X 0 with X number of the previous exchange that the master wishes to acknowledge the exchange word in the table remains at X number of previous events Sepam only increments the exchange number when new events are present X 1 number of new events If the event table is empty Sepam performs no processing operations when the master reads the event table or the exchange word The data are encoded in binary format Clearing an event queue Writing a value xxFFh in the exchange word any exchange number event number FFh reinitializes the corresponding event queue all stored events not yet transmitted are deleted This command leads the reset of the bits 10 11 14 and 15 o
174. 5 0 1246 0 0993 0 0813 0 0681 0 0579 0 0499 0 0435 0 0384 0 0341 0 0305 0 0274 0 0248 0 0226 150 0 2312 0 2127 0 1965 0 1823 0 1395 0 1110 0 0908 0 0759 0 0645 0 0556 0 0485 0 0427 0 0379 0 0339 0 0305 0 0276 0 0251 155 0 2575 0 2366 0 2185 0 2025 0 1546 0 1228 0 1004 0 0838 0 0712 0 0614 0 0535 0 0471 0 0418 0 0374 0 0336 0 0304 0 0277 160 0 2846 0 2612 0 2409 0 2231 0 1699 0 1347 0 1100 0 0918 0 0780 0 0671 0 0585 0 0515 0 0457 0 0408 0 0367 0 0332 0 0302 165 0 3124 0 2864 0 2639 0 2442 0 1855 0 1468 0 1197 0 0999 0 0847 0 0729 0 0635 0 0559 0 0496 0 0443 0 0398 0 0360 0 0328 170 0 3410 0 3122 0 2874 0 2657 0 2012 0 1591 0 1296 0 1080 0 0916 0 0788 0 0686 0 0603 0 0535 0 0478 0 0430 0 0389 0 0353 175 0 3705 0 3388 0 3115 0 2877 0 2173 0 1715 0 1395 0 1161 0 0984 0 0847 0 0737 0 0648 0 0574 0 0513 0 0461 0 0417 0 0379 180 0 4008 0 3660 0 3361 0 3102 0 2336 0 1840 0 1495 0 1244 0 1054 0 0906 0 0788 0 0692 0 0614 0 0548 0 0493 0 0446 0 0405 185 0 4321 0 3940 0 3614 0 3331 0 2502 0 1967 0 1597 0 1327 0 1123 0 0965 0 0839 0 0737 0 0653 0 0583 0 0524 0 0474 0 0431 190 0 4644 0 4229 0 3873 0 3567 0 2671 0 2096 0 1699 0 1411 0 1193 0 1025 0 0891 0 0782 0 0693 0 0619 0 0556 0 0503 0 0457 195 0 4978 0 4525 0 4140 0 3808 0 2842 0 2226 0 1802 0 1495 0 1264 0 1085 0 0943 0 0828 0 0733 0 0654 0 0588 0 0531 0 0483 200 0 5324 0 4831 0 4413 0 4055 0 3017 0 2358 0 1907 0 1581 0 1335 0 1145 0 0995 0 0873 0 0773 0 0690 0 0620 0 0560 0 0509
175. 5 4 3 2 1 0 Option MD MX Extension MET148 2 2 DSM303 MSA141 MET148 2 1MES114 MES108 Mod MX 0 z x x x x y y Mod MD 1 z x 0 x x y y x 1 if option included y 1 if option included exclusive options z 1 if extension in 2FE word 4 Bit 0 1 if MES114E or MES114F Vac set up Accuracy Examples Measurement accuracy depends on the weight of the 1 Unit 1A Accuracy 1 2 0 5A unit it is equal to the value of the point divided by 2 U21 Unit 10 V Accuracy 10 2 5 V PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Electric Schneider 167 Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding Test zone The test zone is a 16 word zone that may be accessed via the communication link by all functions in both read and write modes to facilitate communication testing at the time of commissioning or to test the link Test zone Word address Bit address Access Modbus function Format enabled Test 0C00 C000 CO0OF Read write 1 2 3 4 5 6 15 16 None Initialized to 0 OCOF COFO COFF Read write 1 2 3 4 5 6 15 16 None Initialized to 0 Protection setting Word address zone 1 Protection setting zone The protection setting zone is an exchang e table which is used to read and set the protection functions 2 setting zones are available to be used by 2 masters Word address zone 2 Access Modbus function enabled Setting read buffer 1E00 1E7C 2000 207C R 3 Setting read request 1E80 2080 R W 3 6 16 Remote setting request buffer 1F00 1F7C
176. 578 E1 E5 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 0 00676 E2 E5 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 0 00885 E1 E4 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 0 00909 E3 E5 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 0 01136 E2 E4 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 0 01587 E1 E3 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 0 01667 E4 E5 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 0 02000 E3 E4 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 0 02632 E2 E3 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 0 04000 E1 E2 ACE990 range 1 0 2 VA 0 05780 E1 E5 ACE990 range 2 2 5 VA 0 06757 E2 E5 ACE990 range 2 2 5 VA 0 08850 E1 E4 ACE990 range 2 3 0 VA 0 09091 E3 E5 ACE990 range 2 3 0 VA 0 11364 E2 E4 ACE990 range 2 3 0 VA 0 15873 E1 E3 ACE990 range 2 4 5 VA 0 16667 E4 E5 ACE990 range 2 4 5 VA 0 20000 E3 E4 ACE990 range 2 5 5 VA 0 26316 E2 E3 ACE990 range 2 7 5 VA Connection to Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 To residual current l0 input on connector A terminals 19 and 18 shielding Connection to Sepam series 60 To residual current 10 input on connector E terminals 15 and 14 shielding Connection to Sepam series 80 m To residual current IO input on connector terminals 15 and 14 shielding m To residual current l 0 input on connector 8 terminals 18 and 17 shielding Recommended cables m Cable between core balance CT and ACE990 less than 50 m 160 ft long m Sheathed cable shielded by tinned copper braid between the ACE990 and Sepam maximum length 2 m 6 6 ft m Cable cross section between 0 93 mm AWG 18 and 2 5 mm A
177. 5A 1 1A 2 LPCT 7 Number of phase CTs 0 3 CTs 1 2 CTs 8 Rated current In A 9 Basic current Ib A 10 Residual current determination mode 0 None 1 2 ACSH 2 20 A CSH 3 1ACT 4 5ACT 5 ACE990 Range 1 6 ACE990 Range 2 7 5ACSH 8 Sensitive 1 A CT 9 Sensitive 5 A CT 11 Rated residual current InO 0 1A 12 Integration period 0 5mn 1 10 mn 2 15 mn 3 30 mn 4 60 mn 13 Reserved 14 Rated primary voltage Unp V 15 Rated secondary voltage Uns 0 100V 1 110V 2 115V 3 120V 4 200 V 5 230 V 6 Numerical value see setting 21 16 VT wiring 0 3V 1 2U 2 1U 17 Residual voltage mode 0 None 1 23V 2 external VT Uns V3 3 external VT Uns 3 18 Type of cubicle 0 incomer 1 feeder 19 Increment active power 0 1 kW h 20 Increment reactive power 0 1 kvar h 21 Rated secondary voltage Uns Vv PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Modbus communication PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Access to remote settings Protection settings They are organized according to increasing ANSI codes ANSI 27 27S Undervoltage Function number 10xx relay 1 xx 01 relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Voltage mode 0 phase to neutral 1 phase to phase 7 Us or Vs set point Unp or Vnp 8 Tripping time delay 10 ms 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved ANSI 27D Positive sequence undervoltage Function number 08xx
178. 6554 0 5717 0 5055 0 4520 0 4077 180 3 5988 1 7918 1 2933 1 0217 0 8449 0 7191 0 6244 0 5504 0 4908 0 4418 185 2 1665 1 4739 1 1394 0 9316 0 7872 0 6802 0 5974 0 5312 0 4772 190 2 7726 1 6946 1 2730 1 0264 0 8602 0 7392 0 6466 0 5733 0 5138 195 4 5643 1 9782 1 4271 1 1312 0 9390 0 8019 0 6985 0 6173 0 5518 200 2 3755 1 6094 1 2483 1 0245 0 8688 0 7531 0 6633 0 5914 VIb 1 85 1 90 1 95 2 00 2 20 2 40 2 60 2 80 3 00 3 20 3 40 3 60 3 80 4 00 4 20 4 40 4 60 Es 105 0 0209 0 0193 0 0180 0 0168 0 0131 0 0106 0 0087 0 0073 0 0063 0 0054 0 0047 0 0042 0 0037 0 0033 0 0030 0 0027 0 0025 110 0 0422 0 0391 0 0363 0 0339 0 0264 0 0212 0 0175 0 0147 0 0126 0 0109 0 0095 0 0084 0 0075 0 0067 0 0060 0 0055 0 0050 115 0 0639 0 0592 0 0550 0 0513 0 0398 0 0320 0 0264 0 0222 0 0189 0 0164 0 0143 0 0126 0 0112 0 0101 0 0091 0 0082 0 0075 120 0 0862 0 0797 0 0740 0 0690 0 0535 0 0429 0 0353 0 0297 0 0253 0 0219 0 0191 0 0169 0 0150 0 0134 0 0121 0 0110 0 0100 125 0 1089 0 1007 0 0934 0 0870 0 0673 0 0540 0 0444 0 0372 0 0317 0 0274 0 0240 0 0211 0 0188 0 0168 0 0151 0 0137 0 0125 130 0 1322 0 1221 0 1132 0 1054 0 0813 0 0651 0 0535 0 0449 0 0382 0 0330 0 0288 0 0254 0 0226 0 0202 0 0182 0 0165 0 0150 135 0 1560 0 1440 0 1334 0 1241 0 0956 0 0764 0 0627 0 0525 0 0447 0 0386 0 0337 0 0297 0 0264 0 0236 0 0213 0 0192 0 0175 140 0 1805 0 1664 0 1540 0 1431 0 1100 0 0878 0 0720 0 0603 0 0513 0 0443 0 0386 0 0340 0 0302 0 0270 0 0243 0 0220 0 0200 145 0 2055 0 1892 0 1750 0 162
179. 6EN 03 2011 PE80468 PE80778 Network configuration Network_001 net x ol pp lal i ANTAA sel ee os lS lle ink y pense _ 7 IEC 61850 configuation a I Emm f Network configuration Address Tye Famy Model User label Device name 1013513112 Sep epon ees Busbar 1019513113 SW_MAIN ai Motor 8 Motoxt2 BE se Motor Close Sepam network connected to SFT2841 Connection Connection in progress Fle DASFT2841 SFT2841 Net Net_02 net IIE T Fa Senam Serie 60 G82 Generator Ge2Lore Select address 101951311211 Sepam with ACES50 J gt Access to parameters and settings for a Sepam series 60 connected to a communication network PCRED301006EN 03 2011 SFT2841 setting and operating software Configuration of a Sepam network Identification of Sepam units connected to the communication network The Sepam units connected to the communication network are identified by either m their Modbus address m their IP address m the IP address for their gateway and their Modbus address These addresses can be configured in either of the following ways m Manually one by one o the Add button is used to define a new device o the Edit button is used to modify the Modbus address if necessary o the Delete button removes a device from the configuration m or automatically for Modbus addresses by running an automatic search of the Sepam units connected
180. 8 1 44 s gt Is Table of K values IIs SIT VIT LTI EIT UIT RI IEEE MI IEEE VI IEEE El IACI IAC VI IAC El and IEC A and IEC B and IEC C IEC D IEC E IEC F 1 0 3 062 62 005 62 272 200 226 1 1 24 7000 90 000 9 471 4290 2 534 22 461 136 228 330 606 19 033 45 678 122 172 1 2 12 901 45 000 225 000 545 905 2 216 11 777 65 390 157 946 9 413 34 628 82 899 1 5 5 788 18 000 79 200 179 548 1 736 5 336 23 479 55 791 3 891 17 539 36 687 2 0 3 376 9 000 33 000 67 691 1 427 3 152 10 199 23 421 2 524 7 932 16 178 2 5 2 548 6 000 18 857 35 490 1 290 2 402 6 133 13 512 2 056 4 676 9 566 3 0 2 121 4 500 12 375 21 608 1 212 2 016 4 270 8 970 1 792 3 249 6 541 3 5 1 858 3 600 8 800 14 382 1 161 1 777 3 242 6 465 1 617 2 509 4 872 4 0 1 676 3 000 6 600 10 169 1 126 1 613 2 610 4 924 1 491 2 076 3 839 4 5 1 543 2 571 5 143 7513 1 101 1 492 2 191 3 903 1 396 1 800 3 146 5 0 1 441 2 250 4 125 5 742 1 081 1 399 1 898 3 190 1 321 1 610 2 653 5 5 1 359 2 000 3 385 4 507 1 065 1 325 1 686 2 671 1 261 1 473 2 288 6 0 1 292 1 800 2 829 3 616 1 053 1 264 1 526 2 281 1 211 1 370 2 007 6 5 1 236 1 636 2 400 2 954 1 042 1 213 1 402 1 981 1 170 1 289 1 786 7 0 1 188 1 500 2 063 2 450 1 033 1 170 1 305 1 744 1 135 1 224 1 607 7 5 1 146 1 385 1 792 2 060 1 026 1 132 1 228 1 555 1 105 1 171 1 460 8 0 1 110 1 286 1 571
181. 8 Tripping time delay 10 ms 9 Timer hold curve 3 10 Timer hold delay 10 ms 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 188 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Modbus communication PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Access to remote settings ANSI 59 Overvoltage Function number 11xx relay 1 xx 01 relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 6 3 Activity O 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Voltage mode 0 phase to neutral 1 phase to phase 7 Us or Vs set point Unp or Vnp 8 Tripping time delay 10 ms 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved ANSI 59N Neutral voltage displacement Function number 12xx relay 1 xx 01 relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Latching Format Unit CB control Activity Reserved Reserved Vs0 set point Tripping time delay Reserved Reserved Reserved j CO NI Oy BY j N gt Reserved ANSI 66 Starts per hour Function number 0701 Setting Data Latching Format Unit Reserved Activity Reserved Reserved Period of time Total number of starts CO N M oO BY wy P Number of consecutive hot starts o Number of consecutive starts Time delay between starts Minutes Reserved m Reserved wo Reserved gt
182. ANSI 50 51 during energization after a long outage the time before activation Tcold Depending on the installation characteristics these m a logic input 124 by default has been activated indicating a temporary overload operations can actually generate transient inrush due to starting of the load corresponding to the protected feeder or a feeder currents likely to exceed the protection set points downstream These transient currents may be due to m the start command for the CLPU 50 51 function has been activated from the logic m the power transformer magnetizing currents equation editor m the motor starting currents m simultaneous resetting of all the loads in the This detection results in either depending on the parameter setting of installation air conditioning heating etc Global action CLPU 50 51 for a predefined duration In principle the protection settings should be defined application of a configurable multiplying factor to set point Is of each ANSI 50 51 so as to avoid tripping due to these transient currents protection unit However if these settings result in inadequate m or blocking of the various protection units sensitivity levels or delays that are too long the CLPU 50 51 function can be used to increase or inhibit pee Setting the CLPU 50 51 function parameters allows the user to set points temporarily after energization m define the time before activation Tcold and the pick up threshold CLPUs m choose
183. ASDU FUN INF LN DO DA TC3 BO08 20 160 23 LLNO SGCB SetActiveSettingGroup TC4 Boog 20 160 24 LLNO SGCB SetActiveSettingGroup Electric Schneider 93 DE50457 Protection functions Directional earth fault ANSI code 67N 67NC Type 2 operation The protection function operates like an earth fault protection function with an added direction criterion It is suitable for closed ring distribution networks with directly earthed neutral It has all the characteristics of an earth fault protection function 50N 51N and can therefore be easily coordinated with that function The residual current is the current measured at the Sepam 10 input or calculated using the sum of the phase currents according to the parameter setting The time delay may be definite time DT or IDMT according to the curves below The protection function includes a timer hold delay T1 for the detection of restriking faults The tripping direction may be set at the busbar end or line end Definite time protection IsO is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation time delay t A tripping zone 4 IsO set point DE50398 Tripping characteristic of protection 67N type 2 IDMT protection The IDMT protection function operates in accordance with the IEC 60255 3 BS 142 and IEEE C 37112 standards DE52321 gt 1 1 2 10 20 10 IsO The Is setting is the vertical asymptote of the curve and T is the operatio
184. C 58 V AC 154VDC 120VAC threshold Input limit Atstate1 gt 19 V DC gt 88 V DC gt 88 VAC gt 176VDC gt 176VAC voltage At state0 lt 6VDC lt 75VDC s22VAC lt 137VDC lt 48VAC Isolation of inputs from Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced other isolated groups 011 control relay output Voltage DC 24 48 VDC 127VDC 220VDC 250VDC AC 100 to 47 5 to 240 V AC 63 Hz Continuous current 8A 8A 8A 8A 8A Breaking capacity Resistive 8 4 A 0 7A 0 3A 0 2A 8A load L R load 6 2A 0 5A 0 2A lt 20 ms L R load 4 1 A 0 2A 0 1A lt 40 ms p f load 5A gt 0 3 Making capacity lt 15 A for 200 ms Isolation of outputs Enhanced from other isolated groups Annunciation relay output 012 to 014 Voltage DC 24 48 VDC 127VDC 220VDC 250VDC AC 100 to 47 5 to 240 V AC 63 Hz Continuous current 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A Breaking capacity Resistive 2 1 A 0 6A 0 3A 0 2A load L R load 2 1A 0 5A 0 15 A lt 20 ms p f load 1A gt 0 3 Making capacity lt 15 A for 200 ms Isolation of outputs Enhanced in relation to other isolated groups PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE52153 DE51683 N Installation Input Vac setting Yes S9S9909SS9 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 MES114 modules Description M and 6 3 removable lockable screw type connectors D connectors for 4 relay outputs
185. C 61850 network In this case it can be used to define the IEC 61850 configuration of Sepam connected to this network See the Sepam IEC 61850 Communication user s manual reference SEPED306024EN for more information Configuration of the Modbus TCP IP gateway See the setup manual for the gateway used In general the gateway should be assigned an IP address The configuration parameters for the gateway s RS 485 interface must be defined in accordance with the Sepam communication interface configuration m speed 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bauds m character format 8 data bits 1 stop bit parity none even odd Configuration of communication on SFT2841 When configuring a Sepam network on SFT2841 the following communication parameters must be defined m type of device Modbus gateway ECI850 or Sepam m P address IP address for the connected remote equipment m time out from 100 to 3000 ms A time out of between 800 ms and 1000 ms is sufficient in most installations Communication via the TCP IP gateway may however be slowed down if other applications want Modbus TCP IP or IEC 61850 access at the same time The time out value should then be increased 2 to 3 seconds m number of retries from 1 to 6 Note 1 SFT2841 uses the Modbus TCP IP communication protocol Although communication is IP based use of SFT2841 is restricted to a local installation network based on an Ethernet network LAN Local Area Network Th
186. Configured Forward Delay A 5 Learned Forward Delay 15 Configured Max Age 20 Learned Max Age 20 ACE850 RSTP bridge statistics Schneider 158 Electric Commissioning and diagnosis Ethernet communication SNTP statistics Item SNTP Client status Description Value configured for the parameter in SFT2841 Active SNTP server IP address Address of the server currently answering SNTP requests 0 0 0 0 if no server answer Poll interval Value configured for the parameter in SFT2841 Round trip delay Total time for SNMP request and response messages Local offset Difference between SNTP time and ACE time Daylight saving time Value configured for the parameter in SFT2841 Last Successful Time Synchronization UTC Last time the ACE850 successfully contacted the SNTP server UTC time Device Date and Time UTC Current time and date of the ACE850 UTC time Device Date and Time local Current time and date of the ACE850 local time RSTP bridge statistics Item Bridge status Description RSTP status of the bridge Bridge ID Bridge vector Bridge priority Bridge Mac address Designated Root ID Bridge vector of the RSTP root bridge Designated Root Port Identifier of the root port priority number Rootpath cost Path cost to the root Total topology changes Topology change counter as defined by 802 1D 2004 Configured hello
187. D 2 Tripping of protection 50 51 unit 2 I gt gt 51 LED 3 Tripping of protection 50N 51N unit 1 lo gt 51N LED 4 Tripping of protection 50N 51N unit 2 lo gt gt 51N LED 5 Ext LED6 LED 7 Circuit breaker open 111 0 off LED 8 Circuit breaker closed 112 1 lon LED 9 Tripping by circuit breaker control Trip 1 Assignment by default with MES1 14 The default parameter setting may be personalized using the SFT2841 software m the assignment of signal lamps to events is to be defined in the control matrix screen LEDs tab m editing and printing of personalized labels are proposed in the Sepam menu PCRED301006EN 03 2011 MT11186 Control and monitoring functions SFT2841 Sepam 1 G Eile Edt Operation nde 3 0 SHS meh aan Frac Ase Characteristics Outputs Indicators Everts nl Led Led 2 Led3 Led4 Led5 led Led7 Led8 Led9 CAE x 5051 2 x 50 51 3 Logic inputs 051 4 SON 5IN 1 x Equations SON SIN 2 x SON 5IN 3 SON SIN 4 a a a ee E Control functions 5086F 61 46 2 BZN 1 m2 Reese RP 320 40 ASAMS 1 Fa aam Cancel EZ z BEE Conmected Motor wai Weir Parameter seire Remate controls en 24 01 2002 164527 _ SFT2841 control matrix Control matrix The control matrix is used for simple assignment of the logic outputs and signal lamps to information produced by
188. ET148 2 module chapter for accuracy derating according to wiring cross section Standard RTD assignments The standard assignments described below may be selected when the first MET148 2 module is configured SFT2841 hardware configuration screen It is compulsory to choose an assignment in order to use the thermal overload Cooling time constant calculation function Motor generator Transformer choice choice M40 M41 G40 T40 T50 T42 T52 RTD 1 Stator 1 Phase 1 T1 RTD 2 Stator 2 Phase 1 T2 RTD 3 Stator 3 Phase 2 T1 RTD 4 Bearing 1 Phase 2 T2 RTD 5 Bearing 2 Phase 3 T1 RTD 6 Bearing 3 Phase 3 T2 RTD7 Bearing 4 RTD 8 Ambient temperature Ambient temperature PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 57 Electric MT 10228 MT10551 Protection functions Operation The negative sequence unbalance protection function m picks up if the negative sequence component of phase currents is greater than the operation set point m it is time delayed The time delay may be definite time or IDMT according to a standardized curve or specially adapted Schneider curve The negative sequence current is determined according to the 3 phase currents gt 4 gt 2 gt We gen a 12 a 13 2n witha e 3 If Sepam is connected to 2 phase current sensors only the negative sequence current is lii ain a 3 Zr with a e 3 Both formulas are equivalent when there is no zero sequence current earth fau
189. Electrical network protection Sepam series 40 User s manual 03 2011 Schneider Electric Safety instructions Safety symbols and messages Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before trying to install operate service or maintain it The following special messages may appear throughout this bulletin or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure followed Risk of electric shock N The addition of either symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label indicates that an I electrical hazard exists which will result in personal injury if the instructions are not ANSI symbol IEC symbol Safety alert This is the safety alert symbol It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death Safety messages A DANGER DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury A WARNING WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided can result in death or serious injury A CAUTION CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided can result in minor or moderate injury CAUTION CAUTION used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous
190. I3 When only the voltage U21 is connected P and Q are calculated assuming that the system voltage is balanced According to standard practice it is considered that m for the outgoing circuit o power exported by the busbar is positive o power supplied to the busbar is negative x MT10168 Y direction of flow m for the incoming circuit 9 O power supplied to the busbar is positive o power exported by the busbar is negative direction y of flow Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the O key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option 1 Choice to be set in the general settings MT10179 Characteristics Active power P Reactive power Q Measurement range 1 5 Sn at 999 MW 1 5 Sn at 999 Mvar Unit kW MW kvar Mvar Accuracy 1 typical 2 1 typical 2 Display format 3 significant digits 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1 kW 0 1 kvar Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 second typical Apparent power S Measurement range 1 5 Sn at 999 MVA Unit kVA MVA Accuracy 1 typical 2 Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1 kVA Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 Sn v3 Unp In 2 At In Unp cos 9 gt 0 8 in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 27 Electric MT10257 M
191. IT UIT DT RI DT CEI SIT A LTI B VIT B EIT C DT or IDMT IEEE MI D VI E El F DT or IDMT IAC I VI El DT or IDMT Is0 set point 0 1 to 15 Ind Definite time Inst 0 05 s to 300 s 0 1 to 1 Ind IDMT 0 1 s to 12 5 s at 10 IsO Vs0 set point 2 to 80 of Unp Timer hold Definite time DT timer hold Inst 0 05 s to 300 s IDMT IDMT reset time 0 5 s to 20 s ANSI 67N 67NC type 3 Directional earth fault according to I0 magnitude with angular sector tripping zone Angle at start of tripping zone 0 to 359 Angle at end of tripping zone 0 to 359 IsO set point CSH core balance CT 2 A rating 0 1 A to 30 A Definite time Inst 0 05 t0 300 s 20 A rating 2 Ato 300 A Definite time Inst 0 05 to 300 s 1 ACT 0 05 to 15 InO min 0 1 A sensitive In0 0 1 CT In Core balance CT ACE990 0 05 to 15 InO min 0 1 A range 1 Vs0 set point Calculated VO sum of 3 voltages 2 to 80 of Unp Measured VO external VT 0 6 to 80 of Unp ANSI 81H Overfrequency 50 to 55 Hz or 60 to 65 Hz ANSI 81L Underfrequency 40 to 50 Hz or 50 to 60 Hz 0 1 s to 300s 0 1 s to 300s 1 Tripping as of 1 2 Is so Schnelder PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Protection functions Undervoltage ANSI code 27 278 Operation The protection function is three phase and operates according to parameter setting with phase to neutral or phase to phase voltage m it picks up if one of the 3 phase to neutral or ph
192. Is set point g Setting 50 Ib lt Is lt 500 Ib Is Resolution 1 Accuracy 0 5 Drop out pick up ratio 93 5 5 oiib Time delay ST LT and LTS Setting ST 500 ms lt T lt 300 s LT 50 ms lt T lt 300 s excessive starting LTS 50 ms lt T lt 300 s time Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit locked rotor output Accuracy 2 or from 25 ms to 40 ms rotor rotation 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Case of starting locked rotor 62 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 MT10858 MT10419 Protection functions Description This function is used to protect equipment motors transformers generators lines capacitors against overloads based on measurement of the current consumed Operation curve The protection gives a trip order when the heat rise E calculated according to the measurement of an equivalent current leq is greater than the set point Es The greatest permissible continuous current is Ib Es The protection tripping time is set by the time constant T m the calculated heat rise depends on the current consumed and the previous heat rise state m the cold curve defines the protection tripping time based on zero heat rise m the hot curve defines the protection tripping time based on 100 nominal heat rise Cold curve Alarm set point tripping set point Two set points may be set for heat rise m Est alarm m Es2 tripping Hot state set point When
193. N 51N functions Setting 10 to 100 In Resolution 1 In Accuracy 5 or 1 In Global action CLPU 50N 51N Setting Blocking Multiplication of the set point Action on ANSI 50N 51N protection unit x Setting OFF ON Time delay T0 x for ANSI 50N 51N protection unit x Resolution setting 100 to 999 ms in 1 ms steps 1 to 999 s in 1 s steps 1 to 999 min in 1 min steps Accuracy 2 or 20 ms Multiplying factor MO x for ANSI 50N 51N protection unit x Setting 100 to 999 IsO Resolution 1 Is Schneider 81 Electric Protection functions Operation The voltage restrained phase overcurrent protection function is used to protect generators The operation set point is adjusted according to the voltage to take into account cases of faults close to the generator which cause voltage dips and short circuit current This protection function is three pole It picks up if one two or three phase currents reach the voltage adjusted operation set point Is The alarm linked to operation indicates the faulty phase or phases It is time delayed and the time delay may be definite time DT or IDMT according to the curves opposite The set point is adjusted according to the lowest ofthe phase to phase voltages measured The adjusted set point Is is defined by the following equation SL Je PL DUB Itz ax a 0 2 MT11030 0 2 08 U UN Definite time protection Is is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation
194. NSI 27D 47 Positive sequence undervoltage 5 to 60 of Unp 0 05 s to 300 s ANSI 27R Remanent undervoltage 5 to 100 of Unp 0 05 s to 300s ANSI 27S Phase to neutral undervoltage 5 to 120 of Vnp 0 05 s to 300s ANSI 32P Directional active overpower 1 to 120 of Sn 0 1 s to 300s ANSI 32Q 40 Directional reactive overpower 5 to 120 of Sn M 0 1 s to 300s ANSI 37 Phase undercurrent 0 15 to 1 Ib 0 05 s to 300 s ANSI 38 49T Temperature monitoring 8 or 16 RTDs Alarm and trip set points 0 to 180 C or 32 to 356 F ANSI 46 Negative sequence unbalance Definite time 0 1 to 5 Ib 0 1 s to 300s IDMT 0 1 to 0 5 Ib Schneider Electric 0 1 to 1 Ib CEI IEEE 0 1sto1s Tripping curve Schneider Electric CEI SIT A LTI B VIT B EIT C IEEE MI D VI E El F ANSI 46BC Broken Conductor Set point li Id 10 to 100 0 1 s to 300 s ANSI 47 Negative sequence overvoltage 1 to 50 of Unp 0 05 s to 300 s ANSI 48 51LR 14 Excessive starting time locked rotor 0 5 Ib to 5 Ib ST starting time 0 5 s to 300s LT and LTS time delays 0 05 s to 300s ANSI 49RMS Thermal overload Rate 1 Rate 2 Accounting for negative sequence component 0 2 25 45 9 Time constant Heating T1 5 to 120 mn T1 5 to 120 mn Cooling T2 5 to 600 mn T2 5 to 600 mn Alarm and tripping set points 50 to 300 of rated thermal capacity Cold curve modification factor 0 to 100 Switching of thermal settings conditions By logic input B
195. OF IMPROPER OPERATION Do not use a CCA634 on connector B1 and residual current input 10 on connector A terminals 18 and 19 simultaneously Even if itis not connected to a sensor a CCA634 will disturb input 10 on connector A Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage PCRED301006EN 03 2011 1 A 5 A current transformers Connecting and assembling the CCA630 connector 1 Open the 2 side shields for access to the connection terminals The shields can be removed if necessary to make wiring easier If removed they must be replaced after wiring 2 If necessary remove the bridging strap linking terminals 1 2 and 3 This strap is supplied with the CCA630 3 Connect the wires using 4 mm 0 16 in ring lugs and check the tightness of the 6 screws that guarantee the continuity of the CT secondary circuits The connector accommodates wires with cross sections of 1 5 to 6 mm AWG 16 10 4 Close the side shields 5 Plug the connector into the 9 pin inlet on the rear panel item B 6 Tighten the 2 CCA630 connector fastening screws on the rear panel of Sepam Connecting and assembling the CCA634 connector 1 Open the 2 side shields for access to the connection terminals The shields can be removed if necessary to make wiring easier If removed they must be replaced after wiring 2 According to the wiring required remove or reverse the bridging strap This is used to link either termi
196. PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE80352 DE80353 Control and monitoring functions Inhibit closing 02 Closing N O closing coil Self tests and fail safe position Example of use with undervoltage trip coil with fail safe condition diagram 2 Undervoltage trip coil Breaker closed Breaker open Setting the Sepam output parameters 01 N C O2 N C 011 N O Example of use with undervoltage trip coil without fail safe condition diagram 3 Inhibit closing 02 Closing U 0 Undervoltage trip coil Breaker closed Breaker open 4 5 ole a SOR ed oe SNS Nee ee see eed T Setting the Sepam output parameter O1 N O 02 N C 011 N O PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 139 Electric Control and monitoring functions 140 Schneider Es Electric Self tests and fail safe position Using the watchdog The watchdog is extremely important in the monitoring system as it indicates to the user that the Sepam protection functions are working correctly When Sepam detects an internal failure a LED flashes automatically on the Sepam front panel regardless of whether the watchdog output is connected correctly If the watchdog output is not correctly connected to the system this LED is the only way of knowing that Sepam has failed We therefore strongly recommend connecting the watchdog output at the highest level of the
197. PPE80409 PE80410 Modbus communication Modbus TCP Server Statistics TCP Connection Port Status Operational Inbound Outbound Statistics Opened TCP Connections 1 Received Messages 24 Transmitted Messages 25 Reset Counters ACE850 Modbus TCP server statistics Modbus TCP Connections Statistics index Remote IP Remote Port Local Port 1 169 254 0 20 4607 502 15801 15802 169 254 0 20 3213 502 3 3 Reset Counters Connections Transmitted Messages Received Messages Sent Errors 0 2 ACE850 Modbus TCP connections statistics SNMP Statistics Global Diagnostics SNMP Agent Status Operational Bad Community Usages 13 Received Messages 342 Transmitted Messages 342 Reset Counters ACE850 SNMP statistics PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Commissioning and diagnosis Ethernet communication Modbus TCP server statistics Item Port status Description Modbus port status Opened TCP connections Number of Modbus clients currently connected Received messages Total number of Modbus requests Transmitted messages Total number of Modbus responses Reset counters button Button to reset the messages counters Note the Web interface uses one Modbus connection to operate Modbus TCP connections statistics Item Description Index Connection number Remote IP IP address of the Modbus client Remote port TCP port number on the client side Local port TCP p
198. Q 40 47 51V m 59 only in cases where the protection function is set up for phase to neutral overvoltage when the voltages are measured by two phase VTs VOVT m 67 A residual voltage fault affects the following protection functions m 59N m 67N 67NC The behavior of the protection functions in the event of a Phase voltage fault or Residual voltage fault is to be set up and the following choices are proposed m for protection functions 27 27S 27D 32P 320 40 47 51V 59 and 59N inhibition or no inhibition m for protection function 67 inhibition or non directional operation 50 51 m for protection function 67N 67NC inhibition or non directional operation 50N 51N Setting advice The partial loss of voltages is based on the detection of the presence of negative sequence voltage and the absence of negative sequence current By default m the presence of negative sequence voltage is detected when Vi gt 10 Vnp Vsi m the absence of negative sequence current is detected when li lt 5 In Isi m time delay T1 is 1 s These default settings ensure the stability of the VT supervision function in the event of short circuits or transient phenomena on the network The Isi set point may be raised for highly unbalanced networks Time delay T2 for the detection of the loss of all voltages must be longer than the time it takes for a short circuit to be cleared by the protection function 50 51 or 67 to avoid the detecti
199. RS 485 communication port Electrical interface Standard 2 wire or 4 wire differential RS 485 EIA Max number of Sepam units per ECI850 2 Sepam series 80 or 2 Sepam series 60 or 3 Sepam series 40 or 5 Sepam series 20 Maximum network length 1000 m 3300 ft Ethernet communication port Number of ports 1 Type of port 10 100 Base Tx Protocols HTTP FTP SNMP SNTP ARP SFT IEC 61850 TCP IP Transmission speed 10 100 Mbps PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE80262 Installation _ op LED power up maintenance Standard LEDs m RS 485 LED network link active o On RS 485 mode o Off RS 232 mode m Flashing green Tx LED ECI850 transmission active m Flashing green Rx LED ECI850 reception active Ethernet LEDs m LK green LED on network link active m Flashing green Tx LED ECI850 transmission active m Flashing green Rx LED ECI850 reception active m 100 green LED o On 100 Mbps network speed o Off 10 Mbps network speed 10 100 Base Tx port for Ethernet connection by RJ45 connector Connection of the 24 V DC supply Reset button RS 485 connection RS 485 parameter setting selector switches RS 232 connection A OOMONOW Recommended settings u 12 3 4 5 6 2 wire by default N 3 4 5 6 Setting the RS 485 network parameters 4 wire PCRED301006EN 03 2011 PE80063 ECI850 IEC 61850 Sepam server
200. RVOLTACE Ten 2 a rar Personalized message editor b51 b gt 51 b gt 5IN b gt 5IN ext Ooff lon Trip 2001 10 06 12 40 50 DEFAUT PHASE 1A 162A 161A Trip 11 Trip 12 Trip I3 250A Alarm message on the advanced UMI Schneider 128 Electric Local indication ANSI code 30 Personalized user messages 30 additional messages may be created using the SFT2841 software to link a message to a logic input or the result of a logic equation for example or to replace a predefined message by a personalized message Personalized user message editor in SFT2841 The personalized message editor is integrated in the SOFT2841 software tool and may be accessed in connected or unconnected mode from the control matrix screen m display on the screen the Event tab associated with Protection the predefined messages associated with the protection functions appear m double click on one of the messages displayed to activate the personalized message editor Personalized message editor functions m creation and modification of personalized messages o in English and the local language o by text input or importing of an existing bitmap file bmp or by point to point drawing m deletion of personalized messages m assignment of predefined or personalized messages to an event defined in the control matrix O from the control matrix screen Events tab double click on the event to be linked to a new message O se
201. S 485 10 100 base T 10 100 base T 10 100 base T Modbus RTU a 0 a 0 a 0 IEC 60870 5 103 a 0 a 0 a 0 DNP3 a 1 a 1 a 1 Modbus TCP IP IEC 61850 To Sepam Physical interface 1 port 1 port 1 port 1 port 1 port 1 port 2 wire RS 485 2 wire RS 485 2 wire RS 485 RS 485 RS 485 RS 485 2 wire or 4 wire 2 wire or 4 wire 2 wire or 4 wire RS 485 distributed power m 7 supply Modbus RTU a 0 a 0 a 0 a IEC 60870 5 103 a 0 a 1 m 1 DNP3 a 0 a 0 a 0 Power supply DC 24 to 48 V 24V 24V 24V AC 110 to 220 V 110 to 220 V See details on page page 259 page 260 page 260 See EGX100 See EGX300 page 262 manual manual 1 The supervisor protocol is the same as for Sepam Note All these interfaces support the E LAN protocol 240 Sernac PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE80842 DE80439 Installation Connection of communication interfaces Connection cords CCA612 connection cord Function The CCA612 prefabricated cord is used to connect ACE949 2 ACE959 ACE937 ACE969TP 2 and ACE969FO 2 communication interfaces m To the white communication port on a Sepam series 20 or series 40 base unit m To the white communication port on a Sepam series 60 base unit m To the white communication ports or C on a Sepam series 80 base unit Characteristics m Length 3 m 9 8 ft m Fitted with 2 white RJ45 connectors Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 Sepam series 60 Sepam series 80 ACE949 2 DE80844
202. S network DE80953 Description Residual current is measured with a 1 A or 5 ACT on the neutral point Parameters Residual current Rated residual current Measuring range 1 ACT InO neutral point CT In 0 1 to 20 Ind 5 ACT InO neutral point CT In 0 1 to 20 InO DE81047 CCA630 CT 1A 2 turns CT 5A 4 turns Connection on TT network Connection with CSH30 Variant 2 residual current measurement by CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT on the neutral earthing link Connection on TN S network aa Schneider DE80955 Description Residual current is measured with a core balance CT on the neutral point Core balance CTs are recommended for measuring very low fault currents provided that the earth fault current remains below 2 kA Above this value it is advisable to use the standard variant 1 Parameters Residual current Rated residual current Measuring range 2 A rating CSH Ind 2A 0 1 to 20 Ind 5 Arating CSH Ind 5A 0 1 to 20 Ind 20 A rating CSH Ind 20 A 0 1 to 20 In0 Connection on TT network PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE80956 DE81052 DE80967 Installation Base unit Connection of low voltage residual current Inputs Variant 3 residual current measurement by sum of 3 phase currents and neutral current measurement by CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT Description Measurement by core balance CT is recommended for measuring very low fault currents Parameters
203. S value of the 50 or 60 Hz component of phase to neutral voltages m V1 phase 1 phase to neutral voltage m V2 phase 2 phase to neutral voltage m V3 phase 3 phase to neutral voltage It is based on measurement of the fundamental component Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the O key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement range 0 06 to 1 2 Vnp Unit Vor kV Accuracy 0 5 typical 2 1 from 0 5 to 1 2 Vnp 2 from 0 06 to 0 5 Vnp Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1V Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 Vnp primary rated phase to neutral voltage Vnp Unp v3 2 At Vnp in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Metering functions PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Residual voltage Positive sequence voltage Residual voltage Operation This function gives the value of the residual voltage VO V1 V2 V3 VO is measured m by taking the internal sum of the 3 phase voltages m by an open star delta VT It is based on measurement of the fundamental component Readout The measurement may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the O key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 04
204. Sepam recalculates and checks the CRC sent by the master m if the CRC received is valid Sepam replies m if the CRC received is invalid Sepam does not reply PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Commissioning and diagnosis Serial line communication Modbus diagnosis counters Counter definition Sepam manages the Modbus diagnosis counters These are m CPT1 Number of valid frames received whether the slave is involved or not m CPT2 Number of frames received with a CRC error or physical error frames with more than 255 bytes frames received with at least one parity overrun framing or line break error m CPT3 Number of exception responses generated even if not transmitted due to receipt of a broadcast request m CPT4 Number of frames specifically addressed to the station excluding broadcasting m CPT5 Number of valid broadcast frames received m CPT6 Not significant m CPT7 Not significant m CPT8 Number of frames received with at least one character having a physical error parity overrun framing or line break m CPT9 Number of valid requests received and correctly executed Counter reset The counters are reset to 0 m when they reach the maximum value FFFFh 65535 m when they are reset by a Modbus command function 8 m when Sepam auxiliary power is lost m when communication parameters are modified Using the counters Modbus diagnosis counters help to detect and resolve communication problems They can be accessed
205. T determine the Is current and time delay T settings Theoretically the Is current setting corresponds to the maximum continuous current it is generally the rated current of the protected equipment cable transformer The time delay T corresponds to operation at 10 Is on the curve This setting is determined taking into account the constraints involved in discrimination with the upstream and downstream protection devices The discrimination constraint leads to the definition of point A on the operation curve IA tA e g the point that corresponds to the maximum fault current for the downstream protection device PCRED301006EN 03 2011 General Tripping curves Problem 2 Given the type of IDMT the Is current setting and a point k Ik tk on the operation curve determine the time delay setting T On the standard curve of the same type read the operation time tsk that corresponds to the relative current Ik Is and the operation time Ts10 that corresponds to the relative current I Is 10 The time delay setting to be used so that the operation curve passes through the point k Ik tk is tk T Ts10 xi MT10215 Another practical method the table below gives the values of K ts ts10 as a function of I Is In the column that corresponds to the type of time delay read the value K tsk Ts10 on the line for Ik Is The time delay setting to be used so that the operation curve passes through point k Ik tk
206. T10258 Metering functions 2 Schneider Peak demand active and reactive power Power factor cos Peak demand active and reactive power Operation This function gives the greatest average active or reactive power value since the last reset The values are refreshed after each integration interval an interval that may be set from 5 to 60 mn common interval with peak demand phase currents The values are saved in the event of a power failure Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the amp key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Resetting to zero m press the ea key on the advanced UMI display unit when a peak demand is displayed m via the clear command in the SFT2841 software m via the communication link remote control order TC6 Characteristics Active power P Reactive power Q Measurement range 1 5 Sn at 999 MW 1 5 Sn at 999 Mvar Unit kW MW kvar Mvar Accuracy 1 typical 2 1 typical 2 Display format 3 significant digits 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1 kW 0 1 kvar Integration interval 5 10 15 30 60 mn 5 10 15 30 60 mn 1 Sn V3 Unp In 2 At In Unp cos gt 0 8 in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 TS TC equivalence for each protocol Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870 5 103 IEC 61850 TC Binary Output ASDU FUN INF LN DO DA TC6 BO12 MSTA1 RsMaxA ctlVal
207. TP 801 1d 2004 Baud rate 100 Mbps Fiber type Multimode Wavelength 1300 nm Type of connector SC Fiber optic diameter um Tx minimum optical power Tx maximum optical RX sensitivity dBm RX saturation dBm Maximum dBm power dBm distance 50 125 22 5 14 33 9 14 2 km 1 24 mi 62 5 125 19 14 33 9 14 2 km 1 24 mi Dimensions z im fi in roretes oT peas A A ACE850FO age re 127 2 TOON i gt 58 2 28 min Son i 171 2 lt 6 74 a 58 2 28 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 253 P Electric DE80430 DE80431 DE80432 DE80433 Installation JACE850TP Sepam P2 A Pi 10100 107100 0 BASE TX BASE TX einiol fim Ba BA 7 8 9 10 11 ACE850TP View of underside SQne ACE850FO SA sts 10 gt ACTILK 100 ACTILK Sepam P2 P1 c 100 100 1540 BASE FX BASE FX Tx Re Tx Re va va I ACE850FO Front view a ill f 2 5 Ami nolleljel jan 1 BA AA 7 8 9 12131415 ACE850FO View of underside 254 Schneider P E
208. The protection function is inhibited for residual voltages below the Vs0 set point The time delay is definite time When a memory is added recurrent faults can be detected the memory is controlled by a time delay or by the residual voltage value The tripping direction can be set at the busbar end or line end Block diagram VO gt VsO memory reset VO VO lt VOmem CSH core bal CT 10 cos 0 60 lt IsO busbar 0 TOmem CT 10 cos 0 60 gt IsO time delayed line output LL choice n 4 0 E 10 core ACE990 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 memory pick up signal and to logic discrimination Schneider Electric 91 Protection functions 92 Schneider amp Electric DE50398 Directional earth fault ANSI code 67N 67NC Definite time operation IsO is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation time delay tA Definite time protection principle Memory The detection of recurrent faults is controlled by the time delay TOmem which extends the transient pick up information thereby enabling the operation of the definite time delay even with faults that are rapidly extinguished 2 ms and restrike periodically Even when a Petersen coil with no additional resistance is used tripping is ensured by fault detection during the transient fault appearance with detection extended throughout the
209. WG 12 m Resistance per unit length less than 100 mQ m 30 5 mQ ft m Minimum dielectric strength 100 Vrms Connect the connection cable shielding in the shortest manner possible 2 cm or 5 08 in maximum to the shielding terminal on the Sepam connector Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam Do not ground the cable by any other means Schneider P Electric 229 PE50476 Installation 10 input 4 output MES114 module 230 gl Fae SS TE Se Ceeccecucuc Be Schneider MES114 modules Function The 4 outputs included on the Sepam series 20 and 40 base unit can be extended by adding an optional MES114 module with 10 inputs and 4 outputs available in 3 versions m MES114 10 DC inputs voltage from 24 V DC to 250 V DC m MES114E 10 inputs voltage 110 125 V AC or V DC m MES114F 10 inputs voltage 220 250 V AC or V DC Characteristics MES114 module Weight 0 28 kg 0 617 Ib Operating temperature 25 C to 70 C 13 F to 158 F Environmental Same characteristics as Sepam base units characteristics Logic inputs MES114 MES114E MES114F Voltage 24 to 110 to 110 VAC 8 220 to 220 to 250 V DC 125 VDC 250VDC 240 VAC Range 19 2 to 88 to 88 to 176 to 176 to 275 V DC 150 V DC 132VAC 275VDC 264V AC Frequency 47 to 63 Hz 47 to 63 Hz Typical consumption 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA Typical switching 14V DC 82 V D
210. acteristics of the records stored in an identification zone m read the contents of the different files m acknowledge each transfer m reread the identification zone to ensure that the record still appears in the list of records available 2 transfer zones are available m transfer zone 1 O request frame 2200h 2203h identification zone starting at 2204h reply frame starting at 2300h transfer zone 2 request frame 2400h 2403h identification zone starting at 2404h reply frame starting at 2500h E DO OD HD PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Disturbance recording Reading the identification zone Given the volume of data to be transmitted the master must ensure that there are data to be recovered and prepare the exchanges when necessary The identification zone described below is read by the reading of N words starting at the address 2204h 2404h m 2 reserve words forced to 0 m size of record configuration files encoded in 1 word m size of record data files encoded in 2 words m number of records encoded in 1 word m date of record 1 least recent encoded in 4 words see format below m date of record 2 encoded in 4 words see format below m m date of record 19 most recent encoded in 4 words see format below m 27 reserve words All of these data are consecutive Reading the contents of the different files Request frame The master makes the request by writing the date of the record to be transferred functi
211. alues depending on the type of conductor in Q km Q mi Cable Rdc Xdc ROc X0c Multi core 0 39 0 63 0 14 0 225 2 3 22 0 4 0 64 Single phase 0 06 0 1 0 11 0 18 0 99 1 6 1 41 1 83 Line Rdl Xdi ROI xol Single core 0 68 1 1 0 372 0 6 0 828 1 33 1 696 2 73 Characteristics Time delay T Setting 1 s to 99 min Percentage of cable in the relevant feeder Setting 0 to 30 Symmetrical impedance of conductors Positive sequence resistance of Rdl lines 0 001 to 10 Q km or 0 0016 to 16 1 Q mi Positive sequence reactance of Xdl lines 0 001 to 10 Q km or 0 0016 to 16 1 Q mi Positive sequence resistance of Rdc cables 0 001 to 10 Q km or 0 0016 to 16 1 Q mi Positive sequence reactance of Xdc cables 0 001 to 10 Q km or 0 0016 to 16 1 Q mi Zero sequence resistance of ROI lines 0 001 to 10 Q km or 0 0016 to 16 1 Q mi Zero sequence reactance of XOI lines 0 001 to 10 Q km or 0 0016 to 16 1 Q mi Zero sequence resistance of ROc cables 0 001 to 10 Q km or 0 0016 to 16 1 Q mi Zero sequence reactance of X0c cables 0 001 to 10 Q km or 0 0016 to 16 1 Q mi Indicative performance The relative error on the fault location is calculated m in relation to the longest path on the feeder _ Dreal Destimated 9 Dlongest 100 7 m in the following conditions o load supplied on the feeder less than 4 MVA o fault resistance less than 150 Q Accuracy of calculation of the single phase fault location Feeder type Ty
212. ance General The logic inputs and outputs and the analog inputs are the parts of Sepam least covered by the self tests See List of self tests which place Sepam in the fail safe position page 136 They should be tested during a maintenance operation The recommended interval between preventive maintenance operations is 5 years Maintenance tests To perform maintenance on Sepam see section Sepam commissioning tests page 286 Carry out all the recommended commissioning tests according to the type of Sepam to be tested First test all the logic inputs and outputs involved in tripping the circuit breaker A test of the complete chain including the circuit breaker is also recommended Schneider 303 Electric 1 1 1 Commissioning Firmware modifications Firmware evolutions The table below describes the firmware version history of the Sepam base The following information is provided for each firmware version m release date m compatible base version s m serial number range of compatible Sepam bases m new features added to the Sepam base The base version represents the hardware version of the Sepam base V1 00 July 2001 Base 1 0132001 to First version 0209062 V2 00 March 2002 Base 1 0209063 to m New applications added G40 M41 S42 T40 and T42 0527999 m Logic equation editor and customized messages available m CTs and energy monitoring available m Compliance with the new MSA1
213. ance between conductors lt 60 pF m 18 3 pF ft Capacitance between conductor and shielding lt 100 pF m 30 5 pF ft Maximum length 1300 m 4270 ft Fiber optic communication port Fiber type Fiber optic network for ACE937 and ACE969FO 2 interfaces Graded index multimode silica Wavelength 820 nm invisible infra red Type of connector Fiber optic diameter um Numerical aperture NA Maximum attenuation Minimum optical power ST BFOC bayonet fiber optic connector Maximum fiber length dBm km available dBm 50 125 0 2 2 5 6 700 m 2300 ft 62 5 125 0 275 3 2 9 4 1800 m 5900 ft 100 140 0 3 4 14 9 2800 m 9200 ft 200 HCS 0 37 6 19 2 2600 m 8500 ft Fiber optic communication port Fiber optic Ethernet network for the ACE850FO communication interface Fiber type Multimode Wavelength 1300 nm Type of connector SC Fiber optic diameter um TX minimum optical TX maximum optical RX sensitivity RX saturation Maximum power dBm power dBm dBm dBm distance 50 125 22 5 14 33 9 14 2 km 1 24 mi 62 5 125 19 14 33 9 14 2 km 1 24 mi Wired communication port Connector type Data RJ45 10 100 Mbps Wired Ethernet network for the ACE850TP communication interface Maximum distance 100 m 328 ft Medium Cat 5 STP or FTP or SFTP 242 Schneider Electric PCRED301006EN 03 2011 PE80321 DE80035 DE80127 Installation ACE949
214. arried out systematically The remote monitoring and control system provides a chronological display of the time tagged data Time tagging Sepam time tagging of events uses absolute time see section on date and time When an event is detected it is tagged with the absolute time given by Sepam s internal clock All the Sepam internal clocks must be synchronized so as to avoid drifts and all be the same thereby allowing inter Sepam chronological sorting Sepam has two mechanisms for managing its internal clock m time setting to initialize or modify the absolute time A special Modbus message called time message is used to time set each Sepam m synchronization to avoid Sepam internal clock drifts and ensure inter Sepam synchronization Synchronization may be carried out according to two principles m internal synchronization via the communication network without any additional wiring m external synchronization via a logic input with additional wiring At the time of commissioning the user sets the synchronization mode parameter PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Time tagging of events Initialization of the time tagging function Each time the communication system is initialized energizing of Sepam the events are generated in the following order m appearance of data loss m appearance of incorrect time m appearance of not synchronous m disappearance of data loss The function is initialized with t
215. ase to phase voltages drops below the Us or Vs set point m it includes a definite time delay T m with phase to neutral operation it indicates the faulty phase in the alarm associated with the fault Block diagram U21 or V1 lt Us or Vs DE52310 U32 or V2 lt Us or Vs time delayed output U13 or V3 lt Us or Vs pick up signal Characteristics Us or Vs set point Setting 5 Unp or Vnp to 120 Unp or Vnp Accuracy 0 2 or 0 002 Unp Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 103 42 5 Time delay T Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic times Operation time pick up lt 35 ms typically 25 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 40 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Connection conditions Type of connection V1 V2 V3 U21 U21 U32 U21 VO U21 U32 VO Phase to neutral Yes No No No Yes operation Phase to phase Yes on U21 only Yes on U21 only Yes operation PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 51 Electric Protection functions Positive sequence undervoltage and phase rotation direction check ANSI code 27D 47 Operation Positive sequence undervoltage The protection picks up when the positive sequence component Vd of a three phase voltage system drops below the Vsd set point with gt gt gt 22 Vd 1 3 V1 aV2 a V3 gt gt
216. ases or on the neutral connection of the three 1 A or 5 A phase CTs m other core balance CT connected to an ACE990 interface and when the residual voltage is calculated in Sepam or cannot be calculated and is therefore not available for the protection function L1 current test terminal box Checking of phase current and voltage input connection Procedure 1 Connect according to the diagram below m a wire between the generator current terminals to inject current into the primary circuit of the core balance CT or CT with the wire passing through the core balance CT or CT in the P1 P2 direction with P1 the busbar end and P2 the cable end m when applicable the generator voltage terminals to the voltage test terminal box so as to only supply Sepam s phase 1 voltage input and therefore obtain a residual voltage VO V1 Sepam series 40 voltage test terminal box V1 V2 V3 N single phase or 3 phase A generator PCRED301006EN 03 2011 2 Turn the generator on 3 When applicable apply a V N voltage set to the rated secondary phase to neutral voltage of the VT i e Vns Uns v3 4 Inject an current set to 5 A and when applicable in phase with the V N voltage applied i e generator phase displacement o V N 0 5 Use the SFT2841 software to check the following m the value indicated for the measured l0 residual curren
217. asured in the equipment by temperature sensors connected to the MET148 2 module T2 is calculated every time that the equipment runs for a sufficient time followed by a shutdown I lt 0 1lb and temperature stabilization For motors and generators T2 is calculated according to the temperatures measured on the stator by RTDs 1 2 and 3 For transformers T2 is calculated according to the temperatures measured on the primary winding by RTDs 1 3 and 5 For better accuracy it is advisable to measure the ambient temperature with RTD 8 If in the RTD assignment table other applications is selected T2 is not calculated Once the calculation has been made the calculated value may be used to replace the T2 1 parameter in two ways according to the configuration m automatically in which case each new calculated value updates the T2 constant used m or manually by entering the value in the T2 parameter 1 It is advisable to use the calculated T2 if the equipment has carried out at least three starting cycles followed by cooling Schneider Electric 63 DE50479 Protection functions Start inhibit The thermal overload protection can inhibit the closing of the motor s control device until the heat rise drops back down below a value that allows restarting This value takes into account the heat rise produced by the motor when starting The inhibition function is grouped together with the starts per hour protection and the indi
218. at corresponds 500 to 60 of Ib The table reads K 7 55 The tripping time is equalto 200 0 5 x 7 55 3 755 s 100 50 20 0 5 0 2 0 1 0 05 0 02 0 01 0 005 0 002 0 001 max curve T 1s min curve T 0 1s Wb 02 03 0507 1 2 3 5 7 10 20 li Ib 10 15 20 2 30 33 33 50 55 57 7 60 65 70 75 K 99 95 54 50 35 44 25 38 19 32 16 51 10 53 9 00 821 7 84 755 7 00 652 6 11 li Ib cont d 80 85 90 95 100 110 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 K cont d 5 74 542 513 487 464 4 24 3 37 315 296 280 265 252 2 40 2 29 li Ib cont d 22 230 240 250 260 270 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 K cont d 2 14 210 2 01 1 94 1 86 1 80 1 627 1 577 1 53 1 485 1 444 1 404 1 367 1 332 li Ib contd 380 390 400 410 420 430 470 480 490 2500 K cont d 1 298 1 267 1 236 1 18 1 167 1 154 1 082 1 06 1 04 1 02 1 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 59 Electric Protection functions Broken conductor ANSI code 46BC Description Operation The purpose of Broken conductor detection protection Broken conductor detection protection is based on the negative sequence and is to indicate on a radial medium voltage network the positive sequence current ratio which makes it independent of the load fluctuations opening of a phase at a point on the circuit on the network This may have several origins However these performances depend on m broken conductor on the ground at th
219. ation network m You are also strongly advised to set the other physical layer configuration parameters before making the connection to the communication network m Modifying the configuration parameters during normal operation will not disturb Sepam but will reset the communication port Schneider 147 Electric PE80510 PE80395 Modbus communication SFT2841 Sepam series 40 Substation 40_1 BB Eie Edt Operation Sepam Application Options Window 2 O64 gh amp Gr Nr Sepam hardware Hardware configuration Application ype Sepam label repam on Optional modules IT MES Input output module e r r IT MSA141 1 analog output module I7 DSM303 Front panel UMI module 77 ACE en Communication intailace E configuration General characteristics CTAVT Supervision Program logie Password Apply Cancel Sepam model MX model without fixed advanced UMI MD model w h fixed advanced UMI Synchronisation mode Network x Disconnected Substation 540 Sepamoot 08106 2009 17 41 08 SFT2841 Sepam configuration screen Communication configuration Communication interface Ethemet Medium type Port P1 100BaseFX Full D v Port P2 100BaseFX Full D IP parameters IP address IP subnet mask IP default gateway CID override IP settings TCP parameters FTP session idle time TCP keep alive Cancel ACE 850F0 Ss
220. ator status Remote indication status Sepam diagnosis Sepam general characteristics Sepam status Application type Major fauk Sepam 3 00 2 Partial faut ro Remote setting enabled yes Connector Sepam date and time Sepam synchronized timetagged event present Sepam identification Software version v3 00 Communica tion Status of optional modules Communication protocol Modbus Communication interface version 0 1 Communication Communication protocol Communication interface version 0 Data loss Status Number of frames received Number of frames received with errors SFT2841 Sepam series 40 diagnosis screen 12 Schneider Commissioning and diagnosis Serial line communication Installing the communication network Preliminary study The communication network must first be the subject of a technical study to determine the following according to the installation characteristics and constraints geography amount of information processed etc m the type of medium electrical or fiber optic m the number of Sepam units per network m the transmission speed m the ACE interfaces configuration m the Sepam parameter settings Sepam user manual The communication interfaces must be installed and connected in accordance with the instructions in the Installation chapter of this manual Preliminary checks The following preliminary checks must be made m chec
221. aximum for 100 mQ m or 66 ft maximum for 30 5 m ft Connecting 2 CSH200 CTs in parallel It is possible to connect 2 CSH200 CTs in parallel if the cables will not fit through a single CT by following the instructions below m Fit one CT per set of cables m Make sure the wiring polarity is correct The maximum permissible current at the primary is limited to 6 KA 1 s for all cables 225 Electric Schneider Installation CSH30 interposing ring CT Function The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used as an interface when the residual current is measured using 1 A or 5 A current transformers Characteristics Weight 0 12 kg 0 265 Ib Vertical assembly of CSH30 Horizontal assembly of Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail interposing ring CT CSH30 interposing ring CT In vertical or horizontal position Dimensions mm L 4 5 in 280978 DE80023 226 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE80125 DE80126 Installation TC 1A 2 turns TC 5A 4 turns 1 ATC 2 turns 5 ATC 4 turns PCRED301006EN 03 2011 PE50033 CSH30 interposing ring CT Connection The CSH30 is adapted for the type of current transformer 1 A or 5 A by the number of turns of the secondary wiring through the CSH30 interposing ring CT m 5 Arating 4 turns m 1 A rating 2 turns Connection to 5 A secondary circuit Connection to 1 A secondary circuit PE50034 1 Plug into the connector 1 Pl
222. b00 word 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y wodi 0 0 0 0 M M M M 0 0 D D D D D word2 0 0 0 H H H H H 0 0 mn mn mn mn mn mn word3 ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms word 4 Y 1 byte for years varies from 0 to 99 years The remote monitoring and control system must ensure that the year 00 is greater than 99 M 1 byte for months varies from 1 to 12 D 1 byte for days varies from 1 to 31 H 1 byte for hours varies from 0 to 23 mn 1 byte for minutes varies from 0 to 59 ms 2 bytes for milliseconds varies from 0 to 59999 These data are encoded in binary format Sepam is time set via the write word function function 16 at the address 0002 with a mandatory 4 word time message The bits set to 0 in the description above correspond to format fields which are not used in and not managed by Sepam Since these bits can be transmitted to Sepam with random values Sepam performs the necessary disabling Sepam does not check the consistency or validity of the date and time received Synchronization clock A synchronization clock is required to set the Sepam date and time Schneider Electric has tested the following equipment Gorgy Timing ref RT300 equipped with the M540 module Electric Schneider 173 Modbus communication Reading of events Sepam provides the master or masters with two event tables The master reads the event table and acknowledges by writing the exchange word S
223. balance CT secondary circuit m MV core balance CT S1 output to ACE990 E2 input terminal m MV core balance CT S2 output to ACE990 E4 input terminal PCRED301006EN 03 2011 ACE990 Core balance CT interface Connection Connection of core balance CT Only one core balance CT can be connected to the ACE990 interface The secondary circuit of the MV core balance CT is connected to 2 of the 5 ACE990 interface input terminals To define the 2 input terminals it is necessary to know the following m Core balance CT ratio 1 n m Core balance CT power m Close approximation of rated current InO InO is a general setting in Sepam and defines the earth fault protection setting range between 0 1 InO and 15 In0 The table below can be used to determine m The 2 ACE990 input terminals to be connected to the MV core balance CT secondary m The type of residual current sensor to set m The exact value of the rated residual current InO setting given by the following formula In0 k x number of core balance CT turns with k the factor defined in the table below The core balance CT must be connected to the interface in the right direction for correct operation the MV core balance CT secondary output terminal S1 must be connected to the terminal with the lowest index Ex K value ACE990 input Residual current Min MV core terminals to be sensor setting balance CT connected power 0 00
224. between o the Sepam network and the called modem o the called modem Sepam side and the calling modem PC side o the PC and the calling modem see recommended configurations table PC modem interface 38400 bauds 19200 bauds 9600 bauds Sepam network 38400 bauds 19200 bauds 9600 bauds Telephone network V34 modulation 33600 bauds V34 modulation 19200 bauds V32 modulation 9600 bauds Industrial configuration profile The following table shows the main characteristics of the modem on the Sepam side These characteristics match a configuration profile commonly known as an industrial profile as opposed to the configuration of modems used in offices Depending on the type of modem used the configuration will either be via AT commands from a PC using HyperTerminal or the configuration tool that may have been supplied with the modem or by setting switches see the modem manufacturer s manual AT command NO force amp Q6 Characteristics of the industrial profile configuration Transmission in buffered mode without error correction Data compression deactivated CO Line quality monitoring deactivated EO DTR signal assumed to be permanently off allows the modem amp DO connection to be established automatically on an incoming call CD signal off when carrier is present amp C1 All reports made to Sepam blocked Q1 Character echo suppression E0 No flow control amp KO PCRED30100
225. c discrimination blocking reception 1 13 Logic discrimination blocking reception 2 121 Switching of groups of settings A B 113 External reset E E E 114 External tripping 1 121 External tripping 2 122 External tripping 3 123 Buchholz gas tripping 121 Thermostat tripping 122 Pressure tripping E 123 Downstream load start up E 124 Inhibit remote control E E E a 125 SF6 a E E E 126 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 electric 115 Control and monitoring functions 116 Schneider G Electric Circuit breaker contactor control ANSI code 94 69 Description Sepam is used to control breaking devices equipped with different types of closing and tripping coils m circuit breakers with shunt trip or undervoltage trip units parameter setting of O1 in the front of the advanced UMI or using SFT2841 m latching contactors with shunt trip units Integrated circuit breaker contactor control This function controls the breaking device It is coordinated with the recloser and logic discrimination functions and includes the anti pumping function It performs the following operations according to the parameter setting m tripping on output O1 by o protection unit units configured
226. c input 113 113 0 group A 113 1 group B or by forcing the use of the group Operation Phase overcurrent protection is three phase It picks up if one two or three of the phase currents reach the operation set point The alarm connected to the operation of the protection function indicates the faulty phase or phases It includes a time delay which is either definite constant DT or IDMT depending on the curves on the facing page Confirmation The phase overcurrent protection function includes a configurable confirmation component The output is confirmed as follows m by phase to phase undervoltage protection unit 1 m by negative sequence overvoltage protection m no confirmation The protection incorporates a harmonic 2 restraint set point which can be used to set the protection Is set point close to the CT rated current including when a transformer switches The restraint can be selected by parameter setting This harmonic 2 restraint is active when the current is less than half the minimum short circuit current of the network downstream of the protection Definite time protection functions Is is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation time delay tA Definite time protection principle IDMT protection IDMT protection operates in accordance with the IEC 60255 3 BS 142 IEEE C 37112 standards IDMT protection principle 72 Schneider DE80533
227. cation START INHIBIT informs the user Saving of heat rise The current heat rise is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure Inhibition of tripping Tripping of the thermal overload protection may be inhibited by the logic input Inhibit thermal overload when required by the process Use of two operating rates The thermal overload protection function may be used to protect equipment with two operating rates for example m transformers with two ventilation modes with or without forced ventilation ONAN ONAF m two speed motors The protection function comprises two groups of Thermal overload ANSI code 49 RMS Switching from one group of thermal settings to the other is done without losing the heat rise value It is controlled m either via a logic input assigned to the switching of thermal settings function m or when the phase current reaches an adjustable Is set point to be used to process the switching of thermal settings of a motor with locked rotor User information The following information is available for the user m heat rise m learnt cooling time constant T2 m time before restart enabled in case of inhibition of starting m time before tripping with constant current See chapter Machine operation assistance functions page 37 Characteristics Set point Rate 1 Rate 2 Setting Es1 alarm set point 50 to 300 50 to 300 Es2 tripping set point 50 to 300 50 to 300
228. circuit o power supplied to the busbar is positive O power exported by the busbar is negative flow direction This protection function operates for V1V2V3 U21 U32 and U21 U32 VO connections MT11184 Block diagram overpowe r reverse power MT11166 time delayed output pick up output Characteristics Tripping direction Setting overpower reverse power Ps set point Setting 1 Sn to 120 Sn Resolution 0 1 kW Accuracy 2 0 3 Sn for Ps between 1 Sn and 5 Sn 5 for Ps between 5 Sn and 40 Sn 3 for Ps between 40 Sn and 120 Sn Drop out pick up ratio 93 5 5 Min return variance 0 004 Sn Time delay T Setting 100 ms to 300 s Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy 2 or from 10 ms to 35 ms Characteristic times Operation time lt 80 ms Overshoot time lt 90 ms Reset time lt 80 ms 1 Sn v3 Unp In 2 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 MT11167 Protection functions overpower reverse power Operating zone PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Directional reactive overpower ANSI code 32Q 40 Operation This protection function is used to detect field loss on synchronous machines generators or motors connected to the network In both cases the machine undergoes additional temperature build up which may damage it It picks up if the reactive power flowing in one direction or the other supplied or absorbed is g
229. cold state is equal to t T1 0 3567 gt t 24 min 0 3567 513 s point 2 This tripping time is too long since the limit for this overload current is 400 s point 2 If the time constant T1 is lowered the thermal overload protection will trip earlier below point 2 There risk that motor starting when hot will not be possible also exists in this case see Figure 2 in which a lower Sepam hot curve would intersect the starting curve with U 0 9 Un The EsO parameter is a setting that is used to solve these differences by lowering the Sepam cold curve without moving the hot curve In this example the thermal overload protection should trip after 400 s starting from the cold state The following equation is used to obtain the EsO value 2 thecessary 2 T Es0 processed e 1 I processed Es2 b b with t necessary tripping time necessary starting from a cold state a equipment current processet 1 When the machine manufacturer provides both a time constant T1 and the machine hot cold curves the use of the curves is recommended since they are more accurate 2 The charts containing the numerical values of the Sepam hot curve may be used or else the equation of the curve which is given on page 63 Schneider Electric 65 DE50511 DE50512 Protection functions Thermal overload ANSI code 49 RMS Setting examples In numerical values the following is obtained Use of the additional setting group 400 s
230. confirmed and if the inputs 12 Disable recloser l BON EO A required for that logic are present on the MES114 13 __ Confirm thermal protection nu E u or MES108 optional module 14 Reset undercurrent protection E 15 S LAN communication monitoring E E EEEE 8 E Direct remote control order activation 3 The remote control order is executed when it is written 16 _S LAN communication monitoring EEEE EEHEHE HEEE in the remote control word The program logic resets it inhibition to zero after the remote control order is acknowledged 1 OPG French acronym for disturbance recording A 2 Zero resetting of all the peak demands except the peak demand of the negative and positive Confirmed SBO remote control order sequence current ratio select before operate 3 TC15 Remote control order follows the same TC1 inhibition mode In this mode remote control orders involve two steps m selection by the master of the order to be sent by Address word 00F2 TC17 to TC32 Bit address 0F20 to OF2F writing the bit in the STC word and checking of the TC Application S40 S41 S42 S43 S44 T40 T42 M40 M41 G40 selection by rereading the word 50 S51 S52 S53 S54 T50 T52 m execution of the order to be sent by writing the bitin 47 Inhibit TS126 Inductive and TS127 E u u u ee u the TC word Capacitive The remote control order is executed if the bit in the 18 Confirm TS126 Inductive and TS127 m m m m EB E E E E E STC word and the bit in the associat
231. connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord amp Grounding earthing terminal 1 Link activity LED flashes when communication is active sending or receiving in progress 2 Jumper for RS 485 network line end impedance matching with load resistor Re 150 Q to be set to m De if the module is not at one end of the network default position m Rc if the module is at one end of the network 3 Network cable clamps inner diameter of clamp 6 mm or 0 24 in Connection m Connection of network cable to screw type terminal blocks A and m Connection of the earthing terminal by tinned copper braid with cross section 2 6 mm AWG 10 or cable with cross section 2 2 5 mm AWG 12 and length lt 200 mm 7 9 in fitted with a 4 mm 0 16 in ring lug Check the tightness maximum tightening torque 2 2 Nm or 19 5 Ib in m The interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover shielding at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable o the network cable must be stripped o the cable shielding braid must be around and in contact with the clamp m The interface is to be connected to connector on the base unit using a CCA612 cord length 3 m or 9 8 ft white fittings m The interfaces are to be supplied with 12 V DC or 24 V DC Electric Schneider 243 PE80322 DE80036 DE80129 Installation ACE959 4 wire RS 485 network interface Function The ACE959 interface performs 2 functio
232. continuous self testing watchdog Control and monitoring m circuit breaker program logic ready to use requiring no auxiliary relays or additional wiring m adaptation of control functions by a logic equation editor m preprogrammed customizable alarm messages on UMI PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Introduction Presentation Esher Exon Sepam Eieeckens Explosion Onion Featte z ja oj jsle afe a lalelelal gt l GER E Easa ose Y sone Y sne Y Maximum de cowantphase 1 p Activi delesempl _ Jeude r glage A Jeu actf Courbe de d clenchement Temps ndependont User Machine Interface 2 levels of User Machine Interface UMI are available according to the user s needs m basic UMI an economical solution for installations that do not require local operation run via a remote monitoring and control system m fixed or remote advanced UMI a graphic LCD display and 9 key keypad are used to display the measurement and diagnosis values alarm and operating messages and pes e e en provide access to protection and parameter setting values for installations gt that are operated locally PE50299 C Horsserice Cowantde seui Ensanice Temporisetion Courbe de meinten Temps de mainien ES CAME Edition de tiquette Sepam Setting and operating software The SFT2841 PC software tool g
233. cording of analog and logic signals may be triggered by different events according to control matrix parameter setting or by manual action m triggering by the grouping of all pick up signals of the protection functions in service m triggering by the delayed outputs of selected protection functions m triggering by selected logic inputs m triggering by selected outputs Vx logic equations m manual triggering by a remote control order TC10 m manual triggering via the SFT2841 software tool Disturbance recording may be m inhibited via the SFT2841 software or by remote control order TC8 m validated via the SFT2841 software or by remote control order TC9 Block diagram disturbance recording triggering by selected protection m functions delayed outputs disturbance recording triggering Sr by selected logic inputs 21 disturbance recording triggering by selected outputs Vx logic F equations manual disturbance SFT2841 5k recording triggering TC10 disturbance recording triggering inhibition of SFT2841 F disturbance recording TC8 triggering validation of SFT2841 Ey disturbance recording TC9 triggering O 0 LLL manual disturbance SFT2841 F recording triggering TC10 TS TC equivalence for each protocol Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870 5 103 IEC 61850 TC Binary Output ASDU FUN INF LN DO DA TC8 BO3 RDRE1 Rcdinh ctlVal TC9 BO4 RDRE1 Rcdinh ctlVal TC10 BO5
234. cording to insulation class T ambient is the measured temperature Adaptation of the protection to motor thermal withstand Motor thermal protection is often set based on the hot and cold curves supplied by the machine manufacturer To fully comply with these experimental curves additional parameters must be set m initial heat rise EsO is used to reduce the cold tripping time Increase factor fa 2 Te Eso modified cold curve ts Ln ieg Ca ES m a second group of parameters time constants and set points is used to take into account thermal withstand with locked rotors This second set of parameters is taken into account when the current is greater than an adjustable set point Is Accounting for negative sequence current In the case of motors with coiled rotors the presence of a negative sequence component increases the heat rise in the motor The negative sequence component of the current is taken into account in the protection by the equation leq ph K 1i in whichlph is the greatest phase current li is the negative sequence component of the current Kis an adjustable factor K may have the following values 0 2 25 4 5 9 For an asynchronous motor K is determined as follows K 2 c9 4 in whichCn Cd rated torque and starting torque lbCld bas rent and starting current g rated si ur Learning of the cooling time constant T2 The cooling time constant T2 may be learnt according to the temperatures me
235. crimination overcurrent time delayed unit 3 delayed unit 4 earth fault time a delayed unit 3 SSL tripping delayed unit 4 time delay settings for logic discrimination overcurrent logic delayed unit 1 delayed unit 2 earth fault logic delayed unit 1 delayed unit 2 directional 1 earth fault logic delayed unit 1 directional amp _ 4 t direction of 67 67N protection functions overcurrent logic 21 delayed unit 1 A direction of blocking signals With the combination of the directional protection blocking reception 1 0 T functions and the logic discrimination function the logic input T 30m 30 ms faulty section may be isolated with minimum delay by the tripping of the circuit breakers on either side of the fault directional earth fault logic PAA F delayed unit 2 Blocking information are prepared by protection directional gt 17 functions 67 and 67N overcurrent logic Priority is given to protection function 67 when delayed unit 2 amp 7 protection functions 67 and 67N detect faults in i 0 T opposite directions at the same time the blocking blocking reception 2 a o information is determined by the direction of the fault logic input e detected by protection function 67 1 According to parameter setting by default O3 for send BIT and O12 for send Bi2 The instantaneous output of protection function 67 activated at 80 of the Is set point is used to send blocking information This avoids uncertain
236. cription The directional phase overcurrent function includes 2 groups of 2 units called respectively Group A and Group B The mode for switching from one group to the other may be determined by parameter setting m by remote control TC3 TC4 m by logic input 113 113 0 group A 113 1 group B or by forcing the use of the group Operation This protection function is three phase It includes a phase overcurrent function associated with direction detection It picks up if the phase overcurrent function in the chosen direction line or busbar is activated for at least one of the three phases or two out of three phases according to parameter setting The alarm linked to the protection operation indicates the faulty phase or phases It is time delayed and the time delay may be definite time DT or IDMT according to the curves page 89 The direction of the current is determined according to the measurement of the phase in relation to a polarization value It is qualified as busbar direction or line direction according to the following convention MT11175 busbar direction y line direction The polarization value is the phase to phase value in quadrature with the current for cos 1 90 connection angle A phase current vector plane is divided into two half planes that correspond to the line zone and busbar zone The characteristic angle 6 is the angle of the perpendicular to the boundary line between the 2 zon
237. cteristics If the use conditions are outside the normal zone special arrangements should be made before commissioning such as air conditioning of the premises Operation in a polluted atmosphere Acontaminated industrial atmosphere such as the presence of chlorine hydrofluoric acid sulfur solvents etc can cause corrosion of the electronic components in which case environmental control arrangements should be made such as pressurized premises with filtered air etc before commissioning The effect of corrosion on Sepam has been tested according to the IEC 60068 2 60 and EIA 364 65A See Environmental Characteristic page 18 Electric Schneider 201 Installation 202 Schneider Equipment identification Identification of the base unit DE80987 DE80988 Identification of the base unit Each Sepam comes in a single package which contains the base unit and 2 connectors m 1 x 20 pin connector CCA620 or CCA622 m 1 x 6 pin connector CCA626 or CCA627 The other optional accessories such as modules current input connectors or voltage and cords are supplied in separate packages To identify a Sepam check the 2 labels on the right side panel of the base unit describing the product s functional and hardware features m Hardware reference and designation label User Machine Interface model 59604 Serial N 10480001 Series 40 advanced UMI 24 250V S ries 40 IHM avanc e 24 250V A B CE c US S10MD Or
238. ctions m earth fault and phase overcurrent cold load pick up m broken conductor detection Main functions Protection m phase protection and earth fault protection with adjustable reset time with switching of the active group of settings and logic discrimination m earth fault protection insensitive to transformer switching m RMS thermal overload protection that takes into account external operating temperature and ventilation operating rates m directional earth fault protection suitable for all isolated compensated or impedant neutral systems m directional phase overcurrent protection with voltage memory m voltage and frequency protection functions under over etc Communication Sepam can be connected to a supervision communication network S LAN based on the following communication protocols Modbus RTU DNP3 IEC 60870 5 103 IEC 61850 All the data needed for centralized equipment management from a remote control and monitoring system are available via the communication port m in read mode all measurements alarms settings etc m in write mode breaking device remote control orders etc Diagnosis 3 types of diagnosis data for improved operation m network and machine diagnosis tripping current context of the last 5 trips unbalance ratio disturbance recording m switchgear diagnosis cumulative breaking current trip circuit supervision operating time m diagnosis of the protection unit and additional modules
239. d LED flashing ACE850 not configured and or not connected to the base unit m Red LED permanently on ACE850 not operational initialization in progress or failed STS LED communication status green permanently on OK Ethernet Port 2 100 green LED permanently on 100 Mbps Ethernet Port 2 activity LED flashing on transmission reception Ethernet Port 1 100 green LED permanently on 100 Mbps Ethernet Port 1 activity LED flashing on transmission reception ORUN Power supply terminal block Grounding earthing terminal using supplied braid RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the Sepam base unit with a CCA614 cord m Sepam series 40 communication port identified by a white label on the Sepam unit m Sepam series 60 and Sepam series 80 communication port F identified by a blue label on the Sepam unit 12 Tx fiber of 100 Base FX SC connector for Ethernet communication port P2 E LAN or S LAN 13 Rx fiber of 100 Base FX SC connector for Ethernet communication port P2 E LAN or S LAN 14 Tx fiber of 100 Base FX SC connector for Ethernet communication port P1 E LAN or S LAN 15 Rx fiber of 100 Base FX SC connector for Ethernet communication port P1 E LAN or S LAN oon A CAUTION HAZARD OF BLINDING Never look directly into the end of the fiber optic Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE80444 DE80445 Installation ACE850 Co
240. d directly or exported to a text file for editing m and when applicable in the format of a file to be downloaded into Sepam using the SFT2841 software Checking parameters and protection settings Check to be made when the Sepam parameter and protection settings have not been entered or downloaded during commissioning testing to confirm the conformity of the parameter and protection settings entered with the values determined during the study The aim of this check is not to confirm the relevance of the parameter and protection settings 1 Go through all the parameter and protection setting screens in the SFT2841 software in the order proposed in guided mode 2 For each screen compare the values entered in the Sepam with the values recorded in the parameter and protection setting file 3 Correct any parameter and protection settings that have not been entered correctly proceeding as indicated in the Use of the SFT2841 software section of this manual Conclusion Once the checking has been done and proven to be conclusive as of that phase the parameter and protection settings should not be changed any further and are considered to be final In order to be conclusive the tests which follow must be performed with these parameter and protection settings We strongly recommend that you do not modify even temporarily any of the existing values to facilitate testing Schneider 289 Electric Commissioning Checking of phase cu
241. d monitoring Circuit breaker contactor control functions ANSI code 94 69 Associated functions Trip circuit supervision and open closed matching Description This supervision is designed for trip circuits m with shunt trip units The function detects o circuit continuity o loss of supply o mismatching of position contacts The function inhibits closing of the breaking device m with undervoltage trip units The function detects O mismatching of position contacts coil supervision being unnecessary in this case The information is accessible in the matrix and via the remote indication TS106 Block diagram 111 DE81059 a m 4 21 trip circuit fault 1 With MES option The function is activated if inputs 111 and 112 are set respectively as circuit breaker open Wiring for undervoltage trip unit position and circuit breaker closed position TS TC equivalence for each protocol Modbus DNP3 IEC 60870 5 103 IEC 61850 TS Binary Input ASDU FUN INF LN DO DA TS106 BI11 1 160 36 XCBR1 EEHealth stVal Open and close order supervision Description Following a circuit breaker open or close order the system checks whether after a 200 ms time delay the circuit breaker has actually changed status If the circuit breaker status does not match the last order sent a Control fault message and remote indication TS108 are generated TS TC equivalence for each protocol Modbus
242. detection u Free Inhibit undercurrent Free Inhibit closing u u u u Free Open order 7 u 7 E E 7 u E u E a E Free Close order 7 u 7 u E 7 7 u 7 E w 7 u 7 Free Phase voltage transformer fuse melting u u u u Free Residual voltage transformer fuse melting m u 7 E E 7 7 u 7 E E 7 u 7 Free External positive active energy counter 7 u 7 E E 7 7 E E L 7 u 7 7 Free External negative active energy counter a u u u Free External positive reactive energy counter m 7 7 E u 7 u 7 E E 7 7 7 u 7 Free External negative reactive energy counter m u u Free Downstream load start up E u 7 E Free Logic outputs Tripping u u u u O1 Trip lockout u u u 02 Watchdog u 04 Close order 7 u 7 E E 7 u 7 E E 7 u O11 Note all the logic inputs are available via the communication link and accessible in the SFT2841 matrix for other non predefined applications ma Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Control and monitoring Standard logic input assignment functions The table below lists the logic input assignment obtained with the SFT2841 software by clicking on the Standard assignment button Logic inputs Open position E 111 Closed position a 12 Logi
243. duration of the fault based on the VO gt VOmem criterion within the limit of TOmem With this type of application TOmem must be greater than T definite time delay Standard setting The settings below are given for usual applications in the different earthing systems The shaded boxes represent default settings Isolated neutral Impedant neutral Compensated neutral IsO set point To be set according to To be set according to Tobe set according to network coordination network coordination network coordination study study study Characteristic angle 60 90 0 0 Time delay T To be set according to Tobesetaccordingto To be set according to network coordination network coordination network coordination study study study Direction Line Line Line Vs0 setpoint 2 of Uns 2 of Uns 2 of Uns Sector N A 86 86 Memory time TOmem 0 0 200 ms Memory voltage 0 0 0 VOmem PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Protection functions PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Directional earth fault ANSI code 67N 67NC Characteristics Type 1 Measurement origin Setting range 10 Characteristic angle 60 Setting 45 0 15 30 45 60 90 Accuracy 3 Tripping direction Setting Busbar line IsO set point Setting 0 1 Ind lt Is0 lt 15 In0 expressed in Amps With CSH sensor 2 Arating 0 2 A lt Is0 lt 30A 5 A rating 0 5 A lt Is0 lt 75A 20 A rating 2 A lt Is0 lt 300A cT 0 1 Ind lt
244. e 1 km 0 62 mi Logic inputs MES114 MES114E MES114F Voltage 24to250VDC 110t0125VDC 110VAC 220 to 250 V DC 220 to 240 V AC Range 19 2to275VDC 88t0 150VDC 88t0 132VAC 176to275VDC 176 to 264 V AC Frequency 47 to 63 Hz 47 to 63 Hz Typical consumption 3mA 3mA 3mA 3 mA 3 mA Typical switching threshold 14 VDC 82 V DC 58 V AC 154 V DC 120 V AC Input limit voltage 219VDC 288 V DC 288 V AC gt 176 V DC 2176 VAC lt 6 VDC lt 75VDC lt 22 VAC lt 137 V DC lt 48 VAC Isolation of inputs in relation to Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced other isolated groups Relay outputs Control relay outputs 01 O2 O3 011 contacts Voltage DC 24 48 V DC 127 VDC 220 V DC 250 V DC AC 47 5 to 63 Hz 100 to 240 V AC Continuous current 8A 8A 8A 8A 8A Breaking capacity Resistive load 8A 4AA 0 7A 0 3A 0 2A L R load lt 20 6A 2A 0 5A 0 2A L R load lt 40 ms 4A 1A 0 2A 0 1A Resistive load 8A p f load gt 0 3 5A Making capacity lt 15 A for 200 ms Isolation of outputs from other Enhanced isolated groups Annunciation relay output 04 012 013 014 contacts Voltage DC 24 48 V DC 127 VDC 220 V DC 250 V DC AC 47 5 to 63 Hz 100 to 240 V AC Continuous current 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A Breaking capacity Resistive load 2A 1A 0 6A 0 3A 0 2A L R load lt 20 ms 2A 1A 0 5A 0 15 A p f load gt 0 3 1A Isolation of outputs from other Enhanced isolated groups Power supply Voltage 24 250 V DC 110 240 V AC Ra
245. e delays 50 to 150 of Unp or Vnp if Uns lt 208 V 0 05 to 300 s 50 to 135 of Unp or Vnp if Uns 2 208 V 0 05 to 300 s ANSI 59N Neutral voltage displacement 2 to 80 of Unp ANSI 66 Starts per hour 0 05 s to 300s Starts per period 1 to 60 Period 1 to 6hr Consecutive starts 1 to 60 Time between starts 0 to 90 mn ANSI 67 Directional phase overcurrent Tripping time delay Timer hold Tripping curve Definite time DT SIT LTI VIT EIT UIT DT RI DT CEI SIT A LTI B VIT B EIT C DT or IDMT IEEE MI D VI E El F DT or IDMT IAC I VI El DT or IDMT Is set point 0 1 to 24 In Definite time Inst 0 05 s to 300 s 0 1 to 2 4 In IDMT 0 1 s to 12 5 s at 10 Is Timer hold Definite time DT timer hold Inst 0 05 s to 300 s IDMT IDMT reset time 0 5sto20s Characteristic angle 30 45 60 ANSI 67N 67NC type 1 Directional earth fault according to 10 projection Characteristic angle 45 0 15 30 45 60 90 IsO set point 0 1 to 15 Ind Definite time Inst 0 05 s to 300 s Vs0 set point 2 to 80 of Un Memory time TOmem time 0 0 05 s to 300 s VOmem validity set point 0 2 to 80 of Unp ANSI 67N 67NC type 2 Directional earth fault according to 10 magnitude with half plan tripping zone Characteristic angle 45 0 15 30 45 60 90 Tripping time delay Timer hold Tripping curve Definite time DT SIT LTI VIT E
246. e files are recorded in FIFO First In First Out type shift storage When the maximum number of records is reached the oldest record is erased when a new record is triggered The disturbance records are saved for a minimum of 48 hours and typically for approximately 100 hours when the Sepam is switched off Transfer Files may be transferred locally or remotely m locally using a PC which is connected to the front panel connector and has the SFT2841 software tool m remotely using a software tool specific to the remote monitoring and control system Recovery The signals are recovered from a record by means of the SFT2826 software tool Principle stored record triggering event Characteristics Record content Set up file date channel characteristics measuring chain transformer ratio Sample file 12 values per period recorded signal Analog signals 2 recorded 4 current channels I1 12 13 10 3 voltage channels V1 V2 V3 or U21 U32 VO Logical states recorded 10 logic inputs logic outputs O1 to O4 pick up 1 data item configurable by the logic equation editor Number of records stored 1t0 19 Total duration of a record 1sto 10s The total records plus one should not exceed 20 s at 50 Hz and 16 s at 60 Hz Examples at50 Hz 1x 10 s record 3x5 s records 19x 1 s records Periods before triggering event 0 to 99 periods File format COMTRADE 97
247. e financial losses This situation affects the availability of the installation m Failure of the protection to trip The consequences of a fault that is not eliminated can be catastrophic For safety of operation the protection relay must detect faults in the power supply as quickly as possible using discrimination This situation affects the safety of the installation Self tests and monitoring functions On initialization and cyclically during operation Sepam runs a series of self tests These self tests are designed to detect any failure in its internal and external circuits so as to ensure Sepam s reliability These failures are classified into 2 categories major failures and minor failures m A major failure reaches the hardware resources used by the protection functions program memory and analog input for example This type of failure risks resulting in failure to trip on a fault or nuisance tripping In this case Sepam must go into the fail safe position as quickly as possible m A minor failure affects Sepam s peripheral functions display communication This type of failure does not prevent Sepam from protecting the installation and providing continuity of service Sepam then operates in downgraded mode The classification of failures into 2 categories improves both safety and availability of the installation The possibility of a Sepam major failure must be taken into account when selecting the trip command type to maximize a
248. e first word in the zone function code and unit number has the same values as those described for the remote reading reply frame m xxyy with o function code xx different from 00 and FFh O unit number yy different from FFh The settings are available and confirmed The word is a copy of the request frame The zone contents remain valid until the next request is made m 0000h no request frame has yet been formulated This is espcially the case when Sepam is energized The other words are not significant m FFFFh the request frame has been processed but the results in the reply zone are not yet available It is necessary to repeat reply frame reading The other words are not significant m xxFFh with the function code xx different from 00 and FFh The read request for the settings of the designated function is not valid The function is not included in the particular Sepam or access to settings is impossible in both read and write modes Schneider 180 Electric PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Modbus communication Description of settings Data format All the settings are transmitted in signed 32 bit integer format encoding as a complement of 2 Particular setting value 7FFF FFFFh means that the setting is out of the validity range D The Enabled or Disabled setting is encoded as follows 0 Disabled 1 Enabled The tripping curve setting is encoded as follows 0 definite 1 inverse 2 long t
249. e of settings outside the tolerance range and thereby guarantees a high level of availability Sepam is therefore ready to operate without requiring any additional qualification testing that concerns it directly 286 Schneider Principles and methods Sepam commissioning tests The preliminary Sepam commissining tests may be limited to a commissioning check i e m checking of compliance with BOMs and hardware installation diagrams and rules during a preliminary general check m checking of the compliance of the general settings and protection settings entered with the setting sheets m checking of current or voltage input connection by secondary injection tests m checking of logic input and output connection by simulation of input data and forcing of output status m validation of the complete protection chain possible customized logic functions included m checking of the connection of the optional MET148 2 and MSA141 modules The various checks are described further on General principles m all the tests should be carried out with the MV cubicle completely isolated and the MV circuit breaker racked out disconnected and open m all the tests are to be performed in the operating situation no wiring or setting changes even temporary changes to facilitate testing are allowed m the SFT2841 parameter setting and operating software is the basic tool for all Sepam users It is especially useful during Sepam commissioning tests The t
250. e operation of SFT2841 over a WAN Wide Area Network cannot be guaranteed because of the presence of some routers or firewalls that may reject the Modbus protocol causing communication times that would be incompatible with Sepam Note 2 SFT2841 allows Sepam protection settings to be modified and direct activation of the outputs These operations which could involve the operation of electrical switchgear opening and closing and thus risk the safety of people and installations are protected by the Sepam password In addition to this protection the E LANs and S LANs must be designed as private networks protected from external actions by all suitable methods PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Use MODAYA ss 1 8 Ble ale amp Link ype Automatic search wW u can ME Network configuration Address Type Family Model User label Device name Conevant HD OM3 Phone moden Devon ao MotorD1 a ep Moto 8 Motor03 Motord4 Configuration window for the communication network via telephone modem PCRED301006EN 03 2011 SFT2841 setting and operating software Configuration of a Sepam network Link via telephone modem The Sepam units are connected to an RS 485 multidrop network using an industrial PSTN modem This modem is the called modem It must first be configured either via AT commands from a PC using HyperTerminal or the configuration tool that may have been supplied with the modem or by setting switches se
251. e source end m the installation m broken conductor on the ground at the load end o the transformer neutral earthing system m open wire without conductor on the ground due to o capacitive current o a broken conductor O presence of a permanent negative sequence o a blown fuse m the nature of the fault o a problem with a circuit breaker phase O broken conductor with either 1 end on the ground at the source end or 1 end on the ground at the load end or no end touching the ground O distance between the protection relay and the location of the break o fault impedance The impedance depends mainly on the nature of the ground where the fault occurred This protection function needs to be wired to 3 phase CTs in working order If the wiring is with 2 phase CTs or if the CT supervision function has detected a problem the protection function is automatically inhibited By default the protection is off Block diagram 11 12 5 In II TBC 0 DE80532 N time delayed output amp H gt li Id lid lid gt li Id s Be signal Protection setting assistance Setting the set point li Id s The further away or more impedant the fault to be detected is the more sensitive the protection setting needs to be that is to say the lower the set point li Id s setting should be However there may be a permanent negative sequence on the network due to the loads connected In this case the protection set point mus
252. e the modem manufacturer s manual The PC may use an internal or an external modem This modem on the PC side is always the calling modem It must be installed and configured in accordance with the Windows modem installation procedure Configuration of the calling modem in SFT2841 When configuring a Sepam network SFT2841 displays the list of all the modems installed on the PC The communication parameters to be defined are m modem select one of the modems listed by SFT2841 m telephone no no of the remote modem to be called m speed 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bauds m parity none not adjustable m handshake none RTS or RTS CTS m time out from 100 to 3000 ms Communication via modem and telephone network is slowed considerably because of the transit time through the modems A time out of between 800 ms and 1000 ms is sufficient in most 38400 baud installations In some cases the poor quality of the telephone network may require a slower speed 9600 or 4800 bauds The time out value should then be increased 2 to 3 seconds m number of retries from 1 to 6 Note the speed and parity of the calling modem must be configured under Windows with the same values as for SFT2841 Schneider 25 PE80468 Use Network configuration Network_001 net T Link ype mln a E a BIS F EC Automatic search 61850 configuration Network configuration Address Ieaern ES 101951311
253. e to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Base unit Assembly The Sepam is simply flush mounted and secured by its clips No additional screw type fastening is required gt Mounting clamp DE51143 Slot Present the product as indicated making sure the metal plate is correctly entered in the groove at the bottom Tilt the product and press on the top part to clamp it with the clips Schneider 207 Electric Installation Base unit Connection Sepam components m base unit 4 o A base unit connector power supply output relay CSH30 120 200 or ACE990 input Screw type connector shown CCA620 or ring lug connector CCA622 o 1 5 CT A current input connector CCA630 or CCA634 or LPCT current input connector CCA670 o communication module link connection white o D remote inter module link connection black o voltage input connection screw type connector shown CCA626 or ring lug connector CCA627 m optional input output module 2 MES114 o O M MES114 module connectors o K MES114 module connector Th 2 6 DE52161 o 125 2 41 Y 014 o 9 H 2 o g yos 5 o 2 le soz a Bl J o CSH S 3 19 A ap oT ys you 2 18 o 5 o i5 TA aad o jn 2 98 p
254. eaker tripping 56 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Protection functions Temperature monitoring ANSI code 38 49T Operation This protection is associated with an RTD of the Pt100 platinum 100 Q at 0 C or 32 F or Ni 100 or Ni 120 nickel type in accordance with the IEC 60751 and DIN 43760 standards m it picks up when the monitored temperature is greater than the Ts set point m it has two independent set points o alarm set point o tripping set point m when the protection is activated it detects whether the RTD is shorted or disconnected oO RTD shorting is detected if the measured temperature is less than 35 C or 31 F measurement displayed O RTD disconnection is detected if the measured temperature is greater than 205 C or 482 F measurement displayed If an RTD fault is detected the set point output relays are inhibited the protection outputs are set to zero The RTD fault item is also made available in the control matrix and an alarm message is generated specifying the faulty RTD module Block diagram T lt 205 C MT10878 amp set point 1 set point 2 amp p RTD s fault RTD Characteristics Ts1 and Ts2 set points C a Setting 0 C to 180 C 32 F to 356 F Accuracy 1 5 C 42 7 F Resolution 1 C 11 F Pick up drop out difference 3 C 0 5 Characteristic times Tripping time lt 5 seconds 1 See connection of M
255. ec When a motor rotor is locked or is turning very slowly its thermal behavior is different EsO 4 e 24x60sec 4 74 2 0 3035 31 from that with the rated load In such conditions the motor is damaged by overheating of the rotor or stator For high power motors rotor overheating is most By setting EsO 31 point 2 is moved downward to often a limiting factor obtain a shorter tripping time that is compatible with the The thermal overload parameters chosen for operation with a low overload are no motor s thermal resistance when cold see Figure 3 longer valid Note A setting EsO 100 therefore means that the hotand IN order to protect the motor in this case excessive starting time protection may be cold curves are the same used Nevertheless motor manufacturers provide the thermal resistance curves when the Figure 2 hot cold curves not compatible with the rotor is locked for different voltages at the time of starting motor s thermal resistance Aoi Figure 4 Locked rotor thermal resistance A N FA Sepam cold curve motor running i locked rotor a 513 Is motor cold curve 2 400 Pes amp motor hot curve E os o g i 2 N 8 100 Sepam hot curve ST i Seas lt starting at Un starting at 0 9 Un 4 o gt 1 1 1 05 2 I Ib N gt 1 1 2 Is Wb Figure 3 hot cold curves compatible with the thermal resistance motor running motor s thermal
256. ect according to the diagram below m the generator voltage terminals to the voltage test terminal box using the plug provided m a wire between the generator current terminals to inject current into the primary circuit of the core balance CT or CT with the wire passing through the core balance CT or CT in the P1 P2 direction with P1 the busbar end and P2 the cable end Sepam series 40 voltage test terminal box or 3 phase generator PCRED301006EN 03 2011 single phase 2 Turn the generator on 3 Apply a V N voltage set to the rated secondary voltage of the VTs connected in an open delta arrangement i e Uns V3 or Uns 3 4 Inject an current set to 5 A and in phase with the voltage applied i e generator phase displacement a V N I 0 5 Use the SFT2841 software to check the following m the value indicated for the measured IO residual current is approximately equal to 5A m the value indicated for the measured VO residual voltage is approximately equal to the rated primary phase to neutral voltage of the VTs i e Vnp Unp V3 m the value indicated for the phase displacement 0 VO 10 between the 10 current and VO voltage is approximatelyequal to 0 6 Turn the generator off Schneider 297 MT11194 MT11195 Commissioning Z SFT2841 Sepam 1000 serie 40 IC Gl Eie Edt Operation Sepam Applica
257. ed 5 Reserved 6 Vsi set point Unp 7 Tripping time delay 10 ms 8 Reserved 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 5 ANSI 48 51LR 14 Locked rotor excessive starting time Function number 0601 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 6 2 CB control 3 Activity 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Is set point Ib 7 Excessive starting time delay 10 ms 8 Locked rotor time delay 10 ms 9 Locked rotor on start time delay 10 ms 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 13 Reserved Electric Schneider 185 Modbus communication 186 Schneider G Electric Access to remote settings ANSI 49RMS Thermal overload Function number 0401 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity 4 Negative sequence factor K 0 without 1 low 2 25 2 average 4 5 3 high 9 5 Current threshold Is switching from rate 1 rate 2 Ib 6 Accounting for ambient temperature 0 no 1 yes 7 Maximum equipment temperature C 8 Additional settings taken into account rate 2 0 no 1 yes 9 Learnt cooling time constant T2 learnt taken into 0 no account 1 yes 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Rate 1 heatrise alarm set point 13 Rate 1 heatrise tripping set point 14 Rate 1 heating time constant mn 15 Rate 1 cooling time constant mn 16 Rate 1 initial heatrise 17 Reserved 18 Reserved 19 Res
258. ed on both phases Schneider 217 Electric 058731N DE80051 DE80059 Installation 1 A 5 A current transformers Function Sepam may be connected to any standard 1 A and 5 A current transformer Schneider Electric offers a range of current transformers to measure primary currents from 50 A to 2500 A Please consult us for further information 058733N ARJA1 ARJP3 Sizing of current transformers Current transformers should be dimensioned so as not to become saturated by the current values they are required to measure accurately minimum 5 In For overcurrent protection m Definite time The saturation current must be more than 1 5 times the setting value m IDMT The saturation current must be more than 1 5 times the highest working value on the curve Practical solution when there is no information on the settings Rated secondary Rated Accuracy CT secondary Wiring current in burden class resistance Rct resistance Rf 1A 2 5 VA 5P 20 lt 3Q lt 0 075 Q 5A 7 5 VA 5P 20 lt 0 20 lt 0 075 Q CCA630 CCA634 connector Function The current transformers 1 A or 5 A are connected to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector on the rear panel of Sepam m The CCA630 connector is used to connect 3 phase current transformers to Sepam m The CCA634 connector is used to connect 3 phase current transformers and a residual current transformer to Sepam The CCA630 and CCA634 connectors contain interposing ring CTs with thro
259. ed to add circuit breaker closing inhibition conditions o V_FLAGREC data saved in disturbance recording Used to save a specific logical status in addition to those already present in disturbance recording Local variables Variables designed for intermediary calculations They are not available outside the logic equation editor They may appear on the left or right of the assignment sign There are 31 of them VL1 to VL31 Two constants are also predefined K_1 always equal to 1 and K_0 always equal to 0 Schneider 131 Control and monitoring functions Table of protection function input and output variables Logic equations Details of protection inputs outputs The tables below list the input output data available for each protection function The SFT2841 software includes a data input assistance tool which may be used to quickly identify each data item m numbers less than 100 correspond to the protection outputs that may be used as equation input variables m numbers between 100 and 199 correspond to the protection inputs that may be used as equation output variables m numbers greater than 200 correspond to the recloser outputs that may be used as equation input variables Outputs Instantaneous output pick up 1 7 Protection output time delayed 3 a u Drop out 4 Instantaneous output inverse 6 zone
260. ed to increase or inhibit set points temporarily after energization If the residual current is measured by a correctly installed CT there is less risk of measuring an incorrect residual current In this case there is no need to use the CLPU 50N 51N function Earth fault Cold Load Pick Up Blocking CLPU 50N 51N Operation The CLPU 50N 51N function starts if one of the following three conditions is fulfilled m aphase current is detected after all the currents have disappeared for longer than the time before activation Tcold m a logic input 124 by default has been activated indicating a temporary overload due to starting of the load corresponding to the protected feeder or a feeder downstream m the start command for the CLPU 50N 51N function has been activated from the logic equation editor This detection results in either depending on the parameter setting of Global action CLPU 50N 51N for a predefined duration m application of a configurable multiplying factor to set point IsO of each ANSI 50N 51N protection unit m or blocking of the various protection units Setting the CLPU 50N 51N function parameters consists of m defining the time before activation Tcold and the pick up threshold CLPUs m choosing which ANSI 50N 51N protection units it affects m defining the type of action multiplying factor or blocking its duration TO x and if necessary the multiplying factor MO x for each ANSI 50N 51N protection unit x B
261. ed word are set Capacitive the program logic resets the STC bit and TC bits to zero 19 32 Reserved after the remote control order is acknowledged Deselection of the STC bit takes place Remote control of the analog output m if the master deselects it by writing in the STC word The analog output of the MSA141 module may be set up for remote control via the m if the master selects write bit a bit other than the Modbus communication link word address 010F The usable range of the numerical one already selected value transmitted is defined by the min value and max value settings of the m ifthe master sets a bit in the TC word which does not analog output match the selection In this case no remote control This function is not affected by remote control inhibition conditions order is executed 172 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Modbus communication Presentation The communication system time tags the data processed by Sepam The time tagging function assigns a date and precise time to status changes so that they can be accurately classified over time Time tagged data are events that can be processed in the control room by the remote monitoring and control system using the communication protocol for the data logging and chronological display functions Sepam time tags the following data m logic inputs m remote indications m information pertaining to Sepam equipment see Sepam check word Time tagging is c
262. edance matching resistors Function SW1 1 SW1 2 SW1 3 Polarization at 0 V via Rp 470 Q ON Polarization at 5 V via Rp 470 Q ON 2 wire RS 485 network impedance ON matching by 150 Q resistor Converter configuration when delivered m 12 V DC distributed power supply m 2 wire RS 485 network polarization and impedance matching resistors activated Connection 2 wire RS 485 link without distributed power supply m To 2 5 mm AWG 12 screw type terminal block m L L 2 wire RS 485 signals m Shielding 2 wire RS 485 link with distributed power supply m To connector female 9 pin sub D m 2 wire RS 485 signals L L m Distributed power supply V 12 V DC or 24 V DC V 0 V Power supply m To 2 5 mm AWG 12 screw type terminal block m Reversible phase and neutral ACE919CA m Earthed via terminal block and metal case ring lug on back of case Electric Schneider 261 PE80319 Installation Schneider G Electric LK RX 100 vr eciesoMG Pe rE aeREEE EES gERBERF penne ECI850 IEC 61850 Sepam server 22 Schneider ECI850 IEC 61850 Sepam server Function The ECI850 can be used to connect Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40 Sepam series 60 and Sepam series 80 to an Ethernet network using the IEC 61850 protocol The ECI850 creates the interface between the Ethernet IEC 61850 network and a Sepam RS 485 Modbus network A PRI surge arrester ref 16339 is supplied with the ECI85
263. ent input Characteristics Weight 0 64 kg 1 41 Ib Assembly Mounted on symmetrical DIN rail Amplitude accuracy 1 Phase accuracy lt 2 Maximum permissible current 20kA 15s on the primary winding of an MV core balance CT with a ratio of 1 50 that does not saturate ACE990 core balance CT interface Operating temperature 5 C to 55 C 23 F to 131 F Storage temperature 25 C to 70 C 13 F to 158 F Description and dimensions ACE990 input terminal block for connection of the core balance CT jods ACE990 output terminal block for connection of the Sepam residual current oO 9 1 81 3 11 0 43 228 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE51682 Installation Example Given a core balance CT with a ratio of 1 400 2 VA used within a measurement range of 0 5 A to 60 A How should it be connected to Sepam via the ACE990 1 Choose a close approximation of the rated current InO Le 5A 2 Calculate the ratio approx InO number of turns 5 400 0 0125 3 Find the closest value of k in the table opposite to k 0 01136 4 Check the mininum power required for the core balance CT 2 VA core balance CT gt 0 1 VA V OK 5 Connect the core balance CT secondary to ACE990 input terminals E2 and E4 6 Set Sepam up with InO 0 0136 x 400 4 5 A This value of InO can be used to monitor current between 0 45 A and 67 5 A Wiring of MV core
264. ent of 2 Example m 0001 represents 1 m FFFF represents 1 32NS or 2 x 16NS format The information is encoded in two 16 bit words in binary format unsigned The first word is the most significant word 32S format The information is encoded as a complement of 2 in 2 words The first word is the most significant word m 0000 0001 represents 1 m FFFF FFFF represents 1 B format Rank i bit in the word with i between 0 and F Examples F E D c B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TS1 to Word address 0101 TS16 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit address 101x TS49 to Word address 0104 TS64 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 Bit address 104x TC1 to Word address 00FO TC16 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 T 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit address OFOx STC1 to Word address 00F1 STC16 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit address OF1x PCRED301006EN 03 2011 X format Sepam check word This format applies only to the Sepam check word that may be accessed at the word address 0100h This word contains various items of information relating to m Sepam operating mode m time tagging of events Each data item contained in the Sepam check word may be accessed bit by bit from address 1000 for bit 0 to 100F for bit 15 m bit 15 event present in event zone 1 m bit 14 Sepam in data loss status in event zone 1 m bit 13 Sepam not synchronous m bit 12 Sepam time not correct m bit 11 presence of events in
265. epam updates its event table The events sent by Sepam are not sorted chronologically Structure of event table 1 m exchange word 0040h m event number 1 0041h 0048h m event number 2 0049h 0050h m event number 3 0051h 0058h m event number 4 0059h 0060h Structure of event table 2 m exchange word 0070h m event number 1 0071h 0078h m event number 2 0079h 0080h m event number 3 0081h 0088h m event number 4 0089h 0090h The master has to read a block of 33 words starting at the address 0040h 0070h or 1 word at the address 0040h 0070h ia Schneider Time tagging of events Exchange word The exchange word is used to manage a special protocol to be sure not to lose events following a communication problem The event table is numbered for that purpose The exchange word includes two fields m most significant byte MSB exchange number 8 bits 0 255 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b09 b08 Exchange number 0 255 Description of the MSB of the exchange word The exchange number contains a numbering byte which identifies the exchanges The exchange number is initialized to zero when Sepam is energized When it reaches its maximum value FFh it automatically returns to 0 Sepam numbers the exchanges and the master acknowledges the numbering m least significant byte LSB number of events 8 bits 0 4 b07 b06 b0
266. er Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage Schneider 264 P Electric DE80263 DE80447 DE80448 ECI850 IEC 61850 Sepam server Dimensions Connection m Connect the power supply and RS 485 twisted pair using cable with cross section s 2 5 mm AWG 12 m Connect the 24 V DC power supply and the earth to inputs 1 5 and 3 of the PRI surge arrester ref 16339 supplied with the ECI850 m Connect outputs 2 8 and 6 12 of the PRI surge arrester to the and terminals of the black screen terminal block m Connect the RS 485 twisted pair 2 wire or 4 wire to the RX RX or RX RX TX TX terminals of the black screw terminal block m Connect the RS 485 twisted pair shielding to the terminal of the black screw terminal block m Connect the Ethernet cable to the green RJ45 connector 2 wire RS 485 network 24 V A EMITA 4 wire RS 485 network Ref PRI 16339 2 8 6 12 7 V 6 v 24 V il UMETAN PRI Ref 16339 2 8 6 12 7 V 6 V
267. er for data format 162 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Modbus communication Remote control zone The remote control zone is a table which contains the pre assigned remote control bits TC The zone may be read or written using the word functions or bit functions The use of remote control orders is discussed in detail on page 172 Data addresses and encoding Remote control orders Word address Bit address Access Function Format TC1 TC16 00FO OFOO R W 3 4 6 16 B 1 2 5 15 STC1 STC16 00F1 OF10 R W 3 4 6 16 B 1 2 5 15 TC17 TC32 00F2 OF20 R W 3 4 6 16 B 1 2 5 15 STC17 STC32 00F3 OF30 R W 3 4 6 16 B 1 2 5 15 Status zone The status zone is a table that contains the Sepam check word pre assigned remote indication bits TS logic inputs logic equation bits logic outputs LEDs and analog output control word The TS assignments are discussed in detail on page 169 Status Word address Bit address Access Modbus function Format enabled Sepam check word 0100 1000 R 3 4 or 1 2 7 X TS1 TS16 0101 1010 R 3 4 or 1 2 B TS17 TS32 0102 1020 R 3 4 or 1 2 B TS33 TS48 0103 1030 R 3 4 or 1 2 B TS49 TS64 reserved 0104 1040 R 3 4 or 1 2 B TS65 TS80 0105 1050 R 3 4 or 1 2 B TS81 TS96 0106 1060 R 3 4 or 1 2 B TS97 TS112 0107 1070 R 3 4 or 1 2 B TS113 TS128 0108 1080 R 3
268. er hold delay T1 m definite time timer hold for all the tripping curves gt Is time delayed output j gt Is pick up signal l l l l l l l m Li l i tripping time delay L value ofinternal counter I m DMT for IEC IEEE and IAC curves gt Is time delayed output I value of internal time delay counter PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Phase overcurrent ANSI code 50 51 Characteristics Tripping curve Setting Confirmation Definite time IDMT chosen according to list on page 72 Setting by undervoltage unit 1 by negative sequence overvoltage none by confirmation Is set point Setting Definite time 0 1 Ins Is lt 24 In expressed in Amps IDMT 0 1 Ins Is lt 2 4 In expressed in Amps Resolution 1 Aor 1 digit Accuracy 1 5 or 0 01 In Drop out pick up ratio Time delay T operation time at 10 Is 93 5 5 or gt 1 0 015 In Is x 100 Setting Definite time inst 50 ms lt T lt 300s IDMT 100 ms lt T lt 12 5 s or TMS Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy Definite time 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms IDMT Class 5 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Timer hold delay T1 Definite time timer hold 0 0 05 to 300 s IDMT 0 5t0 20s Characteristic times Operation time Pick up lt 35 ms at 2 Is typically 25 ms Confirmed instantaneous m inst lt 50 ms at 2 Is for Is gt 0 3 In typically
269. erence between Sepam s current time and the nearest ten second period at the time of the receipt of a synchronization pulse which is adapted to match the synchronization pulse period The synchronization pulse period is determined automatically by Sepam when it is energized based on the first two pulses received the synchronization pulse must therefore be operational before Sepam is energized The synchronization function only operates after Sepam has been time set i e after the disappearance of the incorrect time event Any time changes greater than 4 seconds in amplitude are made by sending a new time frame The switch from summer time to winter time and vice versa is made in this way as well There is a temporary loss of synchronism when the time is changed The external synchronization mode requires additional equipment a synchronization clock to generate a precise periodic synchronization time pulse If Sepam is in correct time and synchronous status and if the difference in synchronism between the nearest ten second period and the receipt of the synchronization pulse is greater than the synchronism error for 2 consecutive synchronization pulses it switches into non synchronous status and generates the appearance of a not synchronous event Likewise if Sepam is in correct time and synchronous status the failure to receive a synchronization pulse for 200 seconds generates the appearance of a not synchronous event
270. erved 20 Reserved 21 Reserved 22 Rate 2 heatrise alarm set point 23 Rate 2 heatrise tripping set point 24 Rate 2 heating time constant mn 25 Rate 2 cooling time constant mn 26 Rate 2 initial heatrise 27 Rate 2 base current for rate 2 0 1A 28 Reserved 29 Reserved 30 Reserved 31 Reserved PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Modbus communication PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Access to remote settings ANSI 50 51 Phase overcurrent Function number 01xx relay 1 xx 01 to relay 4 xx 04 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 6 3 Activity O 4 Confirmation 0 none 1 neg seq overvoltage 2 undervoltage 5 H2 restraint set point 6 Reserved 7 Group A tripping curve 8 Group A Is set point 0 1 A 9 Group A tripping time delay 10 ms 10 Group A timer hold curve 3 11 Group A timer hold delay 10 ms 12 Group A H2 restraint 13 Group A Iscmin 0 1A 14 Reserved 15 Reserved 16 Group B tripping curve 17 Group B Is set point 0 1 A 18 Group B tripping time delay 10 ms 19 Group B timer hold curve 3 20 Group B timer hold delay 10 ms 21 Group B H2 restraint OD 22 Group B Iscmin 0 1 A 23 Reserved 24 Reserved 1 Set point utilized by all the groups ANSI 50BF Breaker failure Function number 2001 Setting Data Format Unit
271. es m check all the ACE configuration parameters on SFT2841 m check the CPT2 and CPT9 diagnostic counters on the SFT2841 Sepam Diagnosis screen Electric Schneider 153 DE80432 Modbus communication Commissioning and diagnosis Ethernet communication Installing the Ethernet network Preliminary study According to the installation characteristics and constraints a technical study must first determine the Ethernet network requirements including m the network topology m the various subnets if any and their interconnections m the IP addressing scheme Sepam operating instructions Communication interfaces must be installed and connected in accordance with the instructions given in this manual page 244 See also the ACE850 installation guide delivered with each ACE850 reference BBV35290 Preliminary checks Perform the following actions m check the CCA614 cord connection between the ACE850 interface and the Sepam base unit m check the connection of the ACE850 to the Ethernet network m check the auxiliary power supply connection m check the complete configuration of the ACE850 Checking the operation of the ACE interface You can use the following to check that an ACE850 interface is operating correctly m the indicator LEDs on the front panel of the ACE850 m the information provided by the SFT2841 software connected to Sepam m the Web pages embedded inside the ACE850 Basic diagnostics Diagnosis using indica
272. es according to two different types of characteristics i e a choice of m type 1 the protection function uses 10 vector projection m type 2 the protection function uses 10 vector magnitude m type 3 the protection function uses IO vector magnitude according to the Italian ENEL DK5600 specification Type 1 operation The function determines the projection of the residual current IO on the characteristic line the position of which is set by the setting of characteristic angle 60 in relation to the residual voltage The projection value is compared to the IsO set point The projection method is suitable for radial feeders in resistive isolated or compensated neutral systems With compensated neutral systems it is characterized by its capacity to detect very brief repetitive faults recurrent faults In the case of Petersen coils with no additional resistance fault detection in steady state operating conditions is not possible due to the absence of active zero sequence current The protection function uses the transient current at the beginning of the fault to ensure tripping The 60 0 setting is suitable for compensated neutral systems When this setting is selected the parameter setting of the sector is used to reduce the protection tripping zone to ensure its stability on fault free feeders The protection function operates with the residual current measured at the relay 10 input operation with sum of three currents impossible
273. es and the polarization value Voltage memory Should all the voltages disappear during a 3 phase fault near the busbar the voltage level may be insufficient for the fault direction to be detected lt 1 5 Unp The protection function therefore uses a voltage memory to reliably determine the direction The fault direction is saved as long as the voltage level is too low and the current is above the Is set point Closing due to a pre existing fault If the circuit breaker is closed due to a pre existing 3 phase fault on the busbar the voltage memory is blank As a result the direction cannot be determined and the protection does not trip In such cases a backup 50 51 protection function should be used PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Directional phase overcurrent ANSI code 67 MT11128 Three phase function polarization currents and voltages line zone DE50667 busbar zone U13 Fault tripping in line zone with 30 line d zone E i i al busbar zone 0 45 U32 busbar zone busbar zone U13 line zone Fault tripping in line zone with 6 45 DE50669 busbar zone U13 Fault tripping in line zone with 60 Schneider a7 Protection functions Directional phase overcurrent ANSI code 67 Block diagram DE52319 Cc N 0 90 lt 01 lt 0 270 lt a1 lt 6 270 Phase 1 current I1 processing U13 ae 90 lt a2 lt 0 90
274. ests described in this document are systematically based on the use of that tool Method For each Sepam m only carry out the checks suited to the hardware configuration and the functions activated A comprehensive description of all the tests is given further on m use the test sheet provided to record the results of the commissioning tests Checking of current and voltage input connections The secondary injection tests to be carried out to check the connection of the current and voltage inputs are described according to m the type of current and voltage sensors connected to Sepam in particular for residual current and voltage measurement m the type of injection generator used for the tests three phase or single phase generator The different possible tests are described further on by m a detailed test procedure m the connection diagram of the associated test generator The table below specifies the tests to be carried out according to the type of measurement sensors and type of generator used and indicates the page on which each test is described Current sensors 3 CTs 3 CTs 1 core 3 CTs 3 CTs 1 core balance CT balance CT Voltage sensors 3 VTs 3 VTs 2 phase VTs 2 phase VTs 1 residual VT 1 residual VT Three phase Page 290 Page 290 Page 291 Page 291 generator Page 295 Page 296 Page 297 Single phase Page 292 Page 292 Page 292 Page 292 generator Page 295 Page 296 Page 297 PCRED301006EN 03 2011
275. et communication ports to connect a Sepam to a single Ethernet network depending on the topology star or ring m For a star topology only one communication port is used m For a ring topology both Ethernet communication ports are used to provide redundancy This redundancy conforms to the RSTP 802 1d 2004 standard PB105301 Either port can be used for connection m To the S LAN Supervisory Local Area Network port to connect Sepam to an Ethernet communication network dedicated to supervision using one of the two following protocols o IEC 61850 o Modbus TCP IP TR A15 m To the E LAN Engineering Local Area Network port reserved for Sepam remote parameter setting and operation using the SFT2841 software ACE850TP communication interface There are two versions of the ACE850 interfaces which are identical except for the type of port featured m ACE850TP Twisted Pair for connection to an Ethernet network S LAN or E LAN using a copper RJ45 10 100 Base TX Ethernet link m ACES5OFO Fiber Optic for connection to an Ethernet network S LAN or E LAN using a 100Base FX fiber optic connection star or ring PB105300 Compatible Sepam The ACE850TP and ACE850FO multi protocol communication interfaces are compatible with m Sepam series 40 version gt V7 00 m Sepam series 60 all versions m Sepam series 80 base version and application version gt V6 00 ACE850FO communication interface The ACE850 multi protocol co
276. et point Setting 5 Unp to 100 Unp Accuracy 5 or 0 005 Unp Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 104 3 Time delay T Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic times Operation time lt 40 ms Overshoot time lt 20 ms Reset time lt 30 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 53 Electric DE50459 Protection functions reverse power Operating zone 54 Schneider amp Electric overpower Directional active overpower ANSI code 32P Operation This function may be used as m active overpower protection for energy management load shedding or m reverse active power protection against motors running like generators and generators running like motors It picks up if the active power flowing in one direction or the other supplied or absorbed is greater than the Ps set point It includes a definite time delay T It is based on the two wattmeter method The function is only enabled if the following condition is met P 23 1 Q which provides a high level of sensitivity and high stability in the event of short circuits The power sign is determined according to the general feeder or incomer parameter iaccording to the convention m for the feeder circuit o power exported by the busbar is positive o power supplied to the busbar is negative x MT11183 flow direction m for the incomer
277. etting of tripping logic one out of three z two out of three Grouping of output data 88 Schneider Electric PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Protection functions Tripping logic In certain cases it is wise to choose a tripping logic of the two out of three phases type Such cases may occur when two parallel transformers Dy are being protected For a 2 phase fault on a transformer primary winding there is a 2 1 1 ratio current distribution at the secondary end The highest current is in the expected zone operation zone for the faulty incomer no operation zone for the fault free incomer One of the lowest currents is at the limit of the zone According to the line parameters it may even be in the wrong zone There is therefore a risk of tripping both incomers Time delay Definite time protection Is is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation time delay tA MT10911 Definite time protection principle IDMT protection IDMT protection operates in accordance with the IEC 60255 3 BS 142 and IEEE C 37112 standards DE52320 IDMT protection principle PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Directional phase overcurrent ANSI code 67 The Is setting is the vertical asymptote of the curve and T is the operation time delay for 10 Is The tripping time for I Is values of less than 1 2 depends on the type of curve chosen Name of curve Type
278. event zone 2 m bit 10 Sepam in data loss status in event zone 2 m bit9 major fault in Sepam m bit8 partial fault in Sepam m bit 7 setting group A in service m bit6 setting group B in service m bit 1 Sepam in local setting mode m other bits reserved undetermined values Status changes of bits 1 6 7 8 10 12 13 and 14 of this word trigger the sending of a time tagged event Schneider 161 Electric Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding Synchronization zone The synchronization zone is a table which contains the absolute date and time for the time tagging function Time messages should be written in a single block containing 4 words using function 16 write word Messages can be read word by word or by groups of words using function 3 Synchronization zone Word address Access Modbus function enabled Binary time year 0002 Read write 3 16 Binary time months days 0003 Read 3 Binary time hours minutes 0004 Read 3 Binary time milliseconds 0005 Read 3 See time tagging of events chapter for data format Identification zone The identification zone contains system type information pertaining to the identification of the Sepam equipment Some of the information in the identification zone is also found in the configuration zone at the address 02CCh Identification zone Word address Access Modbus function Format Value enabled Manufacturer identif
279. ew tight all terminals even those not in use Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Terminal Assignment Type Wiring 3 Screw terminals m Wiring without fittings 4 f o 1 wire with maximum cross section 0 5 to 2 5 mm 2 AWG 20 12 or 2 wires with maximum cross section 0 5 to 1 mm 2 AWG 20 18 O Stripped length 8 to 10 mm 0 31 to 0 39 in m Wiring with fittings o Recommended wiring with Schneider Electric fitting DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1 5 mm AWG 16 DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2 5 mm AWG 12 AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mm AWG 18 o Tube length 8 2 mm 0 32 in O Stripped length 8 mm 0 31 in 81 Protective Screw terminal 1 green yellow wire max length 3 m 9 8 ft 8 earth and max cross section 2 5 mm AWG 12 2 Functional 4 mm 0 16 in Earthing braid supplied for connection to 8 earth ring lug cubicle grounding Electric Schneider 255 DE81023 Installation Supervisor or RTU S LAN SS BI i P1 P2 ACE850 om Sepam series 80 bneider 256 Schneider Fault tolerant fiber optic ring communication network ACE850TP and ACE850FO Multi protocol interfaces Connection ACE850TP or ACE850FO communication architectures Performance Redundancy performance tests have been conducted using RuggedCom switches RS900xx RSG2xxx family compatible with RSTP 802 1d 2004 T
280. f the control word without associated event generation Sepam in data loss 1 no data loss 0 status Sepam has two internal storage queues with a capacity of 64 events If one of the queues becomes saturated i e 63 events already present the data loss event is generated by Sepam in the 64 position The detection of events stops and the most recent events are lost PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Modbus communication PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Time tagging of events Description of event encoding An event is encoded in 8 words with the following structure Most significant byte Least significant byte Word 1 type of event 08 00 For remote indications internal data logic inputs Word 2 event address See bit adresses 1000 to 10BF Word 3 reserved 00 00 Word 4 falling edge disappearance or rising edge appearance 00 00 Falling edge 00 01 Rising edge Word 5 year 00 0 to 99 year Word 6 month day 1 to 12 month 1 to 31 day Word 7 hours minutes 0 to 23 hours 0 to 59 minutes Word 8 milliseconds 0 to 59999 Electric Schneider 175 DE80301 Modbus communication master computer network Architecture for internal synchronization via the communication network 176 Schneider Time tagging of events Synchronization Sepam accommodates two synchronization modes m internal via the
281. g mode Once the connection has been established the procedure for uploading a parameter and protection setting file is as follows 1 Activate the Upload Sepam function in the Sepam menu 2 Select the rpg file that is to contain the uploaded data 3 Acknowledge the end of operation report Local operation of Sepam Connected to Sepam SFT2841 offers all the local operating functions available in the advanced UMI screen plus the following functions m setting of Sepam internal clock via the general characteristics tab implementation of the disturbance recording function via the Fault recording menu OPG validation inhibition of the function recovery of Sepam files start up of SFT2826 m consultation of the history of the last 64 Sepam alarms with time tagging m access to Sepam diagnostic data in the Sepam tab box included in Sepam diagnosis m in Parameter setting mode the switchgear diagnostic values may be modified operation counter cumulative breaking current to reset the values after a change of breaking device PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Use SFT2841 setting and operating software Configuration of a Sepam network Connection window The SFT2841 software connection window is used m To select an existing Sepam network or configure a new one m To set up the connection to the selected Sepam network m To select one Sepam unit from the network and access its parameters settings and operation and mainte
282. g to Sepam 1 Not recommended even on the second fault 2 2 wattmeter method not suitable for unbalanced loads 3 Residual current too low in IT 4 2 phase to phase VTs PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 11 PE800226 PE80315 Introduction Sepam series 40 a modular solution Sepam series 40 with basic UMI and with fixed advanced UMI my Sehneider Presentation The Sepam series 40 family of protection and metering units is designed for the operation of machines and utility substations and electrical distribution networks in industrial installations for all voltage levels It consists of simple high performance solutions suited to demanding applications that call for current and voltage metering Sepam series 40 selection guide by application Selection criteria Basic protection I l U and f U and f l U and f functions Specific protection Directional Directional Directional earth functions earth fault earth fault fault and phase overcurrent Applications Substation 843 853 S40 S50 541 851 542 52 1 S44 S54 Transformer T40 T50 T42 T52 2 Motor M40 M41 Generator G40 1 S5X applications are identical to S4X applications with the following additional functions m earth fault and phase overcurrent cold load pick up m broken conductor detection m fault locator 2 T5X applications are identical to T4X applications with the following additional fun
283. generation disabled to prevent logbook saturation on underload networks V6 01 September Bases 1 2 3 09350001 to Hardware evolution of the Sepam series 40 base 3 2009 and 4 09499999 V6 02 August 2010 Bases 1 2 3 New harmonic 2 restraint function on the earth fault protection ANSI 50N 51N and 4 V6 05 October 2010 Bases 1 2 3 Same event list management for all Sepam series 20 series 40 and series 80 and 4 V7 00 December Bases 3and4 09500001 to m New applications added 2009 10469999 S50 S51 S52 S53 T50 and T52 applications created based on the S40 S41 S42 S43 T40 and T42 applications enhanced with the following functions o Fault locator function ANSI 21FL o Broken conductor protection ANSI 46BC o Cold load pick up on and lo functions m New functions added on all applications o Cable arcing fault detection based on an harmonic 2 restraint function on ANSI 50 51 o New harmonic 2 restraint function on the earth fault protection ANSI 50N 51N o Supervision communication is checked by using remote control orders TC broadcasting If the TC is not received in the correct setting time interval the Sepam trips o Inductive and capacitive remote indication event generation disabled to prevent logbook saturation on underload networks o Under voltage functions ANSI 27 27S setting point o Positive sequence under voltage function ANSI 27D setting point V7 04 November Base 3 and 4 10470001 Same event list management for al
284. h fault message i fault l an T E l Protection 1 time delay Final trip Dead time cycle 1 Dead time cycle 2 message oe cee ce I l Remote indication final trip Schneider 100 Electric 76 DL PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Protection functions Recloser ANSI code 79 Example 3 closing on a fault 8 50N 51N unit 1 E instantaneous Protection time delay 50N 51N unit 1 OO T 500 ms Earth fault 7 Y Circuit breaker Final tripping open message Recloser ready Remote indication final tripping Example 4 no extension of dead time Earth fault 4 TRIP J x Dead time cycle 1 Dead time cycle 2 cireni breaker fo oO open A Recharging time gt MT10558 Circuit breaker charged Example 5 extension of dead time Earth fault 4 TRIP 04 Maximum additional dead time Dead time cycle 1 Dead time cycle 2 t gt Circuit breaker gt l open A l Circuit breaker t iS Normal recharging time charged gt MT 10564 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 P Electric 101 Protection functions 12 Schneider Overfrequency ANSI code 81H Operation The protection function picks up when the positive sequence voltage frequency is above the Fs set point and the positive sequence voltage is above the Vs set point If asingle VT is connected U21 the function picks up when the frequency is above the Fs set point and
285. h the following information to assist with identifying and resolving communication problems m name of the protocol configured m Modbus interface version number m number of valid frames received CPT9 m number of invalid mistaken frames received CPT2 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Modbus communication Link activity LED The ACE interface link activity LEDs are activated by variations in the signal on the Modbus network When the supervisor communicates with Sepam during transmission or reception these LEDs flash After wiring check the information given by the link activity LEDs when the supervisor operates Note Flashing indicates that there is traffic passing to or from Sepam it does not mean that the exchanges are valid Functional test If there is any doubt about correct operation of the link m run read write cycles in the test zone m use Modbus diagnosis function 8 sub code 0 echo mode The Modbus frames below transmitted or received by a supervisor are an example of a test performed when communication is set up Test zone Read Transmission 01 03 0C00 0002 C75B Reception 01 03 04 0000 0000 FA33 Write Transmission 01 10 0C00 0001 02 1234 6727 Reception 01 10 0C00 0001 0299 Read Transmission 01 03 0C00 0001 875A Reception 01 03 02 1234 B533 Function 8 Modbus diagnosis echo mode Transmission 01 08 0000 1234 ED7C Reception 01 08 0000 1234 ED7C Even in echo mode
286. harmonics up to number 17 Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the amp key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement range 0 1 to 1 5 In Unit AorkA Accuracy 0 5 typical 2 2 from 0 3 to 1 5 In 5 if lt 0 3 In Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1A Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 In rated current set in the general settings 2 At In in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 3 Display of values 0 02 to 40 In Residual current Operation This operation gives the RMS value of the residual current IO It is based on measurement of the fundamental component Readout The residual current measured 10 and the residual current calculated by the sum of the phase currents lox may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the K key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement range Connection to 3 phase CTs 0 1 to 1 5 In0 Connection to 1 CT 0 1 to 1 5 Ind Connection to core balance CT with ACE990 0 1 to 1 5 Ind Connection to CSH residual 2 A rating 0 2 to 3A current sensor 5 A rating 0 5 to 7 5 A 20 A rating 2to 30 A Unit Aor kA Accuracy 2 1 typical a
287. he corresponding VTs via the test terminal box residual voltage input connection to the corresponding VTs via the test terminal box logic input and output connection temperature sensor connection analog output connection m hardware BOMs and installation rules m group of Sepam parameter and protection settings available in paper format OO O0 0 00 o Schneider 287 Electric Commissioning 288 Schneider G Electric General examination and preliminary actions Checking to be done prior to energizing Apart from the mechanical state of the equipment use the diagrams and BOMs provided by the contractor to check m identification of Sepam and accessories determined by the contractor m correct earthing of Sepam via terminal 17 of the 20 pin connector m correct connection of auxiliary voltage terminal 1 AC or positive polarity terminal 2 AC or negative polarity m presence of a residual current measurement core balance CT and or additional modules connected to Sepam when applicable m presence of test terminal boxes upstream from the current inputs and voltage inputs m conformity of connections between Sepam terminals and the test terminal boxes Connections Check that the connections are tightened with equipment non energized The Sepam connectors must be correctly plugged in and locked Energizing 1 Switch on the auxiliary power supply 2 Check that Sepam performs the following initialization sequence which
288. he current values of the remote indication and logic input status without creating any events related to those data After the initialization phase event detection is activated It can only be interrupted by saturation of the internal event storage queue or by the presence of a major fault in Sepam Date and time Presentation An absolute date and time are generated internally by Sepam comprising the following information Year Month Day Hour minute millisecond The date and time format is standardized ref IEC 60870 5 4 Power failure protection The internal clock of Sepam is saved for 24 hours After a power outage that lasts for more than 24 hours the time must be reset The period over which Sepam data and time settings are maintained in the event of a power outage depends on the ambient temperature and the age ofthe Sepam unit Typical values m at25 C O 24 hours for 7 years O 18 hours for 10 years O 14 hours for 15 years m at 40 C O 24 hours for 3 years o 16 hours for 10 years o 10 hours for 15 years Resetting the date and time The internal clock of Sepam may be time set in three different ways m by the remote monitoring and control system via the Modbus link m via the SFT2841 software tool General characteristics screen m via the display of Sepam units equipped with the advanced UMI The time tagged on events is encoded in 8 bytes as follows b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b09 b08 b07 b06 b05 b04 b03 b02 b01
289. he selected Sepam Schneider Terz Use UMI on front panel Presentation Basic UMI This UMI includes m 2 signal lamps indicating Sepam operating status o green on indicator device on D red N indicator device unavailable initialization phase or detection of internal failure m 9 parameterizable yellow signal lamps fitted with a standard label with SFT2841 a customized label can be printed on a laser printer m amp key for clearing faults and resetting m 1 connection port for the link with the PC CCA783 or CCA784 cord the connector is protected by a sliding cover b51 MT10276 Fixed or remote advanced UMI In addition to the basic UMI functions this version provides m a graphic LCD display for the display of measurements parameter protection settings and alarm and operating messages The number of lines size of characters and symbols are in accordance with the screens and language versions The LCD display is back lit when the user presses a key m a 9 key keypad with 2 operating modes White keys for current operation D display of measurements 2 display of switchgear network diagnosis data 3 display of alarm messages 4 resetting 5 acknowledgment and clearing of alarms Blue keys activated in parameter and protection setting mode D access to protection settings access to Sepam parameter setting 9 used to enter the 2 passwords required to change protection and paramete
290. hneider Electric 271 Use Not connected to Sepam mode Sepam parameter and protection setting The parameter and protection setting of a Sepam using SFT2841 consists of preparing the Sepam file containing all the characteristics that are specific to the application a file that is then downloaded into Sepam at the time of commissioning CAUTION HAZARD OF UNINTENDED OPERATION m The device must only be configured and set by qualified personnel using the results of the installation protection system study m During commissioning of the installation and after any modification check that the Sepam configuration and protection function settings are consistent with the results of this study Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage Operating mode 1 Create a Sepam file for the type of Sepam to be set up the newly created file contains the Sepam factory set parameter and protection settings 2 Modify the Sepam general settings and protection function settings m all the data relating to the same function are grouped together in the same screen m it is advisable to enter all the parameters and protection settings in the natural order of the screens proposed by the guided navigation mode Entry of parameter and protection settings m the parameter and protection setting input fields are suited to the type of value o choice buttons o numerical value input fields o dialogue box
291. ication 0006 R 3 0100 Equipment identification 0007 R 3 0 Marking equipment type 0008 R 3 Idem 02E2 Modbus version 0009 R 3 Not managed 0 Application version 000A B R 3 m Sepam check word 000C R 3 Idem 0100 Extension word 000D R 3 Not managed 0 Command 000E R W 3 16 Not managed Init to 0 Extension address 000F R 3 02CC 1 MSB word 2 major index LSB word 2 minor index Events 1 zone The event zone is a table which contains a maximum of 4 time tagged events Events should be read in a single block containing 33 words using function 3 The exchange word can be written using functions 6 or 16 and read individually using function 3 Events 1 zone Word address Access Modbus function enabled Exchange word 0040 Read write 3 6 16 Event n 1 0041 0048 Read 3 Event n 2 0049 0050 Read 3 Event n 3 0051 0058 Read 3 Event n 4 0059 0060 Read 3 See time tagging of events chapter for data format Events 2 zone The event zone is a table which contains a maximum of 4 time tagged events Events should be read in a single block containing 33 words using function 3 The exchange word can be written using functions 6 or 16 and read individually using function 3 Events 2 zone Word address Access Modbus function enabled Exchange word 0070 Read write 3 6 16 Event n 1 0071 0078 Read 3 Event n 2 0079 0080 Read 3 Event n 3 0081 0088 Read 3 Event n 4 0089 0090 Read 3 See time tagging of events chapt
292. ide view mm a ke k 4 DE80034 eos oo ee ee ee wi _ foe 13 167A ans as e288 999 ide alae 152 5 99 1 Green LED Sepam on Red LED steadily on module unavailable flashing Sepam link unavailable 9 yellow LEDs Label identifying the LEDs Graphic LCD screen Display of measurements Display of switchgear network and machine diagnosis data Display of alarm messages Sepam reset or confirm data entry 10 Alarm acknowledgment and clearing or move cursor up 11 LED test or move cursor down 12 Access to protection settings 13 Access to Sepam parameters 14 Entry of 2 passwords 15 PC connection port 16 Mounting clip 17 Gasket to ensure NEMA 12 tightness gasket supplied with the DSM303 module to be installed if necessary OONOO RO RJ45 lateral output connector to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord Cut out for flush mounting mounting plate thickness lt 3 mm or 0 12 in DE80060 98 5 0 5 3 88 5 67 Connection RJ45 socket to connector the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord The DSM303 module is always the last interlinked remote module and it systematically ensures impedance matching by load resistor Rc Electric Schneider 239 Installation Communication accessory selection guide There are 2 types of Sepam communication accessory m Communication interfaces which are essential for connecting Sepam
293. ider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Metering functions PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Contents General settings Characteristics Phase current Residual current Average current and peak demand currents Phase to phase voltage Phase to neutral voltage Residual voltage Positive sequence voltage Negative sequence voltage Frequency Active reactive and apparent power Peak demand active and reactive power Power factor cos Active and reactive energy Temperature Tripping context Tripping current Negative sequence unbalance Phase displacement 00 Phase displacement 01 2 3 Disturbance recording Fault locator Thermal capacity used Cooling time constant Operating time before tripping Waiting time after tripping Running hours counter and operating time Starting current and starting overload time Number of starts before inhibition Start inhibit time delay Cumulative breaking current and number of operations Operating time Charging time VT supervision CT supervision Schneider Electric 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 45 Metering functions General settings The general settings define the characteristics of the measurement sensors connected to Sepam and determine the performance of the metering and protection functions used They are accessed via the SFT2841 setting software General Characteristics tab
294. igin France L OO NUN IN U IT 59604 01 10480001 C99 Test PASS 11 30 2010 Operator C99 m Software reference and designation label Substation S42 Sous station S42 59682 Type of application English French series 40 5961 5 Working language Modbus 0031412 C04 HMM NM ULT INN IN 1 1 TTT Additional information INITIALEN NN UN 9 mer over S stemancatyy S10 XX sox KKK PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Installation Equipment identification Identification of accessories Identification of accessories The accessories such as optional modules current or voltage connectors and connection cords come in separate packages which are identified by labels m Example of MES114 module identification label Part number DE80234 59646 Serial No 0304169 10 inputs 4 outputs 24 250 VDC Origin France 10 entr es 4 sorties 24 250 VCC 23 CE Commercial reference MES114 ji ah gosto aoao eee MIIL INN DTM 03146134FA Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 P Electric 203 Installation 204 Schneider G Electric Equipment identification Sepam series 40 List of Sepam series 40 references Reference Description 59600 Base unit with basic UMI 24 250 V DC and 100 240 V AC power supply 59604 Base unit with advanced UMI 24 250 V DC and 100 240 V AC power supply 59608 DSM303 remote advanced UMI module 596
295. ime They are reset to 0 after Sepam is recharging cc key external input or remote control order The LATCH function accepts as many parameters as the number of variables that the user wishes to latch It applies to the entire program whatever the position in the program For easier reading it is advisable to put it at the start of the program PCRED301006EN 03 2011 MT11042 MT 11044 Control and monitoring functions PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Logic equations m x TON y t on delay timer The x variable follows the switching to 1 of the y variable with a delay t t in ms m x TOF y t off delay timer The x variable follows the switching to 0 of the y variable with a delay t tin ms m x PULSE i n time tagger Used to generate n periodic pulses separated by a time interval i as of the starting time d o dis expressed as hour minute second o iis expressed as hour minute second o nis an integer n 1 repetition until the end of the day Example V1 PULSE 8 30 00 1 0 0 4 will generate 4 pulses at one hour intervals at 8 h 30 9h 30 10 h 30 11 h 30 This will be repeated every 24 hours The pulses last for a 14 ms cycle V1 has the value of 1 during the cycle If necessary V1 may be extended using the TOF SR or LATCH functions Maximum number of functions m the total number of delay timers TON and TOF and time taggers PULSE taken together cannot exceed 16 m there is no limit on the number
296. ime SIT A IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B IEC extremely inverse time EIT C IEEE moderately inverse IEC D IEEE very inverse IEC E IEEE extremely inverse IEC F IAC inverse IAC very inverse IAC extremely inverse 1 The curve equations are given in the chapter entitled IDMT protection functions i 1 4 4 4 1 i 1 The function takes into account current variations during the time delay interval For currents with a very large amplitude the protection function has a definite time characteristic m if gt 20 IsO tripping time is the time that corresponds to 20 IsO m if gt 20 InO tripping time is the time that corresponds to 20 InO operation based on IO input m if 10 gt 40 InO tripping time is the time that corresponds to 40 InO operation based on sum of phase currents Block diagram 11 12 5 13 CSH core bal CT CT core bal ACE990 pick up signal and to logic discrimination 0 gt 1s0 time delayed output The choice between IO measured and I0 calculated by the sum of the phase currents may be set for each unit by default units 1 and 2 set to 10 and units 2 and 4 to 102 By mixing the 2 possibilities on the different units it is possible to have m different dynamic set points m different applications e g zero sequence and tank earth leakage protection PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Protection functions Timer hold delay The function
297. ime inverse 3 very inverse 4 extremely inverse 5 ultra inverse 6 Rl 7 IEC SIT A 8 IEC LTI B 9 IEC VIT B 10 IEC EIT C 11 IEEE Mod inverse 12 IEEE Very inverse 13 IEEE Extr inverse 14 IAC inverse 15 IAC very inverse 16 IAC extr inverse The timer hold delay curve setting is encoded as follows 0 definite time 1 IDMT 4 The H2 restraint variable is encoded as follows 0 H2 restraint 1 no H2 restraint The tripping curve setting is 0 definite time 1 IDMT Setting of latching and CB control 0 No 1 Yes PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Access to remote settings Tripping curve for negative sequence undercurrent 0 definite 7 IEC SIT A 8 IEC LTI B 9 IEC VIT B 10 IEC EIT C 11 IEEE Mod inverse 12 IEEE Very inverse 13 IEEE Extr inverse 17 Schneider specific The activation of each of the cycles is encoded as follows Correspondence between bit position protection according to the table below Bit Activation by 0 Instantaneous phase overcurrent unit 1 1 Time delayed phase overcurrent unit 1 2 Instantaneous phase overcurrent unit 2 3 Time delayed phase overcurrent unit 2 4 Instantaneous phase overcurrent unit 3 5 Time delayed phase overcurrent unit 3 6 Instantaneous phase overcurrent unit 4 7 Time delayed phase overcurrent unit 4 8 Instantaneous earth fault uni
298. imer hold Tripping curve Definite time DT SIT LTI VIT EIT UIT DT RI DT CEI SIT A LTI B VIT B EIT C DT or IDMT IEEE MI D VI E El F DT or IDMT IAC I VI El DT or IDMT IsO set point 0 1 to 15 Ind Definite time Inst 0 05 s to 300 s 0 1 to 1 Ind IDMT 0 1 s to 12 5 s at 10 IsO Timer hold Definite time DT timer hold Inst 0 05 s to 300 s IDMT IDMT reset time CLPU 50N 51N Earth Fault Cold Load Pick Up Blocking Time before activation Tcold 0 5sto20s 0 1 to 300 s Pick up threshold CLPUs 10 to 100 of InO Global action CLPU 50N 51N Blocking or multiplication of the set point Action on unit x ANSI 50N 51N OFF or ON Time delay T0 x 100 ms to 999 min Multiplying factor MO x 100 to 999 of IsO ANSI 50V 51V Voltage restrained overcurrent Tripping time delay Timer hold Tripping curve Definite time DT SIT LTI VIT EIT UIT DT RI DT CEI SIT A LTI B VIT B EIT C DT or IDMT IEEE MI D VI E El F DT or IDMT IAC I VI El DT or IDMT Is set point 0 5 to 24 In Definite time Inst 0 05 s to 300 s 0 5 to 2 4 In IDMT 0 1 s to 12 5 s at 10 Is Timer hold Definite time DT timer hold Inst 0 05 s to 300 s 1 Tripping as of 1 2 Is PCRED301006EN 03 2011 IDMT IDMT reset time 0 5 s to 20 s Schneider 49 Electric Protection functions Setting ranges Functions Settings ANSI 59 Overvoltage L L or L N Tim
299. imum optical power available m Maximum fiber attenuation m Losses in 2 ST connectors 0 6 dBm m Optical power margin 3 dBm according to IEC 60870 standard Example for a 62 5 125 um fiber Lmax 9 4 3 0 6 3 2 1 8 km 1 12 mi Description and dimensions RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with aCCA612 cord 1 Link activity LED flashes when communication is active sending or receiving in progress 2 Rx female ST type connector Sepam receiving 3 Tx female ST type connector Sepam sending Connection m The sending and receiving fiber optic fibers must be equipped with male ST type connectors m Fiber optics screw locked to Rx and Tx connectors The interface is to be connected to connector C on the base unit using a CCA612 cord length 3 m or 9 8 ft white fittings Schneider Electric 245 Installation ACE969TP 2 and ACE969FO 2 Multi protocol interfaces Function The ACE969 multi protocol communication interfaces are for Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40 Sepam series 60 and Sepam series 80 They have two communication ports to connect a Sepam to two independent communication networks m The S LAN Supervisory Local Area Network port is used to connect Sepam to a communication network dedicated to supervision using one of the three following protocols o IEC 60870 5 103 o DNP3 o Modbus RTU The communication protocol is selected at the time of Sepam parameter setting
300. ings zone 2 Read settings 2000 207C 3 Read request 2080 2080 3 6 16 Remote settings 2100 217C 3 16 Disturbance recording zone 1 Record selection 2200 2203 3 16 Identification zone 2204 2271 3 Disturb rec exchange word 2300 2300 3 6 16 Disturbance recording data 2301 237C 3 Disturbance recording zone 2 Record selection 2400 2403 3 16 Identification zone 2404 2471 3 Disturb rec exchange word 2500 2500 3 6 16 Disturbance recording data 2501 257C 3 S LAN communication monitoring Time delay 5815 5815 3 16 2 Note non addressable zones may reply by an exception message or else supply non significant data 1 Zones accessible in word mode or bit mode The address of bit i 0 sis F of address word J is then J x 16 i Example 0C00 bit 0 C000 0C00 bit 7 C007 2 Range allowed 10 to 65535 x 100 ms Time delay can be set from 1 to 6553 5 s with increments of 0 1 s 160 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding Data encoding For all formats If a measurement overruns the maximum permissible value for the related format the value read for the measurement will be the maximum permissible value for the format 16NS format The information is encoded in a 16 bit word in binary format absolute value unsigned The 0 bit b0 is the least significant bit in the word 16S format signed measurements temperatures The information is encoded in a 16 bit word as a complem
301. initiate a trip if a start has been detected I gt Is or if the motor speed is zero For a normal start the input 123 zero speed switch disable this protection MT 10867 0 1lb j i i excessive starting time i i 1 locked rotor Case of normal starting Motor re acceleration When the motor re accelerates it consumes a current in the vicinity of the starting current gt Is without the current first passing through a value less than 10 of Ib The ST time delay which corresponds to the normal starting time may be reinitialized by the logic input motor re acceleration which m reinitialize the excessive starting time protection MT10869 0 1Ib m set the locked rotor protection LT time delay to a low value ee zug Starting is detected when the current consumed is 10 greater than the Ib current starting time An output is set when starting is in progress to be used in the equation editor locked i rotor rr Case of excessive starting time Block diagram 2 e starting 8 g 1 gt Is h ja 3 in progress 5 a tripping output ST 0 1 gt 0 1lb re locked rotor R after starting 11 logic input p 12 motor 13 re acceleration excessive I gt Is starting time Case of locked rotor amp locked rotor logic input ol on start rotor rotation detection iA Characteristics 3
302. installation so that an effective alarm is generated when necessary For example an audible alarm or flashing alarm lamp can be used to warn the operator Watchdog output No failure detected Failure detected status Watchdog output The protection m The protection functions are not working connected correctly functions are m Sepam is in the fail safe position to the control in working order m The Sepam alarm LED flashes system m The watchdog output activates a system alarm m The operator is warned that he needs to intervene Watchdog output The protection m The protection functions are not working not connected functions are m Sepam is in the fail safe position in working order m The Sepam alarm LED flashes m The need of maintenance is detected only if an operator controls the front panel of the digital relay PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Modbus communication PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Contents Presentation Modbus protocol Configuring the communication interfaces Commissioning and diagnosis Data addresses and encoding Time tagging of events Access to remote settings Access to remote settings Disturbance recording Reading Sepam identification Schneider Electric 142 143 146 152 160 173 178 182 195 197 141 Modbus communication 12 Schneider Presentation General Modbus communication allows Sepam to be connected to a supervisor or any other device with a master Modbus communica
303. ion The negative sequence current is given by gt 1 gt 2 gt gt li z3x a 12 al3 The positive sequence current is given by id fxd al2 a213 2x 3 where a e Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the Modbus communication link Resetting to zero Only via the Reset li Id peak demand meter command on the network diagnosis display of the SFT2841 software Characteristics Measuring range 1 to 500 Accuracy 2 Resolution 1 Refresh period 1 second typical 32 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE50412 MT11029 Network diagnosis functions 10 90 vo Phase displacement 00 g1 V1 Phase displacement 1 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Phase displacement 00 Phase displacement 71 92 03 Phase displacement 0 Operation This function give the phase displacement measured between the residual voltage and residual current in the trigonometric sense see diagram The measurement is useful during commissioning to check that the directional earth fault protection unit is connected correctly Two values are available m 00 angle with measured I0 m 02 angle with 10 calculated by sum of phase currents Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the amp key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics
304. ion 50BF m appearance of a switchgear related fault such as trip circuit fault control fault SF6 pressure drop m opening of the circuit breaker by a protection unit that does not run reclosing cycles e g frequency protection pr by external tripping In such cases a final trip message appears Extension of the dead time If during a reclosing cycle reclosing of the circuit breaker is impossible because breaker recharging is not finished following a drop in auxiliary voltage recharging time is longer the dead time may be extended up to the time at which the circuit breaker is ready to carry out an Open Close Open cycle The maximum time addded to the dead time is adjustable Twait_max If at the end of the maximum waiting time the circuit breaker is still not ready the recloser is inhibited see example 4 5 Characteristics Reclosing cycles Setting Number of cycles 1to4 Activation of cycle 1 max 1 to 4 inst delayed no activation max l0 1 to 4 inst delayed no activation directional max 1 to 2 inst delayed no activation directional max 10 1 to 2 inst delayed no activation V_TRIPCB output logic equation activation no activation Activation of cycles 2 3and 4 maxI1to4 inst delayed no activation max l0 1 to 4 inst delayed no activation directional max 1 to 2 inst delayed no activation directional max 10 1 to 2 inst delayed no act
305. itecture for external synchronization via a logic input PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Time tagging of events Synchronization cont d External synchronization via a logic input mode Sepam can be synchronized externally by means of a logic input 121 the MES114 module is required The synchronization pulse is determined by the rising edge of the logic input Sepam can adapt to all synchronization pulse periods from 10 to 60 s by 10 s steps The shorter the synchronization period the more accurate time tagging of status changes is The first time frame is used to initialize Sepam with the absolute date and time the following frames are used for the detection of any time changes The synchronization pulse is used to reset Sepam s internal clock In the initialization phase when Sepam is in non synchronous mode resetting is allowed within an amplitude of 4 seconds In the initialization phase the resetting process switching of Sepam into synchronous mode is based on a measurement of the difference between Sepam s current time and the nearest ten second period This measurement is taken at the time of the receipt of the synchronization pulse following the initialization time frame Resetting is allowed if the difference is less than or equal to 4 seconds in which case Sepam switches to synchronous mode As of that time after the switching to synchronous mode the resetting process is based on the measurement of a diff
306. ivation V_TRIPCB output logic equation activation no activation Time delays Reclaim time 0 1 to 300 s Dead time cycle 1 0 1 to 300 s cycle 2 0 1 to 300 s cycle 3 0 1 to 300s cycle 4 0 1 to 300s Safety time until 79 ready 0 to 60s Maximum additional dead time 0 1 to 60s Twait_max Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit 1 If a protection function that does not activate reclosing cycles leads to circuit breaker opening the recloser is inhibited Electric Schneider 99 MT10555 MT10556 Protection functions Recloser ANSI code 79 Example 1 fault cleared after the second cycle Earth fault 4 50N 51N unit 1 instantaneous Cycle 1 earth fault message Earth fault 50N 51N unit 1 T 500 ms la r I Protection time delay l I Dead time cycle 1 Circuit breaker open Recloser t ready a gt 4 E bai fault message Dead time cycle 2 Reclaim time Remote indication Reclosing in progress Remote indication Reclosing successful Example 2 fault not cleared Earth fault h 50N 51N unit 1 instantaneous Cycle 1 earth fault message Earth fault 4 Ig _________ I Protection time delay I 50N 51N unit 1 T 500 ms Circuit breaker open Recloser ready Remote indication Reclosing in progress A i gt Cleared fault message Cycle 2 eart
307. ives access to all the Sepam functions with all the facilities and convenience provided by a Windows type environment PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider P Electric Introduction Selection table Substation Transformer Motor Generator Protection ANSI code S40 S41 S42 S43 S44 T40 T42 M40 M41 G40 S50 51 S52 S53 S54 T50 T52 Phase overcurrent 50 51 A 2 a K 4 A amp 4 Phase overcurrent cold load pick up blocking CLPU 50 51 4 4 4 44 44 44 44 Voltage restrained phase overcurrent 50V 51V 1 Earth fault 50N 51N 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 sensitive earth fault 50G 51G Earth fault cold load pick up blocking CLPU 50N 51N 44 4 44 44 4 44 44 Breaker failure 50BF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Negative sequence unbalance 46 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Broken conductor 46 BC 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 Directional phase overcurrent 67 2 2 Directional earth fault 67N 67NC 2 2 2 2 2 Directional active overpower 32P 1 1 1 1 1 Directional reactive overpower 32Q 40 1 1 Thermal overload 49RMS 2 2 2 2 2 Phase undercurrent 37 1 1 Excessive starting time locked rotor 48 51LR 14 1 1 Starts per hour 66 1 1 Positive sequence undervoltage 27D 2 2 Remanent undervoltage 27R 1 1 Undervoltage 27 278 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 Overvoltage 9 59 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Neutral voltage displacement 59N 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Negative sequence overvoltage 47 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overfrequency 81H 2 2 2 2 2 2
308. k the CCA612 cord connection between the ACE interface and the Sepam base unit m check the ACE Modbus communication port connection m check the complete configuration of the ACE m for the ACE969 check the auxiliary power supply connection Checking the operation of the ACE interface You can use the following to check that an ACE interface is operating correctly m the indicator LEDs on the front panel of the ACE m the information provided by the SFT2841 software connected to Sepam o on the Diagnosis screen o on the Communication configuration screens Link activity LED for ACE949 2 ACE959 and ACE937 The link activity LED for ACE949 2 ACE959 and ACE937 interfaces flashes when Sepam transmission or reception is active Indicator LEDs on the ACE969 m green on LED ACE969 energized red key LED ACE969 interface status LED off ACE969 configured and communication operational LED flashing ACE969 configuration error or ACE969 not configured LED on ACE969 error link activity LED S LAN Tx flashing Sepam transmission active link activity LED S LAN Rx flashing Sepam reception active BHEOOOS Diagnosis using SFT2841 software Sepam diagnosis screen When connected to Sepam the SFT2841 software informs the operator of the general Sepam status and of the Sepam communication status in particular All Sepam status information appears on the Sepam diagnosis screen Sepam communication diagnosis The operator is provided wit
309. l reference SEPED305001EN m Sepam IEC 60870 5 103 communication user s manual reference SEPED305002EN m Sepam IEC 61850 communication user s manual reference SEPED306024EN Schneider 9 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 P Electric Sepam range Protection functions suitable for low voltage Low voltage earthing systems There are 4 low voltage LV earthing systems designated by a 2 or 3 letter acronym m TN S m TN C m TT m IT The letters making up the acronym have the following meanings Letter Meaning First letter Transformer neutral point l Earthed with an impedance T Directly earthed Second letter Electrical exposed conductive parts of the consumer T Earthed N Connected to the neutral conductor Third letter optional Protective Earth conductor S Separate N neutral conductor and PE Protective Earth conductor Cc Combined N neutral conductor and PE Protective Earth conductor PEN 10 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Sepam range Protection functions suitable for low voltage Compatibility of Sepam low voltage protection functions Sepam protection functions can be used with low voltage LV as long as the conditions below are met m The distribution circuit must be rated higher than 32 A m The installation must comply with standard IEC 60364 For additional information about the compatibility of Sepam protection functions with low voltage please contact Schneider Electric technical support The table
310. l Sepam series 20 series 40 and series 80 2010 V8 00 March 2010 Base 3 and 4 m New applications M40 S44 and S54 304 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Electric Commissioning Firmware modifications General upward compatibility The following table presents the compatibility of a firmware version with the different hardware base versions 1 XX o 2 XX o 3 XX o 4 XX o o oO o 5 XX o o o o 6 00 oO o o o 6 01 o o o o 6 02 o o o oO 6 05 a a oO o 7 XX o o 8 XX a m compatible with all features o compatible but with limited features not compatible Nota Sepam firmware versions V7 00 and above are compatible only with Sepam bases 3 and above manufactured after August 2009 with a serial number above 09350001 Nota The disturbance recording backup function is available only with Sepam bases 4 and above with a serial number above 10300001 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 P Electric 305 Commissioning Notes Schneider 306 P Electric PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Commissioning Notes PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 307 Electric Schneider ER 308 P Electric PCRED301006EN 03 ART 08556 2011 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Schneider Electric Industries SAS 35 rue Joseph Monier CS 30323 F 92506 Rueil Malmaison Cedex RCS Nanterre 954 503 439 Capital social 896 313 776 www schneider electric com PCRED301006EN 10 As standards
311. l positive active energy Eat ext 017C 017D R 3 4 32NS 100 kW h External negative active energy Ea ext 017E 017F R 3 4 32NS 100 kW h External positive reactive energy Er ext 0180 0181 R 3 4 32NS 100 kvar h External negative reactive energy Er ext 0182 0183 R 3 4 32NS 100 kvar h Learnt cooling time constant T2 49 RMS thermal rate 1 0184 R 3 4 16NS mn Learnt cooling time constant T2 49 RMS thermal rate 2 0185 R 3 4 16NS mn PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider Electric Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding Phase displacement zone Phase displacement Word address Access Modbus function Format Unit enabled Phase displacement 0X 01A0 01A1 L 3 4 32NS r Phase displacement 0 01A2 01A3 L 3 4 32NS Phase displacement 1 01A4 01A5 L 3 4 32NS 1 gt Phase displacement 92 01A6 01A7 L 3 4 32NS 1 Phase displacement 93 01A8 01A9 L 3 4 32NS 1 Tripping context zone Latest tripping context Word address Access Modbus function Format Unit Modbus enabled Time tagging of the context see time 0250 0253 R 3 IEC tagging of events chapter page 173 Tripping current Itrip1 0254 R 3 4 32NS 0 1A Tripping current Itrip2 0256 R 3 4 32NS 0 1A Tripping current Itrip3 0258 R 3 4 32NS 0 1A Residual current IO Sum 025A R 3 4 32NS 0 1A Residual current 10 measured 025C R 3 4 32NS 0 1A Phase to phase voltage U21 025E R 3 4 32NS 1V Phase to phase voltage U32 0260 R 3 4 32NS
312. lave disregards all frames m received with a physical error for 1 or more characters format error parity error etc m with an incorrect CRC16 result m for which it is not the recipient Broadcasting The master can also address all slaves using the conventional address 0 This type of exchange is called broadcasting Slaves do not respond to broadcast messages As a result only messages that do not require the transmission of data by the slaves can be broadcast Response time The communication coupler response time Tr is less than 15 ms including a 3 character silence approximately 3 ms at 9600 bauds This time is given with the following parameters m 9600 bauds m format 8 bits odd parity 1 stop bit PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Modbus communication PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Modbus protocol Modbus over TCP IP Requests and replies are exchanged as TCP IP messages over a TCP connection The slave address is therefore its IP address Frames The application layer part of a Modbus TCP frame is made up of 2 fields MBAP Header Modbus PDU m MBAP Modbus Application Header 7 bytes identifies the frame m Modbus PDU as previously described Modbus Application header It contains the following fields Field Length Description Request Response Transaction 2 bytes Identification of a Field initialized by Field copied by identifier Modbus request the client the server from response tra
313. lect the new predefined or personalized message from among the messages presented o and Assign it to the event The same message may be assigned to several events with no restriction Message display in SFT2841 m the predefined messages are stored in Sepam s memory and appear o written out in text format in connected mode o in code number format in unconnected mode m the personalized messages are saved with the other Sepam parameters and protection settings and are displayed written out in text format in connected and unconnected modes Message processing on the advanced UMI display When an event occurs the related message appears on the advanced UMI display The user presses the as key to clear the message and be able to consult all the advanced UMI screens in the normal fashion The user must press the eset key to acknowledge latched events e g protection outputs _ The list of messages remains accessible in the alarm history N key in which the last 16 messages are stored The last 250 messages may be consulted with the SFT2841 software To delete the messages stored in the alarm history m display the alarm history on the advanced UMI clear deat m press the Way key Signal lamp type indication The 9 yellow signal lamps on the front of Sepam are assigned by default to the following events Signal Event Label on lamp front panel LED 1 Tripping of protection 50 51 unit 1 I gt 51 LE
314. lectric OORUN Ouhwhd ACE850TP and ACE850FO Multi protocol interfaces Description ACE850TP communication interface 1 ACE850 communication interface status LED m LED off ACE850 de energized m Green LED permanently on ACE850 energized and operational m Red LED flashing ACE850 not configured and or not connected to the base unit m Red LED permanently on ACE850 not operational initialization in progress or failed STS LED communication status green permanently on OK Ethernet Port 2 100 green LED off 10 Mbps permanently on 100 Mbps Ethernet Port 2 activity LED flashing on transmission reception Ethernet Port 1 100 green LED off 10 Mbps permanently on 100 Mbps Ethernet Port 1 activity LED flashing on transmission reception ORON Power supply terminal block Grounding earthing terminal using supplied braid RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the Sepam base unit with the CCA614 cord m Sepam series 40 communication port identified by a white label on the Sepam unit m Sepam series 60 and Sepam series 80 communication port F identified by a blue label on the Sepam unit 10 RJ45 10 100 Base TX Ethernet communication port P2 E LAN or S LAN 11 RJ45 10 100 Base TX Ethernet communication port P1 E LAN or S LAN oon ACE850FO communication interface 1 ACE850 communication interface status LED m LED off ACE850 de energized m Green LED permanently on ACE850 energized and operational m Re
315. lied braid 3 1415 J6 Power supply terminal block RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord Green LED ACE969 2 energized Red LED ACE969 2 interface status m LED off ACE969 2 set up and communication operational m LED flashing ACE969 2 not set up or setup incorrect m LED remains on ACE969 2 has faulted Service connector reserved for software upgrades E LAN 2 wire RS 485 communication port ACE969TP 2 and ACE969FO 2 8 S LAN 2 wire RS 485 communication port ACE969TP 2 op DB114628 DB114629 a NO 9 S LAN fiber optic communication port ACE969FO 2 2 wire RS 485 communication ports 1 Draw out terminal block with two rows of S LAN port ACE969TP 2 E LAN port ACE969TP 2 or connections to the RS 485 2 wire network ACE969FO 2 m 2 black terminals connection of RS 485 twisted pair 2 wires m 2 green terminals connection of twisted pair for distributed power supply 2 Indication LEDs m flashing Tx LED Sepam sending m flashing Rx LED Sepam receiving 3 Jumper for RS 485 network line end impedance matching with load resistor Rc 150 Q to be set to m X lt if the interface is not at the line end default position m Rc if the interface is at the line end 1 DB114630 DB114631 Fiber optic communication port 1 Indication LEDs S LAN port ACE969FO 2 m flashing Tx LED Sepam sending 1 m flashing Rx LED Sepam receiving 2 Rx female ST
316. llation Base unit Connection of current input 5 21 i o tin 1 Link to remote optional modules Modbus communication port 1 This type of connection allows the calculation of residual voltage 2 Accessory for bridging terminals 3 and 5 supplied with CCA626 connector 210 Senedir PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Installation Base unit Other phase current input connection schemes Variant 1 phase current measurements by 3 x 1 A or 5 A CTs standard connection Description Connection of 3 x 1 A or 5 A sensors to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector CCA630 DE80144 The measurement of the 3 phase currents allows the calculation of residual current Parameters Sensor type 5ACTor1ACT Number of CTs 11 12 13 Rated current In 1 Ato 6250 A Variant 2 phase current measurement by 2 x 1 A or 5 A CTs L1 JL2 L3 Description Connection of 2 x 1 A or 5 A sensors to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector CCA630 CCA634 DE80145 The measurement of phase currents 1 and 3 is sufficient to ensure all the phase current based protection functions The phase current I2 is only assessed for metering functions assuming that 10 0 This arrangement does not allow the calculation of residual current Parameters Sensor type 5ACTor1ACT Number of CTs 11 13 Rated current In 1 Ato 6250 A Variant 3 phase cur
317. logy change BPDUs received STP Transmitted TCNs Number of Topology change BPDUs sent STP Schneider Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding Presentation Data which are similar from the monitoring and control application viewpoint are grouped together in adjacent address zones CAUTION Synchronization zone 0002 0005 3 16 Identification zone 0006 000F 3 RISK OF DATA CORRUPTION Event table 1 When using an ACE850 communication interface Exchange word 0040 0040 3 6 16 with IEC 61850 communication enabled do not Events 1 to 4 0041 0060 3 use the following address zones Event table 2 m Event table 1 0040 0060 Exchange word 0070 0070 3 6 16 m Protections settings zone 1 1E00 1F7C Events 1 to 4 0071 0090 3 m Disturbance recording zone 1 2200 237C Data Failure to follow these instructions can result Remote control orders 00FO 00FO 3 4 6 16 in equipment damage 00F2 00F2 1 2 5 15 0 Remote control selection 00F1 00F1 3 4 6 16 00F3 00F3 1 2 5 15 0 Status 0100 0112 3 4 1 20 Measurements 0113 0158 3 4 Diagnosis 0159 0185 3 4 Phase displacement 01A0 01A9 3 4 Tripping context 0250 027F 3 4 Switchgear diagnosis 0290 02A5 3 4 Application 02CC 02FE 3 Test zone 0C00 OCOF 3 4 6 16 1 2 5 15 Protection settings zone 1 Read settings 1E00 1E7C 3 Read request 1E80 1E80 3 6 16 Remote settings 1F00 1F7C 3 6 Protection sett
318. lt Definite time protection Is is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation time delay tA Definite time protection principle Standardized IDMT protection IDMT protection operates in accordance with the IEC 60255 3 BS 142 and IEEE C 37112 standards 1 12 10 20 li Is IDMT protection principle The Is setting is the vertical asymptote ofthe curve and T is the operation time delay for 10 Is For currents with a very large amplitude the protection function has a definite time characteristic m if li gt 20 Is tripping time is the time that corresponds to 20 Is m if li gt 40 In tripping time is the time that corresponds to 40 In se Schneider DE50557 Negative sequence unbalance ANSI code 46 The following standardized tripping curves are proposed m IEC standard inverse time SIT A m IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B m IEC extremely inverse time EIT C m IEEE moderately inverse IEC D m IEEE very inverse IEC E m IEEE extremely inverse IEC F The curve equations are given in the chapter entilled IDMT protection functions IDMT protection Schneider curve For li gt Is the time delay depends on the value of li Ib Ib basis current of the protected equipment defined when the general parameters are set T corresponds to the time delay for li Ib 5 The tripping curve is defined according to the following equations m for Is Ib lt li Ib lt 0 5 3
319. lt locator function is suitable for m medium voltage networks o overhead made up of 100 overhead lines O or mixed made up of 0 to 30 underground cables and 70 to 100 overhead lines m with neutral to earth connection o direct o with earthing resistor and fault current gt 150 A o with R X impedance in series with ratio R X gt 3 The Fault locator function gives incorrect results when it is applied to underground networks or networks with an isolated or compensated neutral The Fault locator function can only be activated if the rated primary voltage Unp is set between 5 5 kV and 36 kV Operation The fault location is calculated using symmetrical components These are calculated using the values of the 3 currents and 3 phase to earth voltages m recorded during healthy operation before the appearance of the fault m recorded in steady state fault conditions The main assumption of this calculation relies on simplification of the diagram of the feeder monitored via the protection The tree diagram comprising a variety of conductors and loads is replaced by an equivalent simplified diagram which contains no more than one type of conductor and one load connected at the end of the line The function determines the type of fault and the phases affected by the fault then calculates the fault location using a patented algorithm Block diagram Rdc Xdc r a es Calculation Rol XOl of the ROc X0c average impedances
320. lug 6 35 mm 1 4 m Wire with maximum cross section 0 2 to 2 5 mm AWG 24 12 m Stripped length 6 mm 0 236 in m Use an appropriate tool to crimp the lugs onto the wires m 2 ring or spade lugs maximum per terminal m Tightening torque 0 7 to 1 Nem 6 to 9 Ib in PCRED301006EN 03 2011 PE50031 DE51674 Installation tee Aa Aa LPCT settings 258125A 10000000 50 amp 250A 01000000 100 amp 500A 00100000 133 amp 666A 00010000 200 amp 1000A 00001000 320 amp 1600A D0 000400 400 amp 2000A 00000010 GB0 amp SI5QA 0000000 4 Li 12 13 59631 Check plug CAUTION HAZARD OF NON OPERATION m Set the microswitches for the CCA670 CCA671 connector before commissioning the device m Check that only one microswitch is in position 1 for each block L1 L2 L3 and that no microswitch is in the center position m Check that the microswitch settings on all 3 blocks are identical Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage PCRED301006EN 03 2011 LPCT type current sensors Function Low Power Current Transducer LPCT type sensors are voltage output sensors which are compliant with the IEC 60044 8 standard The Schneider Electric range of LPCTs includes the following sensors CLP1 CLP2 CLP3 TLP130 TLP160 and TLP190 CCA670 CCA671 connector Function The 3 LPCT sensors are connected to the CCA670 or CCA671 connector on the
321. ly equal to the rated primary current of the CTs m the value indicated for each of the phase to neutral voltages V1 V2 and V3 is approximately equal to the rated primary phase to neutral voltage of the VT Vnp Unp v3 m the value indicated for each phase displacement 1 V1 11 2 V2 12 and 3 V3 13 between currents 11 12 or 13 and voltages V1 V2 or V3 respectively is approximately equal to 0 6 Turn the generator off Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 P Electric 291 Commissioning Checking of phase current and voltage input connection With single phase generator and voltages delivered by 3 VTs Procedure 1 Connect the single phase voltage and current generator to the corresponding test terminal boxes using the plugs provided according to the block diagram below current test Sepam series 40 voltage test terminal box terminal box V ph N single phase generator A e 7 g 2 Turn the generator on 3 Apply the generator V N voltage set to the rated secondary phase to neutral voltage of the VTs i e Vns Uns V3 between Sepam s phase 1 voltage input terminals via the test box 4 Inject the generator I current set to the rated secondary current of the CTs i e 1 A or 5 A and in phase vith the V N voltage applied i e generator phase displacement a V N I 0 to Sepam s phase 1 current input via the text box
322. ly when the fault current is close to the Is set point 122 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Control and monitoring functions MT11210 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Logic discrimination ANSI code 68 Closed ring network Example of closed ring protection function setting Case of a closed ring with two substations each of which comprises two Sepam S42 or S52 relays marked R11 R12 and R21 R22 R21 R22 gt gt gt 67 2 67 2 lt 67 1 substation 2 gt lt direction of 67 67N protection functions A direction of blocking signals R12 R11 7 o lt gt 67 1 gt 671 7 51 ld substation 1 Starting at one end of the ring the detection direction of units 1 and 2 of the directional protection functions should be alternated between line and busbar Example of setting of the different Sepam with logic discrimination Substation 1 Sepam S42 or S52 no R11 m Logic input output assignment 113 blocking reception 1 03 send blocking information BI1 O12 send blocking information BI2 m 67 67N unit 1 tripping direction busbar m 67 67N unit 2 tripping direction line Substation 2 Sepam S42 or S52 no R22 m Logic input output assignment 113 blocking reception 1 114 blocking reception 2 O3 send blocking information BI1 O12 send blocking information BI2 m 67 67N unit 1 tripping direction busbar m 67 67N unit 2 trip
323. m general settings They define the protected equipment characteristics and the different optional modules This key can also be used to access the version compatible with SFT2841 screen General settings language frequency English O 50Hz O French O 60Hz O reset wy The protection key is used to display set and enable or disable the protection units on b5 beSt bo gt SIN b gt gt 5IN ext YO off Ylon Trip MT10811 Off 50 51 One inverse Threshold 110A Delay 100 ms a te The wrench key is used to enter the passwords for access to the different modes m protection setting m parameter setting and return to operating mode with no passwords on b5 be St b gt 5iN b gt gt 5iN ext YO off Ylon Trip MT10808 passwords a reset Note for parameter setting of signal lamps and output relays it is necessary to use the SFT2841 software program logic menu 082 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Use Advanced UMI Blue keys for parameter and protection setting on b51 1b gt 51 l gt 5iN b gt 5iN ext yo off NICH Trip ee 9 999989 980 MT10812 The amp key is used to confirm the protection settings parameter settings and passwords 50 51 on o On Trip Curve SiT Threshold 550 A Delay 600 ms reset key on b5 beSt bo gt SIN b gt 5N ext 0 off lon Trip oe 998999 980 MT10813 When there are no alarms on the Sepam di
324. m O11 1 control relay output m O12 to O14 3 annunciation relay outputs M connectors for 4 independent logic inputs 111 to 114 connectors for 6 logic inputs m 21 1 independent logic input m 22 to 126 5 common point logic inputs 1 25 pin sub D connector to connect the module to the base unit 2 Voltage selector switch for MES114E and MES114F module inputs to be set to m V DC for 10 DC voltage inputs default setting m V AC for 10 AC voltage inputs 3 Label to be filled in to indicate the chosen parameter setting for MES114E and MES114F input voltages The parameter setting status can be accessed in the Sepam Diagnosis screen of the SFT2841 software tool Parameter setting of the inputs for AC voltage V AC setting inhibits the operating time measurement function Assembly 1 Insert the 2 pins on the MES module into the slots 1 on the base unit 2 Flatten the module up against the base unit to plug it into the connector 2 3 Tighten the mounting screw 3 Schneider 231 Electric DE51685 Installation MES114 modules Connection The inputs are potential free and the DC power supply source is external A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device m NEVER work alone m Turn off all power su
325. m Use tinned copper braid to connect the shielding at least at the MSA141 end Schneider 037 Electric PE50127 Installation DSM303 Remote advanced UMI module Function When associated with a Sepam that does not have its own advanced user machine interface the DSM303 offers all the functions available on a Sepam integrated advanced UMI It can be installed on the front panel of the cubicle in the most suitable operating location m Reduced depth lt 30 mm 1 2 in m A single module for each Sepam to be connected by one of the CCA772 2 m or 6 6 ft or CCA774 4 m or 13 1 ft cords soon ln I N e p51 151 jossin lo on 9 The module cannot be connected to Sepam units with integrated advanced UMIs Characteristics DSM303 module Weight 0 3 kg 0 661 Ib Assembly Flush mounted DSM303 remote advanced UMI module Operating temperature _ 25 C to 70 er F to 158 F Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units 238 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Installation A CAUTION HAZARD OF CUTS Trim the edges of the cut out plates to remove any jagged edges Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury DSM303 MT10151 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE80033 DSM303 Remote advanced UMI module Description and dimensions The module is simply flush mounted and secured by its clips No additional screw type fastening is required Front view S
326. m name System contact System location Read Only community name Read Write community name Enable traps Trap community name Manager 1 IP address Manager 2 IP address private public SFT2841 SNMP configuration ACE850 advanced parameters SNMP SNTP IP fitering ISTP User accounts Enable SNTP Time zone UTC r W Enable DST Cancel Sunday x March at Sunday gt October at DST offset DST starts ast DST ends lat o or SNTP servers Primary server IP address 0 0 0 0 Secondary server IP address 0 Poll interval C Configuring the communication interfaces Ethernet communication SNMP configuration The ACE850 supports SNMP V1 allowing a network administrator to remotely access it with an SNMP manager and view the network status and diagnostics in the MIB2 format only a subset of MIB2 is implemented Additionally the ACE850 may be configured to send SNMP traps in the following cases m ACE850 start restart m Link up m Link down m Authentication failure Parameters System Name Description This parameter is the same as the Sepam label Authorized values Not modifiable from this screen System Contact Name of the administrative contact String lt 16 characters Default empty string System Location Location of the Sepam ACE850 String lt 16 characters Default
327. m obtain 12 Inp V2 Vnp Unp V3 and 2 0 7 Check the I3 V3 93 V3 13 values as well m apply the generator V N voltage set to V3 Uns 2 between terminals 2 3 of Sepam s voltage inputs via the test box m inject a current equal to 1 A or 5 A and in phase with the V N voltage i e a V N I 0 to Sepam s phase 3 current input via the test box m obtain I3 Inp V3 Vnp Unp V3 and 93 0 8 Turn the generator off Schneider 293 Electric Commissioning Description Check to be performed when phase currents are measured by LPCT type current sensors Phase current measurement by LPCT sensors m The 3LPCT current sensors are connected via an RJ45 plug to the CCA670 connector which is to be mounted on the rear panel of Sepam identified as m The connection of only one or two LPCT sensors is not allowed and causes Sepam to go into the fail safe position m The rated primary current In measured by the LPCT sensors is to be entered as a Sepam general setting and configured by microswitches on the CCA670 connector za Schneider Checking of phase current and voltage input connection LPCT type current sensors Procedure The tests to be carried out to check phase current input connections are the same whether the phase currents are measured by CTs or LPCT sensors Only the Sepam current input connection procedure and current injection values change To test current inputs connected to LPCT sensors with a
328. mber of starts before inhibition Start inhibit time delay Number of starts before inhibition Operation The number of starts allowed before inhbition is calculated by the number of starts protection function ANSI code 66 The number of starts depends on the thermal state of the motor Readout The measurement may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Resetting to zero The number of starts counters may be reset to zero as follows after the entry ofa password m on the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the a key m on the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link TC6 Characteristics Measurement range 0 to 60 Unit none Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 Refresh interval 1 second typical Start inhibit time delay Operation The start inhibit time only applies to the M40 and M41 motor applications It depends on both the starts per hour protection ANSI code 66 and the machine thermal overload protection ANSI code 49 RMS if they have been activated This time expresses the waiting time until another start is allowed If at least one of these functions picks up a START INHIBIT message informs the user that starting is not allowed Readout The number of starts and waiting time may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing
329. me as the Sepam and supervisor communication settings Characteristics Mechanical characteristics Weight 0 280 kg 0 617 Ib Assembly On symmetrical or asymmetrical DIN rail Electrical characteristics Power supply 110 to 220 V AC 10 47 to 63 Hz Galvanic isolation between ACE power supply and frame and between ACE power supply and interface supply 2000 Vrms 50 Hz 1 min Galvanic isolation between RS 232 and RS 485 interfaces 1000 Vrms 50 Hz 1 min Protection by time delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm 0 2 in x 0 79 in Communication and Sepam interface distributed supply Data format 11 bits 1 start 8 data 1 parity 1 stop 1 A rating Transmission delay lt 100 ns Distributed power supply for Sepam 12 V DC or 24 V CC 250 mA max interfaces Maximum number of Sepam interfaces with 12 distributed supply Environmental characteristics Operating temperature 5 C to 55 C 23 F to 131 F Electromagnetic compatibility IEC Value standard Fast transient bursts 5 ns 60255 22 4 4 kV with capacitive coupling in common mode 2 kV with direct coupling in common mode 1 kV with direct coupling in differential mode 1 MHz damped oscillating wave 60255 22 1 1 kV common mode 0 5 kV differential mode 1 2 50 us impulse waves 60255 5 3 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE80306 DE80022 DE80529 Installation 473 lg
330. me delay counter PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider Electric T 0 time delayed pick up signal and to logic discrimination 95 Protection functions 1 In0 In if the sum of the three phase currents is used for the measurement InO sensor rating if the measurement is taken by a CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT InO In of the CT if the measurement is taken bya1Aor5A current transformer InO In of the CT 10 if the measurement is taken by a 1 A or 5 A current transformer with the sensitivity x 10 option 2 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 3 Setting ranges in TMS Time Multiplier Setting mode Inverse SIT and IEC SIT A 0 04 to 4 20 Very inverse VIT and IEC VIT B 0 07 to 8 33 Very inverse LTI and IEC LTI B 0 01 to 0 93 Ext inverse EIT and IEC EIT C 0 13 to 15 47 IEEE moderately inverse 0 42 to 51 86 IEEE very inverse 0 73 to 90 57 IEEE extremely inverse 1 24 to 154 32 IAC inverse 0 34 to 42 08 IAC very inverse 0 61 to 75 75 IAC extremely inverse 1 08 to 134 4 4 Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC IEEE and IAC types m Schneider Directional earth fault ANSI code 67N 67NC Characteristics Type 2 Measurement origin Setting range Characteristic angle 60 10 10x Setting 45 0 15 30 45 60 90 Accuracy 3 Tripping direction Setting Busbar line IsO setting Definite time setting 0 1 In0 lt Is0 lt
331. ment i e depending on the case Uns v3 or Uns 3 4 When applicable inject an current set to the rated secondary current of the CTs i e 1 A or 5 A and in phase with the voltage applied i e generator phase displacement o V N I 0 5 Use the SFT2841 software to check the following m the value indicated for the measured VO residual voltage is approximately equal to the rated primary phase to neutral voltage of the VTs i e Vnp Unp V3 m when applicable the value indicated for the calculated 10 residual current is approximately equal to the rated primary current of the CTs m when applicable the value indicated for the phase displacement p0 VO 10 between the 102 current and VO voltage is approximately equal to 0 6 Turn the generator off PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Commissioning Description Check to be carried out when the residual voltage is delivered by 3 VTs on the secondary circuits connected in an open delta assembly and when the residual current is obtained by a specific sensor such as m CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT m CSH30 interposing ring CT whether it is installed on the secondary circuit of a single 1 A or 5 A CT which encompasses the 3 phases or on the neutral connection of the three 1 A or 5 A phase CTs m other core balance CT connected to an ACE990 interface current test terminal box Checking of residual current and residual voltage input connection Procedure 1 Conn
332. meters gt gt gt 146 Sepneider Configuring the communication interfaces Bu Serial line communication Access to configuration parameters The Sepam communication interfaces are configured using SFT2841 software The configuration parameters can be accessed from the Communication configuration window in SFT2841 To access this window m open the Sepam configuration window in SFT2841 m check the box for ACExxx communication interface m click B the Communication configuration window appears m select the type of interface used ACE949 ACE959 ACE937 ACE969TP or ACE969FO m select the Modbus communication protocol The configuration parameters will vary depending on the communication interface selected ACE949 ACE959 ACE937 ACE969TP or ACE969FO The table below specifies the parameters to be configured depending on the communication interface chosen Parameters to be configured ACE949 ACE969TP ACE969FO ACE959 ACE937 Physical layer parameters Fiber optic parameters Modbus advanced parameters E LAN parameters Configuring the physical layer of the Modbus port Asynchronous serial transmission is used with the following character format m 1 start bit m 8 data bits m 1 stop bit m parity according to parameter setting The number of stop bits is always set at 1 If a configuration with parity is selected each character will contain 11 bits 1 start bit 8 data bits 1 parity bit
333. mmunication interfaces will only work if TCP IP firmware option ref 59754 has been ordered with Sepam series 40 Sepam series 60 or Sepam series 80 252 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Installation ACE850TP and ACE850FO module Technical characteristics Weight ACE850TP and ACE850FO Multi protocol interfaces Characteristics 0 4 kg 0 88 Ib Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail Operating temperature 25 C to 70 C 13 F to 158 F Environmental characteristics Power supply Same characteristics as Sepam base units Voltage 24 to 250 V DC 110 to 240 V AC Range 20 10 20 10 Maximum consumption ACE850TP 3 5 WinDC 1 5 VAin AC ACE850FO 6 5 W in DC 2 5 VA in AC Inrush current lt 10A10 ms in DC lt 15A10ms in AC Acceptable ripple content 12 Acceptable momentary outages 100 ms Wired Ethernet communication ports ACE850TP Number of ports 2 x RJ45 ports Type of port 10 100 Base TX Protocols HTTP FTP SNMP SNTP ARP SFT IEC 61850 TCP IP RSTP 801 1d 2004 Baud rate 10 or 100 Mbps Medium Cat 5 STP or FTP or SFTP Maximum distance 100 m 328 ft Fiber optic Ethernet communication ports ACE850FO Number of ports 2 Type of port 100 Base FX Protocols HTTP FTP SNMP SNTP ARP SFT IEC 61850 TCP IP RS
334. n 2 gas test IEC 60068 2 60 C 21 days 75 RH 25 C 77 F 0 5 ppm H2S 1 ppm SO Influence of corrosion 4 gas test IEC 60068 2 60 21 days 75 RH 25 C 77 F 0 01 ppm H S 0 2 ppm SO 0 2 ppm NOs 0 01 ppm Cl EIA 364 65A INA 42 days 75 RH 30 C 86 F 0 1 ppm H S 0 2 ppm SO 0 2 ppm NOs 0 02 ppm Cl In storage Exposure to cold IEC 60068 2 1 Ab 25 C 13 F Exposure to dry heat IEC 60068 2 2 Bb 70 C 158 F Continuous exposure to damp heat IEC 60068 2 3 Ca 56 days 93 RH 40 C 104 F Safety Standard Level Class Value Enclosure safety tests Front panel tightness IEC 60529 IP52 Other panels closed except for rear panel IP20 NEMA Type 12 with gasket supplied Fire withstand Electrical safety tests IEC 60695 2 11 650 C 1200 F with glow wire 1 2 50 us impulse wave IEC 60255 5 5 kv Power frequency dielectric withstand IEC 60255 5 2kV 1 mn Certification ce Harmonized standard European directives EN 50263 m 89 336 CEE Electromagnetic Comptability EMC Directive O 92 31 CEE Amendment O 93 68 CEE Amendment m 73 23 CEE Low Voltage Directive o 93 68 CEE Amendment UL Adis UL508 CSA C22 2 n 14 95 File E212533 CSA CSA C22 2 n 14 95 n 94 M91 n 0 17 00 File 210625 1 Sepam must be stored in its original packing 2 Except for communication 3 kV in common mode and 1 kV in differential mode 3 Except for communication 1 kVrms EB Sehne
335. n of isolated or compensated neutral systems in which very low fault currents need to be detected DE80061 Parameters Residual current Rated residual current Measuring range 2 Arating CSH Ind 2A 0 2 to 40 A 5 Arating CSH Ind 5A 0 5 to 100A 20 A rating CSH Ind 20 A 2t0 400 A Variant 3 residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs and CCA634 L1 L2 L3 Description CCAG34 Residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs m Terminal 7 1 ACT m Terminal 8 5 ACT The sensitivity can be multiplied by 10 using the sensitive parameter setting with DE52520 Ind In 10 Parameters Residual current Rated residual current Measuring range 1ACT InO In CT primary current 0 1 to 20 Ind Sensitive 1 A CT Ind In 10 0 1 to 20 Ind 5 ACT In0 In CT primary current 0 1 to 20 Ind Sensitive 5 A CT Ind In 10 0 1 to 20 Ind CCA634 DE80048 12 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE80115 DE80116 DE80103 Installation Base unit Other residual current input connection schemes Variant 4 residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs and CSH30 interposing ring CT CT 1A 2turns CT5A 4turns CCA630 CSH30 CT 1 A 2turns CT 5A 4turns Description The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used to connect 1 A or 5 A CTs to Sepam to measure residual current m Connection of CSH30 interposing ring CT to 1 A CT make 2 turns through CSH primary m Connecti
336. n the fail safe position Failures which have caused this are deemed to be minor ones Function Test type Execution period UMI Module presence On initialization and during operation Analog output Module presence On initialization and during operation Temperature inputs Module presence On initialization and during operation PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE80251 DE80252 DE80253 Control and monitoring functions 4 Relay output Watchdog PEN oo Permanent internal failure 4 Relay output EEE Watchdog o STOC 5 to 7 seconds Transient internal failure 7 i EEE HL BEL BR elay output el Al i ie I Le Watchdog M LT l Counter 0127 01 ck Sepam de energized Repeated transient internal failures PCRED301006EN 03 2011 2 3 4 5 Self tests and fail safe position Fail safe position When Sepam is in working order it runs self tests continuously Detection of a major failure places Sepam in the fail safe position State of Sepam in the fail safe position m All the output relays are forced to the idle state m All protection functions are inhibited m The watchdog output indicates failure output in the idle state m A red LED on the Sepam front panel is on and a diagnostic message appears on the Sepam display unit see Local indication ANSI code 30 page 127 How Sepam deals with failures m Minor failure Sepam switches to downgraded operation The failure is indicated on the
337. n time delay for 10 IsO The tripping time for 10 Is0 values of less than 1 2 depends on the type of curve chosen Name of curve Type Standard inverse time SIT 1 2 Very inverse time VIT or LTI 1 2 Extremely inverse time EIT 1 2 Ultra inverse time UIT 1 2 RI curve IEC temps inverse SIT A IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B IEC extremely inverse time EIT C IEEE moderately inverse IEC D IEEE very inverse IEC E IEEE extremely inverse IEC F IAC inverse IAC very inverse IAC extremely inverse 1 The curve equations are given in the chapter entitled IDMT protection functions o 3 a a a a a 94 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Protection functions Directional earth fault core bal CT ACE990 V1 v2 x V3 external VT ANSI code 67N 67NC Block diagram 10 10 gt Is0 busbar line choice 10 cos 0 60 lt 0 90 10 cos g0 60 gt 0 output Timer hold delay The function includes an adjustable timer hold delay T1 m definite time timer hold for all the tripping curves 10 gt IsO time delayed output I DE50247 10 gt IsO pick up signal i i tripping time delay counter 1 I 1 L value ofinternal 1 l l 10 gt IsO time delayed output DE50248 10 gt IsO pick up signal 1 1 value of internal ti
338. nals 1 2 and 3 or terminals 1 2 3 and 9 see picture opposite 3 Use terminal 7 1 A or 8 5 A to measure the residual current according to the CT secondary 4 Connect the wires using 4 mm 0 16 in ring lugs and check the tightness of the 6 screws that guarantee the continuity of the CT secondary circuits The connector accommodates wires with cross sections of 1 5 to 6 mm AWG 16 10 The wires only exit from the base 5 Close the side shields 6 Insert the connector pins into the slots on the base unit 7 Flatten the connector against the unit to plug it into the 9 pin SUB D connector principle similar to that of the MES module 8 Tighten the mounting screw Electric Schneider 219 Installation A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device m NEVER work alone m Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding m Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off m Start by connecting the device to the protective ground and to the functional ground m Screw tight all terminals even those not in use Failure to follow these instructions will result in death o
339. nance information Configuration of a Sepam network Several configurations can be defined for the various Sepam installations A Sepam network configuration is identified by a name It is saved on the SFT2841 PC in a file in the SFT2841 installation directory default C Program Files Schneider SFT2841 Net Configuration of a Sepam network is in 2 parts m Configuration of the communication network m Configuration of the Sepam units Configuration of the communication network To configure the communication network first define m The type of link between the PC and the Sepam network m The communication parameters according to the type of link selected o direct serial link o link via Ethernet TCP IP o link via telephone modem Network configuration lt New configuration gt lex e Link ty Aut tic h E T JEC 61850 configuration one as Ethernet zi Edition Serial link Phone modem Ethemet Address Type Family Model User label Device name PE80421 Configuration windows for the communication network according to the type of link serial link modem link STN or Ethernet link TCP Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 P Electric 273 Use Network configuration lt New configuration gt max lA i 8 Be eae Link ype Automatic search I J ein 5 Al Network configuration Addess Type Family Model User label Device name Ia CC Devor Motori Motor2
340. neral settings are made Block diagram U13 a N T 0 i 12 1 gt 1 amp time delayed 13 output pick up signal PCRED301006EN 03 2011 MT10541 MT10527 Protection functions Timer hold delay The function includes an adjustable timer hold delay Ti m definite time timer hold for all the tripping curves gt Is time delayed output j gt Is pick up signal l tripping value of internal time delay counter m IDMT for IEC IEEE and IAC curves gt Is time delayed output I value of internal time delay counter PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Voltage restrained phase overcurrent ANSI code 50V 51V Characteristics Tripping curve Setting Definite time IDMT chosen according to list page 82 Is set point Setting Definite time 0 5 Ins Is lt 24 In expressed in Amps IDMT 0 5 In lt Is lt 2 4 In expressed in Amps Resolution 1Aor1 digit Accuracy 1 5 or 0 01 In Drop out pick up ratio Time delay T operation time at 10 IsO 93 5 5 or gt 1 0 015 In Is x 100 Setting Definite time inst 50 ms lt T lt 300s IDMT 100 ms lt T lt 12 5 s or TMS Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy Definite time 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms IDMT class 5 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Timer hold delay T1 Definite time timer hold 0 0 05 to 300 s IDMT 0 5to 20s Characteristic times Operation time pick up l
341. nformity level 02 For a complete description of the function go to www modbus org The description below covers a subset of the function adapted to Sepam series 40 Implementation Request frame The request frame is made of the following components Field Size bytes Slave number 1 43 2Bh 1 Generic access function code 14 OEh 1 Read device identification 01 or 02 1 Type of read 00 1 Object number CRC16 2 The type of read is used to select a simplified 01 or a standard 02 description Reply frame The reply frame is made of the following components identification are listed below Field Size bytes Number Type Value Slave number 1 0 VendorName Merlin Gerin or 43 2Bh 1 Generic access function code Schneider Electric 14 OEh 1 Read device identification 1 ProductCode Application EAN13 code 01 or 02 1 Type of read 2 MajorMinorRevision Application version number 02 1 Conformity level Vx yy 00 1 Continuation frame flag none for Sepam 3 VendorURL www schneider electric com 00 1 Reserved 4 ProductName Sepam series 40 n 1 Number of objects according to read type 5 ModelName Application name Obj1 1 Number of first object e g M41 Motor Igt 1 Length first object 6 UserAppName Sepam marking txt1 Ig1 ASCII string of first object objn 1 Number nt object Ign 1 Length n object txtn Ign ASCII string of n object CRC16 2 PCRED301006EN
342. ng file on the Sepam once it is connected to the PC click on the g7 icon Using SFT2841 connected to a Sepam network Connected to a Sepam network mode is used during operation m To manage the protection system m To check the status of the power supply m To diagnose any incident occurring on the power supply The PC fitted with the SFT2841 software is connected to a group of Sepam units via a communication network connection via serial link telephone line or Ethernet This network forms the E LAN engineering network The connection window allows configuration of the Sepam network and provides access to the parameter and protection setting files of the Sepam units on the network To open the connection window click on the icon See Configuration of a Sepam network page 273 for details of how to configure the E LAN engineering network from the connection window Schneider 269 Use software Presentation All the setting and operating functions are available on FT2841 Sepam 1000 serie 40 Connection window Gi Eie Edt Operation Sepam Application Options Window 2 SFT2841 setting and operating BEE 16 x the screen of a PC equipped with the SFT2841 software tool and connected to the PC connection on the front panel of Sepam run in a Windows XP or Vista environment All the data used for the same task are grouped together in the same screen to facilitate operation Menus and icon
343. ng functions Characteristics Functions Measurement Accuracy MSA141 Saving range Metering Phase current 0 1 to 40 In 0 5 E Residual current Calculated 0 1 to 40 In 1 Measured 0 1 to 20 Ind 1 Demand current 0 1 to 40 In 0 5 Peak demand current 0 1 to 40 In 0 5 o Phase to phase voltage 0 06 to 1 2 Unp 0 5 Phase to neutral voltage 0 06 to 1 2 Vnp 0 5 Residual voltage 0 04 to 3 Vnp 1 Positive sequence voltage 0 05 to 1 2 Vnp 2 Negative sequence voltage 0 05 to 1 2 Vnp 2 Frequency 25 to 65 Hz 0 02 Hz Active power 0 015 Sn to 999 MW 1 C Reactive power 0 015 Sn to 999 Mvar 1 C Apparent power 0 015 Sn to 999 MVA 1 D Peak demand active power 0 015 Sn to 999 MW 1 o Peak demand reactive power 0 015 Sn to 999 Mvar 1 o Power factor 1 to 1 CAP IND 1 Calculated active energy 0 to 2 1 108 MW h 1 1 digit o Calculated reactive energy 0 to 2 1 108 Mvar h 1 1 digit o Temperature 30 to 200 C 1 C from 20 to 140 C Network diagnosis assistance Tripping context Phase tripping current or 22 to 392 F 0 1 to 40 In Earth fault tripping current 0 1 to 20 InO Negative sequence unbalance Peak demand negative sequence and positive sequence current ratio 10 to 500 of Ib Phase displacement 0 between VO and 10 0 to 359 2
344. ng the use of the group Operation Earth fault protection is single phase It picks up if the earth fault current reaches the operation set point It includes a time delay which is either definite constant DT or IDMT depending on the curves on the facing page The protection function includes a harmonic 2 restraint which can be used to bypass the incorrect residual current on the sum of the 3 phase CTs when the transformers are energized The restraint can be selected by parameter setting The principle of this harmonic 2 restraint allows this protection to trip on intermittent earth faults Definite time protection IsO is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation time delay tA DE50398 Definite time protection principle IDMT protection IDMT protection operates in accordance with the IEC 60255 3 BS 142 and IEEE C 37112 standards tA DE50400 10 IDMT protection principle 78 Schneider 20 gt 10 IsO DE80148 Earth fault ANSI code 50N 51N or 50G 51G The IsO setting is the vertical asymptote of the curve and T is the operation time delay for 10 IsO The tripping time for 10 Is0 values of less than 1 2 depends on the type of curve chosen Name of curve Type Standard inverse time SIT 1 2 Very inverse time VIT or LTI 1 2 Extremely inverse time EIT 1 2 Ultra inverse time UIT 1 2 RI curve IEC standard inverse t
345. nge 20 10 20 10 47 5 to 63 Hz Deactivated consumption 2 lt 6W lt 6VA Maximum consumption 2 lt 11W lt 25VA Inrush current lt 10 A for 10 ms lt 15 A for first half period lt 28 A for 100 us Acceptable momentary outages 20 ms 20 ms Analog output MSA141 module Current 4 20 mA 0 20 mA 0 10 mA Load impedance lt 600 Q wiring included Accuracy 0 50 full scale or 0 01 mA 1 Relay outputs O1 O2 O3 O11 contact comply with clause 6 7 of standard C37 90 30 A 200 ms 2000 operations 2 According to configuration 16 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Sepam series 40 Environmental characteristics Electromagnetic compatibility Standard Level Class Value Emission tests Disturbing field emission IEC 60255 25 EN 55022 A Conducted disturbance emission IEC 60255 25 EN 55022 B Immunity tests Radiated disturbances Immunity to radiated fields IEC 60255 22 3 10 V m 80 MHz 1 GHz IEC 61000 4 3 II 10 V m 80 MHz 2 GHz ANSI C37 90 2 2004 20 V m 80 MHz 1 GHz Electrostatic discharge IEC 60255 22 2 8 kV air 6 kV contact ANSI C37 90 3 8 kV air 4 kV contact Immunity to magnetic fields at network frequency IEC 61000 4 8 IV 30 A m continuous 300 A m 13 s Immunity tests Conducted disturbances Immunity to conducted RF disturbances IEC 60255 22 6 10V Immunity to conducted disturbances in common mode EC 61000 4 16
346. nnecting the ACE850 to Sepam series 40 ma LI TE 22 ACE850 Connecting the ACE850 to Sepam series 60 or series 80 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 CCA614 ACE850TP and ACE850FO Multi protocol interfaces Connection Connection to Sepam m The ACE850 communication interface should only be connected to Sepam series 40 Sepam series 60 or series 80 base units using a CCA614 prefabricated cord length 3 m or 9 8 ft blue RJ45 fittings m Sepam series 40 Connect the CCA614 cord to connector base unit white label m Sepam series 60 or Sepam series 80 Connect the CCA614 cord to connector on the Sepam base unit blue label on the Sepam Connection of power supply The ACE850 interfaces must be supplied with 24 to 250 V DC or 110 to 240 V AC A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device m NEVER work alone m Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding m Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off m Start by connecting the device to the protective ground and to the functional ground m Scr
347. ns m Electrical interface between Sepam and a 4 wire RS 485 communication network m Main network cable branching box for the connection of a Sepam with a CCA612 cord Characteristics ACE959 module Weight 0 2 kg 0 441 Ib Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail Operating temperature 25 C to 70 C 13 F to 158 F Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units 4 wire RS 485 electrical interface Standard EIA 4 wire RS 485 differential Distributed power supply External 12 V DC or 24 V DC 10 Power consumption 16 mA in receiving mode 40 mA maximum in sending mode Maximum length of 4 wire RS 485 network with standard cable Number of Maximum length with Maximum length with Sepam units 12 V DC power supply 24 V DC power supply 5 320 m 1000 ft 1000 m 3300 ft 10 180 m 590 ft 750 m 2500 ft 20 160 m 520 ft 450 m 1500 ft 25 125 m 410 ft 375 m 1200 ft 1 81 144 er Description and dimensions 1 70 mm 2 8 in with CCA612 cord connected A and B Terminal blocks for network cable RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord 4 wire Power supply ACE959 D Terminal block for a separate auxiliary power supply 12 V DC or 24 V DC Been 1201 1 Grounding earthing terminal AJB 1 Link activity LED flashes when communication is active sending or receiving in progress 2 Jumper for 4 wire RS 485 ne
348. nsaction the received request Protocol identifier 2 bytes 0 Modbus protocol Field initialized by Field copied by the client the server from the received request Length 2 bytes Number of following Field initialized by Field initialized by bytes including unit the client the server identifier Unit identifier 1 byte In case of gateways Field initialized by Field copied by identifies a remote the client the server from slave device the received connected on a serial request line Should be 255 in other cases Schneider 145 Electric PE50619 PE50620 Modbus communication T SFT2841 Sepa Ele Edt Oper Sepam Application Options Window 2 S 2 0 SESlah era fo Ar N Sepam hardware configuration General characteristics CT VT Supervision Program logic Password Hardware configuration Application ype Sepam label Optional modules TT MES Input output module I MS814 1 analog output module Te Dee 17 ACES49 958 937 Communication interface Sepam 3 00 2 Sepam model MX model without fixed advanced UMI MD model with fixed advanced UMI Synchronisation mode ewok SFT2641 Sepam Configuration screen Communication configuration Communication interface Communication protocol Sepam address Speed Parity SFT2841 communication configuration window for ACE949 ACE 937 949 959 v 41 38400 Odd Ne Advanced para
349. nt measured x 1 0117 R 3 4 16NS 0 1A Average phase current Im1 x 1 0118 R 3 4 16NS 0 1A Average phase current Im2 x 1 0119 R 3 4 16NS 0 1A Average phase current Im3 x 1 011A R 3 4 16NS 0 1 A Peak demand phase current IM1 x 1 011B R 3 4 16NS 0 1 A Peak demand phase current IM2 x 1 011C R 3 4 16NS 0 1 A Peak demand phase current IM3 x 1 011D R 3 4 16NS 0 1 A Phase to phase voltage U21 x 1 011E R 3 4 16NS 1V Phase to phase voltage U32 x 1 011F R 3 4 16NS 1V Phase to phase voltage U13 x 1 0120 R 3 4 16NS 1V Phase to neutral voltage V1 x 1 0121 R 3 4 16NS 1V Phase to neutral voltage V2 x 1 0122 R 3 4 16NS 1V Phase to neutral voltage V3 x 1 0123 R 3 4 16NS 1V Residual voltage VO x 1 0124 R 3 4 16NS 1V Positive sequence voltage Vd x 1 0125 R 3 4 16NS 1V Negative sequence voltage Vi x 1 0126 R 3 4 16NS 1V Frequency 0127 R 3 4 16NS 0 01 Hz Active power P x 1 0128 R 3 4 16S 1 kW Reactive power Q x 1 0129 R 3 4 16S 1 kvar Apparent power S x 1 012A R 3 4 16S 1 kVA Peak demand active power Pm x 1 012B R 3 4 16S 1 kW Peak demand reactive power Qm x 1 012C R 3 4 16S 1 kvar Power factor cos x 100 012D R 3 4 16S 0 01 Positive active energy Ea x 1 012E 012F R 3 4 2x 16NS 100 kW h Negative active energy Ea x 1 0130 0131 R 3 4 2x 16NS 100 kW h Positive reactive energy Er x 1 0132 0133 R 3 4 2x 16NS 100 kvar h Negative reactive energy Er x 1 0134 0135 R 3 4 2x 16NS 100 kvar h 1a Schneider PCRED301006EN
350. o ensure optimum performance of the protection system during communication between Sepam units via GOOSE messages we strongly recommend setting up a fault tolerant fiber optic ring structure as shown in the connection examples Note Protection performance during communication between Sepam units via GOOSE message is only ensured by using m Fiber optic connections m EC 61850 compatible managed Ethernet switches ROOT Ethernet switch The ROOT Ethernet switch is the master switch of the RSTP reconfiguration function m Asingle ROOT Ethernet switch per Ethernet network in the main loop of the network m A Sepam unit must not be the ROOT Ethernet switch of the network Example of Sepam units connected in a star configuration ROOT Ethernet switch BI IL 1 Ss i 10 P1 P2 ACE850 P1 P2 ACE850 P1 P2 ACE850 Sepam Sepam Sepam series 40 series 60 series 40 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE81024 Installation Supervisor or RTU S LAN Fault tolerant fiber optic ring communication network ACE850TP and ACE850FO Multi protocol interfaces Connection Example of Sepam units connected in a ring configuration
351. o keys appear at the top of the display 50 51 2EJ lor O Trip curve definitive thershold 120 A delay 100 ms delay 0 ms response time e definitive apply Access to the protection setting or parameter setting modes is disabled m By pressing the key m Automatically if no keys are activated for more than 5 minutes 2a Schneider Advanced UMI Data entry principles Modification of passwords Only the parameter setting qualification level 2 keys or the SFT2841 allow modification of the passwords Passwords are modified in the general settings screen key Loss of passwords If the factory set passwords have been modified and the latest passwords entered have been irretrievably lost by the user please contact your local after sales service representative Entry of parameters or settings Principle applicable to all Sepam screens example of phase overcurrent protection m Enter the password m Access the corresponding screen by successively pressing the j key m Move the cursor by pressing the AA key for access to the desired field e g curve m Press the e key to confirm the choice then select the type of curve by pressing the V or A key and confirm by pressing the amp key m Press the P key to reach the following fields up to the apply box Press the lt 1 key to confirm the setting
352. on ACE850TP 10T 100Tx Auto 10BaseT HD 10BaseT FD 100BaseTX HD 100BaseTX FD Default 10T 100Tx Auto Media type Used to define the physical Ethernet connection ACE850FO m 100BaseFX HD m 100BaseFX FD Default 100BaseFX FD IP address Used to enter the static IP address of the 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 ACE850 Default 169 254 0 10 Subnet mask Used to enter the subnet mask of your 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 network Default 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Default 0 0 0 0 Default gateway Used to enter the default gateway router IP address used for wide area network WAN communications Allow CID file to This parameter is not used for Modbus Default not checked override IP only communication parameters Keep alive Timeout value used to test for session 1 to 60 seconds disconnection Default 30 seconds FTP session Timeout value used to force disconnection 30 to 900 seconds inactivity timeout of an inactive FTP session Default 30 seconds Duplicate IP address detection The ACE850 IP address must be unique in the network If it is not unique the Status LED repeats a four blink pause pattern and a new IP address must be assigned to the ACE850 or to the conflicting device Schneider 148 Electric PCRED301006EN 03 2011 PE80396 PE80397 Modbus communication ACE850 advanced parameters SNMP SNTP IP fitering RSTP User accounts SNMP parameters Syste
353. on Disturbance recording inhibited Sending of blocking information BI1 Sending of the blocking information to the O3 by default following Sepam in logic discrimination chain 1 Sending of blocking information Bl2 Sending of the blocking information to the next O12 by default Sepam in logic discrimination chain 2 On Sepam S42 or S52 only Tripping by logic discrimination Tripping order sent by the logic discrimination Only when the logic discrimination function function is used without the circuit breaker control function Cleared fault The recloser function has sucessfully reclosed Impulse type output Final trip The circuit breaker is definitively open after the Impulse type output reclosing cycles Recloser ready The recloser is ready to carry out the cycles Recloser in service The recloser is in service Recloser cycle 1 Cycle 1 in progress Recloser cycle 2 Cycle 2 in progress Recloser cycle 3 Cycle 3 in progress Recloser cycle 4 Cycle 4 in progress Reverse phase rotation The voltages measured are rotating in reverse MET148 1 fault MET148 2 fault Hardware problem on an MET module module 1 or 2 oron an RTD Watchdog Monitoring of Sepam operation Always on O4 if used Logic inputs button Logic inputs I11 to 114 According to configuration If MES114 module is configured Logic inputs 121 to 126 According to configuration If MES114 is configured Equa
354. on 16 in 4 words starting at the address 2200h It should be noted that requesting a new record amounts to stopping the transfers that are in progress This is not the case for an identification zone transfer request 2200h 2400h B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 BOY B08 BO7 BO6 B05 B04 BO3 B02 BO1 BOO 0 O O O O O O O Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 0 O O O M M M M O O O D D D D D O Oo O0 H H H H H Oo O mn mn mn mn mn mn ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms m m ms m ms ms ms ms Y 1 byte for years varies from 0 to 99 years The remote monitoring and control system must ensure that the year 00 is later than 99 M 1 byte for months varies from 1 to 12 D 1 byte for days varies from 1 to 31 H 1 byte for hours varies from 0 to 23 mn 1 byte for minutes varies from 0 to 59 ms 2 bytes for milliseconds varies from 0 to 59999 Reply frame Reading of each portion of configuration and data file records by a 125 word read frame function 3 starting at the address 2300h 2300h 2500h B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 BO9 B08 B07 BO6 B05 B04 BO3 BO2 BO1 BOO Number of usable bytes Exchange number in the data zone Reading should always begin with the first word in the address zone any other address triggers an exception reply incorrect address The configuration and
355. on inhibited E E E 8 u 111 MET148 1 module sensor fault E E 8 E E 112 MET148 2 module sensor fault E E 8 8 amp Address word 0108 TS113 to TS128 Bit address 1080 to 108F TS Application S40 S41 S42 S43 S44 T40 T42 M40 M41 G40 S50 S51 S52 S53 S54 T50 T52 113 Thermistor tripping E E E E E E E E E E 114 Thermistor alarm E E E E E E E E E E 115 External tripping 1 E E E E E E E E 8 E 116 External tripping 2 E E E E E E E E 8 8 117 External tripping 3 E E E E E E E E 8 E 118 Buchholz tripping E 119 Thermostat tripping E 120 Pressure tripping E 121 Buchholz alarm 122 Thermostat alarm E 123 Pressure alarm E 124 SF6 alarm E E E E E 125 Recloser ready 126 Inductive 127 Capacitive 0 128 Phase inverse rotation 1 TC17 can be used to inhibit this TS Address word 0109 TS129 to TS144 Bit address 1090 to 109F TS Application S40 S41 S42 S43 S44 T40 T42 M40 M41 G40 S50 S51 S52 S53 S54 T50 T52 129 Send blocking input 2 7 130 Tripping due to protection E E E E E EEE E E 131 S LAN communication monitoring E E E enabled 132 46BC protection 2 EEE 8 8 8 u 133 Reserved 134 Reserved 135 Reserved 136 Reserved 137 Reserved 138 Reserved 139 Reserved 140 Reserved 141 Reserved 142 Reserved 143 Reserved 144 Reserved 2 Only available on S5X and T5X applications Schneider 171 Electric Modbus communication Da
356. on of CSH30 interposing ring CT to 5 A CT make 4 turns through CSH primary The sensitivity can be multiplied by 10 using the sensitive parameter setting with Ind In 10 Parameters Residual current Rated residual current Measuring range 1 ACT InO In CT primary current 0 1 to 20 Ind Sensitive 1 A CT Ind In 10 0 1 to 20 Ind 5ACT InO In CT primary current 0 1 to 20 Ind Sensitive 5 A CT Ind In 10 0 1 to 20 Ind Variant 5 residual current measurement by core balance CT with ratio of 1 n n between 50 and 1500 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Description The ACE990 is used as an interface between an MV core balance CT with a ratio of 1 n 50 lt n lt 1500 and the Sepam residual current input This arrangement allows the continued use of existing core balance CTs on the installation Parameters Residual current Rated residual current Measuring range ACE990 range 1 Ind Ik n 0 1 to 20 Ind 0 00578 lt k lt 0 04 ACE990 range 2 Ind Ik n 0 1 to 20 Ind 0 0578 lt ks 0 26316 1 n number of core balance CT turns k factor to be determined according to ACE990 wiring and setting range used by Sepam Electric Schneider 213 DE80103 DE80952 DE80103 DE80954 Installation Base unit Connection of low voltage residual current Inputs Variant 1 residual current measurement by CTs on the neutral earthing link with or without CSH30 interposing ring CT Connection on TN
357. on of a VT loss of voltage fault triggered by a 3 phase short circuit The time delay for the 51V protection function must be longer than the T1 and T2 time delays used for the detection of voltage losses Characteristics Validation of the detection of partial loss of phase voltages Setting Yes No Vsi set point Setting 2 to 100 of Vnp Accuracy 2 for Vi gt 10 Vnp 5 for Vi lt 10 Vnp Resolution 1 Pick up drop out ratio 95 2 5 for Vi gt 10 Vnp Isi set point Setting 5 to 100 of In Accuracy 5 Resolution 1 Pick up drop out ratio 105 2 5 Time delay T1 partial loss of phase voltages Setting 0 1 s to 300s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms Validation of the detection of the loss of all phase voltages Setting Yes No Detection of the loss of all voltages with verification of the presence of current Setting Yes No Time delay T2 loss of all voltages Setting 0 1 s to 300s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms Voltage and power protection behavior Setting No action inhibition Protection 67 behavior Setting Non directional inhibition Protection 67N 67NC behavior Setting Non directional inhibition 44 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Switchgear diagnosis functions PCRED301006EN 03 2011 MT11136 CT supervision ANSI code 60 Operation The CT Current Transformer supervision function is used to supervise the complete phase current mea
358. one 1 inhibition 47 51V 59 59N functions 10 Behavior on 67 function 0 non directional 1 inhibition 11 Behavior on 67N function 0 non directional 1 inhibition 12 Vi set point Vn 13 li set point In 14 Time delay loss 3 V 2 U 10 ms 15 Time delay Vi li 10 ms 16 Reserved 17 Reserved 18 Reserved 19 Reserved PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Modbus communication Presentation The disturbance recording function is used to record analog and logical signals during a time interval Sepam can store up to 19 records Each record comprises two files m configuration file with suffix CFG m data file with suffix DAT The data of each record may be transferred via the Modbus link It is possible to transfer 1 to 19 records to a remote monitoring and control system A record may be transferred as many times as possible until it is overwritten by a new record If a record is made by Sepam while the oldest record is being transferred the oldest record is stopped If a command e g remote read or remote setting request is carried out during the transfer of a disturbance recording record the record in not disturbed Time setting Each record can be dated Time setting of Sepam is described in the Time tagging of events section Transferring records Transfer requests are made record by record A configuration file and a data file are produced for each record The master sends the commands to m find out the char
359. onverter A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device m NEVER work alone m Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding m Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off m Start by connecting the device to the protective earth and to the functional earth m Screw tight all terminals even those not in use Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 258 Seo ACE909 2 RS 232 RS 485 converter Function The ACE909 2 converter is used to connect a master central computer equipped with a V24 RS 232 type serial port as a standard feature to stations connected to a 2 wire RS 485 network Without requiring any flow control signals after the parameters are set the ACE909 2 converter performs conversion network polarization and automatic dispatching of frames between the master and the stations by two way simplex half duplex single pair transmission The ACE909 2 converter also provides a 12 V DC or 24 V DC supply for the distributed power supply of the Sepam ACE949 2 ACE959 or ACE969 2 interfaces The communication settings should be the sa
360. ort number on the server side Transmitted messages Number of Modbus requests for this connection Received messages Number of Modbus normal responses for this connection Sent errors Number of Modbus exception responses for this connection Reset counters button Button to reset the messages counters SNMP statistics Item SNMP agent status Description Status of the SNMP agent Bad Community usages Number of requests with invalid community Received messages Total number of SNMP requests Transmitted messages Total number of SNMP responses Reset counters button Button to reset the messages counters Schneider 157 PE80411 PE80412 Modbus communication SNTP Statistics SNTP Protocol SNTP Client Status Enabled Active SNTP Server IP Address 169 254 0 20 Poll Interval minutes 1 Round Trip Delay 0 002 Local Offset 0 003 Date and Time Daylight Saving Time Enabled Last Successful Time Syne UTC 2009 04 22 08 58 13 210 Device Date and Time UTC 2009 04 22 08 59 07 114 Device Date and Time local 2009 04 22 10 29 07 114 ACE850 SNTP statistics RSTP Bridge Statistics Genera Bridge Status Enabled i FE 7 Bridge ID 61440 00 00 54 90 60 02 Designated Root ID 81 92 00 0A DC 19 AE 40 Designated Root Port 12870 Rootpath Cost 200000 Total Topology Changes 3 Configured Hello Time 2 Learned Hello Time 2
361. p A 50N 51N unit of activation time delay TO 42 Unit 3 Group A 50N 51N activation time delay TO 0 43 Unit 3 Group A 50N 51N multiplying factor MO IsO 44 Unit 4 Group A 50N 51N unit of activation time delay TO 45 Unit 4 Group A 50N 51N activation time delay TO 1 46 Unit 4 Group A 50N 51N multiplying factor MO IsO 47 Unit 1 Group B 50N 51N unit of activation time delay TO 48 Unit 1 Group B 50N 51N activation time delay TO 1 49 Unit 1 Group B 50N 51N multiplying factor MO IsO 1 numerical value see setting of time delay unit T 50 Unit 2 Group B 50N 51N unit of activation time delay TO 2 bit 0 unit 1 group A activation 51 Unit 2 Group B 50N 51N activation time delay TO U ee A A peer 52 Unit 2 Group B 50N 51N multiplying factor MO IsO bit 3 unit 4 group A activation 53 Unit 3 Group B 50N 51N unit of activation time delay TO bit 4 unit 1 group B activation 54 Unit 3 Group B 50N 51N activation time delay TO m bit 5 unit 2 group B activation 55 Unit 3 Group B 50N 51N multiplying factor MO 150 a ee en 56 Unit 4 Group B 50N S1N unit of activation time delay TO 57 Unit 4 Group B 50N 51N activation time delay TO 1 58 Unit 4 Group B 50N 51N multiplying factor MO IsO PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 193 Electric Modbus communication 194 Schneider Es Electric Access to remote settings Other protection settings ANSI 21FL Fault Locator Function
362. pam is capable of sending and receiving blocking information except for e g radial distribution with use of time based discrimination td motor Sepams which can only send blocking information tripping time definite time curves When a Sepan is triggered by a fault current m it sends a blocking information to output O3 2 m it trips the associated circuit breaker if it does not receive a blocking information on the logic input assigned to receipt of BI 3 The sending of the blocking information lasts the time it takes to clear the fault It is interrupted after a time delay that takes into account the breaking device operating time and protection unit reset time This system minimizes the duration of the fault optimizes discrimination and guarantees safety in downgraded situations wiring or switchgear failure td Xs Pilot wire test The pilot wire test may be performed using the output relay test function BI order 1 Motor Sepams are not affected by the receipt of a blocking information since they are td Xs designed for loads only 2 Default parameter setting 3 According to parameter setting and presence of an additional MES114 module e g radial distribution with use of the Sepam logic discrimination system 120 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE50465 Control and monitoring Logic discrimination functions ANSI code 68 Radial
363. phase to neutral voltage Vnp Unp v3 Frequency Operation This function gives the frequency value Frequency is measured via the following m based on U21 if only one phase to phase voltage is connected to the Sepam m based on positive sequence voltage if the Sepam includes U21 and U32 measurements Frequency is not measured if m the voltage U21 or positive sequence voltage Vd is less than 40 of Un m the frequency is outside the measurement range Readout The measurement may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the amp key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Rated frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz Range 25 to 65 Hz Accuracy 0 02 Hz Display format 3 significant digits Resolution On SFT2841 0 01 Hz On Sepam display 0 1 Hz Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 At Unp in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 26 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Metering functions Active reactive and apparent power Operation This function gives the power values m P active power V3 U I cos m Q reactive power v3 U I sin m S apparent power v3 U l The function measures the active and reactive power in 3 wire 3 phase arrangements by means of the two wattmeter method The powers are obtained based on the phase to phase voltages U21 and U32 and the phase currents l1 and
364. pical error Overhead 1 02 Mixed 30 cable 7 Accuracy of calculation of the multi phase fault location Feeder type Typical error Overhead 0 73 Mixed 30 cable 2 73 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Machine operation Thermal capacity used assistance functions Cooling time constant Thermal capacity used Operation The thermal capacity used is calculated by the thermal protection function The thermal capacity used is related to the load The thermal capacity used measurement is given as a percentage of the rated thermal capacity Saving of thermal capacity used The thermal capacity used is saved in the event of a Sepam power cut The saved value is used again after a Sepam power outage Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the amp key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement range 0 to 800 Unit Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 Refresh interval 1 second typical Cooling time constant Operation The cooling time constant T2 of the equipment being monitored transformer motor or generator is estimated by the thermal overload protection function It is calculated each time the equipment operates for a sufficiently long period followed by a shutdown I lt 0 1 Ib and temperature stabilization phase The calcula
365. ping direction line Sepam S42 or S52 no R12 m Logic input output assignment 113 blocking reception 1 114 blocking reception 2 O3 send blocking information BI1 O12 send blocking information BI2 m 67 67N unit 1 tripping direction line m 67 67N unit 2 tripping direction busbar Sepam S42 or S52 no R21 m Logic input output assignment 113 blocking reception 1 O3 send blocking information BI1 012 send blocking information BI2 m 67 67N unit 1 tripping direction line m 67 67N unit 2 tripping direction busbar Electric Schneider 123 Control and monitoring Logic discrimination functions ANSI code 68 Substation with 2 parallel incomers Application Substations supplied by 2 or more parallel incomers may be protected using Sepam S42 or S52 or Sepam T42 or T52 by a combination of directional phase 67 and earth fault 67N protection functions with the logic discrimination function incomer 1 incomer 2 a 671 51 51 7 67 ee ie busbar eH feeders MT11211 direction of 67 67N protection functions A direction of blocking signals To avoid both incomers tripping when a fault ocurs upstream from one incomer the incomer protection devices must operate as follows m protection 67 of the faulty incomer detects the fault current in the line direction the protection tripping direction O sends a blocking information to inhibit
366. point sensor 5 E E E E E 90 Protection 38 49T module 2 tripping set point sensor 5 E E E E E 91 Protection 38 49T module 2 alarm set point sensor 6 E E E E E 92 Protection 38 49T module 2 tripping set point sensor 6 E E E E E 93 Protection 38 49T module 2 alarm set point sensor 7 E E E E E 94 Protection 38 49T module 2 tripping set point sensor 7 E E E E E 95 Protection 38 49T module 2 alarm set point sensor 8 E E E E E 96 Protection 38 49T module 2 tripping set point sensor 8 E E E E E 170 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Modbus Communication PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Data addresses and encoding Address word 0107 TS97 to TS112 Bit address 1070 to 107F TS Application S40 S41 S42 S43 S44 T40 T42 M40 M41 G40 50 S51 S52 S53 S54 T50 T52 97 Recloser in service E E E 8 u 98 Recloser in progress E E E 8 E 99 Recloser final trip E E E E E 100 Recloser successful reclosing E E E 8 E 101 Send blocking input 1 E E E E E EEEE E 102 Remote setting inhibited E E E E E EEEE E 103 Remote control inhibited E E E E E EE E E E 104 Sepam not reset after fault E E E E EE E E E 105 TC position discrepancy E E E E E EE 8 E E 106 Matching fault or Trip Circuit Supervision m m m mE mE E E E HE 3 107 Disturbance recording stored E E E E E EE E E E 108 Control fault E E E E E EEEE E 109 Disturbance recording inhibited E E E E E EEEE E 110 Thermal protecti
367. pplying this equipment before working on or inside it Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding m Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that allpower is off m Screw tight all terminals even those not in use Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury MES114 MES114E MES114F Wiring of connectors L W and zn Wiring with no fittings 1 wire with maximum cross section 0 2 to 2 5 mm AWG 24 12 or 2 wires with maximum cross section 0 2 to 1 mm AWG 24 18 stripped length 8 to 10 mm 0 315 to 0 39 in Wiring with fittings 1 terminal 5 recommended wiring with Telemecanique fitting DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1 5 mm AWG 16 013 Hess DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2 5 mm AWG 12 6 7 8 i amp cbaooom oo Om WN AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mm AWG 18 o tube length 8 2 mm 0 32 in o stripped length 8 mm 0 31 in 232 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Installation PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE50566 DE80294 ACE949 2 2 wires or ACE959 4 wires or ACE937 fiber optic module Optional remote modules Connection The optional MET148 2 MSA141 or DSM303 modules are connected to the base unit connector D by a series of links using prefabricated cords which come in 3 different lengths with black fittings m CCA770 L 0 6 m or 2 ft m CCA772 L 2 m or 6 6 ft m CCA774 L
368. pt G40 incomer m CT rating 5 A m number of CTs 3 11 12 13 m rated current In 630 A basic current Ib 630 A integration period 5 mn residual current none rated primary voltage Unp 20 KV rated secondary voltage Uns 100 V voltages measured by VTs U21 U32 residual voltage none disturbance recording 9 x 2 second blocks m pre trig for disturbance recording 36 periods Protection functions m all the protections are off m the settings comprise values and choices that are informative and consistent with the general characteristics by default in particular rated current and voltage In and Un m tripping behavior o latching 50 51 50V 51V 50N 51N 67 67N 46 46BC 32P 32Q 40 48 51LR 14 27D 38 49T 49RMS o participation in circuit breaker control 50 51 50V 51V 50N 51N 67 67N 46 46BC 32P 32Q 40 48 51LR 14 27D 49RMS 38 49T 37 o disturbance recording triggering with Control matrix m activation of signal lamps according to front panel markings m watchdog on output O4 m disturbance recording triggering upon activation of pick up signal PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 085 Electric Commissioning A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS m Only qualified personnel should commission this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions m NEVER work alone m Obey all existing safety instructions when commissioning
369. r 9 8 ft cord to be plugged into the test plug of the CCA670 CCA671 interface connector 9 pin sub D 5 ACE917 injection adapter to test the LPCT protection chain with a standard injection box 6 Standard injection box 222 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE80325 Installation A CAUTION HAZARD OF CUTS Trim the edges of the cut out plates to remove any jagged edges Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE80045 DE80047 LPCT type current sensors Test accessories ACE917 injection adapter Function The ACE917 adapter is used to test the protection chain with a standard injection box when Sepam is connected to LPCT sensors The ACE917 adapter is inserted between m The standard injection box m The LPCT test plug o integrated in the Sepam CCA670 CCA671 interface connector o or transferred by means of the CCA613 accessory The following are supplied with the ACE917 injection adapter m Power supply cord m 3 meter 9 8 ft cord to connect the ACE917 to the LPCT test plug on CCA670 CCA671 or CCA613 Characteristics Power supply 115 230 V AC Protection by time delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm 0 25 A rating 0 2 x 0 79 in CCA613 remote test plug Function The CCA613 test plug flush mounted on the front of the cubicle is equipped with a 3 meter 9 8 ft cord to transfer data from the test plug integrated in the CCA670
370. r hot curve fer O o T Sepam hot curve time before tripping s N oO 1 05 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 gt 2 Wb Thermal overload ANSI code 49 RMS Setting examples For an overload of 2 lb the value t T1 0 0339 2 is obtained In order for Sepam to trip at the point 1 t 70 s T1 is equal to 2065 sec 34 min With a setting of T1 34 min the tripping time is obtained based on a cold state point 2 In this case it is equal to t T1 0 3216 gt t 665 sec i e 11 min which is compatible with the thermal resistance of the motor when cold The negative sequence factor is calculated using the equation defined on page 63 The parameters of the second thermal overload relay do not need to be set They are not taken into account by default Example 3 The following data are available m motor thermal resistance in the form of hot and cold curves see solid line curves in Figure 1 m cooling time constant T2 m maximum steady state current Imax Ib 1 1 The thermal overload parameters are determined in the same way as in the previous example Setting of tripping set point Es2 Es2 Imax Ib 120 Setting of alarm set point Es1 Es1 90 I Ib 0 95 The time constant T1 is calculated so that the thermal overload protection trips after 100 s point 1 With t T1 0 069 I Ib 2 and Es2 120 gt T1 100s 0 069 1449 sec 24 min The tripping time starting from the
371. r serious injury Schneider 220 Electric DE52161 Voltage transformers The phase and residual voltage transformer secondary circuits are connected to the connector item g 2 12 Io 44 014 o 9 2 a 013 o 6 5 y 012 o 3 2 yon DHE e SSOSSOSSosgE la ET 11 126 lt 10 14 10 gt 125449 8 124448 8 Dine pelts 122 lt 6 2 Due 2 1 Dmag S Is SSOSSS 88 SS q Bl sO o 5 o O 3 F az o A a CSH rag jis 17 o OTs 8 7 13 04 o ii o 10 4 03 o 73 7 Is 191 o z 7 o 5 701 Caries x ae i BE DEO i Connections Connections are made using the screw connectors CCA626 or ring lug connectors CCA627 that can be accessed on the rear panel Wiring of the CCA626 connector m Without fitting o 1 wire with maximum cross section of 0 2 to 2 5 mm gt AWG 24 12 or 2 wires with maximum cross section of 0 2 to 1 mm gt AWG 24 16 O Stripped length 8 to 10 mm 0 31 to 0 39 in m With fitting o Recommended wiring with Telemecanique fitting DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1 5 mm AWG 16 DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2 5 mm AWG 12 AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mm AWG 18 O Tube length 8 2 mm 0 32 in O Stripped length 8 mm 0 31 in Wiring of the CCA627 connector m Ring or spade
372. r settings The I A V D 6 keys are used to browse through the menus and to scroll and accept the values displayed lamp test key switching on sequence of all the signal lamps on b51 MT10277 278 sae nrc gt 51 lo gt 5IN b gt 5IN ext b gt 51 lo gt 5IN b gt gt 5IN ext yo off I on Trip Ooff lon Trip PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Use Advanced UMI Access to data Access to measurements and Example measurement loop parameters The measurements and parameters may be accessed 3 energizing Metering menu Metering using the metering diagnosis status and protection of Sepam keys They are arranged in a series of screens as numerical values I rms shown in the diagram opposite m the data are split up by category in 4 menus X associated with the following 4 keys o key measurements choice current voltage frequency power energy O amp key switchgear diagnosis and additional measurements choice diagnosis tripping contexts x5 o key general settings choice general modules I U sensors CT VT supervision program logic I O test O M key protection settings choice phase I residual I directional voltage frequency power machine recloser m when the user presses a key the system moves on to the next screen in the loop When a screen includes more than 4 lines the user moves about in the screen via the cursor keys 4 la a
373. racteristics Cumulative breaking current kA Range 0 to 65535 kA Unit primary kA Resolution 1 kA Accuracy 10 1 digit Number of operations Range 0 to 65535 1 At In in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 41 Electric Switchgear diagnosis functions 42 Schneider Es Electric Operating time Charging time Operating time Operation This function gives the value of the opening operating time of a breaking device and change of status of the device open position contact connected to the 111 input The function is inhibited when the input is set for AC voltage The value is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure Readout The measurement may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the amp key m the display of aPC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link 1 Refer to switchgear documentation for use of this information 2 Optional MES module 3 Optional MES114E or MES114F modules Characteristics Measurement range 20 to 100 Unit ms Accuracy 1 ms typical Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1ms Charging time Operation This function gives the value of the breaking device operating mechanism charging time determined according to the device closed position status change contact and the end of charging contact connected to the Sepam logic inputs The value is saved in the even
374. rd make up the data zone Since the configuration and data files are adjacent a frame may contain the edn of the configuration and the beginning of the data file of a record It is up to the remote monitoring and control system software to reconstruct the files in accordance with the transmitted number of usable bytes and the size of the files indicated in the identification zone Acknowledging a transfer To inform Sepam that a record block that it has just read has been received correctly the master must write the number of the last exchange that it has carried out in the exchange number field and set the number of usable bytes in the data zone of the exchange word to zero Sepam only increments the exchange number if new acquisition bursts are present Rereading the identification zone To ensure that the record has not been modified during its transfer by a new record the master rereads the contents of the identification zone and ensures that the date of the recovered record is still present PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Modbus communication Sepam series 40 identification The objects making up the Sepam series 40 Reading Sepam identification Presentation The Read Device Identification function is used to access in a standardized manner the information required to clearly identify a device The description is made up of a set of objects ASCII character strings Sepam series 40 accepts the read identification function co
375. re input values DE50678 x N i Equation S X S 1 if X 0 Delay timers Two types of delay timers m on delay timer used to delay the appearance of a signal by a time T T 0 S x DE50679 a T gt S m off delay timer used to delay the disappearance of a signal by a time T s x DE50680 ae T gt PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Definition of symbols Pulse mode operation m on pulse used to create a short duration pulse 1 cycle each time a signal appears DE50681 x n m off pulse used to create a short duration pulse 1 cycle each time a signal disappears DE50682 x x ee TIl Note the disappearance of a signal may be caused by an auxiliary power failure Bistable functions Bistable functions may be used to store values i n DE50683 Equation B S RxB Schneider Control and monitoring Logic input output assignment functions Inputs and outputs may be assigned to predefined control and monitoring functions using the SFT2841 software according to the uses listed in the table below m all the logic inputs whether or not assigned to predefined functions may be used for the SFT2841 customization functions according to specific application needs o in the control matrix to link inputs to output relays LED indications or display messages o in the logic equation editor as logic equation variable
376. re ready to use and are implemented by simple parameter setting after the necessary logic inputs outputs have been assigned m the predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs using the SFT2841 software which offers the following customization options o logic equation editor to adapt and complete predefined control and monitoring functions O creation of user messages for local display o customization of the control matrix by changing the assignment of output relays LEDs and display messages Operating principle The processing of each control and monitoring function may be broken down into 3 phases m acquisition of input data o results of protection function processing o external logic data connected to the logic inputs of an optional MES120 input output module o remote control orders TC received via the communication link m actual logic processing of the control and monitoring function m utilization of the processing results o activation of output relays to trigger an actuator D information sent to the facility manager by message and or LED on the advanced UMI and SFT2841 software by remote indication TS via the communication link Logic outputs Logic Control matrix inputs m ay Predefined control and monitoring functions Circuit breaker contactor control Annunciation Etc Predefined Signal lamps messages amp
377. rear panel of Sepam The connection of only one or two LPCT sensors is not allowed and causes Sepam to go into fail safe position The two CCA670 and CCA671 interface connectors serve the same purpose the difference being the position of the LPCT sensor plugs m CCA670 lateral plugs for Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 m CCA671 radial plugs for Sepam series 60 and Sepam series 80 Description 1 3 RJ45 plugs to connect the LPCT sensors 2 3 blocks of microswitches to set the CCA670 CCA671 to the rated phase current value 3 Microswitch setting selected rated current equivalency table 2 In values per position 4 9 pin sub D connector to connect test equipment ACE917 for direct connector or via CCA613 Rating of CCA670 CCA671 connectors The CCA670 CCA671 connector must be rated according to the rated primary current In measured by the LPCT sensors In is the current value that corresponds to the rated secondary current of 22 5 mV The possible settings for In are in A 25 50 100 125 133 200 250 320 400 500 630 666 1000 1600 2000 3150 The selected In value should be m entered as a Sepam general setting m configured by microswitch on the CCA670 CCA671 connector Operating mode 1 Use a screwdriver to remove the shield located in the LPCT settings zone the shield protects 3 blocks of 8 microswitches marked L1 L2 L3 2 On the L1 block set the microswitch for the selected rated current to 1 2 In
378. reater than the Qs set point It includes a definite time delay T It is based on the two wattmeter method The function is only enabled if the following condition is met Q gt 3 1 P which provides a high level of sensitivity and high stability in the event of short circuits The power sign is determined according to the general feeder or incomer parameter iaccording to the convention m for the feeder circuit o power exported by the busbar is positive o power supplied to the busbar is negative 7 MT11183 Y flow direction m for the incomer circuit D power supplied to the busbar is positive o power exported by the busbar is negative flow direction This protection function operates for V1V2V3 U21 U32 and U21 U32 VO connections To operate with certain synchronous motors it may be necessary to inhibit the protection function during motor starting This is done using the Starting in progress output of the 48 51LR function in the equation editor MT11184 Block diagram overpower reverse power time delayed output pick up output Characteristics Tripping direction Setting overpower reverse power Qs set point Setting 5 Sn to 120 Sn Resolution 0 1 var 5 for Qs between 5 Sn and 40 Sn 3 for Qs between 40 Sn and 120 Sn 93 5 5 Accuracy 2 Drop out pick up ratio Time delay T Setting 100 ms to 300 s Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy
379. rent etc in accordance with standards IEC 60255 3 BS 142 and IEEEC 37112 Operation is represented by a characteristic curve e g m t f l curve for the phase overcurrent function m t f 10 curve for the earth fault function The rest of the document is based on t f I the reasoning may be extended to other variables l0 etc The curve is defined by m its type standard inverse very inverse extremely inverse etc m current setting Is which corresponds to the vertical asymptote of the curve m time delay T which corresponds to the operation time for 10 Is These 3 settings are made chronologically in the following order type Is current time delay T Changing the time delay T setting by x changes all of the operation times in the curve by x t DE50666 1 12 10 20 Wg IDMT protection principle The tripping time for I Is values less than 1 2 depends on the type of curve selected Name of curve Type Standard inverse time SIT 1 Very inverse time VIT or LTI 1 Extremely inverse time EIT 1 Ultra inverse time UIT 1 RI curve 1 IEC inverse time SIT A 1 IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B 1 IEC extremely inverse time EIT C 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 IEEE moderately inverse IEC D IEEE very inverse IEC E IEEE extremely inverse IEC F IAC inverse IAC very inverse IAC extremely inverse m when the monitored value is more than 20 times the set poin
380. rent measurement by 3 LPCT type sensors Description Connection of 3 Low Power Current Transducer LPCT type sensors to the CCA670 connector The connection of only one or two LPCT sensors is not allowed and causes Sepam to go into fail safe position DE51826 The measurement of the 3 phase currents allows the calculation of residual current Parameters Sensor type LPCT Number of CTs 11 12 13 Rated current In 25 50 100 125 133 200 250 320 400 500 630 666 1000 1600 2000 or 3150 A Note Parameter In must be set 2 twice m Software parameter setting using the advanced UMI or the SFT2841 software tool m Hardware parameter setting using microswitches on the CCA670 connector PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 211 Electric Installation Base unit Other residual current input connection schemes Variant 1 residual current calculation by sum of 3 phase currents Description Residual current is calculated by the vector sum of the 3 phase currents 11 12 and I3 measured by 3 x 1 Aor 5 A CTs or by 3 LPCT type sensors See current input connection diagrams page 211 CCA630 CCA634 DE80144 Parameters Residual current Rated residual current Measuring range None InO In CT primary current 0 1 to 40 Ind Variant 2 residual current measurement by CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT standard connection Description Arrangement recommended for the protectio
381. resistance via the setting of an thermal resistance motor stopped Sepam tripping curve initial heat rise EsO starting at 65 Un A starting at 80 Un starting at 100 Un adjusted Sepam cold curve In order to take these curves into account the second thermal overload relay may be C motor cold curve used N nek The time constant in this case is in theory the shortest one however it should not aT fotrhoreuwe be determined in the same way as that of the first relay The thermal overload protection switches between the first and second relay if the g equivalent current leq exceeds the Is value set point current a 10077 Sepam hot curve oO Example 4 transformer with 2 ventilation modes ee ee ee Given the following data lt starting at Un The rated current of a transformer with 2 ventilation modes is starting at 0 9 Un m b 200 A without forced ventilation ONAN mode the transformer s main 1 1 2 N operating rate ae m b 240 A with forced ventilation ONAF mode a temporary operating rate to have 20 more power available Setting of the basis current for ventilation operating rate 1 Ib 200 A to be set in Sepam general parameters Setting of the basis current for ventilation operating rate 2 Ib2 240A to be set among the specific thermal overload protection settings Switching of thermal settings via logic input to be assigned to the switching of thermal setting
382. ripped length 8 to 10 mm 0 31 to 0 39 in m Wiring with fittings o recommended wiring with Schneider Electric fitting DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1 5 mm AWG 16 DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2 5 mm AWG 12 AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mm AWG 18 o tube length 8 2 mm 0 32 in O stripped length 8 mm 0 31 in 8 amp Protective earth Screw terminal 1 green yellow wire max length 3 m 9 8 ft and max cross section 2 5 mm AWG 12 DE51845 DE oI Functional earth 4 mm 0 16 in ring lug Earthing braid supplied for connection to cubicle grounding PCRED301006EN 03 2011 249 Electric Schneider DB115265 DB115263 Installation Power supply V V 2 wire RS 485 networks A A B B If ACE969TP and ACE969TP 2 are used together the external power supply is required Power supply V 2 wire RS 485 networks 250 Schneider Es Electric ACE969TP 2 and ACE969FO 2 Multi protocol interfaces Connection 2 wire RS 485 communication ports S LAN or E LAN m Connection of the RS 485 twisted pair S LAN or E LAN to terminals A and B m In case of ACE 969TP wired with ACE969TP 2 O connection of twisted pair for distributed power supply to terminals 5 V et 4 V m In case of ACE969TP 2 only O connection only on the terminal 4 V ground continuity o no need of e
383. ripping Operation The time is calculated by the thermal protection function It depends on the thermal capacity used Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 to 999 mn Unit mn Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 mn Refresh period 1 second typical Schneider 38 Electric PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE80237 Machine operation assistance functions k Measured starting current Imax a a nenn or Is Ib 7 Starting time D PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Running hours counter and operating time Starting current and starting overload time Running hours counter and operating time The counter gives the running total of time during which the protected device motor generator or transformer has been operating I gt 0 1 Ib The initial counter value may be modified using the SFT2841 software The counter is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the amp key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Range 0 to 65535 Unit hours Starting current and starting overload time Operation The starting time is defined as follo
384. rotective earth and to the functional earth m Screw tight all terminals even those not in use Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury P Electric ACE919CA and ACE919CC RS 485 RS 485 converters Function The ACE919 converters are used to connect a master central computer equipped with an RS 485 type serial port as a standard feature to stations connected to a 2 wire RS 485 network Without requiring any flow control signals the ACE919 converters perform network polarization and impedance matching The ACE919 converters also provide a 12 V DC or 24 V DC supply for the distributed power supply of the Sepam ACE949 2 ACE959 or ACE969 2 interfaces There are 2 types of ACE919 converter m ACE919CC DC powered m ACE919CA AC powered Characteristics Mechanical characteristics Weight 0 280 kg 0 617 Ib Assembly On symmetrical or asymmetrical DIN rail ACE919CA 110 to 220 V AC 10 47 to 63 Hz ACE919CC 24 to 48 V DC 20 Electrical characteristics Power supply Protection by time delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm 0 2 in x 0 79 in 1 A rating 1 A rating Galvanic isolation between ACE power supply and frame and between ACE power supply and interface supply Communication and Sepam interface distributed supply Data format 11 bits 1 start 8 data 1 parity 1 stop 2000 Vrms 50 Hz 1 min Transmission delay lt 100 ns Distributed power supply for Sepam 12
385. rrent and voltage input connection With 3 phase generator Procedure 1 Connect the 3 phase voltage and current generator to the corresponding test terminal boxes using the plugs provided according to the appropriate diagram in terms of the number of VTs connected to Sepam m block diagram with 3 VTs connected to Sepam current test Sepam series 40 voltage test terminal box terminal box 4 3 phase O generator A gS y g 290 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Commissioning Checking of phase current and voltage input connection With 3 phase generator m block diagram with 2 VTs connected to Sepam current test Sepam series 40 voltage test terminal box terminal box 3 phase t generator A g 7 g 2 Turn the generator on 3 Apply the 3 generator voltages V1 N V2 N and V3 N balanced and set to the rated secondary phase to neutral voltage of the VTs i e Vns Uns V3 4 Inject the 3 generator currents 11 12 and 13 balanced and set to the rated secondary current of the CTs i e 1 A or 5 A and in phase with the voltages applied i e generator phase displacement o1 V1 N 11 a2 V2 N 12 a8 V3 N 13 0 5 Use the SFT2841 software to check the following m the value indicated for each of the phase currents 11 12 and I3 is approximate
386. s m detection of an internal failure by the self tests m sensor interface connector missing CCA630 CCA634 or CCA670 m no connection of one of the 3 LPCT sensors to the CCA670 connectors L1 L2 and L3 m MES module configured but missing See List of self tests which place Sepam in the fail safe position page 136 The fail safe position is conveyed by ON indicator on indicator on the base unit steadily on relay O4 watchdog in fault position output relays dropped out all protection units inhibited display showing fault message Q 01 J indicator on DSM303 module remote advanced UMI option flashing Downgraded operation The base unit is in working order all the protection functions activated are operational and indicates that one of the optional modules such as DSM303 MET148 2 or MSA141 is faulty or else that a module is configured but not connected See List of self tests which do not place Sepam in the fail safe position page 136 According to the model this operating mode is conveyed by m Sepam with integrated advanced UMI MD base o ON indicator on o Q indicator on the base unit flashing including when the display is out of order off o Q indicator on the MET or MSA module faulty steadily on The display shows a partial fault message and indicates the type of fault by a code O code 1 inter module link fault O code 3 MET module unavailable o code 4 MSA module una
387. s m the control logic of each input may be inverted for undervoltage type operation Logic inputs Open position u u u 111 Closed position u 112 Logic discrimination blocking reception 1 m u u u u Free Logic discrimination blocking reception 2 Free Switching of groups of settings A B 7 u 7 E E 7 7 u 7 E E 7 7 7 u 7 113 External reset u u u Free External tripping 1 u u u Free External tripping 2 u u u u Free External tripping 3 u u u u Free Buchholz gas tripping Free Thermostat tripping Free Pressure tripping Free Thermistor tripping Free Buchholz gas alarm Free Thermostat alarm u 7 Free Pressure alarm u 7 Free Thermistor alarm Free End of charging position u u u u Free Inhibit remote control u u u u Free SF6 u u u u Free Inhibit recloser u u u Free External network synchronization u u u u u 121 Inhibit thermal overload Free Switching of thermal settings Free Motor re acceleration 7 Free Rotor rotation
388. s function and to be connected to the transformer ventilation control unit The settings related to each ventilation operating rate Es set points time constants etc are to be determined according to the transformer characteristics provided by the manufacturer 66 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Protection functions Cold curves for Es0 0 Thermal overload ANSI code 49 RMS Setting examples Ib 1 00 1 05 1 10 1 15 1 20 1 25 1 30 1 35 1 40 1 45 1 50 1 55 1 60 1 65 1 70 1 75 1 80 Es 50 0 6931 0 6042 0 5331 0 4749 0 4265 0 3857 0 3508 0 3207 0 2945 0 2716 0 2513 0 2333 0 2173 0 2029 0 1900 0 1782 0 1676 55 0 7985 0 6909 0 6061 0 5376 0 4812 0 4339 0 3937 0 3592 0 3294 0 3033 0 2803 0 2600 0 2419 0 2257 0 2111 0 1980 0 1860 60 0 9163 0 7857 0 6849 0 6046 0 5390 0 4845 0 4386 0 3993 0 3655 0 3360 0 3102 0 2873 0 2671 0 2490 0 2327 0 2181 0 2048 65 1 0498 0 8905 0 7704 0 6763 0 6004 0 5379 0 4855 0 4411 0 4029 0 3698 0 3409 0 3155 0 2929 0 2728 0 2548 0 2386 0 2239 70 1 2040 1 0076 0 8640 0 7535 0 6657 0 5942 0 5348 0 4847 0 4418 0 4049 0 3727 0 3444 0 3194 0 2972 0 2774 0 2595 0 2434 75 1 3863 1 1403 0 9671 0 8373 0 7357 0 6539 0 5866 0 5302 0 4823 0 4412 0 4055 0 3742 0 3467 0 3222 0 3005 0 2809 0 2633 80 1 6094 1 2933 1 0822 0 9287 0 8109 0 7174 0 6413 0 5780 0 5245 0 4788 0 4394 0 4049 0 3747 0 3479 0 3241 0 3028 0 2836 85 1 8971 1 4739 1 2123
389. s are used for fast direct access to the required information Mt11190 2 DEHS EnS Nr Aih L AS thers Temperatures U I f measurements Currents Phase 1 RMS values Average values Maximum values Residual current Input lo Current operation Voltages m display of all metering and operation data m display of alarm messages with the time of appearance date hour mn s ms m display of diagnosis data such as tripping current number of switchgear operations and cumulative breaking current m display of all the protection and parameter settings m display of the logic status of inputs outputs and signal lamps Phase to neutral voltages Phase to phase voltages Residual voltage Positive sequence voltage Negative sequence voltage Frequency Frequency The SFT2841 software is the solution suited to occasional local operation for demanding personnel PA e a ee Mia a ee who require fast access to all the information Example of a measurement display screen Parameter and protection setting m display and setting of all the parameters of each protection function in the same page PETES m program logic parameter setting parameter setting of general installation and Sepam data m input data may be prepared ahead of time and transferred into the corresponding Sepam units in a single operation downloading function MT 5051 SON SIN 508F 46 67N 32P 32Q 40 49RMS
390. s communication Ethernet TCP IP Statistics PE80404 Ethernet Parameters Mac Address 00 00 54 81 30 10 Frame Type Ethernet Il TCPAP Parameters IP Address 169 254 0 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Default Gateway 169 254 0 24 TCP Keepalive 30 Ethernet Statistics Frames Received 1129 IP Filtering Disabled Frames Transmitted 1972 Reset Counters ACE850 Ethernet TCP IP statistics Ethernet Port Statistics PE80407 Pot ori P Transmit Statistics Frames Transmitted OK 1477 Collisions o Alignment Error 0 Receive Statistics Frames Received OK 2219 Excessive Collisions 0 CRC Errors 0 Carrier Sense Errors 0 FCS Errors 0 Internal MAC Tx Errors 0 Link Speed 100 Collision Statistics Late Collisions 0 Reset Counters ACE850 Ethernet port statistics 156 Schneider Commissioning and diagnosis Ethernet communication Ethernet TCP IP statistics Item Description Mac address Unique Ethernet hardware address of the ACE850 Frame type Value of the frame type configured with SFT2841 TCP IP parameters Parameter values configured with SFT2841 Frames received Total number of received Ethernet frames regardless of port or protocol Frames transmitted Total number of transmitted Ethernet frames regardless of port or protocol Reset Counters button Button to reset the Ethernet counters Ethernet port statistics Item Port P1 P2 buttons Descrip
391. s is true see further on The recloser ready information may be viewed with the control matrix PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Recloser ANSI code 79 Recloser cycles m case of a cleared fault o following a reclosing order if the fault does not appear after the reclaim time has run out the recloser reinitializes and a message appears on the display see example 1 m case of a fault that is not cleared o following instantaneous or time delayed tripping by the protection unit activation of the dead time associated with the first active cycle At the end of the dead time a closing order is given which activates the reclaim time If the protection unit detects the fault before the end of the time delay a tripping order is given and the following reclosing cycle is activated o after all the active cycles have been run if the fault still persists a final trip order is given a message appears on the display and closing is locked out until acknowledgment takes place according to the parameter setting of the protection function m closing on a fault If the circuit breaker closes on a fault or if the fault appears before the end of the safety time delay the recloser is inhibited Recloser inhibition conditions The recloser is inhibited according to the following conditions m voluntary open or close order m recloser put out of service m receipt of a inhibtion order on the logic input m activation of the breaker failure funct
392. se indicators have the following states m Off the corresponding physical link is down or the port speed is 10Mbps m On the corresponding port operates at 100Mbps 4 and 6 Link Activity indicators These indicators have the following states m Off the corresponding physical link is not established m On the corresponding physical link is established m blinking the indicator blinks with the activity on the link 154 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Modbus communication SFT2841 Sepam series 40 Connection window Bl Echier Edition Exploitation Sepam Application Options Fen tre 2 DEHS EL ar AL AZAY wer PE80578 Diagnostic Sepam Caract ristiques g n rales du Sepam Diagnostics Etats Leds Ertr es Sonies Etats TS Type d application Mat Rep re du Sepam Sepam wox Version logiciele v7 00 Communication Protocole de communication ETHERNET 10 169 254 000 0 op rationnel Etat du Sepam D faut majeur D faut partiel T l r glage autoris Connecteur Date et heure du Sepam Sepam synchronise Evt horodat pr sent Etat des modules optionnels non non non CCA630 pr sent non Etat a Version Sepam 000x Peram irege FTC autoris e 1157092009 08 31 18 SFT2841 Sepam diagnosis screen Interface Ethernet Diagnosis Identification Module PE80402 Firmware version Hardware version Addresses Current IP address MAC address
393. sidual current and residual voltage input connection Checking of logic input and output connection Validation of the complete protection chain Checking of optional modules connection Test sheet Maintenance Firmware modifications PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider Electric 241 243 244 245 246 252 258 260 262 267 268 269 270 278 279 285 286 286 287 288 289 290 296 297 298 299 300 302 304 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Introduction PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Contents Selection guide by application Protection functions suitable for low voltage Presentation Selection table Technical characteristics Environmental characteristics Schneider Electric 10 12 14 16 17 Sepam range Selection guide by application The selection guide by application suggests Sepam type s suitable for your protection requirements based on your application characteristics The most typical applications are presented along with the associated Sepam type Each application example is described m By asingle line diagram specifying o the device to be protected Series 20 o the network configuration o the position of the metering sensors m By the standard and specific Sepam functions to be implemented to protect the application concerned Protections Current Voltage Frequency
394. sions o VL3 TON V1 AND V3 300 incorrect expression o VL4 V1 AND V3 o VL3 TON VL4 300 correct Use limit The number of operators and functions OR AND XOR NOT TON TOF SR PULSE is limited to 100 Examples of applications m latching of recloser final trip data By default this data is of the impulse type at the recloser output If required by operating conditions it may be latched as follows LATCH V1 V1 may be latched V1 P79_1_204 recloser final trip output V1 may then control a signal lamp or relay output in the matrix m latching of a signal lamp without latching the protection function Certain operating conditions call for the latching of indications on the front panel of Sepam without latching of the trip output O1 LATCH V1 V2 V1 P50 51_1_1 OR P50 51_3_1 tripping units 1 and 3 of protection 50 51 V2 P50 51_2_1 OR P50 51_4_1 tripping units 2 and 4 of protection 50 51 V1 and V2 must be configured in the matrix to control 2 front panel signal lamps m circuit breaker tripping if input 113 is present for more than 300 ms V_TRIPCB TON 113 300 m life line mode example 1 If work is underway with the power on indicated by input 125 and the user wishes to change the relay behavior as follows 1 circuit breaker tripping by the instantaneous outputs of protection functions 50 51 unit 1 or 50N 51N unit 1 AND if input 125 is present 2 Recloser inhibition
395. situation which if not avoided can result in equipment damages Important notes Restricted liability Electrical equipment should be serviced and maintained only by qualified personnel No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this manual This document is not intended as an instruction manual for untrained persons Device operation The user is responsible for checking that the rated characteristics of the device are suitable for its application The user is responsible for reading and following the device s operating and installation instructions before attempting to commission or maintain it Failure to follow these instructions can affect device operation and constitute a hazard for people and property Protective grounding The user is responsible for compliance with all the existing international and national electrical codes concerning protective grounding of any device Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Sepam series 40 General contents Introduction Metering functions Protection functions Control and monitoring functions Modbus communication Installation Use PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider ectric Sepam series 40 2 Schneider Electric General contents Introduction Selection guide by application Protection functions suitable for low voltage Presentation Selection table Technical characteristics Environmental characteri
396. splay and the user is in the status protection or alarm menu the 4 key is used to move the cursor upward General settings General Module Loge reset on N Bst b gt 5i b gt S5IN b gt 5iN ext Ooff Ylon Tip ee 999989 ee MT10814 When there are no alarms on the Sepam display and the user is in the status protection or alarm menu the P key is used to move the cursor downward Metering PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider G Electric 283 MT10816 MT10817 Use Use of passwords Sepam has two 4 digit passwords m The first password symbolized by a key is used to modify the protection settings m The second password symbolized by two keys is used to modify the protection settings and all the general settings The 2 factory set passwords are 0000 Entry of passwords Press the key to display the following screen passwords ou See ou Press the a key to position the cursor on the first digit O X X X Scroll through the digits using the cursor keys a V then confirm to go on to the next digit by pressing the pm key Do not use characters other than numbers 0 to 9 for each of the 4 digits When the password for your qualification level is entered press the VW key to position the cursor on the apply box Press the ga key again to confirm When Sepam is in protection setting mode a key appears at the top of the display When Sepam is in parameter setting mode tw
397. stics Metering functions General settings Characteristics Phase current Residual current Average current and peak demand currents Phase to phase voltage Phase to neutral voltage Residual voltage Positive sequence voltage Negative sequence voltage Frequency Active reactive and apparent power Peak demand active and reactive power Power factor cos Active and reactive energy Temperature Network diagnosis functions Tripping context Tripping current Negative sequence unbalance Phase displacement 00 Phase displacement 01 02 3 Disturbance recording Fault locator Machine operation assistance functions Thermal capacity used Cooling time constant Operating time before tripping Waiting time after tripping Running hours counter and operating time Starting current and starting overload time Number of starts before inhibition Start inhibit time delay PCRED301006EN 7 8 10 12 14 16 17 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 31 32 33 34 35 37 37 38 39 40 03 2011 Sepam series 40 General contents Switchgear diagnosis functions 41 Cumulative breaking current and number of operations 41 Operating time Charging time 42 VT supervision 43 CT supervision 45 Protection functions 46 Setting ranges 48 Undervoltage 51 Positive sequence undervoltage and phase rotation direction check 52 Remanent undervoltage 53 Directional active overpower 5
398. surement chain m phase current sensors 1 A 5 A CTs or LPCTs m phase current sensor connection to Sepam m Sepam phase current analog inputs The function detects the loss of a phase current when the three phase currents are measured The function is inactive if only 2 phase current sensors are connected The CT fault information disappears automatically when the situation returns to normal i e as soon as the three phase currents are measured and have values greater than 10 of In In the event of the loss of a phase current the following protection functions may be inhibited to avoid nuisance tripping m 46 46BC 32P and 320 40 m 51N if l0 is calculated by the sum of the phase currents Block diagram lt 1 ln m 12 gt 5 In m mm 13 gt 5 ln BEA 110 lt angle 13 12 lt 130 phase 1 loss gt CT fault phase 2 loss phase 3 loss Characteristics Time delay Setting 0 15 sto 300 s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms Inhibition of protection functions 46 32P 320 40 51N Setting No action inhibition Electric Schneider 45 Protection functions 46 Schneider Es Electric Contents Setting ranges Undervoltage ANSI code 27 27S 51 48 51 Positive sequence undervoltage and phase rotation direction check ANSI code 27D 47 52 Remanent undervoltage ANSI code 27R 53 Directional active overpo
399. symmetrical DIN rail Operating temperature 25 C to 70 C 13 F to 158 F Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units Temperature sensors Pt100 Ni100 Ni120 Isolation from earth None None Current injected in RTD 4mA 4mA Description and dimensions A Terminal block for RTDs 1 to 4 B Terminal block for RTDs 5 to 8 RJ45 connector to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord RJ45 connector to link up the next remote module with a CCA77x cord according to application Grounding earthing terminal 1 Jumper for impedance matching with load resistor Rc to be set to m X if the module is not the last interlinked module default position m Rc if the module is the last interlinked module 2 Jumper used to select module number to be set to m MET1 1st MET148 2 module to measure temperatures T1 to T8 default position m MET2 2nd MET148 2 module to measure temperatures T9 to T16 for Sepam series 40 Sepam series 60 and series 80 only 30 1 81 1 70 mm 2 8 in with CCA77x cord connected 234 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE51649 Installation MET148 2 Temperature sensor module Connection A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device
400. t 35 ms at 2 Is typically 25 ms Confirmed instantaneous m inst lt 50 ms at 2 Is for Is gt 0 3 In typically 35 ms m inst lt 70 ms at 2 Is for Is lt 0 3 In typically 50 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 50 ms for T1 0 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 Setting ranges in TMS Time Multiplier Setting mode Inverse SIT and IECIEC SIT A 0 04 to 4 20 Very inverse VIT and IEC VIT B 0 07 to 8 33 Very inverse LTI and IEC LTI B 0 01 to 0 93 Ext inverse EIT and IEC EIT C 0 13 to 15 47 IEEE moderately inverse 0 42 to 51 86 IEEE very inverse 0 73 to 90 57 IEEE extremely inverse 1 24 to 154 32 IAC inverse 0 34 to 42 08 IAC very inverse 0 61 to 75 75 IAC extremely inverse 1 08 to 134 4 3 Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC IEEE and IAC types Schneider 83 Electric Protection functions a Schneider DE52310 Overvoltage ANSI code 59 Operation The protection function is single phase and operates with phase to neutral or phase to phase voltage m it picks up if one of the voltages concerned is above the Us or Vs set point m it includes a definite time delay T m with phase to neutral operation it indicates the faulty phase in the alarm associated with the fault Block diagram U21 or V1 lt Us or Vs U32 or V2 lt Us or Vs U13 or V3 lt Us 21 time delayed output
401. t the tripping time is limited to the value corresponding to 20 times the set point m if the monitored value exceeds the measurement capacity of Sepam 40 In for the phase current channels 20 InO for the residual current channels the tripping time is limited to the value corresponding to the largest measurable value 40 In or 20 InO 104 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Protection functions Equation ty l mi 0E Equation ty l Equation tu A t o EF EF PCRED301006EN 03 2011 General Tripping curves Current IDMT tripping curves Multiple IDMT tripping curves are offered to cover most applications m IEC curves SIT VIT LTI EIT m IEEE curves MI VI El m commonly used curves UIT RI IAC IEC curves Curve type Coefficient values k a B Standard inverse A 0 14 0 02 2 97 Very inverse B 13 5 1 1 50 Long time inverse B 120 1 13 33 Extremely inverse C 80 2 0 808 Ultra inverse 315 2 2 5 1 RI curve Equation tal 1 x L 1 3 1706 0 339 0 236 I IEEE curves Curve type Coefficient values A B p B Moderately inverse 0 010 0 023 0 02 0 241 Very inverse 3 922 0 098 2 0 138 Extremely inverse 5 64 0 0243 2 0 081 IAC curves Curve type Coefficient values A B c D E B Inverse 0 208 0 863 0 800 0 418 0 195 0 297 Very inverse 0 090 0 795 0 100 1 288 7 958 0 165 Extremely inverse 0 004 0 638 0 620 1 787 0 246 0 092 Electric Schneider 105
402. t 1 9 Time delayed earth fault unit 1 10 Instantaneous earth fault unit 2 11 Time delayed earth fault unit 2 12 Instantaneous earth fault unit 3 13 Time delayed earth fault unit 3 14 Instantaneous earth fault unit 4 15 Time delayed earth fault unit 4 16 Instantaneous directional earth fault unit 1 17 Time delayed directional earth fault unit 1 18 Instantaneous directional earth fault unit 2 19 Time delayed directional earth fault unit 2 20 Instantaneous directional phase overcurrent unit 1 21 Time delayed directional phase overcurrent unit 1 22 Instantaneous directional phase overcurrent unit 2 23 Time delayed directional phase overcurrent unit 2 24 V_TRIPCB logic equation The bit status is encoded as follows 0 No activation by the protection function 1 Activation by the protection function The time delay unit of the CLPU functions is coded the following way 0 millisecond 1 second 2 minute Schneider Electric 181 Modbus communication 182 Schneider G Electric Access to remote settings General settings Function number 3002 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Rated frequency 0 50 Hz 1 60 Hz 2 Remote setting enabled 1 disabled 3 Working language 0 English 1 other 4 Active group of settings 0 Group A 1 Group B 3 Choice by 113 4 Choice by remote control 5 Setting mode 0 TMS 1 I Is 6 Phase CT rating 0
403. t Ind 2 from 0 3 to 1 5 InO 5 if lt 0 3 Ind Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1A Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 InO rated current set in the general settings 2 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 excluding sensor accuracy 3 InO InCT or InO InCT 10 according to setting PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Metering functions PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Average current and peak demand currents Operation This function gives m the average RMS current for each phase that has been obtained for each integration interval m the greatest average RMS current value for each phase that has been obtained since the last reset The values are refreshed after each integration interval an interval that may be set from 5 to 60 mn and are saved in the event of a power failure Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the amp key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Resetting to zero m press the a key on the advanced UMI display unit when a peak demand current is displayed m via the clear command in the SFT2841 software m via the communication link remote control order TC6 Characteristics Measurement range 0 1 to 1 5 In Unit AorkA Accuracy 0 5 typical 2 2 from 0 3 to 1 5 In 5 if lt 0 3 In Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 0
404. t be set higher than this negative sequence To set the protection set point you must m read the peak demand negative sequence and positive sequence current ratio value see page 32 after a time representative of the activity on the installation m set the set point li Id s to a value 30 to 50 higher than the value read on the peak demand meter Setting the TBC time delay Asignificant negative sequence may appear briefly on the network for example after a transformer switches downstream or after a short circuit For this reason it is advisable to choose a TBC time delay of at least 1 second and in any case longer than that for the other protection functions Characteristics Set point li Id s Setting 10 to 100 Resolution 1 TBC time delay Setting definite time 0 1 to 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit 1 Under reference conditions IEC 60255 6 60 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Protection functions Negative sequence overvoltage ANSI code 47 Operation The protection function picks up if the negative sequence component of the voltages Vi is above the set point Vsi m it includes a definite time delay T m the negative sequence voltage Vi is determined from the three phase voltages gt 13 22 gt Vi 3V1 a V2 aV3 or aa 13 gt Vi 3 U21 aU32 2n with a e 3 This protection function only operates with connections V1V2V
405. t is approximately equal to 5A m when applicable the value indicated for calculated VO residual voltage is approximately equal to the rated primary phase to neutral voltage of the VTs i e Vnp Unp V3 m when applicable the value indicated for the phase displacement 0 VO 10 between the 10 current and VO voltage is approximately equal to 0 6 Turn the generator off Schneider 295 Commissioning Description Check to be carried out when the residual voltage is delivered by 3 VTs on the secondary circuits connected in an open delta assembly and when the residual current is calculated in Sepam or when applicable is not used for the protection function 296 current test terminal box Checking of residual voltage input connection Procedure 1 Connect according to the diagram below m the generator voltage terminals to the voltage test terminal box so as to only supply Sepam s residual voltage input m when applicable the generator current terminals to the current test terminal box so as to only supply Sepam s phase 1 current input and therefore obtain a residual current I0 11 Sepam series 40 voltage test terminal box single phase or 3 phase generator Schneider 2 Turn the generator on 3 Apply a V N voltage set to the rated secondary voltage of the VTs installed in an open delta arrange
406. t of an auxiliary power failure Readout The measurement may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the amp key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link 1 Refer to switchgear documentation for use of this information 2 Optional MES114 or MES114E or MES114F modules Characteristics Measurement range 1 to 20 Unit s Accuracy 0 5 sec Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1s PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Switchgear diagnosis VT supervision functions ANSI code 60FL Operation The VT Voltage Transformer supervision function is used to supervise the complete phase and residual voltage measurement chain m voltage transformers m VT connection to Sepam m Sepam voltage analog inputs The function processes the following failures m partial loss of phase voltages detected by O presence of negative sequence voltage o and absence of negative sequence current m loss of all phase voltages detected by O presence of current on one of the three phases o and absence of all measured voltages m tripping of the phase VT and or residual VT protection relay detected by the acquisition on a logic input of the fuse melting contact or auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker protecting the VTs m other types of failures may be processed using the logic equation editor The Phase voltage fault and Residual voltage fault information disappears
407. ta addresses and encoding Use of remote control orders Address word 00F0 TC1 to TC16 Bit address OF00 to OFOF Remote control orders are pre assigned to protection TC Application S40 S41 S42 S43 S44 T40 T42 M40 M41 G40 control and metering functions 50 S51 S52 S53 54 T50 T52 Remote control orders may be carried out in two 1 Tripping BF es m DE modes 2 Closing E E E E EEEE E E m direct mode 3 Swtiching to setting group A E E E E E EEE E E m confirmed SBO select before operate mode 4 Switching to setting group B E E E 8 8 8 EEE E It is possible to inhibit all the remote control orders via 5 Sepam reset E ee ee ee ee one logic input assigned to the function inhibit remote 6 Peak demand current zero reset 2 E E E E E EEE E E control with the exception of the remote control 7 Inhibit thermal protection E E 8 E tripping order TC1 which can be activated at any time 8 Inhibit disturbance recording triggering m mE E E E E E E E E The parameter setting of the logic input may be done in OPG two modes 9 Confirm disturbance recording triggering mE E E E E E E E E m inhibition if the input is at 1 OPG m inhibition if the input is at 0 negative input 10 Manual disturbance recording triggering m m m mE E E HE E HE E The device tripping and closing and recloser enabling OPG and disabling remote control orders are acknowledged 1 Emable recloser m Ve if the CB control function is
408. the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 to 360 mn Unit mn Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 mn Refresh interval 1 second typical PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Switchgear diagnosis functions PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Cumulative breaking current and number of operations Cumulative breaking current Operation This function gives the cumulative breaking current in kA for five current ranges It is based on measurement of the fundamental component The current ranges displayed are g0 lt I lt 2In m 2in lt l lt 5In m 5In lt l lt 10In m 10In lt I lt 40In m gt 40 In This function gives the cumulative breaking current in kA for five current ranges Each value is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure Refer to switchgear documentation for use of this information Number of operations The function also gives the total number of breaking device operations It is activated by tripping orders O1 relay The number of operations is saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link The initial values may be introduced using the SFT2841 software tool to take into account the real state of a used breaking device Cha
409. the advanced UMI or the SFT2841 software tool are as follows m tripping currents m residual current measured on l0 input residual current calculated on the sum of the phase currents positive sequence current negative sequence current phase to phase voltages phase to neutral voltages residual voltage positive sequence voltage negative sequence voltage frequency active power m reactive power m fault location m fault resistance m faulty phase s The values corresponding to the last five trips are stored with the date and time of the trip They are saved in the event of a power failure Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Tripping current Operation This function gives the RMS value of currents at the prospective time of the last trip m TRIPI1 phase 1 current m TRIPI2 phase 2 current m TRIPI3 phase 3 current It is based on measurement of the fundamental component This measurement is defined as the maximum RMS value measured during a30 ms interval after the activation of the tripping contact on output O1 Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 1 to 40 In Unit AorkA Acc
410. the function is used to protect a motor this fixed set point is designed for detection of the hot state used by the number of starts function The value of the fixed set point is 50 Heat rise and cooling time constants Heat rise time constant PCRED301006EN 03 2011 MT10420 E 1 T2 t Cooling time constant Thermal overload ANSI code 49 RMS For self ventilated rotating machines cooling is more effective when the machine is running than when it is stopped Running and stopping of the equipment are calculated from the value of the current m running if gt 0 1 Ib m stopped if lt 0 1 Ib Two time constants may be set m T1 heat rise time constant concerns equipment that is running m T2 cooling time constant concerns equipment that is stopped Accounting for harmonics The current measured by the thermal protection is an RMS 3 phase current which takes into account harmonics up to number 17 Accounting for ambient temperature Most machines are designed to operate at a maximum ambient temperature of 40 C 104 F The thermal overload function takes into account the ambient temperature Sepam equipped with the temperature sensor module option with sensor no 8 assigned to measurement of ambient temperature to increase the calculated heat rise value when the temperature measured exceeds 40 C 104 F Tmax 40 C Tmax Tambient in whichT max is the equipment s maximum temperature ac
411. time delay tA MT10211 Definite time protection principle IDMT protection IDMT protection operates in accordance with the IEC 60255 3 BS 142 and IEEE C 37112 standards MT10222 IDMT protection principle a Schnelder U21 la Voltage restrained phase overcurrent ANSI code 50V 51V The IsO setting is the vertical asymptote of the curve and T is the operation time delay for 10 IsO The tripping time for 10 Is0 values of less than 1 2 depends on the type of curve chosen Name of curve Type Standard inverse time SIT 1 2 Very inverse time VIT or LTI 1 2 Extremely inverse time EIT 1 2 Ultra inverse time UIT 1 2 RI curve IEC standard inverse time SIT A IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B IEC extremely inverse time EIT C IEEE moderately inverse IEC D IEEE very inverse IEC E IEEE extremely inverse IEC F IAC inverse IAC very inverse IAC extremely inverse 1 The curve equations are given in the chapter entitled IDMT protection functions 4 1 1 i i 1 1 1 The function takes into account current variations during the time delay interval For currents with a very large amplitude the protection function has a definite time characteristic m if gt 20 Is tripping time is the time that corresponds to 20 Is m if gt 40 In tripping time is the time that corresponds to 40 In In current transformer rated current defined when the ge
412. ting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 6 3 Activity 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Is set point Ib 7 Tripping time delay 10 ms 8 Reserved 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved ANSI 38 49T Temperature monitoring Function number 15xx relay 1 xx 01 to relay 16 xx 10h Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity 4 Reserved 5 Reserved a 6 Alarm set point C 7 Trip set point C 8 Reserved 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 184 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Modbus communication PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Access to remote settings ANSI 46 Negative sequence unbalance Function number 03xx relay 1 xx 01 relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity 4 Reserved 5 5 Reserved 6 Tripping curve O 7 Is set point b 8 Tripping time delay 10 ms 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved ANSI 46BC Broken Conductor Function number 2801 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 6 2 CB control 6 3 Activity 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Set point 7 Tripping time delay 10 ms ANSI 47 Negative sequence overvoltage Function number 1901 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 6 2 CB control 3 Activity 4 Reserv
413. tion Selection of the port of which statistics are displayed Frames transmitted OK A counter that increments each time a frame is successfully transmitted Collisions A counter that increments each time a frame is retransmitted due to collision detection Excessive collisions A counter that increments each time a frame cannot be sent because it has reached the maximum collision status based on the Truncated Binary Exponential Backoff algorithm Carrier sense errors A counter that increments each time there is a collision because carrier sense is disabled Internal MAC Tx errors A counter that increments for every transmission error that is not caused by late excessive or carrier sense collisions Link speed Actual link speed Frames received OK A counter that increments each time a frame is successfully received Alignment errors A counter that increments each time a received frame has an FCS error and does not end on an 8 bit frame boundary CRC errors A counter that increments each time a received frame has a CRC or an alignment error FCS errors A counter that increments each time a received frame has a FCS or an alignment error Late collisions A counter that increments each time a collision occurs after the slot time 512 bits starting at the preamble Reset counters button Button to reset the port counters PCRED301006EN 03 2011 PE80408
414. tion la x S O SH Sak saOrn AL ESAS Diagnosis Input output and indicator status Remote indication status Input output and indicator status Indicators Ps os losin ioosin ex ot ro Tie O xe oe mw C2 jw te te Fault u 12 B u 15 5 u 1 13 Inputs Dupas m 01 n2 02 n3 03 n os G an 1 012 ir 618 ia En 014 0 25 Eu Testing outputs BETT Connected Motor mar Moteur 1 Parameter setting Remote controls en 24 01 2002 16 5240 7 Input output indicator status screen SFT2841 Sepam 1000 serie 40 Connection window E Eie Edt Operation Sepam Application Options Window 2 la x D SHS Ehsan ih An SD Diagnosis Input output and indicator status Remote indication status Sepam diagnosis Sepam general characteristics Sepam status Application type Ma Major faut no Sepam identification Moteur 1 Partial faut yes Software version v1 62 Remote setting enabled no Communication interface version Connecter CAG present Sepam date and time El Communication Chahe ah animal madi dee Status Ve bee Sepam output relay test x s Jerson Sepan snchoried Selection of output to be tested Data loss lime tagged event present co con Number of frames received Number of frames received with c 02 C 012 C 03 C 013 E E Connected Motor M4 Cos cou rols en 2400172002 1685457 Ca toe Sepam diagnosis and output relay test screen 298
415. tion channel Sepam is always a slave station Sepam is connected to a Modbus communication network via a communication interface There is a choice of 3 types of communication interface m Communication interfaces to connect Sepam to a single serial network o ACE949 2 for connection to a 2 wire RS 485 network o ACE959 for connection to a 4 wire RS 485 network o ACE937 for connection to a fiber optic star network m Communication interfaces to connect Sepam to two serial networks o ACE969TP 2 for connection to one 2 wire RS 485 Modbus S LAN supervision communication network one 2 wire RS 485 E LAN engineering communication network o ACE969FO 2 for connection to one fiber optic Modbus S LAN supervision communication network one 2 wire RS 485 E LAN engineering communication network m Communication interfaces to connect Sepam to an Ethernet network o ACE850TP for electrical connection to the network o ACE850FO for optical connection to the network Data available The data available depend on the type of Sepam Measurement readout m phase and earth fault currents m peak demand phase currents m tripping currents m cumulative breaking current m phase to phase phase to neutral and residual voltages m active reactive and apparent power m active and reactive energy m frequency m temperatures m thermal capacity used m starts per hour and inhibit time m running hours counter m motor starting current and
416. tion is based on the temperature measured by RTDs 1 2 and 3 stator sensors for motors and generators or by RTDs 1 3 and 5 primary winding sensors for transformers For greater accuracy it is advisable for the ambient temperature to be measured by RTD 8 If other applications is chosen in the RTD assignment table T2 is not estimated Two measurements are available one for each thermal operating rate of the monitored equipment Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the amp key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 5 to 600 mn Unit mn Resolution imn Accuracy 5 Display format 3 significant digits PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 37 Electric Machine operation assistance functions Operating time before tripping Waiting time after tripping Remaining operating time before overload tripping Operation The time is calculated by the thermal protection function It depends on the thermal capacity used Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 to 999 mn Unit mn Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 mn Refresh interval 1 second typical Waiting time after overload t
417. tional phase overcurrent DIR PHASE FAULT DEFAUT PHASE DIR 2 38 Directional earth fault DIR EARTH FAULT DEFAUT TERRE DIR 37 Active overpower REVERSE P RETOUR P 36 Reactive overpower REVERSE Q RETOURQ 46 Thermal overload THERMAL ALARM ECHAUFT ALARME 3 THERMAL TRIP ECHAUFT DECLT 4 START INHIBIT DEMARRAGE INHIBE 8 Locked rotor ROTOR BLOCKING BLOCAGE ROTOR 6 Locked rotor at startup STRT LOCKED ROTR BLOC ROTOR DEM 27 Excessive starting time LONG START DEMARRAGE LONG 7 Number of starts START INHIBIT DEMARRAGE INHIBE 8 Phase undercurrent UNDER CURRENT COURANT lt lt 9 Overvoltage OVERVOLTAGE TENSION gt gt 10 Undervoltage UNDERVOLTAGE TENSION lt lt 83 11 Positive sequence undervoltage UNDERVOLT PS TENSION Vd lt lt 12 ROTATION ROTATION 39 Neutral voltage displacement VO FAULT DEFAUT VO 13 Overfrequency OVER FREQ FREQUENCE gt gt 14 Underfrequency UNDER FREQ FREQUENCE lt lt 15 Negative sequence overvoltage UNBALANCE V DESEQUILIBRE V 18 Temperature RTDs OVER TEMP ALM T ALARME 16 OVER TEMP TRIP T DECLT 17 RTD S FAULT 1 to 2 DEFAUT SONDES 1 a 2 32 51 Thermostat THERMOST ALARM THERMOT ALARME 26 THERMOS TRIP THERMOS DECLT 23 Buchholz BUCHHOLZ ALARM BUCHH ALARME 25 BUCHH GAS TRIP BUCHH GAZ DECL 22 Pressure PRESSURE ALM PRESSION ALARME 42 PRESSURE TRIP PRESSION DECLT 24 Thermistor PTC NTC THERMIST ALARM THERMIST ALARME 44 THERMIST TRIP THERMIST DECLT 45 External tripping x 1 to 3
418. tions button V1 to V10 Logical equation editor outputs PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Schneider 129 MT11189 Control and monitoring functions SFT2841 Sepam 1000 serie 40 Connection window El Eie Edt Operation Sepam Application Options Window 2 18 x 2 DESEHS BL Br AL AZAY Wr zZ Logical equations Ye ine mode Instananeous tipping on phase faut or eth faut logical input 125 ie ON IV_TRIPCB Fb0 S1_1_1 OR PSON STN 1_1 AND 125 Editing assistant Editing assistant x Protections Logic inputs Variables Special functions E 50 51 Element Element Input variables Element E Element4 50N SIN 508F Output protection delayed Drop Ou Instant output phase 1 Instant output phase 2 Instant output phase 3 Protection inhibited w BEE Connected torn arora 7 P50 51_2_1 am List of tools El Logical equation editor ano or xor nor Schneider 130 Electric DES1256 Logic equations Application This function may be used to configure simple logic functions by combining data received from the protection functions or logic inputs By using logic operators AND OR XOR NOT and time delays new processing operations and indications may be added to the existing ones The logic functions produce outputs that may be used m in the matrix to control relay outputs light up LEDs or display new
419. tions 02A0 R 3 4 32NS 1 If MES114 Operating time 02A2 R 3 4 32NS ims With MES114 Charging time 02A4 R 3 4 32NS 1ms With MES114 Configuration and application zone Configuration and application Word address Access Modbus function Format Unit enabled Type of application 02CC R 3 5 Name of application S40 S41 T42 02CD 02D2 R 3 ASCII 12c Sepam marking 02D3 02DC R 3 ASCII 20c Sepam application version 02DD 02DF R 3 ASCII 6c Modbus address slave number for 02E0 R 3 Level 2 Modbus address slave number for RHM 02E1 R 3 Marking type of equipment 3 02E2 R 3 Type of coupler 0 Modbus 02E3 R 3 Communication version 02E4 R 3 NG MET148 2 n 1 module version 02E5 02E7 R 3 ASCII 6c MET148 2 n 2 module version 02E8 02EA R 3 ASCII 6c MSA141 module version 02EB 02ED R 3 ASCII 6c DSM303 module version 02EE 02F0 R 3 ASCII 6c Name of language 02F1 02FA R 3 ASCII 20c Customized languaged version number 2 02FB R 3 English language version number 2 02FC R 3 Boot version number 2 02FD R 3 Extension word 4 02FE R 3 1 40 not configured 41 840 42 841 43 S42 44 T40 45 T42 46 M41 47 G40 60 S43 61 S50 62 S51 63 S52 64 T50 65 T52 66 S44 67 M40 68 S54 80 S53 2 MSB major index LSB minor index 3 2E2 word MSB 11 h Sepam series 40 LSB hardware configuration Bit 7 6
420. to trip the circuit breaker logic discrimination remote control via the communication link external protection open order by logic input closing on output O11 by recloser remote control via the communication link remote control may be inhibited by the inhibit remote control logic input closing control by logic input m inhibition of closing on output O2 by o trip circuit fault TCS o SF6 fault o inhibit order by logic input DO Bo D 00 o Circuit breaker contactor control with lockout function ANSI 86 The ANSI 86 function traditionally performed by lockout relays may be carried out by Sepam using the predefined Circuit breaker contactor control function with latching of all tripping conditions protection function outputs and logic inputs With this function Sepam performs the following m grouping of all tripping conditions and breaking device control m latching of the tripping order with inhibition of closing until the cause of tripping disappears and is acknowledged by the user see Latching acknowledgment page 118 m indication of the cause of tripping o locally by signal lamps Trip and others and by messages on the display o remotely by remote indications see Use of remote indication bits page 169 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE80536 DE80522 Control and monitoring Circuit breaker contactor control functions ANSI code 94 69 Block diagram Start per hour
421. tor LEDs on the ACE850 1 On fault indicator This indicator has the following states m Off the module is not powered m steady red the ACE850 is initializing or is faulty m blinking red the ACE850 is unable to establish communication with the Sepam Bass a etess l base unit or the ACE850 is not properly configured m steady green the ACE850 is operating correctly m fast blinking green indicates a transient state which occurs at startup when IEC 61850 communication is also used scm m steady green and blinking red communication with the base unit has been lost Ale This can indicate a normal situation due to a restart of the Sepam after parameters m ee Cie have been downloaded The ACE850 automatically resumes normal operation in a few seconds i FX Tx Rx Tx va va This status can also indicate an error condition in which case ACE850 restarts i oe A a automatically within 15 seconds and try to re establish connection 2 Status indicator This indicator has the following states en m Off the Ethernet communication is not started 22830 communication interfaca m steady green the Ethernet communication is correctly operating m three blinks pattern no logical Ethernet link m four blinks pattern duplicate IP address m six blinks pattern invalid IP configuration ACE850FO Eva sts 100 gt OORUN 3 and 5 Speed indicators The
422. ts configuration PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Configuring the communication interfaces Ethernet communication User accounts configuration ACE850 users are assigned usernames and passwords used to gain access to the FTP or WEB servers Each user belongs to a group which determines the user s access rights m Administrator read write access to the FTP server access to the WEB server m Operator read only access to the FTP server access to the WEB server m Guest no access to the FTP server access to the WEB server Up to 4 user accounts can be defined Parameters Description Authorized values User control enable Check this box to enable the configuration Default enabled of users account Currently the ACE850 will not operate if this box is not checked Ensure that this box is always checked User n Check this box to create this user account Default user 1 enabled Uncheck it to delete the account only the Users 2 to 4 disabled last account in the list can be deleted Name User name String 1 to 8 characters Password User password String 4 to 8 characters Group Group to which the user belongs Administrator Operator Guest The following account is always created by default as user 1 m Name Admin m Password ACE850 m Group Administrator IP address and parameter guidelines IP addresses Several configuration parameters are IP addresses These addresses must follow precise rules which are
423. ts original packaging Transport Sepam can be shipped to any destination by all usual means of transport without taking any additional precautions Handling Sepam can be handled without any particular care and can even withstand being dropped by a person standing at floor level Storage Sepam can be stored in its original packaging in an appropriate location for several years m Temperature between 25 C and 70 C between 13 F and 158 F m Humidity lt 90 Periodic yearly checking of the environment and the packaging condition is recommended Once Sepam has been unpacked it should be energized as soon as possible Sepam installed in a cubicle Transport Sepam can be transported by all usual means of transport in the customary conditions used for cubicles Storage conditions should be taken into consideration for a long period of transport Handling Should the Sepam fall out of a cubicle check its condition by visual inspection and energizing Storage Keep the cubicle protection packing for as long as possible Sepam like all electronic units should not be stored in a damp environment for more than a month Sepam should be energized as quickly as possible If this is not possible the cubicle reheating system should be activated Environment of the installed Sepam Operation in a damp environment The temperature relative humidity factors must be compatible with the unit s environmental withstand chara
424. tus The ACE850 status is OK if the ACE850 validates its configuration m the communication ports status m the current ACE850 IP address If the current IP address is different from the one configured this could mean that the configured address is not valid unless the IEC 61850 protocol is also being used Advanced diagnostics using the embedded Web server The advanced diagnostics feature is only available when it is possible to establish an Ethernet connection with the ACE850 If not the basic diagnostics must be used to solve the problems Accessing the ACE850 Web server 1 Start your web browser Internet explorer 6 0 or higher Mozilla Firefox for example 2 In the address text box type the address of the ACE850 169 254 0 10 is the default then press Enter 3 In the login window type your username and password default is Admin ACE850 4 From the left side menu choose the language for the current session 5 From the menu click Diagnostics to access the diagnostics menu Diagnostics Web pages There are two general diagnostics pages dealing with Ethernet operation m Ethernet global statistics m Ethernet port statistics There is also a set of protocol dedicated diagnostic pages m Modbus statistics m IEC 61850 statistics not covered in this manual m SNMP statistics m SNTP statistics m RSTP statistics Diagnostic pages are automatically refreshed every 5 seconds approximately Schneider 155 Modbu
425. twork line end impedance matching with load resistor Rc 150 Q to be set to m X if the module is not at one end of the network default position m Rc if the module is at one end of the network 3 Network cable clamps inner diameter of clamp 6 mm or 0 24 in Connection m Connection of network cable to screw type terminal blocks A and m Connection of the earthing terminal by tinned copper braid with cross section 2 6 mm AWG 10 or cable with cross section 2 2 5 mm AWG 12 and length lt 200 mm 7 9 in fitted with a 4 mm 0 16 in ring lug Check the tightness maximum tightening torque 2 2 Nm or 19 5 Ib in m The interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover shielding at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable o the network cable must be stripped o the cable shielding braid must be around and in contact with the clamp m The interface is to be connected to connector on the base unit using a nn N nl CCA612 cord length 3 m or 9 8 ft white fittings network m The interfaces are to be supplied with 12 V DC or 24 V DC m The ACE959 can be connected to a separate distributed power supply not 1 Distributed power supply with separate wiring or included in included in shielded cable Terminal block is used to connect the distributed the shielded cable 3 pairs power supply module 2 Terminal block for connection of the distributed po
426. uctions can result in equipment damage L1 L2 L3 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 40465 CSH120 and CSH200 Core balance CTs Assembly Group the MV cable or cables in the middle of the core balance CT Use non conductive binding to hold the cables Remember to insert the 3 medium voltage cable shielding earthing cables through the core balance DE51678 Assembly on mounting plate Assembly on MV cables Connection Connection to Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 To residual current IO input on connector a terminals 19 and 18 shielding Connection to Sepam series 80 To residual current 10 input on connector 8 terminals 15 and 14 shielding Connection to Sepam series 60 m To residual current 10 input on connector E terminals 15 and 14 shielding m To residual current l 0 input on connector E terminals 18 and 17 shielding Recommended cable m Sheathed cable shielded by tinned copper braid m Minimum cable cross section 0 93 mm AWG 18 m Resistance per unit length lt 100 mQ m 30 5 mQ ft m Minimum dielectric strength 1000 V 700 Vrms m Connect the cable shielding in the shortest manner possible to Sepam m Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam Do not ground the cable by any other means The maximum resistance of the Sepam connection wiring must not exceed 4 Q i e 20 m m
427. ue no data input checking Maximum value lt 600 Q including wiring 25 C to 70 C 13 F to 158 F Same characteristics as Sepam base units Load impedance Accuracy 0 5 full scale or 0 01 mA Measurements Unit Series 20 Series 40 Series 60 available Series 80 Phase and residual currents 0 1A u E Phase to neutral and phase to 1V u E phase voltages Frequency 0 01 Hz m a Thermal capacity used 1 Temperatures 1 C 1 F m 7 Active power 0 1 kW Reactive power 0 1 kvar Apparent power 0 1 kVA a Power factor 0 01 Remote setting via communication link PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE80907 PE80758 PE80758 7 Installation A 2 1 70 mm 2 8 in with CCA77x cord connected MSA141 configuration Configuration of analog output module MSA141 Cancel Type of output 20 mA or 0 1 m depending on switch v Analog value Scaling Minimum value Maximum value Analog output module MSA141 setting window MSA141 BE re Rc PCRED301006EN 03 2011 MSA141 Analog output module Description and dimensions A Terminal block for analog output RJ45 socket to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord RJ45 socket to link up the next remote module with a CCA77x cord according to application Earthing terminal
428. ug into the connector 2 Insert the transformer secondary wire 2 Insert the transformer secondary wire through the CSH30 interposing ring CT through the CSH30 interposing ring CT 4 times twice Connection to Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 To residual current l0 input on connector A terminals 19 and 18 shielding Connection to Sepam series 60 To residual current 10 input on connector E terminals 15 and 14 shielding Connection to Sepam series 80 m To residual current 10 input on connector E terminals 15 and 14 shielding m To residual current l O input on connector E terminals 18 and 17 shielding Recommended cable m Sheathed cable shielded by tinned copper braid m Minimum cable cross section 0 93 mm AWG 18 max 2 5 mm AWG 12 m Resistance per unit length lt 100 mQ m 30 5 mQ ft m Minimum dielectric strength 1000 V 700 Vrms m Maximum length 2 m 6 6 ft It is essential for the CSH30 interposing ring CT to be installed near Sepam Sepam CSH30 link less than 2 m 6 6 ft long Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam Do not ground the cable by any other means Electric Schneider 297 PE80318 DE80293 Installation ACE990 Core balance CT interface Function The ACE990 is used to adapt measurements between an MV core balance CT with a ratio of 1 n 50 lt n lt 1500 and the Sepam residual curr
429. ugh primaries which ensure impedance matching and isolation between the 1 A or 5 A circuits and Sepam when measuring phase and residual currents The connectors can be disconnected with the power on since disconnection does not open the CT secondary circuit CCA630 A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device m NEVER work alone m Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding m Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off m To remove current inputs to the Sepam unit unplug the CCA630 or CCA634 connector without disconnecting the wires from it The CCA630 and CCA634 connectors ensure continuity of the current transformer secondary circuits m Before disconnecting the wires connected to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector short circuit the current transformer secondary circuits Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury CCA634 218 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 MT 10490 DE80068 Installation DE80069 Bridging of terminals Bridging of terminals 1 2 3and9 1 2 and 3 CAUTION HAZARD
430. ule 1 tripping set point sensor 3 E E E E E 71 Protection 38 49T module 1 alarm set point sensor 4 E E E E E 72 Protection 38 49T module 1 tripping set point sensor 4 E E E 8 E 73 Protection 38 49T module 1 alarm set point sensor 5 E E E E E 74 Protection 38 49T module 1 tripping set point sensor 5 E E E E E 75 Protection 38 49T module 1 alarm set point sensor 6 E E E E E 76 Protection 38 49T module 1 tripping set point sensor 6 E E E E E 77 Protection 38 49T module 1 alarm set point sensor 7 E E E E E 78 Protection 38 49T module 1 tripping set point sensor 7 E E E E E 79 Protection 38 49T module 1 alarm set point sensor 8 E E E E E 80 Protection 38 49T module 1 tripping set point sensor 8 E E E E E Address word 0106 TS81 to TS96 Bit address 1060 to 106F TS Application S40 S41 S42 S43 S44 T40 T42 M40 M41 G40 50 S51 S52 S53 S54 T50 T52 81 Protection 38 49T module 2 alarm set point sensor 1 E E E E E 82 Protection 38 49T module 2 tripping set point sensor 1 E E E E E 83 Protection 38 49T module 2 alarm set point sensor 2 E E E E E 84 Protection 38 49T module 2 tripping set point sensor 2 E E E E E 85 Protection 38 49T module 2 alarm set point sensor 3 E E E E E 86 Protection 38 49T module 2 tripping set point sensor 3 E E E E E 87 Protection 38 49T module 2 alarm set point sensor 4 E E E E E 88 Protection 38 49T module 2 tripping set point sensor 4 E E E E E 89 Protection 38 49T module 2 alarm set
431. uracy 5 1 digit Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1A 1 In rated current set in the general settings Schneider 34 Electric Network diagnosis Negative sequence unbalance functions Peak demand negative sequence and positive sequence current ratio Negative sequence unbalance Operation This function gives the negative sequence component T li Ib The negative sequence current is determined based on the phase currents m 3 phases gt 13 2 gt li z3x a 12 al3 27 IZ with a e m 2 phases gt 2 li x 11 a l3 al 27 17 with a e These 2 formulas are equivalent when there is no earth fault Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the amp key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 10 to 500 Unit b Accuracy 2 Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 Refresh interval 1 second typical Peak demand negative sequence and positive sequence current ratio Operation This peak demand meter is used as an aid to setting the set point for the broken conductor detection protection function ANSI code 46BC It provides the highest value of the negative sequence and positive sequence current ratio li Id since the last reset A phase current measurement with 3 CTs is mandatory for this calculat
432. ush current lt 10A 100 us Acceptable ripple content 12 Acceptable momentary outages 20 ms 2 wire RS 485 communication ports Electrical interface Standard EIA 2 wire RS 485 differential Distributed power supply ACE969 2 not required built in Fiber optic communication port Fiber optic interface Fiber type Graded index multimode silica Wavelength 820 nm invisible infra red Type of connector ST BFOC bayonet fiber optic connector Maximum length of fiber optic network Fiber diameter Numerical Attenuation Minimum optical Maximum fiber um aperture dBm km power available length NA dBm 50 125 0 2 2 7 5 6 700 m 2300 ft 62 5 125 0 275 3 2 9 4 1800 m 5900 ft 100 140 0 3 4 14 9 2800 m 9200 ft 200 HCS 0 37 6 19 2 2600 m 8500 ft Maximum length calculated with m Minimum optical power available m Maximum fiber attenuation m Losses in 2 ST connectors 0 6 dBm m Optical power margin 3 dBm according to IEC 60870 standard Example for a 62 5 125 um fiber Lmax 9 4 3 0 6 3 2 1 8 km 1 12 mi Dimensions mm in A Kl ACE969TP 2 94 3 70 i a lesen En a eees 12345 12245 O Y 144 5 67 Schnekler Installation ACE969TP 2 and ACE969FO 2 Multi protocol interfaces Description ACE969 2 communication interfaces ACE969TP 2 ACE969FO 2 Grounding earthing terminal using supp
433. ut SFT2841 Please use SFT2841 gt 10 0 SFT2841 compatible version screen A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS m Only qualified personnel should maintain this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions m NEVER work alone m Obey all existing safety instructions when commissioning and maintaining high voltage equipment m Beware of potential hazards and wear personal protective equipment Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Maintenance Replacement and repair When Sepam or a module is considered to be faulty have it replaced by a new product or module since the components cannot be repaired Compatibility of Sepam version SFT2841 version The About SFT2841 screen indicates the minimum version of SFT2841 that is compatible with the Sepam being used To display this screen on the Sepam UMI press the key several times to bring up the SFT2841 compatible version screen Check that the SFT2841 software version used is higher than or the same as that indicated on the Sepam screen If the SFT2841 software version is lower than the minimum version compatible with the Sepam being used the SFT2841 software cannot be connected to Sepam and the SFT2841 software displays the following error message SFT2841 software version incompatible with the connected device Preventive mainten
434. utton Parameters Enable RSTP Description Check this box to activate the use of the RSTP protocol Authorized values Default enabled Bridge priority Priority of the bridge The bridge with the lowest priority becomes root 0 61440 by steps of 4096 Default 61440 Amount of time between the transmission of configuration messages Hello time 1 to 10 seconds Default 2 seconds Forward delay time Time value to control how fast a port changes its spanning state when moving towards the forwarding state 4 to 30 seconds Default 21 seconds Max age time Valid duration of configuration message once sent by the root bridge 6 to 40 seconds Default 40 seconds Maximum BPDUs that can be transmitted by the Port Transmit state machine in any Hello time This value limits the maximum transmission rate Max transmit count 3 to 100 Default 32 Cost style RSTP 82 bits or STP 16 bits cost style selection Default RSTP Note RSTP parameters must verify the following relationships m 2x Forward_delay_time 1 second gt Max_age_time m Max_age_time 22 x Hello_time 1 second PCRED301006EN 03 2011 PE80400 Modbus communication ACE850 advanced parameters SNMP SNTP IP fitering RSTP User accounts User accounts User control enable Name Password Group User1 Admin Administrator User2 M User 3 User 4 SFT2841 User accoun
435. vailability or safety of the installation see Selecting the trip command and examples of use page 138 In addition to the self tests the user can activate monitoring functions to improve the installation monitoring m VT supervision ANSI code 60FL m CT supervision ANSI code 60 m Trip circuit and closing circuit supervision ANSI code 74 These functions send an alarm message to the Sepam display unit and a data item is automatically available to the communication to alert the user Schneider 135 Electric Control and monitoring functions 136 Schneider G Electric Self tests and fail safe position Self tests The self tests are run when Sepam is initialized and or during its operation List of self tests which place Sepam in the fail safe position Failures which have caused this are deemed to be major ones Function Test type Execution period Power supply Power supply presence During operation CPU Processor On initialization and during operation RAM memories On initialization and during operation Program memory Checksum On initialization and during operation Parameter memory Checksum On initialization Analog inputs Current During operation Voltage During operation Logic outputs Relay driver On initialization and during operation Connection CCA630 CCA634 On initialization and during operation CCA670 MES114 On initialization and during operation List of self tests which do not place Sepam i
436. vailable m Sepam with remote advanced UMI MX base DSM303 o ON indicator on o RK indicator on the base unit flashing o N indicator on the MET or MSA module faulty steadily on o the display indicates the type of fault by a code same as above Special case of faulty DSM303 o ON indicator on o amp indicator on base unit flashing o J indicator on DSM steadily on o display off This Sepam operating mode is also transmitted via the communication link RTD fault Each temperature monitoring function when activated detects whether the RTD associated with the MET148 2 module is short circuited or disconnected When this is the case the alarm message RTD FAULT is generated Since this alarm is common to the 8 functions the identification of the faulty RTD or RTDs is obtained by looking up the measured values m measurement displayed if the sensor is short circuited T lt 35 C or 31 F m measurement displayed if the sensor is disconnected or T gt 205 C or 401 F Other faults Specific faults indicated by a screen m DSM303 version incompatible if version lt V0146 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE80236 Commissioning CAUTION HAZARD OF DAMAGE TO SEPAM m Do not open the Sepam base unit m Do not attempt to repair any components in the Sepam range either in the base unit or an accessory Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage Abo
437. values measured by Sepam using the SFT2841 software 2 Check the consistency of the temperatures measured m the temperature displayed is if the RTD is short circuited T lt 35 C m the temperature displayed is if the RTD is disconnected T gt 205 C Checking of analog output connection to the MSA141 module 1 Identify the measurement associated by parameter setting to the analog output using the SFT2841 software 2 Simulate if necessary the measurement linked to the analog output by injection 3 Check the consistency between the value measured by Sepam and the indication given by the device connected to the analog output Schneider 299 Electric Commissioning Test sheet Sepam series 40 PROJCCUE earann Type of Sepam Switchboard nu Serial number En G bicle een Software version V Type of check Preliminary general examination prior to energizing o Energizing o Parameter and protection settings o Logic input connection o Logic output connection o Validation of the complete protection chain o Validation of the customized logic functions if necessary o Analog output connection to the MSA141 module if necessary oO Temperature sensor input connection to the MET148 2 module for type T40 T42 T50 T52 M40 M41 G40 go Type of check Test performed Result Display Phase current and phase Secondary injection of CT CT rated primar
438. ved ANSI 81L Underfrequency Function number 14xx relay 1 xx 01 to relay 4 xx 04 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 6 3 Activity 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Fs set point 0 1 Hz 7 Tripping time delay 10 ms 8 Restraint 0 none 1 on frequency variation 9 Vs set point Unp 10 Inhibited threshold on frequency variation 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 13 Reserved 14 Reserved PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Modbus communication Access to remote settings CLPU 50 51 and CLPU 50N 51N protection settings Function number 2A01 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Reserved 2 Reserved 3 Reserved 4 Time before activation Tcold 10 ms 5 Pick up threshold CLPUs In 6 Reserved 7 CLPU 50 51 global action setting 0 blocking 1 multiplication 8 Activation of ANSI 50 51 protection unit x OFF or ON 2 9 Unit 1 Group A 50 51 unit of activation time delay T 10 Unit 1 Group A 50 51 activation time delay T 0 11 Unit 1 Group A 50 51 multiplying factor M ls 12 Unit 2 Group A 50 51 unit of activation time delay T 13 Unit 2 Group A 50 51 activation time delay T 1 14 Unit 2 Group A 50 51 multiplying factor M ls 15 Unit 3 Group A 50 51 unit of activation time delay T
439. voltages delivered by 2 VTs LPCT type current sensors Checking of residual voltage input connection 268 269 270 271 272 273 278 279 280 282 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 292 293 294 296 Checking of residual current and residual voltage input con nection Checking of logic input and output connection Validation of the complete protection cha in Checking of optional modules connection Test sheet Maintenance Firmware modifications Schneider Electric 297 298 299 300 302 304 267 Use 268 PE80320 User Machine Interfaces Sepam User Machine Interfaces Two different levels of user machine interface UMI are offered on the front panel of Sepam m Basic UMI with LEDs for installations operated via a remote system with no need for local operation m Advanced UMI with keypad and graphic LCD display giving access to all the infor11mation necessary for local operation and Sepam parameter setting SFT2841 setting and operating software The UMI on the front panel of Sepam can be completed by the SFT2841 PC software tool which can be used for all Sepam parameter setting local operation and customization functions The SFT2841 setting and operating software is supplied on CD ROM along with the SFT2826 program for recovering disturbance recording files the interactive introduction to the Sepam range and all the Sepam documentation in PDF format The CCA783 or CCA784 PC
440. wer supply module 244 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 PE50024 DE80037 DE51666 Installation ACE937 fiber optic connection interface ACE937 fiber optic interface Function The ACE937 interface is used to connect Sepam to a fiber optic communication star system This remote module is connected to the Sepam base unit by a CCA612 cord Characteristics ACE937 module Weight 0 1 kg 0 22 Ib Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail Power supply Supplied by Sepam Operating temperature 25 C to 70 C 13 F to 158 F Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units Fiber optic interface Fiber type Graded index multimode silica Wavelength 820 nm invisible infra red Type of connector ST BFOC bayonet fiber optic connector A CAUTION Fiber optic Numerical Maximum Minimum optical Maximum diameter aperture NA attenuation power available fiber length HAZARD OF BLINDING um dBm km dBm Never look directly into the end of the fiber optic f 50 125 0 2 2 7 5 6 700 m 2300 ft Failure to follow these instructions can result 62 5125 0 275 32 94 1800 m 5900 fi PNSAILOUS MUY 100 140 03 4 14 9 2800 m 9200 ft 200 HCS 0 37 6 19 2 2600 m 8500 ft 1 70 mm 2 8 in with CCA612 cord connected ACE937 Le Tx PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Maximum length calculated with m Min
441. wer ANSI code 32P 54 Directional reactive overpower ANSI code 32Q 40 55 Phase undercurrent ANSI code 37 56 Temperature monitoring ANSI code 38 49T 57 Negative sequence unbalance ANSI code 46 58 Broken conductor ANSI code 46BC 60 Negative sequence overvoltage ANSI code 47 61 Excessive starting time locked rotor ANSI code 48 51LR 14 62 Thermal overload ANSI code 49 RMS 63 Phase overcurrent ANSI code 50 51 72 Phase overcurrent Cold Load Pick Up Blocking CLPU 50 51 74 Breaker failure ANSI code 50BF 76 Earth fault ANSI code 50N 51N or 50G 51G 78 Earth fault Cold Load Pick Up Blocking CLPU 50N 51N 80 Voltage restrained phase overcurrent ANSI code 50V 51V 82 Overvoltage ANSI code 59 84 Neutral voltage displacement ANSI code 59N 85 Starts per hour ANSI code 66 86 Directional phase overcurrent ANSI code 67 87 Directional earth fault ANSI code 67N 67NC 91 Recloser ANSI code 79 99 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 60 61 62 63 72 74 76 78 80 82 84 85 86 87 91 99 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Protection functions PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Contents Overfrequency ANSI code 81H 102 Underfrequency ANSI code 81L 103 General Tripping curves 104 Schneider Electric 102 103 104 47 Protection functions Setting ranges Functions Settings Time delays ANSI 27 Phase to phase undervoltage 5 to 120 of Unp 0 05 s to 300s A
442. with remote control order TC15 and ER can be inhibited after activation with remote control order TC16 Activation of this u T 0 function is saved on loss of the auxiliary power supply Loss of communication with the Modbus master is detected by the Sepam unit when TC15 1 remote control order TC15 has not been rewritten by the Modbus master at the end FITA 0 of an adjustable time delay T The value of time delay T is set by the Modbus communication to address 5815 The setting range for the time delay is between 1 and 6553 s in 0 1 s steps default value 10s PCRED3DIOOBEN Schneider ME PCRED301006EN 03 2011 electric 117 Control and monitoring functions RESET key acknowledgment TC5 DE51204 inhibit remote control amp external reset TCI received DE5120 111 q TC2 received 12 Schneider 118 Electric reset remote control position discrepancy Circuit breaker contactor control ANSI code 94 69 Associated functions Latching acknowledgment Description The tripping outputs of all the protection functions and all the logic inputs may be latched individually Logic outputs may not be latched The logic outputs set up in pulse mode maintain pulse type operation even when linked to latched data Latched data are saved in the event of a power failure All latched data may be acknowledged locally on the
443. ws m If the locked rotor excessive starting time protection ANSI code 48 51LR is active the starting time is the time separating the moment when one of the 3 phase currents exceeds Is and the moment when the 3 currents drop back below Is Is being the value of the current set point for protection function 48 51LR m f the locked rotor excessive starting time protection ANSI code 48 51LR is not active the starting time is the time separating the moment when one of the 3 phase currents exceeds 1 2 Ib and the moment when the 3 currents drop back below 1 2 Ib The maximum phase current obtained during this time corresponds to the starting overload current Both values are saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Starting overload time Measurement range 0 to 300s Unit sorms Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Refresh interval Starting overload current 1 second typical Measurement range 48 51LR active Is to 24 In 48 51LR inactive 1 2 Ib to 24 In 0 Unit AorkA Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1 A or 1 digit Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 Or 65 5 KA Schneider 39 Electric Machine operation assistance functions a Schneider Nu
444. xception reply incorrect address The first word in the zone function code and unit number may have the following values m xxyy with o function code xx different from 00 and FFh O unit number yy different from FFh The settings are available and confirmed They word is a copy of the request frame The zone contents remain valid until the next request is made m FFFFh the request frame has been processed but the results in the reply zone are not yet available It is necessary to repeat reply frame reading The other words are not significant m xxFFh with the function code xx different from 00 and FFh The read request for the settings of the designated function is not valid The function is not included in the particular Sepam or remote reading of it is not authorized refer to the list of functions which accommodate remote reading of settings PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Modbus communication CAUTION RISK OF UNINTENDED OPERATION m The device must only be configured and set by qualified personnel using the results of the installation protection system study m During commissioning of the installation and following any modification check that the Sepam configuration and protection function settings are consistent with the results of this study Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Access to remote settings Remote setting Data that can
445. xternal power supply m The cable shields must be connected to the terminals marked 3 on the connection terminal blocks m Terminal marked 3 are linked by an internal connection to the earthing terminals of the ACETP 2 interface protective an functional earthing le the shielding of the RS 485 cables is earthed as well m On the ACE960TP 2 interface the cable clamps for the S LAN and E LAN RS 485 networks are earthed by the terminal 3 PCRED301006EN 03 2011 DE52165 Installation Raccordement en anneau ACE969FO _IRx Tx PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Raccordement en toile optique Rx Tx_Rx Tx A Etoile optique ACE969FO ACE969TP 2 and ACE969FO 2 Multi protocol interfaces Connection Fiber optic communication port S LAN A CAUTION HAZARD OF BLINDING Never look directly into the fiber optic Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury The fiber optic connection can be made m point to point to an optic star system m in a ring system active echo The sending and receiving fiber optic fibers must be equipped with male ST type connectors The fiber optics are screw locked to Rx and Tx connectors Electric Schneider 254 Installation ACE850TP and ACE850FO Multi protocol interfaces Function The ACE850 multi protocol communication interfaces are for Sepam series 40 Sepam series 60 and Sepam series 80 ACE850 interfaces have two Ethern
446. y Is set point adjustable from 0 25 to 8 Ib Maximum equipment temperature 60 to 200 C 1 Sn V3 In Unp 48 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Protection functions Setting ranges Functions Settings Time delays ANSI 50 51 Phase overcurrent Tripping time delay Timer hold Tripping curve Definite time DT SIT LTI VIT EIT UIT DT RI DT CEI SIT A LTI B VIT B EIT C DT or IDMT IEEE MI D VI E El F DT or IDMT IAC I VI El DT or IDMT Is set point 0 1 to 24 In Definite time Inst 0 05 s to 300 s 0 1 to 2 4 In IDMT 0 1 s to 12 5 s at 10 Is Timer hold Definite time DT timer hold Inst 0 05 s to 300 s IDMT IDMT reset time 0 5 s to 20 s Confirmation None By negative sequence overvoltage By phase to phase undervoltage Harmonic 2 restraint set point 5 to 50 Short circuit current Isc min In to 999 kA CLPU 50 51 Phase Overcurrent Cold Load Pick Up Blocking Time before activation Tcold 0 1 to 300 s Pick up threshold CLPUs 10 to 100 of In Global action CLPU 50 51 Blocking or multiplication of the set point Action on unit x ANSI 50 51 OFF or ON Time delay T x 100 ms to 999 min Multiplying factor M x ANSI 50BF Breaker failure Presence of current 100 to 999 of Is 0 2 to 2 In Operating time 0 05 s to 300 s ANSI 50N 51N or 50G 51G Earth fault Sensitive earth fault Tripping time delay T
447. y current voltage input connection rated current N Eiin o e 1Aor5A P EE AERPEEERERE PIERRE Binnen Secondary injection of phase VT rated primary phase to neutral voltage the value to be voltage Uns v3 V Hoes o injected depends on the test being performed V Sinis VB Phase displacement 9 V I 0 Ol iioo oO Q2 OS Tests performed on a e e eee eee cee green Signatures LE Here Comments 300 Schneider PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Commissioning Test sheets Sepam series 40 Ud 0 e see nN oo EE oD OE SE ernennen Type of Sepam Switchboard ssccccseceseeceseeseeecesececeeseeeeeeseneeseees Serial number i eU o e I e E EEEE A Software version V Type of check Test performed Result Display Residual current input Injection of 5 A into the core Injected current value connection balance CT primary circuit 10 o When applicable VT rated primary phase to neutral secondary injection voltage Unp v3 Vene of the rated phase to neutral voltage of a phase VT Uns V3 Phase displacement VO 10 0 Wenns Residual voltage input Secondary injection VT rated primary phase to neutral connection of the rated voltage of the VTs voltage Unp v3 VO Fetes oO in an open delta arrangement Uns V3 or Uns 3 When applicable CT rated primary current secondary injection l0 Eu of CT rated current e 1Aor5A Phase displacement VO 10 0
448. y default the CLPU 50N 51N function is off Setting assistance During use with multiplying factor MO x it is advisable to set the IsO set point of the 50N 51N protection unit higher than the pick up threshold CLPUs Block diagram CLPU 50N 51N x ON 1 1 amp 12 Max Fey 1 lt 5 In Tesla lt 0 S 13 4 Jeo ceeeee eens Soh ed nme T logic input ANSI 50N 51N Unit x Downstream a 21 TO x 0 load start up i Y 114 Lae amp T 0 CLPU 1 120 Ey 124 1 gt MO x IsO e time delayed Downstream load 131 amp output 51N x start up by Logic Equation I gt CLPUs i instantaneous Id amp output 50N x 80 Schneider Action of the CLPU 50N 51N function on set point IsO of ANSI 50N 51N protection unit x during time delay T0 x depends on the Global action CLPU 50N 51N setting multiplication of set point IsO by a coefficient MO x blocking PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Protection functions PCRED301006EN 03 2011 Earth fault Cold Load Pick Up Blocking CLPU 50N 51N Characteristics Time before activation Tcold Setting common to CLPU 50 51 and CLPU 50N 51N functions Setting 0 1 to 300s Resolution 10 ms Accuracy 2 or 20 ms Pick up threshold CLPUs Setting common to CLPU 50 51 and CLPU 50

"user manual"

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

&quot;user manual&quot;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

"user manual"